SIMOCODE pro

System Manual Edition 03/2006
sirius
Totally
I ntegrated
Automation

Safety Guidelines
Table of Contents
Important Notes
System Description
1
Short Instructions for
Configuring a Reversing Starter 2
Motor Protection
3
Motor Control
4
Monitoring Functions
5
Outputs
6
Inputs
7
Analog Value Recording
8
3UF50 Compatibility Mode
9
Standard Functions
10
Logic Modules
11
Communication
12
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13
Commissioning and Servicing
14
Alarm, Faults and System
Messages 15
Tables
A
Data Formats and Data Records
B
Dimension Drawings
C
Technical Data
D
Example Circuits
E
Safety and Commissioning Infor-
mation for EEx Areas F
Index
List of Abbreviations
Glossary
To
SIMOCODE pro
System Manual
Edition 03/2006
Order Number: 3UF7970-0AA00-0
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
If more that one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in
connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by
Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly
as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg
GERMANY
Order No.: 3UF7970-0AA00-0
Edition 03/2006
Copyright © Siemens AG
Technical data subject to change
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 i
Table Of Contents
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
1 System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Simplify Configuration with SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.3 Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.4 Check List for Selecting the Device Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.5 Function Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.5.1 Protecting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.5.2 Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.5.3 Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5.4 Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.5.5 Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.5.6 Additional Signal Processing with Freely Programmable Logic Modules. . . 1-15
1.5.7 Operating, Service and Diagnostic Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.6 Overview of System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.7 Description of the System Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.7.1 Basic Units (BU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.7.2 Operator Panel (OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.7.3 Current Measuring Modules (IM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1.7.4 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules (UM)
for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1.7.5 Expansion Modules for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1.7.6 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
1.7.7 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
1.8 Structural Configuration of SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
1.8.1 Function Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
2 Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Introduction and Target of the Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Reversing Starter with Motor Feeder and Local Control Station . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.4 Extending the Reversing Starter with a Control Station via PROFIBUS DP . 2-10
3 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3 Unbalance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.4 Stall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.5 Thermistor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
4 Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.2 Modes of Operation and Mode Selectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.1.3 Enables and Enabled Control Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Table Of Contents
SIMOCODE pro
ii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4.1.4 Control Station Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2 Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.2 General Settings and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.2.3 "Overload Relay" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.2.4 "Direct Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.2.5 "Reversing Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.2.6 "MCCB Circuit Breaker" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.2.7 "Star-delta Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.2.8 "Star-delta Starter with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation"
Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.2.9 "Dahlander" Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.2.10 "Dahlander with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control Function . . 4-34
4.2.11 "Pole-changing Switch" Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.2.12 "Pole-changing Switch with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation"
Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.2.13 "Valve" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.2.14 "Positioner" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.2.15 "Soft Starter" Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.2.16 "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.3 Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls and Status Signal
for the Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
5 Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Earth fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.2 Internal Earth Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.1.3 External Earth fault Monitoring (with Summation Current Transformer) . . . 5-4
5.2 Current Limits Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.2 I> (Upper Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.2.3 I< (Lower Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3 Voltage Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4 Power Factor (cos phi) Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.5 Active Power Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.6 0/4 A-20 mA Signal Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.7 Operation Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.7.2 Operating Hours Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.7.3 Stop Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.7.4 Monitoring the Number of Starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.8 Analog Temperature Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.9 Hysteresis for Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
6 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Basic Unit Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3 Operator Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.4 Digital Module Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.5 Analog Module Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Table Of Contents
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 iii
6.6 Cyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.7 Acyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
7 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Basic Unit Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.3 Operator Panel Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.4 Digital Module Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.5 Temperature Module Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.6 Analog Module Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.7 Cyclic Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.8 Acyclic Receive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
8 Analog Value Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
9 3UF50 Compatibility Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
10 Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2 Test/Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.3 Test Position Feedback (TPF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.4 External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.5 Operational Protection OFF (OPO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.5.1 Response for positioner control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10.5.2 Response to other control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10.6 Power Failure Monitoring (UVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10.7 Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.8 Watchdog (Bus Monitoring, PLC/DCS Monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10.9 Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.9.1 Timestamping in the fault memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.9.2 Timestamping/time synchronization via PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
11 Logic Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2 Truth Table for 3I/1O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.3 Truth Table for 2I/1O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.4 Truth Table for 5I/2O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.5 Counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.6 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11.7 Signal Conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
11.8 Non-volatile Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
11.9 Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
11.10 Flickering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
11.11 Limit Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
12 Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.2 Transmitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.3 Telegram Description and Data Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Table Of Contents
SIMOCODE pro
iv GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12.3.1 Cyclic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12.3.2 Diagnostic Data and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.3.3 Configuration of the Slave Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
12.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.4.1 Slave Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.4.2 Preparing the Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.4.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 Slave via GSD
in the Configuration Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
12.4.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM Object
(DPV-1 Slave via GSD) in STEP7-HW Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.4.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 Slave via OM SIMOCODE pro . . . . . 12-18
12.5 Evaluating Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12.5.1 SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12.5.2 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES . . 12-20
12.6 Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12.7 Parameterization via PROFIBUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
12.7.1 SIMOCODE ES Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
12.7.2 SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
12.7.3 Starting up Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.8 Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
13 Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1 General Information about Mounting and Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.2.1 Basic Units and Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.2.2 Current Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.2.3 Current/voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.2.4 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.3.1 Basic Units and Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.3.2 Current Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
13.3.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
13.3.4 Current Measuring with an External Current Transformer
(Interposing Transformer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
13.4 System Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
13.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
13.4.2 System Interfaces on Basic Units, Expansion Modules, Current
Measuring Modules and Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . 13-27
13.4.3 System Interfaces on the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
13.5 PROFIBUS DP on a 9-pole SUB-D socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
13.6 Installation Guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
14 Commissioning and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1 General Information about Commissioning and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.2.1 Sequence of steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.2.3 Diagnostics via LED Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.3 Servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14.3.1 Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Table Of Contents
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 v
14.3.2 Saving the Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
14.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
14.3.4 Resetting the Basic Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
15 Alarm, Faults and System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
A Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls and Status Messages
for the Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 Abbreviations and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 Socket Assignment Table - Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.4 Socket Assignment Table - Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A.5 Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
B Data Formats and Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.1 Handling Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.1.1 Writing/reading Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.1.2 Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.1.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.2 Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B.3 Data Record 63 - Recording of Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B.4 Data Record 67 - Process Image of the Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B.5 Data Record 69 - Process Image of the Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
B.6 Data Record 72 - Fault Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B.7 Data Record 92 - Device Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
B.8 Data Record 94 - Measured Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
B.9 Data Record 95 - Service/Statistical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
B.10 Data Record 130 - Basic Device Parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
B.11 Data Record 131 - Basic Device Parameter 2 (Plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
B.12 Data Record 132 - Extended Device Parameter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
B.13 Data Record 133 - Extended Device Parameter 2 (Plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32
B.14 Data Record 139 - Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-35
B.15 Data Record 160 - Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-36
B.16 Data Record 165 - Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-36
B.17 Data Record 202 - Acyclic Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
B.18 Data Record 203 - Acyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38
B.19 Data Record 224 - Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-39
B.20 Assignment of Cyclic Control and Signaling Data for Predefined Control
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-40
B.20.1 Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-40
B.20.2 Direct Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41
B.20.3 Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-42
B.20.4 Circuit Breaker (MCCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-43
B.20.5 Star-delta Starter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-44
B.20.6 Star-delta Starter with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation . . . . . . . . . B-45
B.20.7 Dahlander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-46
B.20.8 Dahlander with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-47
B.20.9 Pole-changing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48
B.20.10Pole-changing Switch with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation . . . . . . . B-49
B.20.11Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-50
Table Of Contents
SIMOCODE pro
vi GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.20.12Positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-51
B.20.13Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52
B.20.14Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53
C Dimension Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.1 3UF70 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.1.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.1.2 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
C.2 3UF710 Current Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C.2.1 Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C.2.2 Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
C.2.3 Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C.2.4 Current Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C.2.5 Current Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
C.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C.3.1 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C.3.2 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
C.3.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C.3.4 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C.3.5 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C.4 3UF7200 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.5 Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C.6 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C.6.1 Door adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
D Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.1 Common Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D.2 Technical Data of the Basic Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
D.3 Technical Data of the Current Measuring Modules and
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
D.4 Technical Data of the Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
D.4.1 Technical Data of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
D.4.2 Technical Data of the Analog Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
D.4.3 Technical Data of the Earth-fault Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
D.4.4 Technical Data of the Temperature Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
D.5 Technical Data of the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
D.6 Short-circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor Feeders for Short-circuit
Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-12
Table Of Contents
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 vii
E Example Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
E.2 Example for the "overload relay" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
E.2.1 Circuit diagram for the "overload relay" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
E.2.2 Function circuit diagram for the "overload relay" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
E.3 Example for the "direct starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
E.3.1 Circuit diagram for the "direct starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
E.3.2 Function circuit diagram for the "direct starter". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
E.4 Example for a "reversing starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
E.4.1 Circuit diagram for the "reversing starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
E.4.2 Function circuit diagram for the "reversing starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
E.5 Example for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
E.5.1 Circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
E.5.2 Function circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
E.6 Example for the "star-delta starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
E.6.1 Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
E.6.2 Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
E.7 Example for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction
of rotation" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
E.7.1 Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of
rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
E.7.2 Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the
direction of rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
E.8 Example for the "Dahlander" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
E.8.1 Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
E.8.2 Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
E.9 Example for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation"
circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
E.9.1 Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of
rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
E.9.2 Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction
of rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-19
E.10 Example for the "pole-changing switch" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21
E.10.1 Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-21
E.10.2 Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch" . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-23
E.11 Example for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of
the direction of rotation" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24
E.11.1 Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the
direction of rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24
E.11.2 Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of
the direction of rotation" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-25
E.12 Example for the "valve" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-27
E.12.1 Circuit diagram for the "valve" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-27
E.12.2 Function circuit diagram for the "valve" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-29
E.13 Example of the "positioner" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30
E.13.1 Circuit diagram for "positioner 1" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-30
E.13.2 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 1" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-31
E.13.3 Circuit diagram for "positioner 2" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-32
E.13.4 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 2" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-33
E.13.5 Circuit diagram for "positioner 3" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-34
E.13.6 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 3" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-35
Table Of Contents
SIMOCODE pro
viii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.13.7 Circuit diagram for "positioner 4" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-36
E.13.8 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 4" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-37
E.13.9 Circuit diagram for "positioner 5" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-38
E.13.10Function circuit diagram for "positioner 5" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-39
E.14 Example for the "soft starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-40
E.14.1 Circuit diagram for the "soft starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-40
E.14.2 Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-42
E.15 Example for the "soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit . . . . . . . . . E-43
E.15.1 Circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor" . . . . . . . . . E-44
E.15.2 Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor" . . . E-46
F Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
F.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
F.2 Setting up and Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
F.2.1 Setting the Rated Current of the Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
F.2.2 SIMOCODE pro with Thermistor Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
F.2.3 Wiring of the Sensor Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
F.2.4 Short-circuit Protection according to IEC 60947-4-1 for
Type of Coordination 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
F.2.5 Cable Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7
F.2.6 Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7
F.2.7 Further Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
F.2.8 Ambient Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
F.3 Maintenance and Repairs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
F.4 Guarantee. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
F.5 Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10
Index
List of Abbreviations
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 ix
Important Notes
Purpose of the manual
The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes in detail the motor manage-
ment system and its functions. It contains information about configuring,
commissioning, service and maintenance. The user is introduced to the
system quickly and practically using a typical reversing motor application as
an example.
In addition to providing assistance for troubleshooting and eliminating faults,
this manual also contains information of special importance to service and
maintenance personnel.
The manual contains circuit diagrams, dimension drawings and technical
data about the system components to assist you in carrying out the configu-
ration.
Required basic knowledge
Basic knowledge in the areas of low-voltage controls and distribution, digital
circuit engineering and automation technology is required in order to be able
to understand this manual.
Topics
This manual consists of instructional chapters which can be used to look up
specific information. The following table lists the most relevant topics. The
topics with a gray background represent the contents of the
"SIMOCODE ES" parameterization and service software.
Topic Target group
System Description Configurators, planners
Short Instructions for Con-
figuring a Reversing Starter
Configurators, planners, technicians, commissioners
Motor Protection Configurators, commissioners
Motor Control Configurators, PLC programmers
Monitoring Functions Configurators, programmers, commissioners, service per-
sonnel
Outputs Configurators, planners, programmers
Inputs Configurators, planners, programmers
Analog Value Recording Configurators, programmers, commissioners, service per-
sonnel
3UF50 Compatibility Mode Configurators, PLC programmers
Standard Functions Configurators, programmers
Logic Modules Configurators, programmers
Communication Configurators, PLC programmers
Mounting, Wiring and
Interfaces
Mechanics, electricians, maintenance and service person-
nel
Commissioning and Ser-
vicing
Commissioners, electricians, maintenance and service per-
sonnel
Alarms, Faults and System
Messages
commissioners, maintenance and service personnel, confi-
gurators, PLC programmers
Important Notes
SIMOCODE pro
x GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Scope of application
This manual is applicable for the components included in the
SIMOCODE pro system. It contains a description of the components that
are applicable at the time of printing the document. We reserve the right to
include information about new components or new versions of components
in additional documents.
Further documentation
• Please read the operating instructions of the respective components.
• The DP-Master manual is also required in addition to this system manual.
Definitions
• If "SIMOCODE pro" is referred to, then both the "SIMOCODE pro C" and the
"SIMOCODE pro V" series are meant.
Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro
Using SIMOCODE pro, specific responses (Disabled, Signalling, Warning,
Tripping) can be parameterized for various different types of functions
(e.g. overload). They are always displayed in tabular form:
• "X" = Applicable
• "-" = Not applicable
• "d" = Default.
Short description of the responses:
• Disabled: The corresponding function is switched off, no signals are genera-
ted.
• Signalling: Only a device-internal signal is generated which can be further pro-
cessed in any way.
• Warning: A warning signal which is available as diagnosis for PROFIBUS DP is
generated in addition to the device-internal signal.
• Tripping: The contactor controls QE* are switched off. An error message is
generated which is available as diagnosis for PROFIBUS DP. The error mes-
sage and the device-internal signal remain on until the corresponding time
has elapsed or the cause of the error has been eliminated and acknowledged.
A delay time can also be specified for specific responses.
Correction sheet
A correction sheet is included at the end of this manual. Please use it to fill
in suggestions for improvements, additions and corrections and send it back
to us. This helps us to improve the next edition.
Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3
Tripping - X (d) X
Warning X (d) X -
Signalling X X -
Disabled X X X (d)
Delay 0 - 25.5 s - -
Important Notes
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 xi
Exclusion of liability
The products described here were developed to carry out protection tasks
as part of a complete plant or machine. In general, a complete safety
system consists of sensors, evaluation units, signaling devices and methods
for safe switching off. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure the
safe functioning of the complete plant or machine.
Siemens AG, its subsidiaries and associated companies (herein referred to
as "Siemens") is not in the position to guarantee every characteristic of a
complete plant or machine that is not designed by Siemens.
Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are
given or implied in the following description. No new guarantee, warranty or
liability above those standard to Siemens can be derived from the following
description.
Important Notes
SIMOCODE pro
xii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-1

System Description 1
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find an introduction and general information about
the SIMOCODE pro system including e.g.
• characteristics of both the SIMOCODE pro C and the
SIMOCODE pro V device series
• simplifications of circuits with SIMOCODE pro
• a function overview
• an overview of the system components.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• planners and configurators
• people who are now using SIMOCODE DP and in the future want to use
SIMOCODE pro as a replacement or as an additional system
• optional for commissioners, maintenance and service personnel as additional
information about SIMOCODE pro
• system integrators/process technology.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• basic knowledge about load feeders
• basic knowledge about motor protection
• basic knowledge of control engineering
• basic knowledge of industrial bus technology.
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1.1 Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro (SIRIUS Motor Management and Control Devices) is a
system of motor management and control devices with a PROFIBUS DP
interface. SIMOCODE pro is the further development of the SIMOCODE DP
system.
SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management system which
combines all functions necessary for a motor feeder. Only the switching and
short-circuit protection mechanisms of the main circuit (contactors, circuit
breakers, fuses) are additionally needed.
SIMOCODE pro replaces large sections of the control circuit and also auto-
matically implements all the necessary interlockings. It provides a lot of ope-
rating, service and diagnostic data making the functionality of the motor fee-
der more transparent. It integrates the motor feeder completely into a main
automation system via PROFIBUS DP.
Device series
SIMOCODE pro can be subdivided into two device series with different
functions:
• SIMOCODE pro C - the compact system for direct and reversing starters
and
• SIMOCODE pro V - the variable system which also offers many other additio-
nal functions in addition to the SIMOCODE pro C functions.
Additional control programs are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V for star-delta
starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing switches, soft starters - each also in combi-
nation with reversal of the direction of rotation, as well as valves and positio-
ners. SIMOCODE pro V is also especially versatile. Its functionality can be
extended if required, e.g.
– the number of binary inputs and outputs can be increased in stages and are
adjustable, new types can be added
– a current/voltage Measuring module can be used for additional voltage
measuring and for monitoring power-related measured values (power mana-
gement)
– a temperature module enables the evaluation of several analog temperature
sensors
– an earth-fault detection system can be integrated together with a summation
current transformer
– an analog module extends the system by additional analog inputs and out-
puts, for example, for fill-level or flow-rate monitoring.
SIMOCODE pro C is upwards-compatible to SIMOCODE pro V. This means
that you can use both ranges simultaneously in your plant according to your
requirements.
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-3
Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor feeder indepen-
dently of the automation system. If the automation system (PLC) fails or if
communication is disrupted, the motor feeder also remains protected and
can still be controlled. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being connec-
ted to PROFIBUS DP. This can be connected later according to need.
Typical configuration
The following schematic shows a typical configuration of SIMOCODE pro C
and SIMOCODE pro V:
Figure 1-1: Typical configurations of SIMOCODE pro
U
F
-
0
1
1
2
9
Current measuring
module (IM)
Basic unit (BU1)
Operator panel (OP)
SIMOCODE pro C
Maximum configuration
U
F
-
0
1
1
3
0
SIMOCODE pro V
Basic unit (BU2)
Current measuring
module (IM)
Operator panel (OP)
Digital module (DM)
Analog module (AM)
Additional optional expansions are possible
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1.2 Simplify Configuration with SIMOCODE pro
Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro
Individual components are used for all the control, monitoring and signal
pre-processing. The following components must be used and the following
wiring must be carried out:
• inserting and wiring up the overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices,
current transformers, analog/digital converters
• wiring up the control circuit
• connecting the control devices for start/stop
• bringing the contactor into locking mode via auxiliary switches
• wiring up the interlocks
The following figure shows the conventional configuration of a direct starter:
Figure 1-2: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)
PLC
Start/stop
Thermistor
evaluation
Local start
Local stop
Automatic Manual
-K11
1
-X3
-K1
-K1 S2
S1
-X2
-X1
-F3
-F2-
3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Q1
- K1
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
- F2
1 3 5
2 4 6
M
3~
J 1
PE
2
4...20 mA
1N
2
D
A
-K1 -K1 -F2 -F3
Switchgear
O
N
O
F
F
O
v
e
r
l
o
a
d
T
h
e
r
m
i
s
t
o
r
Automation level / I/O module
-F3
W V U
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
-
Q
1

o
p
e
n
-Q1
N
-K11 -K12
Feedback Control commands
M
a
n
.

/

a
u
t
.

O
N

/

O
F
F

-F4
1L1
-Q1
-K12
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-5
Configuration with SIMOCODE pro
Only SIMOCODE pro is used for complete control, monitoring and signal
pre-processing.
This offers the following advantages:
• additional overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current transfor-
mers, analog/digital converters are not necessary
• wiring up the control circuit (interlocking) is simplified
• the start and stop switches are wired directly to the inputs of the basic unit
• the contactor coil is activated via the output of the basic unit. The auxiliary
contact for locking is no longer necessary
The following figure shows the configuration with SIMOCODE pro:
Figure 1-3: Configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter) with SIMOCODE pro
3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Q1
- K1
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
M
3~
J
PE
W V U
2 4 6
Current Measuring
module (IM)
L1/L+
F11
K1
N/L–
S0 S1
A2 A1
T1 T2
T1
T2
L+
PROFIBUS DP
Thermistor
Control station -
local control [LC]
Basic unit (BU)
IN1 IN2 24 V
OUT 1 1
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1.3 Application Example
Description
The fill level is monitored in a liquid container. A pump keeps the liquid level
(reference value) almost constant by pumping more liquid into the container.
The fill level (actual value) is measured by the fill-level indicator and output-
ted as an analog signal. If the fill level sinks below a certain level, the pump
is switched on by SIMOCODE pro. Liquid is pumped in until the reference
value is again reached. Then the pump is switched off.
Controlling the pump
The pump can be controlled as follows:
• locally: control station - local control [LC] for manual switching on and off (by
visual inspection)
• in the switchgear cabinet door: control station operator panel [OP] for swit-
ching on and off manually
• in the automation level: control station PLC/DCS [DP] for remote-controlled
switching on and off (automatic operation) via PROFIBUS DP
• via SIMOCODE by means of internal logic modules.
Schematic
Figure 1-4: Schematic of a typical application example
3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Q1
- K1
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
M
3~
J
PE
W V U
2 4 6
System
interface
Current Measuring
module (IM)
Pump
L1/L+
F11
K1
N/L–
Connecting cable
S0 S1
A2 A1
T1 T2
Analog module (AM)
In+ In–
Out+ Out–
Fill-level indicator
T1
T2
L+
PLC/DCS
PROFIBUS DP
Thermistor
Liquid container
Control station -
local control [LC]
Control station
PLC/DCS [DP]
Control station -
Operator panel
Optional:
Laptop with
SIMOCODE ES
Display
Basic unit (BU 2)
Motor current
IN1 IN2 24 V
OUT 1 1

System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-7
Recording, displaying and evaluating the measured values
The following measured values are required for monitoring the process:
• pump motor current, which is measured by the current measuring module
• analog value of the fill-level indicator, which is measured by the analog
module
The measured values are evaluated directly by SIMOCODE pro and/or trans-
ferred via PROFIBUS DP to the PLC/DCS.
Any measured value can be outputted via the analog module, e.g. the effec-
tive motor current when a pointer instrument is connected.
Optionally, e.g. a laptop can be connected to the operator panel with the
SIMOCODE ES software in order to evaluate further process data locally.
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1.4 Check List for Selecting the Device Series
The following check list should help you decide on the best device series for
your requirements:

SIMOCODE pro
Requirement pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Footnote
Standard motor feeders (4 inputs, 3 outputs)
with control functions for direct starters,
reversing starters, intelligent overload relays
✓ ✓ 1)
Monitoring of blocking, unbalance, phase
failure ✓ ✓ 1)
Current measuring, current limit monitoring,
overload protection ✓ ✓ 1)
Earth-fault monitoring via current measuring
module (internal) ✓ ✓ 1)
Thermistor motor protection with PTC (binary)
✓ ✓
Motor feeder with control function:
Star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-chan-
ging switches, soft starters – each also possi-
ble in combination with reversal of the
direction of rotation –, valves, positioners
— ✓ 1)
Measuring, processing and outputting analog
values e.g. flow rate, fill level, etc.
(if necessary via an analog module)
— ✓ 2)
Current measuring and voltage measuring
— ✓ 3)
Voltage monitoring for undervoltage
— ✓ 3)
Power management, implementing power
considerations (power, power factor), power
monitoring
— ✓ 3)
More than 4 binary inputs required
(maximum 12) — ✓ 2)
Table 1-1: Check list for selecting the device series
1) Via current measuring module
2) With expansion modules
3) Via current/voltage measuring modules
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-9
More than 3 relay outputs required
(maximum 7) — ✓ 2)
Earth-fault monitoring with a summation cur-
rent transformer via an earth-fault module — ✓ 2)
Binary inputs for 110 - 240 V AC/DC
(max. 8) — ✓ 2)
Bistable relay outputs (max. 4)
— ✓ 2)
Analog temperature monitoring with NTC,
PT100, PT1000 and KTY 83/84 sensor types — ✓ 2)
SIMOCODE pro
Requirement pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Footnote
Table 1-1: Check list for selecting the device series (cont.)
1) Via current measuring module
2) With expansion modules
3) Via current/voltage measuring modules
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1.5 Function Overview
1.5.1 Protecting Functions
For a more detailed description, see chapter 3 "Motor Protection".
Electronic overload protection
The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-dependent
motor protection:
• overload protection
• phase unbalance
• phase failure.
Stall protection
See chapter 3 "Motor Protection".
Thermistor protection
The basic units (BU1 and BU2) make it also possible to connect thermistor
sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the motor temperature.
1.5.2 Monitoring Functions
For a more detailed description, see chapter 5 "Monitoring Functions".
Earth-fault monitoring
The basic units have
• Internal earth-fault monitoring:
For motors with a 3-cable connection, the basic unit evaluates a possible
fault current/earth-fault current from the total current via a current measuring
module or a current/voltage measuring module. Internal earth-fault monito-
ring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks which
are either grounded directly or grounded with low impedance.
• External earth-fault monitoring by SIMOCODE pro V
1
),
5
):
In the case of networks which are grounded with a higher impedance it may
be necessary to set up the earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault cur-
rents using a summation current transformer instead of carrying out internal
earth-fault monitoring via a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module. A maximum of one earth-fault module can be used to
create an additional input on basic unit 2 to connect a 3UL22 summation cur-
rent transformer. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A/ 0.5 A/ 1 A can be evaluated
with the summation current transformer.
Current limit monitoring
The current limit monitoring function is used for process monitoring. Impen-
ding irregularities in the system can be detected in good time: Exceeding a
current limit which is still below the overload limit can e.g. indicate a dirty fil-
ter on a pump or a motor bearing which is running more and more sluggis-
hly. Falling below a current limit can be the first hint that a drive motor belt is
worn out.
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-11
Voltage monitoring
2
)
SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of voltage monitoring of a three-phase
current network or a one-phase network for undervoltage or further availabi-
lity:
• Monitoring for undervoltage:
Two-phase monitoring for limits which can be freely chosen. The response of
SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a particular pre-warning or trip level can be fre-
ely parameterized.
• Monitoring for further availability:
Even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can display the further
availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit brea-
ker or at the fuses.
Temperature monitoring
1
),
3
)
The temperature module from SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of imple-
menting analog temperature monitoring, e.g. of the motor windings or the
bearings of up to 3 sensor measuring circuits.
SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of overtemperature for
freely selectable limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-
warning or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed. Temperature
monitoring always takes place taking the highest temperature of all the sen-
sor measuring circuits in use into account.
Active power monitoring
2
)
The shape of the active power curve of a motor shows its actual load. A load
which is too high leads to increased wear of the motor and as a result can,
in certain circumstances, lead to premature motor failure. An active power
which is too low can, for example, be a sign of no-load operation of the
motor. SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of two-phase active power moni-
toring for upper and lower limits which can be freely chosen.
The response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a pre-warning or trip level
can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Power factor (cos phi) monitoring
2
)
Especially in the low-end performance range of a motor, the power factor
changes more frequently than either the motor current or the active power
does. For this reason, power factor monitoring is particularly suitable for
distinguishing between non-load operation and faults, e.g. a tear in a drive
belt or a break in a drive shaft.
SIMOCODE pro V allows two-phase monitoring of the power factor (cos phi)
for undershooting freely selectable limits. The response of
SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be freely para-
meterized and delayed.
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Monitoring operating hours, stop time and number of start-ups
SIMOCODE pro V can monitor the operating hours and the stop times of a
motor in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors because they
were either running too long (wear) or they were stopped for too long a
period of time.
For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal can be issued
which can indicate that maintenance on the relevant motor is necessary or
even that the motor should be replaced. After replacing the motor, the ope-
rating hours and stop times can be reset. In order to avoid excessive ther-
mal strain on a motor and premature aging, the number of motor start-ups in
a selected time frame can be limited. The limited number of possible starts
can be indicated by pre-warnings.
Monitoring additional process variables via the analog module
1
)
4
)
SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of measuring and monitoring other pro-
cess variables via the analog module.
For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect the pump against dry
operation, or the degree of pollution in a filter can be monitored using a dif-
ferential pressure transducer. If the fill level undershoots a specified level,
the pump can be switched off, or if the differential pressure overshoots a
specified value, the filter should be cleaned.
SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of the corresponding pro-
cess variables for upper and lower limits which can be freely chosen. The
response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be
freely parameterized and delayed.
Phase sequence identification
2
)
SIMOCODE pro offers the option of determining the direction of rotation of
a motor by identifying the phase sequence. If the direction of rotation is
false, a signal can be generated or the motor switched off.
Monitoring measured values using unrestricted limit monitors
1
)
SIMOCODE pro is able to monitor every measured value in the system for
undershooting or overshooting a set threshold value by using unrestricted
limit monitors.
See chapter 11.11 "Limit Monitor".
1) When using basic unit 2
2) When using basic unit 2 with a current or voltage measuring module
3) Additional temperature module required
4) Additional analog module required
5) Additional earth-fault module and summation current transformer required.
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-13
1.5.3 Control Functions
Depending on the device series, the following parameterizable control
functions are available:
All the necessary protection functions and interlocks are already available
and can be flexibly adapted and expanded.
For a more detailed description of the individual control functions, see chap-
ter 4 "Motor Control".
SIMOCODE
Control function pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Overload relays ✓ ✓ 1)
Direct starters ✓ ✓ 1)
Reversing starters ✓ ✓ 1)
Circuit breakers (MCCBs) ✓ ✓ 1)
Star-delta starters,
can be combined with reversal of the direction
of rotation
— ✓
Dahlander,
can be combined with reversal of the direction
of rotation
— ✓
Pole-changing switches,
can be combined with reversal of the direction
of rotation
— ✓
Valves — ✓
Positioners — ✓
Soft starters,
can be combined with reversal of the direction
of rotation
— ✓
1) Due to additional requirements (e.g. power measuring), it may be necessary to select
the BU2 device version.
Table 1-2: Control functions
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1.5.4 Communication
PROFIBUS DP
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or
terminal connection on the basic units).
SIMOCODE pro supports, for example, the following services:
For a detailed description, see chapter 12 "Communication".
1.5.5 Standard Functions
Standard functions are predefined functions which can be easily activated,
e.g. time-staggered restart of the drives after a power failure.
SIMOCODE pro has the following standard functions:
Table 1-4: Standard functions
For a detailed description, see chapter 10 "Standard Functions".
SIMOCODE
Service pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s ✓ ✓
Automatic baud rate recognition ✓ ✓
Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services
(DPV1)
✓ ✓
Operation as DPV1 slave downstream from the Y
link
✓ ✓
Warnings according to DPV1 ✓ ✓
Time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP — ✓
3UF50 compatibility mode — ✓
Table 1-3: PROFIBUS DP services
SIMOCODE
Standard function pro C (BU1)
Number
pro V (BU2)
Number
Test 2 2
Reset 3 3
Test position feedback (TPF) 1 1
External fault 4 6
Operational protection off (OPO) — 1
Power failure monitoring (UVO) — 1
Emergency start 1 1
Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS) 1 1
Timestamping — 1
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-15
1.5.6 Additional Signal Processing with Freely Programmable Logic Modules
If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use
the logic modules which can be programmed freely. These can be used, for
example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions and counter
functions. Furthermore, every value in SIMOCODE pro can be monitored for
undershooting or overshooting selected limit values using limit monitors.
Depending on the device series, the system offers several logic modules
which can be parameterized freely:
For a detailed description, see chapter 11 "Logic Modules".
SIMOCODE
Logic module pro C (BU1)
Number
pro V (BU2)
Number
Truth tables 3 inputs/1 output 3 6
Truth tables 2 inputs/1 output — 2
Truth tables 5 inputs/2 outputs — 1
Timers 2 4
Counters 2 4
Signal conditioners 2 4
Non-volatile elements 2 4
Flashing 3 3
Flickering 3 3
Limit monitor — 4
Table 1-5: Logic modules which can be programmed freely
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1.5.7 Operating, Service and Diagnostic Data
SIMOCODE pro supplies a lot of detailed operating, service and diagnostic
data:
Operating data
• Motor switching state (on, off, right, slowly, quickly), derived from the current
flow in the main circuit; therefore no feedback via auxiliary contacts of circuit
breakers and contactors is necessary
• Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 and maximum current in % of set current
• Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 in V
2)
• Real power in W
2)
• Apparent power in VA
2)
• Power factor in %
2)
• Phase unbalance in %
• Phase cycle
2)
• Temperature in the sensor measuring circuits 1, 2 and 3 and maximum tem-
perature in °C
1) 3)
• Actual analog signal value
1) 4)
• Time to tripping in s
• Heating up of the motor model in %
• Remaining motor cooling down time in s, etc.
Service data
Among other things, SIMOCODE pro yields the following information for
maintaining relevant data:
• Number of motor operating hours, also resettable)
• Motor stop times, also resettable
• Number of motor starts, also resettable
• Number of permissible starts remaining
• Number of overload trippings, also resettable
• Internal comments stored in the device referring to the feeder, e.g. informa-
tion regarding maintenance events, etc.
Diagnostic data
• Numerous detailed early warning and fault signals, also for further processing
in the device or in the control system
• Internal device error protocolling with time stamp
• Value of the last tripping current
• Feedback faults (e.g. no current flow in the main circuit after switch-on com-
mand), etc.
1) When using basic unit 2
2) When using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module
3) Additional temperature module required
4) Additional analog module required
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-17
1.6 Overview of System Components
Devices
SIMOCODE pro
Connectable
system components
pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Application
Operator panel (OP) Installation in the cabi-
net door. Additional
control station and
display. With system
interface for connec-
ting a PC
Current measuring modules (IM)
0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A
Current measuring
with push-through
system. Basic unit can
be snapped open
Current measuring modules (IM)
10 A up to 100 A
Current measuring modules (IM)
20 A up to 200 A
Current measuring
with push-through
system or a rail con-
nection system
Current measuring modules (IM)
63 A up to 630 A
Current measuring
with a rail connection
system
Current/voltage measuring modu-
les (UM)
*
0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A

Mounting only next to
the basic unit, other-
wise similar to the
current measuring
modules, also:
- voltage measuring
- power measurement
- power factor
(cos phi) measure-
ment
- phase cycle
Current/voltage measuring modu-
les (UM)
*
10 A up to 100 A

Current/voltage measuring modu-
les (UM)
*
20 A up to 200 A

Current/voltage measuring modu-
les (UM)
*
63 A up to 630 A

Table 1-6: System components, devices
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
For a detailed description of the system components, see chapter 1.7 "Des-
cription of the System Components".
For dimensional drawings, see chapter C "Dimension Drawings".
For assembly information, see chapter 13 "Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces".
Digital modules (DM)
24 V DC monostable
110 V up to 240 V AC/DC monosta-
ble
24 V DC bistable
110 V up to 240 V AC/DC bistable
— Additional binary
inputs and outputs.
Maximum 2 DMs pos-
sible
Analog module (AM)
*

Additional inputting
and outputting as well
as monitoring of ana-
log values
Max. 1 AM possible
Earth-fault module (EM)
*

For connecting a
3UL22 external sum-
mation current trans-
former for earth-fault
monitoring
Max. 1 EM possible
Temperature module (TM)
*

For monitoring tempe-
rature via additional
sensors
(PT100, PT1000,
KTY83/KTY84, NTC).
Max. 1 TM possible.
SIMOCODE pro
Connectable
system components
pro C
(BU1)
pro V
(BU2)
Application
Table 1-6: System components, devices (cont.)
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-19
Accessories
Software
For parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing
SIMOCODE basic unit
Connectable
system components
pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application
Connecting cable in 4 different
lengths ranging from 0.025 m up to
2 m
For connecting
system components
via system interfaces
System interface cover For covering system
interfaces not in use
Memory module For saving the device
parameters. In the
case of device repla-
cement, existing para-
meters can be
transferred without a
PC
Addressing plug For configuring the
PROFIBUS DP
address without a PC
PC cable For connecting
SIMOCODE pro to a
PC
Door adapter Only for leading out
the system interface
e.g. from a switchgear
cabinet
Table 1-7: System components, accessories
SIMOCODE basic unit
Software components pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application
SIMOCODE ES Smart Access via the system
interface on the
device
SIMOCODE ES Professional
with Object Manager
OM SIMOCODE pro
Access via the system
interface on the
device and PROFI-
BUS DP
SIMOCODE ES Graphic
*)
Graphical parameteri-
zation per
"Drag&Drop"
Table 1-8: System components, software
*) Optional software package for SIMOCODE ES Smart or SIMOCODE ES Professional
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1.7 Description of the System Components
1.7.1 Basic Units (BU)
The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro
system. Basic units are always required when using SIMOCODE pro. They
have a standard enclosure width of 45 mm and are equipped with detacha-
ble terminals:
Figure 1-5: Basic units
Basic unit 1 (BU1)
Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the
SIMOCODE pro C device series. The following motor control functions are
supported:
• overload relays
• direct starters and reversing starters
• circuit breaker activation.
Basic unit 2 (BU2)
Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro V device series. The
following motor control functions are supported:
• overload relays
• direct and reversing starters
• star-delta starters, also with reversal of the direction of rotation
• 2 speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing switches), also with
reversal of the direction of rotation
• 2 speeds, motors with superette Dahlander windings, also with reversal of
the direction of rotation
• slide control
• valve control
• circuit breaker control (MCCB)
• soft starter control, also with reversal of the direction of rotation.
Basic unit 1 (BU1) Basic unit 2 (BU2)
SIMOCODE pro C device series SIMOCODE pro V device series
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-21
Basic unit 2 offers the following expansion options:
• increasing the device functionality if necessary using expansion modules of
22.5 mm width
• using a current/voltage measuring module instead of the current measuring
module used
• additional inputs and outputs if necessary.
Supplying the inputs
See chapter 13.3 "Wiring".
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1.7.2 Operator Panel (OP)
The operator panel is often integrated into the front panels of motor control
centers. It can be used with the SIMOCODE pro C as well as with the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all the status LEDs which are on
the basic units, the "TEST/RESET" button and makes the system interface
externally available.
It also offers the option of controlling the motor feeder from the cabinet. For
this, the operator panel is equipped with
• 5 buttons, of which 4 can be parameterized freely
• 10 LEDs, of which 7 can be parameterized freely
The following figure shows an operator panel:
Figure 1-6: Operator panel
The operator panel can be connected to the basic unit or to the expansion
module on the back of the system interface. The voltage is supplied by the
basic unit.
A PC with SIMOCODE ES or the memory module and the addressing plug
can be connected using the PC cable via the system interface on the front
(with a cover for IP54).
Legend strip:
Legend strips for designating buttons 1 to 4 as well as LEDs 1 to 3 are
enclosed:
• Buttons 1 to 4:
6 pre-assigned and 1 individually inscribable legend strip
• LEDs 1 to 3:
1 individually inscribable legend strip.
Figure 1-7: Legend strip for operator panel buttons and LEDs
Operator panel
SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
Device series
0
DEVICE BUS GEN. FAULT
Button 1 Button 2 Button 3
TEST/
RESET
Button 4
LED 1 LED 2 LED 3
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-23
Unused legend strips can be stored on the back of the operating panel:
Figure 1-8: Storage clips for legend strip
Memory module "park position":
The memory module can be protected from unauthorized use by "parking" it
on the back of the control panel.
In this case, the storage clips for the legend strip cannot be used.
Figure 1-9: Memory module in the park position
Storage clips
Legend strip
Memory module
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1.7.3 Current Measuring Modules (IM)
Current measuring modules are used with the basic units of the
SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device series.
The current measuring module must be selected according to the set cur-
rent to be monitored (rated operating current of the motor). The current
measuring modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with
interposing transformers up to 820 A.
The following figure shows the different current measuring modules:
Figure 1-10: Current measuring modules

The current measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a connec-
ting cable which also supplies the power. Current measuring modules up to
100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the
mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. The basic units can be snap-
ped directly onto the current measuring modules. The current measuring
modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard rail or, optionally,
they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments
which are integrated into the enclosure. The current measuring module up
to 630 A can only be mounted using the integrated screw attachments.
Current measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
Device series
0.3A - 3A
2.4A - 25A
10A - 100A
20A - 200A 63A - 630A
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-25
1.7.4 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V
Device Series
The SIMOCODE pro V device series offers the option of using a current/
voltage measuring module instead of a current measuring module. In addi-
tion to measuring the motor current, current/voltage measuring modules
can also
• monitor voltages up to 690 V
• evaluate and monitor the power and power factor (cos phi)
• monitor the phase cycle
The following figure shows the different current/voltage measuring modu-
les:
Figure 1-11: Current/voltage measuring modules
The current/voltage measuring module is connected to the basic device via
a connecting cable which also supplies the power. Current/voltage measu-
ring modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be
fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. The cur-
rent/voltage measuring modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the
standard rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate
with the screw attachments which are integrated into the enclosure. Moun-
ting is only possible via the internal screw attachments for the current/
voltage measuring modules up to 630 A. Basic units can only be mounted
separately next to the current/voltage measuring modules.
Current/ voltage measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro V
Device series
0.3A - 3A
2.4A - 25A
10A - 100A
20A - 200A 63A - 630A
Monitoring voltages up to 690 V
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Note
The use of a current/voltage measuring module requires basic unit 2, pro-
duct version EO2 (from 04/2005) or later.
Current/voltage measuring modules have additional detachable terminals for
the evaluation or monitoring of performance variables which can be fed with
all three phase voltages of the main circuit.
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-27
1.7.5 Expansion Modules for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series
Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion modules are
available:
• digital modules (DM)
• analog module (AM)
• earth-fault module (EM)
• temperature module (TM).
All expansion modules have the same design with an enclosure width of
22.5 mm. They are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing)
and detachable terminals.
The following figure shows an expansion module:
Figure 1-12: Expansion module
Digital module (DM)
Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the types and number
of binary inputs and relay outputs on basic unit 2, if required.
The following digital modules are available for basic unit 2:
Table 1-9: Versions of digital modules
A maximum of 2 digital modules can be connected to basic unit 2. This
means that 4 additional binary inputs and 2 additional binary outputs are
available. All versions listed here can be combined with each other.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs
and 7 relay outputs.

Inputs Supply Outputs
4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 monostable relay
outputs
4 inputs 110 - 240 V AC/DC, external 2 monostable relay
outputs
4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
4 inputs 110 - 240 V AC/DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
Expansion module
SIMOCODE pro V
Device series
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
With the monostable version, the relay outputs open after switching off/
failure/interruption of the supply voltage. With the bistable version, the swit-
ching state of the relay outputs remains intact even after switching off/
failure/interruption of the supply voltage.
If necessary, you can set a debounce time for the digital module inputs (see
chapter 7.4 "Digital Module Inputs".
Supplying the inputs: see also chapter 13.3 "Wiring".
Analog module (AM)
By means of the analog module, basic unit 2 can be optionally expanded by
analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA to 20 mA). As a result, it is possible to
measure and monitor any process variable which can be mapped on to a 0/4
mA - 20-mA signal.
Typical applications are, for example, fill level monitoring for protecting
pumps from dry operation or the monitoring of pollution in a filter using a
differential pressure transducer. In this case, the automation system has
free access to the measured processed variables. The analog output can, for
example, be used for the visualization of any process variables on a pointer
instrument. The automation system can also freely access the output.
• 1 analog module can be connected to BU2
• 2 analog inputs for detecting signals from 0/4-mA - 20-mA.
Both inputs are set to either 0 to 20 mA or 4 mA - 20 mA
• 1 output for outputting a 0/4 mA - 20 mA signal.
Note
The use of an analog module requires basic unit 2, product version EO2
(from 04/2005) or later.
Earth-fault module (EM)
In the case of networks which are grounded with a higher impedance it may
be necessary to set up the earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault cur-
rents using a 3UL22 summation current transformer instead of carrying out
earth-fault monitoring via a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A, 1 A can be evaluated
with the summation current transformer.
In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring supported by both device
series, SIMOCODE pro V can therefore be expanded by a supplementary,
external and more precise earth-fault monitoring system.
An additional input for connecting a summation current transformer can be
added to basic unit 2 via the earth-fault module.
• 1 earth-fault module can be connected to BU2.
Note
The use of an earth-fault module requires basic unit 2, product version EO2
(from 04/2005) or later.
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-29
Temperature module (TM)
The temperature module offers the option of expanding the
SIMOCODE pro V device series by an analog temperature monitoring
system. With this, up to 3 analog sensor measuring circuits (in two or three-
wire systems) can be connected, the temperatures in the 3 sensor measu-
ring circuits evaluated as well as the highest temperature in all the sensor
measuring circuits determined.
The temperatures recorded can be fully integrated into the process, can be
monitored and are also available for a main automation system. You can, for
example, implement analog temperature monitoring of the motor winding,
bearings, coolant and gear oil temperature.
SIMOCODE pro V supports various sensor types (NTC, KTY83/84, PT100
and PT1000) for use in hard, fluid or gaseous media.
Attention
The same sensor type must be used in all sensor measuring circuits.
• 1 temperature module can be connected to BU2
• 3 sensor measuring circuits in 2 or 3-wire systems
Note
The use of a temperature module requires basic unit 2, product version EO2
(from 04/2005) or later.
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
1.7.6 Accessories
The following figure shows accessories which are independent of the device
series:
Figure 1-13: Accessories
PC cable
for the device parameterization, for connecting a PC to the system interface
of a basic unit via its serial interface.
Memory module
for plugging onto the system interface and for fast reading in or out of the
entire SIMOCODE pro parameterization, e.g. in the case of a unit replace-
ment (see chapter 14.3.3 "Replacing SIMOCODE pro Components").
Addressing plug
for the "hardware" transfer of the PROFIBUS DP address to a basic unit wit-
hout a PC/programming device.
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with an addressing plug:
Please see chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address".
Connecting cable
in different lengths and various versions (ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m,
0.5 m; round cable 2.0 m). They are required for connecting the individual
basic units with their current measuring modules and, if necessary, with
their expansion modules or operator panels. The total length of all the con-
necting cables should not exceed pro System 3 m!
Door adapter
for making the system interface of a basic unit available at an easily accessi-
ble location (e.g. front panel), thus guaranteeing fast parameterization.
System interface cover
to protect the system interfaces from dirt or to seal them. In normal opera-
tion, system interfaces which are not used must be closed.
PC cable
Memory module
Addressing plug
Connecting cable
System interface
cover
SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
Device series
Door adapter
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-31
1.7.7 Software
SIMOCODE pro offers different software tools for thorough, time-saving
parameterization, configuration and diagnostics:
SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for
SIMOCODE pro, which is runnable on a PC/programming device under Win-
dows 2000 or Windows XP. It is available in 2 versions:
• SIMOCODE ES Smart, for directly connecting the PC/programming device
(serial interface) to SIMOCODE pro with a PC cable via the system interface
on the device (point to point)
• SIMOCODE ES Professional, for connecting one or more devices via
PROFIBUS DP and/or via the system interface on the device. You can find a
demo and the latest updates on the Internet at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/simocode -> Support -> Tools & Downloads.
SIMOCODE ES Graphic is an optional software package for
SIMOCODE ES Smart or SIMOCODE ES Professional. It extends the user
interface by a graphics editor and as a result allows very ergonomic and
user-friendly parameterization per "Drag & Drop". The inputs and outputs
from function blocks can be graphically linked and the parameters set. The
device parameterization can be graphically documented.
Note
Prerequisite for the installation of SIMOCODE ES Graphic is an installed ver-
sion of SIMOCODE ES Smart 2004 + service pack 1 or
SIMOCODE ES Professional + service pack 1 on the PC/programming
device.
Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro
Part of SIMOCODE ES Professional. When SIMOCODE ES Professional and
the OM SIMOCODE pro are installed on a PC/programming device,
SIMOCODE ES Professional can be called directly from Step7 HW configu-
ration. Thus, a simple and thorough SIMATIC-S7 configuration is made pos-
sible.
PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro
With the PCS-7 library SIMOCODE pro, SIMOCODE pro can be connected
easily and conveniently to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system.
The PCS-7 library SIMOCODE pro contains
• the corresponding diagnostic and driver blocks with the diagnostic and driver
concept of SIMATIC PCS 7
• the elements necessary for operator control and process monitoring (sym-
bols and faceplate)
Attention
Observe the respective system versions!
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
GSD File
for the integration into SIMATIC S7 or into any DP standard master system
(automation system). You will find the current english version on the Inter-
net at http://www.ad.siemens.de.
You will find further information on the integration of DP slaves in the docu-
mentation for the automation system.
Win SIMOCODE DP Converter
is a software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files
(3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for
SIMOCODE pro.
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-33
1.8 Structural Configuration of SIMOCODE pro
1.8.1 Function Blocks
Characteristics
In the SIMOCODE pro system, there are internal function blocks e.g. for
control stations, control functions and motor protection.
Every function block has a name and is equipped with inputs and outputs.
The following table shows the possible input and output types of the inter-
nal functions blocks from SIMOCODE pro:
Table 1-10: Input and output types of the internal function blocks from SIMOCODE pro
Input Symbol Example
Plugs
(binary)
Function blocks in the basic unit can have binary
plugs. These are connected via software to binary
sockets. They are relevant for the parameterization
e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.
Plugs
(analog)
Function blocks in the basic unit can have analog
plugs. These are connected via software to analog
sockets. They are relevant for the parameterization
e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.
Example: 2-byte word for cyclic signaling data.
Screw termi-
nals
Screw terminals are outside e.g. function block "BU -
input". Control devices and auxiliary switches are
usually connected there.
Control data
from
PROFIBUS DP
From the DP master to SIMOCODE pro e.g. function
block "Cyclic control".
Output
Sockets
(binary)
Function blocks in the basic devices can have binary
sockets. These are assigned via software to binary
plugs. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g.
with SIMOCODE ES.
Sockets
(analog)
Function blocks in the basic devices can have analog
sockets. Sockets are assigned via software to analog
plugs. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g.
with SIMOCODE ES.
Example: 2-byte word max. current I_max.
Screw termi-
nals
Screw terminals are outside e.g. function block "BU -
output". Contactors, e.g., are connected there.
Signaling data
to
PROFIBUS DP
From SIMOCODE pro to the DP master e.g. function
block "cyclic signaling data".
Binary
connecting
blocks
Internal binary signals (binary sockets) which are not
assigned to a function block (fault, status, other), e.g.
"Status - device o.k." (in the graphics editor).
Analog
connecting
blocks
Internal analog signals (analog sockets) which are not
assigned to a function block, e.g. "Phase unbalance"
(in the graphics editor).
DP
DP
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Schematic of principle structural configuration
The following function block diagram shows the principal configuration of
SIMOCODE pro with its external inputs and outputs and the internal
function blocks:
Figure 1-14: Principal configuration of SIMOCODE-pro
Connecting plugs with sockets
Note
The plugs and sockets of the function blocks have not already been connec-
ted at the factory with the binary inputs and the relay outputs of the basic
unit. The internal wiring (connecting the plugs and sockets) is determined by
the user according to his respective application. 1)
Attention
If external wiring has already been carried out, but SIMOCODE pro has not
yet been parameterized:
If you now press a button, the contactors will not be activated!
1
)
1) If you select and load a preset application in SIMOCODE ES, e.g. the
reversing starter, all links and interlocks for the reversing starter are created
in the basic unit.
1
2
3
1
2
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
Bit 0.0
Bit 0.1
Bit 0.2
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
4
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
BU inputs
Cyclic
signaling
Cyclic
control
BU outputs
3
DP
DP
From the
To the DP
Master
PROFIBUS DP
BU
PROFIBUS DP
Function block A
Function block C
Function block B
Inputs
(terminals)
Sockets Plugs Sockets
4
Outputs
(terminals) Plugs
external
BU internal
Standard function
Control function
Logic function
Standard function
Function block D
DP
Master
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 2-1

Short Instructions for Configuring
a Reversing Starter 2
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find short instructions for configuring a reversing
starter including an example. Most of the parameters are appropriately set
as factory defaults for most of the applications. Only a few parameters have
to be set.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• planners
• configurators
• mechanics
• electricians
• commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro (see Chapter 1 "System Description")
• basic knowledge of the SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
2-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
2.1 Introduction and Target of the Example
Introduction
The following simple example of a reversing starter demonstrates step-by-
step how to work with SIMOCODE pro. In this context, the reversing starter
will be equipped with
• a local control station
• and then with a second control station with PROFIBUS DP
The SIMOCODE ES software is used for parameterization.
The PC/programming device is connected to the basic unit via PC cable.
Target of the example
This example is intended to
1. Show you how to implement a standard switching operation of a reversing
starter with SIMOCODE pro in only a few steps
2. Help you modify this example for your respective application
3. Help you easily implement other applications
Important steps
The two important steps with SIMOCODE pro are always:
• implementation of the external wiring (for control and feedback of main cur-
rent switching devices and control and signaling devices)
• implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions (function
blocks), with control and analysis of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs (inter-
nal SIMOCODE wiring).
Conditions
• Load feeder/motor present
• PLC/DCS control with PROFIBUS DP interface is present
• The main circuit of the reversing circuit including the current measuring mod-
ule is already wired. In this case, the 3 cables leading to the motor must be
led through the push-through system openings of the current measuring
module.
• PC/programming device is present
• The SIMOCODE ES software is installed
• The basic unit has the basic factory default settings.
In chapter 14.3.4 "Resetting the Basic Factory Default Settings" you will learn
how to implement the basic factory default settings.
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 2-3
2.2 Reversing Starter with Motor Feeder and Local Control
Station
Necessary components
The following table shows the components that are required for
this example:
Table 2-1: Components needed for the example
Item Ordering data Order number
1 SIMOCODE pro C basic unit
(SIMOCODE pro V also possible)
3UF7000-1AU00-0
(3UF7010-1AU00-0)
2 Current measuring module 0.3 A up to 3 A 3UF7100-1AA00-0
3 Connecting cable for connecting the basic unit and
the current measuring module, depending on the
length
3UF793.-1AA00-0
4 "SIMOCODE ES Smart" software for parameterization
via the system interface or
"SIMOCODE ES Professional" software
for parameterization via the PROFIBUS DP and sys-
tem interface, including STEP-7 Object Manager pos-
sible
3ZS1 312-1CC10-0YA0


(3ZS1 312-2CC10-0YA0
5 PC cable for connecting the basic device to a PC/ pro-
gramming device
3UF7940-0AU00-0
6 PROFIBUS DP cable
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
2-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Circuitry of the reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro
The following schematic shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the con-
trol circuit:
Figure 2-1: Circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit with SIMOCODE pro
Main circuit Control circuit
3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Q1
- K1
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
M
3~
J
PE
W V U
2 4 6
Current Measuring
module (IM)
L1/L+
F11
K1
N/L–
S0 S1
A1 A2
Motor, motor rated current e.g. 3 A
Basic unit (BU)
3 push-through
system openings
System
interface
Connecting cable
System
interface
S2
K2
CLASS 10
Optional: thermistor
1 3 5
2 4 6
- K2
IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V
OUT1 OUT2 1
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 2-5
Circuit diagram of the control circuit of a reversing starter
The following schematic shows the circuit diagram of the control circuit with
a local control station for the commands
• LEFT
• OFF
• RIGHT.
Displays, signals, etc. are not taken into account.
Figure 2-2: Circuit diagram of the control circuit of a reversing starter
The necessary interlocks and links are carried out via the software in the
basic unit.
Standard reversing starter Reversing starter w. SIMOCODE pro
Necessary interlocks
and links
S0: "LEFT" button
S1: "OFF" button
S2: "RIGHT" button
K1: Contactor clockwise rotation
K2: Contactor counterclockwise rotation
L1/L+
F11
K1
N/L–
S0 S1
A1 A2
Basic unit (BU)
K2
S2
L1/L+
N/L–
K2
K2
K1
S2
S1
K1
K2
S0
K1
IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V
OUT1 OUT2 1
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
2-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
2.3 Parameterization
The basics of parameterization
After the external connections have been carried out (contactor coils con-
nected, current measuring module integrated in the main circuit), the sec-
ond step is the parameterization of SIMOCODE pro.
For this you need to know the following points:
Table 2-2: Schematic of the different function blocks in SIMOCODE pro
Point Description
1 Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for
control stations and control functions with motor protection.
2 Function blocks have names.
3 Function blocks can have settings, e.g. the type of control function and the
set current for the overload protection.
4 Function blocks have plugs and sockets. These are clearly designated.
5 You have to do the following in order to achieve the desired functionality:
• connect the function blocks by connecting specific plugs to specific sockets
(i.e put the plugs in the sockets)
• if required, set the values in the function blocks, e.g. the set current,
type of control function
6 The inputs of the function blocks in the basic device are designated and
labeled as plugs:
7 The outputs of the function blocks in the basic device are designated and
labelled as sockets:
8 Plugs and sockets of the inputs and outputs of the devices are not connected
as factory defaults. If you press a button now, the contactors are not acti-
vated.
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 2-7
General procedure for parameterizing a reversing starter
Parameterization means:
1. Setting values
2. Linking function blocks
In the example, this means the following:
• You choose the "reversing starter" control function to implement all interlocks
and links in the basic device for the reversing starter.
• You determine the set current Ie for the motor protection. In this case, the
set current corresponds to the motor rated current, here 3 A.
• The "BU - outputs" function block must be connected to the sockets of the
"protecting/controlling" function block via the software. This means
– connect "BU - output 1" to the socket "Contactor control QE1" (right)
– connect "BU - output 2" to the socket "Contactor control QE2" (left).
• the plugs of the "protecting/controlling" function block must be connected to
the sockets of the "BU - inputs" function block via the software. This means
– connect local control station [LC] ON< to socket "BU - input 1"
– connect local control station [LC] OFF to socket "BU - input 2"
– connect local control station [LC] ON> to socket "BU - input 3".
Figure 2-3: Schematic of an example of parameterization
The assignment of the contactor controls QE depends on the parameterized
control function. See chapter 4.3 "Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp
Controls and Status Signal for the Control Functions".
SIMOCODE pro
• Connect
relay outputs
1
2
1
2
3
BU - inputs
Local control station [LC] Contactor controls
• Choose a reversing starter
• Determine Ie
• Connect
digital inputs
BU - outputs
QE1
QE2
ON<
OFF
ON>
Protecting/controlling
I
e
= 3 A
Right
Left
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
2-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
Carry out the following steps:
Table 2-3: Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
Step Description
1 Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC/programming device.
2 Choose the control function "reversing starter" as the application. When you
select this application, a range of presettings will be automatically carried out
that you will have to check later.
3 Under "Device configuration", select either SIMOCODE pro C or
SIMOCODE pro V. Deactivate the operator panel if not present.
4 Open the dialog Device parameters > Motor protection > Overload/unbalance/
blocking. Set the set current Ie1 to 3A.
5 Open the dialog Further function blocks > Outputs > Basic device and check the
following settings:
• Contactor control > Contactor control QE1.
• Contactor control > Contactor control QE2.
6 Open the dialog Device parameters> Motor control > Control stations and check
the following settings:
•local control [LC] ON<: BU - input 1
•local control [LC] OFF: BU - input 2
•local control [LC] ON>: BU - input 3
Check if the releases for "ON" and "OFF" for the operating mode "local2" are
set.
7 Parameterization is finished. Store the parameter file on your PC/ program-
ming device using Switchgear > Save.
The relay outputs are connected
to the contactor controls.
Note
By choosing a preset application (step 2), other presettings might be made
when assigning the BU outputs to the contactor controls.
QE1
QE2
1
2
BU - inputs
Protecting/controlling
The control station
is now connected "locally" with
the binary inputs of the basic unit. 1
2
3
BU - outputs
ON<
OFF
ON>
Protecting/controlling
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 2-9
Transferring the parameters to the basic device and commissioning
After creating the parameter file, you can transfer it to SIMOCODE pro and
start up the reversing starter. To do this, execute the following steps:
Table 2-4: Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and commissioning
Attention
Switching between "right" and "left" is only possible via "OFF" and after expi-
ration of the preset interlocking time of 5 seconds.
Configuration with local control station is finished
The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now finished. You now have a
functional reversing starter with a local control station.
If the wiring and parameterization is correct, the contactors for clockwise
and counterclockwise rotation are activated when the corresponding but-
tons are pushed.
Step Description
1 Switch on the voltage supply of the basic device.
2 Connect the serial interface of the PC/programming device and the system
interface of the basic unit with the PC cable.
3 Observe the status LED on the basic unit. The "Device" LED should light up
green. SIMOCODE pro can be started up.
4 Transfer the parameter file to the basic unit via the menu e.g. using
Target system > Load in switchgear. Choose the RS232 interface with which
SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC via the PC cable.
5 After having transferred the data to the basic device, you will receive the
message "Download to the switchgear finished successfully".
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
2-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
2.4 Extending the Reversing Starter with a Control Station
via PROFIBUS DP
In this section
In this section you will find out how the previously configured example can
be extended by one control station via PROFIBUS DP. You have the option of
using either the local control stations (local control) or PLC/ DCS (remote
control). This enables SIMOCODE pro to be controlled locally via buttons as
well as via PLC/ DCS.
The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in
SIMOCODE pro. For this reason, you only have to set the PROFIBUS DP
address for SIMOCODE pro so that it can be recognized correctly as a DP
slave on the PROFIBUS DP.
Conditions
The following conditions must be fulfilled:
• The motor is switched off
• The supply voltage for the basic device is switched on. The "Device" LED
must light up green
• The basic unit is connected to the PROFIBUS DP. The PROFIBUS DP inter-
face is on the front side (9-pole SUB-D socket)
• You have integrated SIMOCODE pro in your automatization system.
You will find further information on the integration of DP slaves in the docu-
mentation for the automation system.
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
First set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit.
The following options are available:
• via the addressing plug
• via SIMOCODE ES.
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 2-11
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Carry out the following steps:
Table 2-5: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Carry out the following steps:
Table 2-6: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Step Description
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2 Start SIMOCODE ES.
3 Open the menu Switchgear > Open online.
4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.
Press OK to confirm.
5 Open the dialog Device parameters > Bus parameters.
6 Select the DP address.
7 Save the data in the basic unit with
Target system > Load to switchgear. The address is set. Confirm the
change of the address.
Step Description
1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.
The switches are numbered.
Example address 21: Put the switches "16"+"4"+"1" in the "ON position".
2 If necessary, pull the PC cable out of the system interface.
3 Plug the addressing plug in the system interface.
The "Device" LED lights up yellow.
4 Briefly press the test/ reset button. The set address is accepted. The
"Device" LED blinks yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
5 Pull the addressing plug from the system interface.
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
2-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Additional internal components of the basic unit
The control local control station [LC] is already wired, the external compo-
nents are connected and the required internal connections have been car-
ried out.
The following additional internal components that are already connected as
factory defaults and do not have to be parameterized are required:
• PROFIBUS DP bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands "LEFT", "OFF" and
"RIGHT"
• PROFIBUS DP bit 0.5 for the switching between the control stations (local)
and the PLC/DCS (remotely)
– Bit0.5=0: local control station [LC] active
– Bit0.5=0: PLC/ DCS [DP] control station active.
The PLC/DCS [DP] control station and the switch-over (plug S1) are already
connected with the bits (sockets) of the cyclic signaling data from
PROFIBUS DP. The assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under
Device parameters > Motor control > Control stations.
Figure 2-4: Schematic of internal components of the basic unit for the example
All pre-assigned cyclic signaling data is not shown.
The assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under
Additional function blocks > Outputs > Cyclic signaling data
Configuration with PLC/DCS [DP] control station is finished
The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now finished. You now have a
reversing starter with an additional control station via PROFIBUS DP.
The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled
by setting the corresponding bits.
SIMOCODEpro
1
2
3
1
2
Bit0.1
Bit0.2
PROFIBUS DP
Bit0.5
LEFT
OFF
RIGHT
LEFT
OFF
RIGHT
Status
ON<
OFF
ON>
QE1
QE2
Bit0.0
Bit0.1
Bit0.2
BU - inputs BU - outputs
Bit0.0
DP
Cyclic
control
DP
Cyclic
signaling
Control stations
Right
Left
S1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 3-1
Motor Protection 3
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on motor protection.
Motor protection includes
• overload protection
• unbalance protection
• stall protection
• thermistor protection.
The motor protection operates alongside the motor control "at a higher level
in the background". All parameters of the motor protection are explained.
They can be active or non-active depending on the chosen control function.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• knowledge of electrical drive engineering.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device parameters > Motor protection.
Motor Protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
3.1 Introduction
Description
The motor protection functions "Overload protection", "Unbalance protec-
tion", "Stall protection" and "Thermistor protection" are explained in
Chapters 3.2 to 3.4.
Schematic diagram
The following schematic diagram shows the "Ext. protecting" function block
("Overload protection", "Unbalance protection" and "Stall protection") with
optional parameter settings and signals.
Figure 3-1: "Ext. protection" function block (overload protection, unbalance protection and stall
protection)
Extended protection
Set current Is1
Set current Is2
Class 5, 10, ... 40
Response at Trip Level
Reset
Type of Load
Pause time
Cooling Down Period
Unbalance Protection
Stalled Rotor
Extended parameters:
Level
Level
Protection/Control
Signal/Warning/Fault:
- Cool Time active
- Pause active
- Time to trip(analog)
- Heating up motor model (analog)
- Remain. cooling down time (analog)
- Last tripping current (analog)
- Prewarn Overload
- Overload + Phase loss
- Overload
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Switching
off
- Unbalance
- Stalled Rotor
from current
Response at Pre-Warning Level
see
Tab. 3-1
see
Tab. 3-1
see
Tab. 3-1
see
Tab. 3-1
measuring
Current
Motor Protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 3-3
Adjustable responses "Overload protection", "Unbalance protection" and "Stall
protection"
Table 3-1: Adjustable responses "Overload protection", "Unbalance protection" and "Stall protection"
See also "Table of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important
Notes".
Attention
Deactivate the unbalance protection in SIMOCODE ES if the type of load is
set for 1-phase!
Response At pre-warning
level
At trip level At "asym-
mety" level
At "stall pro-
tection" level
Disabled X X X X (d)
Signalling X X X X
Warning X (d) X X (d) X
Tripping - X (d) X X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s - 0 - 25.5 s 0 - 25.5 s
Motor Protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
3.2 Overload Protection
Description
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors in compliance with
IEC 60947-4-1. The tripping class can be set to 8 different settings ranging
from class 5 to class 40. Therefore, the switch-off time can be adjusted very
precisely to the power-up time of the motor which allows the motor to be
better used to capacity. The "Heating up the motor model" value and the inter-
val up to the overload tripping are also calculated and can be put at the dis-
posal of the control system. After an overload tripping, the remaining cool-
ing down time is displayed. The motor current at the point of overload trip-
ping is stored.
Set current Is1
The motor rated current is usually set with the set current Is1. This value is
listed on the type plate of the motor. It is the basis for calculating the over-
load tripping characteristic curve. ls2 must always be set higher than ls1.
Range: depends on the desired current module
Set current Is2
The set current Is2 is only necessary for motors with 2 speeds in order to
also guarantee suitable overload protection for the higher speed as well.
Range: depends on the selected current module
Attention
Make sure that both motor currents are within the setting range of the cur-
rent module in use. Otherwise, you should use an additional 3UF18 current
transformer.
Set current Is1: 0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A
10 A up to 100 A
20 A up to 200 A
63 A up to 630 A
Set current Is2: 0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A
10 A up to 100 A
20 A up to 200 A
63 A up to 630 A
Motor Protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 3-5
Class
The class (tripping class) indicates the maximum tripping time in which
SIMOCODE pro must trip cold with the 7.2-fold set current Is (motor protec-
tion according to IEC 60947). Please take into account that with start-ups >
"Class 10", the admissible AC3 current of the contactor must be reduced
(derating), which means that a larger contactor must be used.
The following diagram shows the tripping classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35
and 40 for a 3-pole symmetric load:
Figure 3-2: Switch-off classes for 3-pole symmetric loads
Range:
Class: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40
1,15
Motor Protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
The following diagram shows the tripping classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35
and 40 for a 2-pole load:
Figure 3-3: Switch-off classes for 2-pole load
Range:
Response in case of overload
The response of SIMOCODE pro can be additionally adjusted in case of
overload:
Further information: see "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter
"Important Notes" and the table "Responses" in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Attention
With motors for EEx e applications the response must remain set to "trip-
ping"!
Class: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40
0,85
Motor Protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 3-7
Cooling down period
The cooling down period is the specified time after which an overload trip-
ping can be reset. It is usually five minutes. The thermal memory (motor
model - see below) is deleted after the cooling down period expires.
Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time correspondingly
extend the specified time.
Range:
Heating up the motor model (thermal memory)
At a motor rated current (Is) of 100 %, the "heating up the motor model" value
is 87 % (1/1.15 x 100 %) in a steady state and 100 % at the moment of over-
load tripping.
Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response of the motor
when switching off under normal operating conditions (not in the case of
overload tripping!). After this interval, the thermal memory in
SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold start is possible. Due to this, fre-
quent start-ups within a short period of time are possible.
Cooling down period: 60 up to 6553.5 seconds
Motor Protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
The following schematic shows the cooling off response with and without a
pause time:
Figure 3-4: Cooling down response with and without pause time
Attention
The motor and the switchgear must be dimensioned specifically for this
load!
Type of load
You can choose whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a
3-phase load.
With a 1-phase load, the following measures should be carried out:
• The internal earth-fault monitoring and the unbalance protection must be
deactivated
• Only one of the two cables should be feed through a push-through system
opening in the current module.
The phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.
Pause time: 0 up to 6553.5 seconds
Load type: 1-phase, 3-phase
Trip level
ON
t
t
t
100%
100%
Overload tripping
Without pause time
With pause time
Motor
OFF
No overload tripping
Pause time
Thermal memory will be deleted after the pause time
Trip level
Thermal memory (Motor model)
Motor Protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 3-9
Delay pre-warning
The "delay" parameter is used to determine the interval during which the
pre-warning level (1.15 x Ie) must be constantly exceeded before
SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise, there is no
reaction.
In case of phase failure or unbalance > 50 %, this pre-warning is already
issued at approx. 0.85 x Ie.
Reset
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto", the "Overload", "Overload + unbal-
ance" and "Thermistor" faults are acknowledged automatically
• if the cooling down period has expired
• if the thermistor value has decreased to the resetting value according to
specification.
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto", the errors must be acknowledged
by a reset signal:
• "Reset" button on the basic unit
• "Reset" button on the operator panel
• "Reset" standard functions.
For this reason, the "Reset - input" inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, e.g. using reset via the bus.
Warning
The "Auto reset" mode of operation may not be used in applications in which
an unexpected restart of the motor can lead to damage to persons or
objects.
Reset: Manual, Auto
Motor Protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
3.3 Unblance Protection
Description
The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the
control system. A definable and delayable response can be tripped when an
adjustable level is exceeded. If the phase unbalance is greater than 50 %,
a reduction of the tripping time according to the overload characteristic
curve takes place automatically since the heat development in motors
increases with asymmetrical conditions.
Level
The limit of the unbalance to which SIMOCODE pro is to react when over-
shot is set here.
Response
Here you can choose the response of SIMOCODE pro in case of phase
unbalance:
See "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes"
and the table "Responses" in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Delay
The unbalance limit must be exceeded for the period of the set delay time
before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise, there is
no reaction.
Level: 0 to 100%
Motor Protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 3-11
3.4 Stall Protection
Description
After the motor current exceeds an adjustable stall limit (current limit), a
definable and delayable response can be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro.
For example, the motor can be set to tripped quickly independently of the
overload protection. The stall protection is only active after the parameter-
ized class interval has elapsed, e.g. for class 10 after 10 seconds. The stall
protection prevents the motor from unnecessary high thermal and mechani-
cal load as well as premature deterioration.
Level
After exceeding the stall limit, SIMOCODE pro reacts according to the spec-
ified response.
Range:
Response
Here you can determine the response to be executed when the blocking
limit is exceeded:
See "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes"
and the table "Responses" in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Delay
The "Delay" parameter is used to specify the time interval. The stall level
must be constantly exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired
response. Otherwise there is no reaction.
Level: 0 up to 1020 % of Is
Motor Protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
3.5 Thermistor Protection
Description
Thermistor protection is based on a direct temperature measurement in the
motor via binary PTC thermistors which can be connected to either basic
unit 1 (BU1) or basic unit 2 (BU2).
Thermistor protection is used for:
• motors with high switching frequencies
• converter operation
• intermittent operation and/or during braking
• a restricted air supply
• speeds that are lower than the rated speed
In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or in the bearings
of the motor.
Schematic and characteristic curve
The resistance of the thermistors increases very rapidly when the limit tem-
perature is reached.
Figure 3-5: Thermistor (thermistor protection) function block
Response
• Overtemperature:
Here you can choose the SIMOCODE pro response to be executed if the tem-
perature exceeds the trip level.
Attention
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to "trip-
ping"!
Response at trip level
Response to sensor fault
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Signal
- Thermistor short circuit
Thermistor
input
BU
Tripping
υ
R
see
Tab. 3-2
see
Tab. 3-2
- Thermistor trip level
- Thermistor open circuit
Thermistor
T1
T2
Motor Protection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 3-13
• Sensor fault(sensor circuit error):
Here you can choose the SIMOCODE pro response to be executed if there is
a short circuit or a wire break in the thermistor sensor cable.
Table 3-2: "Thermistor protection, binary" response
See also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important
Notes".
Response Trip level Sensor fault
Disabled - X
Signaling X X
Warning X X
Tripping X X
Motor Protection
SIMOCODE pro
3-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-1
Motor Control 4
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on
• control stations which you can select and enable according to need. The
following related topics are explained:
– how control stations, modes of operation and enables work together,
– how control commands e.g. "ON", "OFF" are switched through to the
control function
• control functions you can select according to need. The following related
topics are explained:
– how control commands e.g. "ON", "OFF" are switched through from the
control stations to the contactor controls/relay outputs
– which parameters apply depending on the control function chosen.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• electrical drive engineering
• motor protection.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device parameter > Motor control.
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4.1 Control stations
4.1.1 Description
Control stations are places from which control commands can be given to
the motor. The "control stations" function module is used for the management,
switching and prioritization of the various control stations. SIMOCODE pro can
manage up to four different control stations in parallel. Depending on the
control function, up to 5 different control commands can be transmitted
from each control station to SIMOCODE pro.
• Local, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control commands are issued via
pushbutton.
• PLC/DCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system
(remote).
• PC, control commands are issued via an operator control station or via
PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES software.
• Operator Panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator
panel in the switchgear cabinet door.
Control commands can be e.g:
– motor on (ON>), motor off (OFF) for a direct starter
– motor left (ON<), motor off (OFF), motor right (ON>) for a reversing starter
– motor slow (ON>), motor fast (ON>>), motor off (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit
The plugs of the "control stations function block" must be connected to
arbitrary sockets (e.g. binary inputs on the basic unit, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for the control commands to take effect.
Up to 5 different control commands can be sent from each control station.
There are up to 5 plugs (plug ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>) available
on the function block per control station. The number of active plugs
depends on the chosen control function. With a direct starter, for example,
only the plugs "ON>" and "OFF" are active.
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-3
Control stations
• Control station - local control
In this case, the control devices are usually in the direct vicinity of the motor
and are wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The plugs of the "control
stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally the
function blocks for the basic units or the digital module inputs, basic unit
inputs, DM - inputs) for the control commands to take effect.
Attention
The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. Therefore, it is guaranteed that
SIMOCODE pro switches off the motor safely e.g. in case of a wire break in
the supply cable. The precondition is that the control station is active.
Fig. 4-1: Control station - local control
• Control station - PLC/DCS
This control station is primarily intended for control commands from the
automation system (PLC/DCS) via the cyclic control telegram of
PROFIBUS DP.
The plugs of the "control stations" function block must be connected to
arbitrary sockets, normally the function blocks for the cyclic PROFIBUS DP
bits (cyclic control) for the control commands to take effect.
Fig. 4-2: Control station - PLC/DCS
Pushbutton BU - Inputs
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
1
2
3
4
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
Local
ON <<
ON
PLC/DCS [DP]
ON
OFF
Enables
Enables
PLC
Cycl. receive
DP
Bit 0.0
Bit 1.7
ON >>
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
PLC/DCS [DP]
ON <<
PC [DPV1]
ON
OFF
Enables
Enables
Number:16
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
• Control station - PC
This control station is primarily intended for switching commands on an
arbitrary PC which, along with the automation system, is used as a second
master on the PROFIBUS DP. The control commands are sent via the
acyclic receive telegram from PROFIBUS DPV1.
Note
If the SIMOCODE ES Professional/SIMATIC PDM PC software is connected to
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP, its control commands automatically take
effect via the PC[DPV1] control station. The inputs (plugs) of the "control
stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets, normally the
function blocks for the acyclic PROFIBUS DP bits (acyclic receive) for the
commands to take effect.
Fig. 4-3: Control station - PC
• Control station - operator panel
This control station is primarily intended for control commands issued via the
buttons of the 3UF72 operator panel which is e.g. mounted in a switchgear
cabinet door. The plugs of the "control stations" function block must be
connected to arbitrary sockets (normally with the function block for the
buttons of the operator panel - OP buttons) for the control commands to take
effect.
Attention
Since the operator panel only has 4 buttons for controlling the motor feeder,
one button must be used as a speed switch button for control functions with
2 rotational speeds and 2 directions of rotation.
For this purpose, the button must be assigned to the internal control
command "[OP]<>/ <<>>".
Attention
If the SIMOCODE ES PC Software on a programming device is connected to
SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, the control commands
automatically take effect via the control station operator panel (OP) and
must also be enabled here if necessary.
<>/<<>>
Op. Panel [OP]
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
PC [DPV1]
Enables
ON
OFF
Enables
PC
Acycl. receive
DP
Bit 0.0
Bit 1.7
Number: 16
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-5
Fig. 4-4: Control station - operator panel
4.1.2 Modes of Operation and Mode Selectors
Modes of operation
You can use the control stations either individually or in combination. There
are four different modes of operation you can switch between:
• Local 1
• Local 2
• Local 3
• Remote/Automatic: In this mode of operation, the communication must be
carried out via PLC.
Not all control stations are usually connected. If more than one control
station (e.g local and PLC/DCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also
mandatory to operate the control stations selectively. Four modes of
operation are provided for this purpose which can be selected via two
control signals (mode selectors). For each individual control station in every
mode of operation, it can be stipulated if "ON commands" and/or "OFF
commands" are to be used. The modes of operation are so controlled that
only one mode of operation is active at any one time.
Example: There are three modes of operation in a system:
Table 4-1: Modes of operation
The key-operated switch must be read in via an input to select these modes
of operation. The remote switching operation should be controlled via the
bus. The key-operated switching operation has priority over all other modes
of operation.
Mode of operation Description
Key-operated switch
operation,
e.g. local 1
Only local control entries are admissible!
All other control stations are locked.
Manual operation,
e.g. local 3
Only operator panel control commands and local control
commands can be issued.
Remote operation,
e.g. remote/automatic
Only PLC/DCS control commands are permitted; locally, only
OFF commands are permitted.
<>/<<>>
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
Op. panel [OP]
Enables
ON
OFF
Operator
panel
OP buttons
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Mode selectors
The S1/S2 mode selectors are used to switch between the modes of
operation "Local 1", "Local 2", "Local 3" and "Remote/Automatic". The S1 and
S2 plugs must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. device inputs, control
bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for this.
The following table shows the modes of operation, depending on the signal
status of the S1 and S2 mode selectors:
Table 4-2: Modes of operation depending on S1 and S2
The different modes of operation for enabling the control stations can be
used to specify the switch authorizations for the individual control stations
• Local
• PLC/DCS [DP]
• PC [DPV1]
• Operator panel (OP)

Only the following are active:
• the mode of operation set by the plugs S1 and S2 of the "control stations"
function block
• the enables selected there.
Example for a dynamic mode of operation in relationship to time:
Fig. 4-5: Example - modes of operation
Input
Mode of operation
Local 1 Local 2 Local 3
Remote/
Automatic
S1 0 0 1 1
S2 0 1 0 1
0
0
Local 1 Remote Local 3 Remote Local 1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
Key-op.
Time t
Remote Manual Remote Key-op.
S1
S2
0
switch
switch
operation
operation operation
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-7
4.1.3 Enables and Enabled Control Command
Enables
Enables for the control commands "ON" and "OFF", which must be activated,
are assigned to each mode of operation for every single control station. This
means that depending on the mode of operation, it can be specified for each
control station whether the motor may only be switched on, off or both on and
off. The corresponding checkbox is activated in the "Control stations"
dialog in SIMOCODE ES.
Enables and enabled control command schematic
The following schematic shows the "control stations" function block and the
modes of operation:
Fig. 4-6: Function block "control stations"
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
Local
<>/<<>>
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
Op. panel [OP]
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
PLC/DCS [DP]
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
PC [DPV1]
Local1 Local2 Local3 Remote
S1
S2
Mode selectors
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Enabled
ON
OFF
control
command
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
To the control function
ON
OFF
Enables
ON
OFF
Enables
ON
OFF
"Protecting/Controlling"
Control stations
Enabled
Not enabled
Activation of enables for
control commands "ON" and
"OFF" in SIMOCODE ES
Enables
Enables
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example for operator enable
The following diagram shows an example of operator enable for the
"local 2" mode of operation, "Dahlander with reversal of direction of rotation"
control function:
Fig. 4-7: Example for operator enable
In the example, the motor can only be switched on and off in the "local 2"
mode of operation via the buttons (local) connected to the inputs of the basic
unit and the digital module.
Control command "OFF" enabled
Tothe control function
"Protecting/Controlling"
Control command "ON" (ON<<, ON<, ON>, ON>>)"
enabled
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-9
4.1.4 Control Station Settings
Control stations Description
LC Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal
(arbitrary sockets ,
but usually device inputs).
The "OFF" plug is 0-active on the control station [LC].
ON <<
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
PLC/DCS [DP] Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal
(arbitrary sockets ,
but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DP)
ON <<
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
PC [DPV1] Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal
(arbitrary sockets ,
but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DPV1)
ON <<
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Operator panel (OP) Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal
(arbitrary sockets ,
but usually operator panel pushbuttons)
<>/<<>>
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Mode selectors For switching between the 4 modes of operation local 1,
local 2, local 3, remote with arbitrary signals
(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits
from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
S1
S1
Table 4-3: Control station settings
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4.2 Control Functions
4.2.1 Description
Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for
controlling load feeders.
They have the following important features:
• monitoring switching on/switching off (no current flows in the main circuit
without the ON command)
• monitoring the OFF state (no current flows in the main circuit without the ON
command)
• monitoring the ON status
• switching off in case of a fault.
For monitoring these statuses, SIMOCODE pro uses F (feedback) ON, which
is usually derived directly from the current flow in the main circuit via the
current measuring modules.
All necessary interlocks and connections for the corresponding applications
are already implemented in the control functions.
Control functions contain:
• Plugs for
– control commands (ON <<,ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) that are usually
connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets. From there,
control commands come from the different control stations. The
number of active inputs depends on the control function chosen. For
example, with a direct starter, only the inputs "ON>" and "OFF" are
active.
• Auxiliary control inputs (plug ), e.g. Feedback ON
• Sockets for
– contactor controls QE1 to QE5. The number of contactor controls
depends on the control function chosen. The contactor controls are
usually connected to the relay outputs that are intended for controlling
the contactor coils.
– displays (lamp controls) QL*, QLS. The number of statuses depends on
the control function chosen.
– statuses, e.g. "Status - ON <<, Status - ON >>". The number of statuses
depends on the control function chosen.
– faults, e.g. "Fault - feedback (F) ON", "Fault - antivalence".
• Settings, e.g. interlocking time, non-maintained command mode ON/OFF, etc.
• A logic component with all necessary interlockings and connections for the
control function
• Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is
active "at a higher level in the background". Motor protection and thermistor
protection are independent functions that switch off the motor when
activated via the control functions. For a more detailed description, see
chapter 3 "Motor Protection".
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-11
Control function schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the control
function ("Protecting/controlling" function block):
Fig. 4-8: General representation of the control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Lamp control and status signals:
The feeder status feedback is signaled via the status signals or the QL lamp
control. They are all directly dependent on the status of the auxiliary control
input "F ON".
Feeder status feedback:
• Status signals, e.g. "Status ON<": These are transmitted, for example, via
PROFIBUS DP to the automations system and signal the status of the feeder
there.
• Displays (lamp control) "Display - QLE<": These can, for example, activate a
signal lamp or a pushbutton lamp.
Note
If the motor is running in test operation, the displays can show a different
response (e.g. flashing).
Positioner CLOSE
Positioner OPEN
ON <<
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
QE1
QE3
QE5
QE2
QE4
Control commands Contactor controls
Displays (lamp
QLE<<
QLA
QLE>>
QLE<
QLE>
QLS
(ON<<)
(ON<)
(OFF)
(ON>)
(ON>>)
(Fault)
Aux. control inputs *
Plugs of the control commands are usually
connected with the "Enabled control
command" sockets
*) Abbreviations
**) See also chapter 3 "Motor
Protection"
F ON Feedback ON
FC Feedback CLOSE
FO Feedback OPEN
TC Torque CLOSE
TO Torque OPEN
F ON
FC
FO
TC
TO
Status signals
ON <<
OFF
ON >>
ON <
ON >
Protecting/controlling
Control function
(motor protection**)
e.g. for PROFIBUS DP
control)
Controlstations
Enabled
control command
Settings
•Operating Mode
•Control Commands
•Aux. Control Inputs
•Timings
•Star-delta
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
• The "QL..." lamp controls also automatically signal to the status displays via a
2 Hz flashing frequency:
– Test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing)
– Unacknowledged fault case (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
– Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the
relay outputs
– Lamp test: all QL outputs are activated for approx. 2s
Extent and application
Depending on the device series, the system provides the following control
functions:
SIMOCODE
Control function pro C (BU1) pro V(GG2)
Overload relay ✓ ✓
Direct starter ✓ ✓
Reversing starter ✓ ✓
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) ✓ ✓
Star-delta starter — ✓
Star-delta reversing starter — ✓
Dahlander starter — ✓
Dahlander reversing starter — ✓
Pole-changing switch — ✓
Pole-changing reversing switch — ✓
Solenoid valve — ✓
Positioner 1 to positioner 5 — ✓
Soft starter — ✓
Soft starter with reversing contactor — ✓
Table 4-4: Control functions
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-13
4.2.2 General Settings and Definitions
Parameter
Parameter Description
F ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with "Status - current flowing" socket) as factory
default. An auxiliary contact from the contactor is not required for
signaling. Depending on the control function chosen, this state is
signaled by the QLE1 to QLE5 displays and by the "Status - ON <<,
- ON <, - ON >, - ON >>" signals. "No current flowing" means: the
motor is switched off. An auxiliary contact from the contactor is not
required for signaling. This state is signaled by the QLA display and
the "Status - OFF" signal
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated:
The control command on the corresponding input of the control
stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >,ON >>" is saved. It can only be
revoked by an "OFF" control command from the corresponding
control station. The auxiliary contact for locking the contactor is
no longer necessary. Motor feeders are usually operated in
locking mode. Locking is preset.
• Activated:
Depending on the control function chosen, the non-maintained
command mode affects the plugs of all control stations "ON<,
ON <<, ON >, ON >>". A control command is only effective as
long as there is a "high signal".
Save switching
command
• Deactivated:
Commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational
speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF" and
after the interlocking time/switching interval has elapsed. This
setting is usually used and is preset.
• Activated:
Commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational
speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF" and
after the interlocking time/switching interval has elapsed.
If the selected direction/speed cannot be executed immediately
due to a parameterized interlocking time/switching interval, the
selection is signalized by flickering QLE displays. Your selection
can be canceled at any time with "OFF".
Load type You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (e.g. heating):
Because generally no overcurrent flows in a resistive load during
switching, the "Start active" status is not signaled. In this case, the
start message for the "Signaling", "Warning" and "Switch off"
functions is not hidden.
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Feedback time SIMOCODE pro monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via
F ON (Feedback ON).
If the status of F ON changes - without a corresponding switching
command - the Fault feedback (F) switches off the feeder.
The default value is 0.5 s.
The feedback time can be used to suppress such "feedback faults"
for a defined period of time, e.g. in the case of network switches.
When the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro continuously
controls if F ON = 0. If the current flows longer than the set
feedback time without the "ON" control command being issued,
fault message "Fault - feedback (F) ON" is issued. The contactor
controls can only be connected after the fault has been rectified.
When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE continuously controls
if F ON = 1. If the current flows longer than the set feedback time
without the "OFF" control command being issued, a fault message
"Fault - feedback (F) OFF" is issued. The contactor controls are
deactivated.
Execution time SIMOCODE pro monitors switching on/switching off. Switching on/
switching off must be completed within this time period.
The default value is 1.0 s. After an "ON" control command has been
issued, SIMOCODE pro must measure the current in the main
circuit within the execution time. Otherwise, the fault message
"Fault - execution ON command" will be issued. SIMOCODE pro
deactivates the contactor controls.
After the "OFF" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must
not be able to detect any current in the main circuit after the
execution time. Otherwise, the fault message "Fault - execution
OFF command" will be issued. The contactor controls can only be
connected after the fault has been rectified.
Interlocking time SIMOCODE pro prevents, e.g. in the case of reversing starters,
both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching
from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
interlocking time.
Pause time In the "Dahlander" and "pole-changing switch" control functions,
switching from the fast speed to the slow one can be delayed with
the time configured.
In the "Star/Delta" control function, the pause time extends the
time between switching off the star contactor and switching on the
delta contactor by the time configured.
Parameter Description
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-15
Fig. 4-9: Execution time (Az) and feedback time (Rz) depending on F ON
Faults
The contactor controls are deactivated.
There is also:
• a flashing signal on the QLS lamp control
• a flashing signal on the "GEN. FAULT" LED
• the "Status - general fault" signal
• the corresponding signaling bit of the fault.
1
0
OFF
Switch ON ON
OFF
1
0
OFF
Switch OFF
QE
F ON
Az Rz Az Rz
Voltage failure,
e.g. pulsating current conditions
Az: Execution time
Rz: Feedback time
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4.2.3 "Overload Relay" Control Function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro functions like an electronic
overload relay. Control commands (e.g. ON, OFF) cannot be issued to the
load. The control stations, as well as the inputs of the control function (e.g.
ON>, OFF), do not have any function in the case of overload relays.
When applying the control voltage, SIMOCODE pro automatically closes the
QE3 contactor control; it remains active until it is deactivated by the fault
signal of a protection or monitoring system.
The QE3 contactor control must be connected to an arbitrary relay output
that switches off the contactor coil of the motor contactor in case of
overload.
Schematic
Fig. 4-10: Schematic of the "Overload relay" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in the chapter 4.2.2
"General Settings and Definitions".
Note
In the case of overload, the QE3 output is set (=1) and is only reset when
the overload is tripped (=0).
This output closes when the overload function is parameterized.
Overload relay Description
F ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
Load type You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Table 4-6: Overload relay settings
Aux. control inputs
Contactor controls
Displays
QE3
F ON* QLS
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
Protecting/controlling
Load type
Overload relay
Motor protection
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-17
4.2.4 "Direct Starter" Control Function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can switch a motor on and off with this control function.
Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 internal contactor control
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). Thus, the
inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably
to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault signal causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated.
Schematic
Fig. 4-11: Schematic of the "direct starter" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Aux. control inputs
Contactor controls
Displayas (lamps)
Status
QE1
F ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
(ON)
(OFF)
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
OFF
ON >
Protecting/controlling
Feedback time
Execution time
Inching mode
Load type
Direct starter
Motor protection
ON
Control commands
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in the chapter 4.2.2
"General Settings and Definitions".
Direct starters Description
OFF OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON > ON control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
F ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Table 4-7: Direct starter settings
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-19
4.2.5 "Reversing Starter" Control Function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the direction of
rotation of the motor (forwards and backwards).
Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control (clockwise i.e.
forwards)
• Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control (counter-clockwise i.e.
backwards)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 and QE2 internal contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). Thus, the
inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably
to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault signal causes the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to be
deactivated.
Switching the direction of rotation
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the "Status - ON>" or
"Status - ON<" signal is no longer issued (motor was switched OFF) AND
after the interlocking time has expired.
• via the OFF control command
• directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed
via the interlocking time.
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Schematic
Fig. 4-12: Schematic of the "reversing starter" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Control commands
Aux. control inputs
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
F ON*
QLE<
QLA
QLE>
QLS
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON <
OFF
ON >
Protecting/controlling
Feedback time
Execution time
Interlocking time
Inching mode
Save switching
Load type
command
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
(ON <)
*Feedback ON
Reversing starter
Motor protection
Right
Left
Interlocking time
active
Extended controlling
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-21
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Reversing starter Description
ON < ON< control command, counter-clockwise rotation
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)
OFF OFF control command
(connection with optional socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON > ON> control command, clockwise rotation
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
F ON* Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Save switching
command
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type You can select between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Interlocking time Range: 0 - 255 seconds
Table 4-8: Reversing starter settings
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4.2.6 "MCCB Circuit Breaker" Control Function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can ideally switch circuit breakers (e.g. 3WL, 3VL) ON and
OFF with this control function. The circuit breakers are connected to
PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro.
Control commands
• Start with "ON>" activates the QE1 contactor control for an impulse of
400 ms.
• Stop with "OFF" activates the QE2 contactor control for an impulse of
400 ms.
• With "Reset", the QE2 contactor control is activated for an impulse of 400 ms
when the circuit breaker is released (alarm switch = ON).
The impulse of a control command is always fully executed before the
"counter impulse" is set.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets.
Making internal assignments
You have to make the following assignments:
1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the
"ON connection" of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.
2) Assign the QE2 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the
"OFF connection" of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.
3) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input, which is connected to the auxiliary switch
(HS) of the circuit breaker, to the auxiliary control input "Feedback ON".
4) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input, which is connected to the alarm switch of
the circuit breaker, to the input (socket) of the "External fault 1" standard
function.
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-23
Schematic
Fig. 4-13: Schematic of the "circuit breaker" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Circuit breaker Description
OFF OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON > ON control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
F ON* Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection always with
socket , (input), which the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker
is connected to)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time Higher than the motor running time of the motor drive of the circuit
breaker. Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Table 4-9: Circuit breaker settings
Control commands
Aux. control inputs
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
F ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
400 ms.
400 ms.
OFF
ON >
Protecting/controlling
Feedback time
Execution time
Inching mode
Load type
(ON)
(OFF)
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
Circuit breaker
Motor protection
ON
OFF
Auxiliary switch
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4.2.7 "Star-delta Starter" Control Function
Description
Star-delta starting is used to limit the starting current and to avoid
overloading the network. In this control function, SIMOCODE pro starts the
motor first with a star-switched stator winding and then switches it to delta.
Control commands
• Start with "ON" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and
then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (network contactor)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets. Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2
and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.
Switching from star to delta
For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before
the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor) is connected.
SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:
• Current-dependent with decreasing current below the threshold (I < 90% Ie).
• Time-dependent according to the time set in the parameter "Maximum time
for star operation" when the current in the star operation does not sink below
this threshold.
Safety instructions
Attention
It is recommended to wire the QE contactor controls to the relay outputs of
the basic unit.
Attention
If you use the internal earth-fault detection with a star-delta connection,
false trippings might occur. For delta operation, the summation current is
non-zero due to harmonics.
Attention
If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a
current which is 1/√3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter
control function.
Example: In = 100 A Ie = In x 1/√3
Ie = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Ie = 57.7 A
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-25
Switching interval
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the switching
interval.
Reason: for motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated
current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta
starting current if the switching interval is too short. The motor EMF
decreases if the interval is longer.
Schematic
Fig. 4-14: Schematic of the "star-delta starter" control function ("Controlling/protecting" function block)
Control commands
Aux. control inputs
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
F ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
OFF
ON >
Protecting/controlling
Feedback time
Execution time
Inching mode
Load type
(ON)
(OFF)
(Fault)
QE3
Switching interval
Max. time for
star operation
Transformer
mounted
*Feedback ON
Star-delta starter
Motor protection
Switching interval
active
Star contactor
Delta contactor
Network contactor
Extended controlling
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Star-delta starter Description
OFF OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON > ON control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
F ON* Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Switching interval Range: 0 - 655.3 seconds (10 ms steps)
Max. time for
star operation
Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Range: 0 - 255 seconds
Transformer
mounted
1
)
The set current and the switching levels for star-delta switching
depend on the mounting place of the current measuring module.
• Delta: set current reduced to In x 1/√3
• In supply cable: set current Ie = In (rated current of the motor)
Table 4-10: Star-delta starter settings
1) Attention
If a current/voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be
connected to the supply cable!
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-27
4.2.8 "Star-delta Starter with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control
Function
Description
With this control function, a motor can be started in both directions of
rotation in star delta operation.
Control commands
• Clockwise rotation: start with "ON>" first activates the QE1 (star contactor)
contactor control and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control
(network contactor, clockwise rotation)
• Counter-clockwise rotation: start with "ON<" first activates the QE1 (star
contactor) contactor activation and then immediately activates the QE4
contactor control QE4 (network contactor, counter-clockwise rotation)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets. The inputs (plugs) must be connected
to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command"
sockets.
Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 QE3 and QE4 contactor controls to
be deactivated.
Switching from star to delta
For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before
connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor).
SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:
• Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the level (I < 90% Ie).
• Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Maximum time for star
operation" when the current in the star operation does not sink below this
threshold.
Switching the direction of rotation
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the "Status - ON>" or
"Status - ON<" signal is no longer issued (motor was switched OFF) AND
after the interlocking time has expired.
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time.
Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
"interlocking time".
Start-up is always in star mode.
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Safety instructions
Note
It is recommended to wire the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to the relay
outputs of the basic unit. You need at least 1 digital module for this control
function.
Attention
If you use the internal earth-fault detection for a star-delta connection,
false trippings might occur.
For delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.
Attention
If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a
current which is 1/√3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter
control function.
Example: In = 100 A Ie = In x 1/√3
Ie = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Ie = 57.7 A
Switching interval
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the switching
interval.
Reason: for motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated
current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta
starting current, if the switching interval is too short. The motor EMF
decreases if the interval is longer.
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-29
Schematic
Fig. 4-15: Schematic of the "star-delta starter" function with reversal of the direction of rotation
("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Control commands
Aux. control inputs
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
F ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON>
OFF
ON >
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
QE3
ON <
Protecting/controlling
Feedback time
Executiontime
Inching mode
Load type
Switching time
Max. time for
star operation
Transformer
mounted
Save switching
command
Interlocking time
*Feedback ON
QLE<
(ON <)
QE4
ON <
Star-delta starter with
reversal of the

Motor protection
Star contactor
Delta contactor
Right - network contactor
Save switching
Switching interval
active
Interlocking time
active
Extended controlling
direction of rotation
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Star-delta starter
with reversal of
the direction of
rotation
Description
OFF OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON > ON> control command
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket) ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
ON < ON< control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)
Feedback ON* Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Save switching
command
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Switching interval Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds (10 ms steps)
Interlocking time Transformer mounted
Maximum time for
star operation
Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Range: 0 - 255 seconds
Transformer
mounted
1
)
The set current and the switching levels for the star-delta switching
depend on the mounting position of the current transformer/
current measuring module.
• Delta: set current reduced to In x 1/√3
• In supply cable: set current Ie = In (rated current of the motor)
Table 4-11: Star-delta starter settings with reversal of the direction of rotation
1) Attention
If a current/voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be
connected to the supply cable!
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-31
4.2.9 "Dahlander" Control Function
Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with only one stator
winding at two speeds (fast and slow). SIMOCODE pro wires the stator
winding via the contactors so that there is a high pole number at low speed
and a low pole number at high speed.
Control commands
• Slow: start with "ON>" first activates the QE2 contactor control (slow)
• Fast: start with "ON>>" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star
contactor, fast) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control
(network contactor, fast)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be
deactivated.
Switching the speed
It is possible to switch the speed if the signal when the signal "Feedback
ON" is no longer issued (motor was switched off) AND when changing from
"fast" = > "slow" after the switching interval has expired.
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly when the "Save switching command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the "fast" speed from being
switched on at the same time as the contactor for the "slow" speed.
Switching interval
The "switching interval" parameter can be used to delay switching from "fast"
to "slow" to give the motor enough time to run down.
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Attention
Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit:
• Ie1 for the slower speed
• Ie1 for the faster speed
Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at
both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need
according to the corresponding speed two external current converters (e.g.
3UF18 with 1A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary
cables must lead through the current measuring module with the range 0.3
A - 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the
secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information see
chapter 3.2 "Overload Protection".
Schematic
Fig. 4-16: Schematic of the "Dahlander" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Control commands
Aux. control inputs
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
F ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
OFF
ON >
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
QE3
*Feedback ON
ON >>
ON >>
QLE>>
(ON >>)
Protecting/controlling
Feedback time
Execution time
Inching mode
Load type
Switching interval
Save switching
command
Dahlander
Motor protection
Switching interval
active
Fast
Slow
Fast - star contactor
Extended controlling
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-33
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Dahlander Description
OFF OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON > ON> control command (slow)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
ON >> ON>> control command (fast)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>>" socket)
F ON* Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Save switching
command
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and Defini-
tions")
Feedback time Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Switching interval Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds (10 ms steps)
Table 4-12: Dahlander settings
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4.2.10 "Dahlander with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control Function
Description
This control function is used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at
both speeds.
Control commands
• Right - slow: start with "ON>" first activates QE2 the contactor control (right-
slow).
• Right - fast: start with "ON>>" first activates the QE3 contactor control (fast-
star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control
(right-fast)
• Left - slow: start with "ON<" activates the QE4 contactor control (left-slow)
• Left - fast: start with "ON<<" activates the QE3 contactor control (fast-star
contactor) and then immediately activates the QE5 contactor control (left-
fast)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.
Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.
Switching the direction of rotation
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the "Status - ON>" or
"Status - ON<" signal is no longer issued (motor was switched OFF) AND
after the interlocking time has expired.
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed
via the "interlocking time".
Switching the speed
when the signal "Feedback ON" is no longer issued (motor was switched off)
AND when changing from "fast" = > "slow" after the switching interval has
expired.
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly when the "Save switching command" is activated.
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-35
Switching interval
The "switching interval" parameter can be used to delay switching from "fast"
to "slow" to give the motor enough time to run down.
Safety information
Note
You need at least 1 digital module for this control function. This control
function cannot be implemented with bistable relay outputs.
Attention
Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit:
• Ie1 for the slower speed
• Ie1 for the faster speed
Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at
both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need
according to the corresponding speed two external current converters (e.g.
3UF18 with 1A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary
cables must lead through the current measuring module with the range 0.3
A - 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the
secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information see
chapter 3.4 "Stall Protection".
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Schematic
Fig. 4-17: Schematic of the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation" control function
("Controlling/protecting" function block)
Control commands
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
F ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
QE3
ON <
*Feedback ON
QLE<
(ON <)
QE4
Contactor controls
QE5
QLE<<
(ON <<)
QLE>>
(ON >>)
OFF
ON >
ON <
ON <<
ON >>
ON >>
ON <<
Protecting/Controlling
Execution time
Inching mode
Load type
Switching interval
Save switching
command
Interlocking time
Aux. control inputs
Dahlander with
reversal of the

Motor protection
Right - fast
Right - slow
Fast - star contactor
Left - slow
Left - fast
Switching interval
active
Interlocking time
active
Extended controlling
direction of rotation
Feedback time
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-37
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Dahlander with
reversal of the
direction of
rotation
Description
ON << ON<< control command (left, fast)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<<" socket)
ON < ON< control command (left, slow)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<<" socket)
OFF OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF<" socket)
ON > ON> control command (right, slow)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
ON >> ON>> control command (right, fast)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>>" socket)
F ON* Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated (presetting)
Activated
Save switching
command
Deactivated (presetting)
Activated
Load type You can choose between
Motor
Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and Definitions")
Feedback time Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Interlocking time Range: 0 - 255 seconds
Switching interval Range 0 to - 655.3 seconds (10 ms steps)
Table 4-13: Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation control function settings
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4.2.11 "Pole-changing Switch" Control Function
Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with two stator
windings in two speed levels (fast and slow).
Control commands
• Slow: start with "ON>" activates the QE2 contactor control (slow).
• Fast: start with "ON>>" activates the QE1 contactor control (fast).
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.
Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.
Switching the speed
It is possible to switch the speed when the "Feedback ON" signal is no
longer issued (motor is switched off) AND when changing from "fast" ->
"slow" after the switching interval has expired:
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly when the "Save switching command" is activated.
Switching interval
The "switching interval" parameter can be used to delay switching from "fast"
to "slow" to give the motor enough time to run down.
Attention
Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit:
• Ie1 for the slower speed
• Ie1 for the faster speed.
Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at
both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need
according to the corresponding speed two external current converters
(e.g. 3UF18 with 1 A secondary transformer rated current), whose
secondary cables must lead through the current measuring module with the
range 0.3 - 3 A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the
secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information
see chapter 3.2 "Overload Protection".
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-39
Schematic
Fig. 4-18: Schematic of the "pole-changing switch" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function
block)
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
pole-changing
switch
Description
OFF OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON > ON> control command (slow)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
ON >> ON>> control command (fast)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>>" socket)
F ON* Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
Deactivated (presetting)
Activated
Table 4-14: Pole-changing switch settings
Control commands
Aux. control inputs
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
F ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
OFF
ON >
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
ON >>
ON >>
QLE>>
(ON >>
Protecting/Controlling
Feedback time
Execution time
Inching mode
Load type
Switching interval
Save switching
command
Pole changing switch
Motor protection
Switching interval
active
Fast
Slow
Extended controlling
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Save switching
command
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Switching interval Range: 0 - 655.3 seconds (10 ms steps)
pole-changing
switch
Description
Table 4-14: Pole-changing switch settings (cont.)
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-41
4.2.12 "Pole-changing Switch with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control
Function
Description
This control function is used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at
both speeds.
Control commands
• Right - slow: start with "ON>" activates the QE2 contactor control (right-slow)
• Right - fast: start with "ON>>" activates the QE1 contactor activation (right-
fast)
• Left - slow: start with "ON<" activates the QE4 contactor control (left-slow)
• Left - fast: start with "ON<<" activates the QE5 contactor control (left-fast)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command"
sockets.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.
Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.
Switching the direction of rotation
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal
"Status - ON>" or "Status - ON<" is no longer issued (motor was switched
off) AND after the interlocking time has expired.
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time.
Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
"interlocking time".
Switching the speed
It is possible to switch the speed when the "Feedback ON" signal is no
longer issued (motor is switched off) AND when changing from "fast" ->
"slow" after the switching interval has expired:
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly when the "Save switching command" is activated.
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Switching interval
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the speeds "fast" and "slow"
from switching on at the same time. The "switching interval" parameter is
used to delay switching from "fast" to "slow" to give the motor enough time
to run down.
Safety information
Note
At least one additional digital module is necessary for this control function.
Attention
Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit:
• Ie1 for the slower speed
• Ie1 for the faster speed.
Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at
both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need
according to the corresponding speed two external current converters (e.g.
3UF18 with 1 A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary
cables must lead through the current Measuring module with the range 0.3
- 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the secondary
currents of the external transformers. For further information see chapter
3.2 "Overload Protection".
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-43
Schematic
Fig. 4-19: Schematic of the "pole-changing switch" with reversal of the direction of rotation
control function ("Controlling/protecting" function block)
Interlocking time active
Pause time active
Control commands
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
F ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
ON <
*Feedback ON
QLE<
(ON <)
QE4
Contactor controls
QE5
QLE<<
(ON <<)
QLE>>
(ON >>)
OFF
ON >
ON <
ON <<
ON >>
ON >>
ON <<
Protecting/controlling
Feedback time
Execution time
Inching mode
Load type
Switching interval
Save switching
command
Interlocking time
Pole-changing switch with
reversal of the

Motor protection
Right - fast
Right - slow
Left - slow
Left - fast
Extended controlling
direction of rotation
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Pole-changing
switch with
reversal of the
direction of
rotation
Description
ON << ON<< control command (left, fast)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<<" socket)
ON < ON< control command (left, slow)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)
OFF OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON > ON> control command (right, slow)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
ON >> ON>> control command (right, fast)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>>" socket)
Feedback ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Save switching
command
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Interlocking time Range: 0 - 255 seconds
Switching interval Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds (10 ms steps)
Table 4-15: Settings for pole-changing switches with reversal of the direction of rotation
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-45
4.2.13 "Valve" Control Function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate a solenoid valve.
With the control commands "OPEN" and "CLOSE", the valve is brought into
the corresponding end position. SIMOCODE pro must be informed via
corresponding limit switches (OPEN, CLOSE) when the end position has
been reached.
Control commands
• Open: start with "ON>" activates the QE1 internal contactor control.
• Close: stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault signal causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated and
puts the valve into the "close" position.
Safety information
Attention
The motor protection functions are not active. A current measuring module
is not necessary.
Attention
If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the valve
is immediately switched OFF via the fault message
"Fault double 1" (="close")
If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command,
the valve is switched off with the fault message "Fault - end position fault"
(= "Close").
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Schematic"
Fig. 4-20: Schematic of "valve" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Valve Description
OFF OFF control command (close)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON> ON control command (open)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Execution time Time until the end position is reached.
Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds
Table 4-16: Valve control function settings
F ON *
Control commands
Aux. control inputs
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
(OPEN)
(CLOSE)
(Fault)
OFF
ON >
FC
FO
Protecting/controlling
Execution time
* Abbreviations
FC Feedback CLOSE
FO Feedback OPEN
Inching mode
Valve
Open
FC
FO
Extended controlling
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-47
4.2.14 "Positioner" Control Function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can control positioners/actuators with this control function.
The positioner is moved into the corresponding end position with the
"OPEN" and "CLOSE" control commands and is deactivated via its limit
switch (1-active) or torque switch (0-active).
SIMOCODE pro must be informed about the response of the limit switch/
torque switches via its inputs.
Control commands
• Open: start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control until "End position
OPEN" (feedback open) is reached.
• Close: start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control until "End position
CLOSE" (feedback close) is reached.
• Stop: with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
The drive remains stopped in that position.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets.
Function schematic
Fig. 4-21: Function schematic of the torque switch and the limit switch when controlling
positioners

TO
Torque switch
TC
Motor shaft with springs
at the beginning and end
FO
FC
Limit switch
Positioner
Gear
OPEN CLOSE
OPEN CLOSE
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Switching the direction of travel
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal "Feedback ON" is
no longer issued (motor was switched off) AND after the interlocking time
has expired.
• Via the OFF control command.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed
via the "interlocking time".
Attention
The corresponding torque switch must not respond before the associated
limit switch when the torque switch (TO)/(TC) is connected. In this case, the
positioner is switched off immediately with the fault message "Fault -
blocked positioner".
If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the
positioner is immediately switched off via the fault message "Fault double 1"
(="close").
If both torque switches respond at the same time (TO=0 and TC=0), the
positioner is switched off immediately with the fault message
"Fault double 0".
If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command,
the positioner is switched off with the fault message "Fault end position
fault".
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-49
Schematic
Fig. 4-22: Schematic of the "positioner" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Control commands Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE1
QE2
QLE<
QLA
QLE>
QLS
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON <
OFF
ON >
Open
Stop
(Fault)
Closed
* Abbreviations
F ON* Feedback ON
FC Feedback CLOSE
FO Feedback OPEN
TC Torque CLOSE
TO Torque OPEN
Aux. control inputs *
F ON
FC
FO
TC
TO
Open
Closed
Open
Stop
Closed
Protecting/controlling
Feedback time
Execution time
Interlocking time
Inching mode
Load type
Positioner
Motor protection
Interlocking time active
Positioner closes
Positioner opens
FC
FO
TC
TO
Extended controlling
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-50 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Variants for slide control
The following table shows the 5 variants for slide control:

Table 4-17: Variants for slide control
Attention
The signals of the torque switches and the position switches must be wired
to the inputs of the basic units. Torque switches must be O-active, whereas
the position switches must be 1-active.
Variant
Switch off
TC
Torque
CLOSE
FC
End position
Closed
FO
End position
Open
TO
Torque
OPEN
Positioner 1
After reaching the end position FO
(OPEN) or FC (CLOSE).
— X X —
Positioner 2
After reaching the end position FO
(OPEN) or FC (CLOSE) AND
response of the associated torque
switch TO (OPEN) or TC (CLOSE)
X X X X
Positioner 3
After reaching the end position FO
(open). After reaching the end
position 'CLOSE', the respective
torque switch TC must respond after
the limit switch FC has responded.
X X X —
Positioner 4
After reaching the end position FC
(CLOSE). After reaching the end
position FO (OPEN), the respective
torque switch TO must also
respond after the limit switch FO
has responded.
— X X X
Positioner 5
After reaching the end position or the
torque. The actuator is either
monitored by the limit switches or by
the torque switches. The switches
are implemented as changeover
contacts and are checked for
antivalence. In the case of non-
antivalent feedback (e.g. FC=0 and
TC=0), SIMOCODE pro recognizes a
wire break and deactivates the
positioner with the fault message
"Fault - antivalence"
Antivalent active Antivalent active
Close Open
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-51
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Positioner Description
ON < ON< control command (close)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)
OFF Control command stop
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON > ON> control command (open)
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
F ON* Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
FC Auxiliary control input "Feedback CLOSE" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with the socket of an input which the limit
switch is wired to)
FO Auxiliary control input "Feedback OPEN" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with the socket of an input which the limit
switch is wired to)
TC Auxiliary control input "Torque CLOSE" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with the socket of an input which the torque
switch is wired to)
TO Auxiliary control input "Torque OPEN" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with the socket of an input which the torque
switch is wired to)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time Time until the limit position is reached.
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Interlocking time Range: 0 - 255 seconds
Table 4-18: Control function positioner settings
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-52 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4.2.15 "Soft Starter" Control Function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft
starter. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected to the PROFIBUS DP via
SIMOCODE pro.
Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 and QE4 internal contactor controls.
• Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the signal
"Feedback ON" is no longer issued, the QE1 contactor control is deactivated
3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft starter.
• With "reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the
soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). The inputs
(plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the
"Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.
Making internal assignments
You have to make the following assignments:
1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of
the network contactor
2) Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output with which the
"ON input" from the soft starter is to be activated
3) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output which gives the
acknowledgement signal of 20 ms to the soft starter
4) Assign the "ON>" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control
commands
5) Assign the input of SIMOCODE pro that is connected to the signaling output
"fault" of the soft starter to the input of the standard function module
"external fault 1"
6) The "Start-up end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the
outputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.
Attention
In order to avoid disconnections due to faults, the "Execution time"
parameter in SIMOCODE pro must be set at least to the smooth running
down time of the soft starter.
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-53
Schematic
Fig. 4-23: Schematic of "soft starter" control function ("Protecting/controlling" function block)
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Soft starter Description
OFF OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON > ON control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
Feedback ON* Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON"
(connection with arbitrary socket , usually with "Status - current
is flowing" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Feedback time Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time At least > smooth running down time.
Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Table 4-19: Soft starter settings
Control commands
Aux. control inputs
Displays
Status
QE1
F ON*
QLA
QLE>
QLS
OFF
ON >
OFF
ON >
Protecting/controlling
Feedback time
Execution time
Inching mode
Load type
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
QE3
Displays
20 ms.
QE4
ON
Soft starter
Motor protection
Network contactor
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-54 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
4.2.16 "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Control Function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter
including an additional reversing contactor. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are
connected to the PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro. With this control
function, SIMOCODE pro can control the motor direction of rotation
(forwards and backwards).
Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates QE1 and QE4 contactor control (clockwise,
i.e. forwards)
• Start with "ON <" activates QE2 and QE4 contactor control (counter-clockwise
i.e. backwards)
• Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the
"Feedback ON" signal is no longer issued, the QE1 / QE4 contactor control is
deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft
starter.
• With "reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the
soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations
to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of "control stations"). Thus, the
inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably
to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.
Switching the direction of rotation
It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal
"Status - ON>" or "Status - ON<" is no longer issued (motor was switched
off) AND after the interlocking time has expired:
• Via the OFF control command
• Directly, when the "Save switching command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same
time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed
via the interlocking time.
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-55
Making internal assignments
You have to make the following assignments:
1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of
the network contactor (right)
2) Assign the QE2 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of
the network contactor (left)
3) Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output with which the
"ON input" from the soft starter is to be activated
4) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output which gives the
acknowledgement signal of 20 ms to the soft starter
5) Assign the "ON>", "ON<" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control
commands
6) Assign the input of SIMOCODE pro that is connected to the signaling output
"fault" of the soft starter to the input of the standard function module
"external fault 1"
7) The "Start-up end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the
outputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.
Note
An additional digital module may be necessary for this control function.
Schematic
Fig. 4-24: Schematic of the "soft starter" with reversing contactor control function ("Protecting/
controlling" function block)
Interlocking time
active
QE4
Control commands
Feedbacks
Contactor controls
Displays
Status
QE2
F ON*
QLE<
QLA
QLE>
QLS
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON <
OFF
ON >
Protecting/controlling
Feedback time
Execution time
Interlocking time
Inching mode
Save switching
Load type
command
(ON >)
(OFF)
(Fault)
(ON <)
*Feedback ON
QE1
QE3
Right
Left
Soft starter with
Motor protection
20 ms.
(ON)
reversing contactor
Extended controlling
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-56 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter 4.2.2 "General
Settings and Definitions".
Soft starter with
reversing
contactor
Description
ON < ON< control command, counter-clockwise rotation
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON<" socket)
OFF OFF control command
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - OFF" socket)
ON > ON> control command, counter-clockwise rotation
(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled control command - ON>" socket)
Feedback ON* Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary
socket , usually with "Status - current is flowing" socket)
Non-maintained
command mode
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Save switching
command
• Deactivated (presetting)
• Activated
Load type You can choose between
• Motor
• Resistive load (see chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and Defini-
tions")
Feedback time Range: 0 - 25.5 seconds
Execution time At least > smooth running down time.
Range: 0 - 6553.5 seconds
Interlocking time Range: 0 - 255 seconds
Table 4-20: Soft starter with reversing contactor settings
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 4-57
4.3 Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls
and Status Signal for the Control Functions
Table 4-21: Active control stations, contactor & lamp controls and status signal
of the control functions
1
)

B
a
s
i
c

u
n
i
t

1
,

S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
C
2
)

B
a
s
i
c

u
n
i
t

2
,

S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
V
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
/

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
t
a
t
i
o
n
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
L
a
m
p

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
Q
L
E
<
<

(
O
N
<
<
)
Q
L
E
<

(
O
N
<
)
Q
L
A

(
O
F
F
)
Q
L
E
>

(
O
N
>
)
Q
L
E
>
>

(
O
N
>
>
)
S
t
a
t
u
s

s
i
g
n
a
l
O
N
<
<
O
N
<
O
F
F
O
N
>
O
N
>
>
Q
E
1
Q
E
2
Q
E
3
Q
E
4
Q
E
5
O
N
<
<
O
N
<
O
F
F
O
N
>
O
N
>
>
O
v
e
r
l
o
a
d

1
)
,
2
)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
c
t
i
v
e
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
D
i
r
e
c
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

1
)
,
2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
O
N
-
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
R
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

1
)
,
2
)
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
R
i
g
h
t
L
e
f
t
-
-
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

b
r
e
a
k
e
r

1
)
,
2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
O
N
i
m
p
u
l
s
e
-
O
F
F
i
m
p
u
l
s
e
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
t
a
r
-
d
e
l
t
a


s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
D
e
l
t
a
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
N
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
t
a
r
-
d
e
l
t
a

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

w
i
t
h

r
e
v
e
r
s
a
l

o
f

t
h
e

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

r
o
t
a
t
i
o
n

2
)
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
S
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
D
e
l
t
a
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
R
i
g
h
t
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
e
f
t
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
D
a
h
l
a
n
d
e
r

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
F
a
s
t
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
s
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
D
a
h
l
a
n
d
e
r

w
i
t
h

r
e
v
e
r
s
a
l

o
f

t
h
e

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

r
o
t
a
t
i
o
n

2
)
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
s
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
P
o
l
e
-
c
h
a
n
g
i
n
g

s
w
i
t
c
h

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
F
a
s
t
S
l
o
w
-
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
P
o
l
e
-
c
h
a
n
g
i
n
g

s
w
i
t
c
h

w
i
t
h

r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

t
h
e

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

r
o
t
a
t
i
o
n

2
)
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
-
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
V
a
l
v
e

2
)
-
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
O
p
e
n
-
O
p
e
n
-
-
-
-
-
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
O
p
e
n
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

1

2
)
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
O
p
e
n
C
l
o
s
e
d
-
-
-
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

2

2
)
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
O
p
e
n
C
l
o
s
e
d
-
-
-
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

3

2
)
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
O
p
e
n
C
l
o
s
e
d
-
-
-
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

4

2
)
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
O
p
e
n
C
l
o
s
e
d
-
-
-
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

5

2
)
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
O
p
e
n
C
l
o
s
e
d
-
-
-
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
O
N
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
R
e
s
e
t
O
N
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

w
i
t
h

r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

2
)
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
R
i
g
h
t
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
-
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
e
f
t
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
-
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
R
e
s
e
t
O
N
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
-
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
Motor Control
SIMOCODE pro
4-58 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 5-1

Monitoring Functions 5
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the monitoring functions
• Earth fault monitoring
• Current limits monitoring
• Voltage monitoring
• Power factor (cos-phi) monitoring
• Active power monitoring
• Monitoring of 0/4 - 20 mA
• Operation hours monitoring
• Analog temperature monitoring.
Like motor protection and motor control, the monitoring functions work "in
the background". All parameters of the monitoring functions are explained.
They can be active or not depending on the chosen control function.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• programmers
• commissioners
• service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• SIMOCODE pro
• motor protection, motor control
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• knowledge of electrical drive engineering.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device parameters > Monitoring functions.
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
5-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5.1 Earth fault Monitoring
5.1.1 Description
SIMOCODE pro measures and monitors all three phase currents. By evalua-
ting the summation current of the 3 current values, the motor feeder can be
monitored for a possible fault current/earth fault.
Internal earth fault monitoring via a current/voltage measuring module is
only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks which are
either grounded directly or grounded with low impedance.
The internal earth-fault monitoring can be activated through parameteriza-
tion. It covers 2 operating cases:
• Normal operating case up to 2 x I
e
. The effective operating current must be
smaller than twice the set current I
e
. Fault currents > 30 % of the set current
I
e
will be detected.
• Start-up or overload operation from 2 x I
e
. The effective operating current is
larger than twice the set current I
e
. Fault currents > 15 % of the effective
motor current will be detected.
Note
If you use internal earth-fault monitoring for star-delta circuits, this can lead
to false trippings. For delta operation, the summation current is non-zero
due to harmonics.
External earth fault monitoring via a summation current transformer and a
earth-fault module is normally used for networks which are grounded with
high impedance.
Rated fault currents of 0.3 A / 0.5 A / 1 A are evaluated by the 3UL22 sum-
mation current transformer. The response delay of the summation current
transformer is 300 ms - 500 ms. The response delay can be additionally
increased by parameterizing SIMOCODE pro accordingly.
A definable and delayable response to a detected earth fault can be parame-
terized.
A warning is triggered if the earth-fault limit is exceeded. You can set addi-
tional trippings through parameterization.
If the rated fault currents are exceeded, SIMOCODE pro reacts either:
• by turning off the contactor controls QE* or
• with a warning
depending on which configuration you set.
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 5-3
5.1.2 Internal Earth Fault Monitoring
Response
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to an internal earth
fault:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Figure 5-1: "Internal earth fault monitoring" function module
Table 5-1: "Internal earth fault monitoring" response
Activity
Unless it has been deactivated, this function is always active, independent
of whether the motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
Response Internal earth fault
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn X
Switch off X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
Earth fault monitoring
Response/delay
see Table 5-1
Signal -
Switching
off
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Internal earth fault
External earth fault
Current from
current or
current/voltage
"Internal earth fault"
measuring
module
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
5-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5.1.3 External Earth fault Monitoring (with Summation Current Transformer)
Response
Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro to an internal earth fault:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Figure 5-2: "Earth fault monitoring" function block
Table 5-2: "External earth-fault monitoring" response
1) Additional delay of the summation current transformer delay
Activity
Unless it has been deactivated, this function is always active, independent
of whether the motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
Response External earth fault
Deactivated -
Signal X (d)
Warn X
Switch off X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
1
)
Signal -
Switching
off
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Current from
summation current
transformer/
earth-fault module
Earth fault monitoring
Internal earth fault
External earth fault
Response/delay
see Table 5-2
"External earth fault"
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 5-5
5.2 Current Limits Monitoring
5.2.1 Description
The current limits monitoring function is used - independently of the over-
load protection - for process monitoring.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for
upper and lower current limits which can be freely chosen. The response of
SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level is reached can be freely
parameterized and delayed.
Current measuring modules or current/voltage measuring modules are used
to measure the motor current.
Figure 5-3: "Current limits" function block
Trip level: I>
1
)
Response when I>
Delay when I>
Warning level: I>
Response when I>
Delay when I>
Trip level: I<
2
)
Response when I<
Delay when I<
Warning level: I<
Response when I<
Delay when I<
Hysteresis
Event
Event
Event
See
Table 5-3
See
Table 5-4
See
Table 5-5
See
Table 5-6
Current limit values
- Trip level I>
Event
- Warning level I>
- Trip level I<
- Warning level I<
Switching
off
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Current I_max from
current measuring
(current or
current/voltage
measuring
module)
1)

Upper limit
2) Lower limit
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
5-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5.2.2 I> (Upper Limit)
Trip level, warning level
When monitoring current limits I> (upper limit), 2 different response levels,
I> (upper limit) trip level and I> (upper limit) warning level, can be paramete-
rized and monitored.
If the current of one or more phases exceeds the response level, the current
limit monitoring is activated.
Activity of the trip level and warning level
The trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is running and the
start-up procedure is finished, and there is no test position feedback (run+).
Response at trip level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is
overshot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Table 5-3: "Trip level" response for current limit monitoring I<
Response at warning level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning
level is overshot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Table 5-4: "Warning level" response for current limit monitoring I>
Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I< (upper limit):
Trip level: 0 up to 1,020% of Ie in 4% increments
Warning level: 0 up to 1,020% of Ie in 4% increments
Response Trip level
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn -
Switch off X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
Response Warning level:
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn X
Switch off -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the response level value in 1% increments
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 5-7
5.2.3 I< (Lower Limit)
Trip level, warning level
When monitoring current limits I< (lower limit), 2 different response levels
(trip level / warning level) can be parameterized and monitored. If the current
of the phases (I
max
)falls below the response level, the current limit monito-
ring is activated.
Activity of the trip level and warning level
The trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is running and the
start-up procedure is finished, and there is no test position feedback (run+).
Response at trip level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is
undershot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Table 5-5: "Trip level" response for current limit monitoring I<
Response at warning level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning
level is undershot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Table 5-6: "Warning level" response for current limit monitoring I<
Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I< (lower limit):
Trip level: 0 to 1,020% of Ie in 4% increments
Warning level: 0 to 1,020% of Ie in 4% increments
Response Trip level
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn -
Switch off X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
Response Warning level:
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn X
Switch off -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
Hysteresis 0 to 15% of response level value in 1% increments
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
5-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5.3 Voltage Monitoring
Description
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a
three-phase network or a one-phase network for freely selectable limits.
The response of SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level is reached
can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Current/voltage measuring modules are used to measure the voltage. This
is based on the minimal voltage of all voltages U
min
.
Figure 5-4: "Voltage monitoring" function block
Trip level, warning level
You can parameterize 2 different response levels (trip level/ warning level).
If the voltage of one or more phases falls below the response level or
warning level, the voltage monitoring is activated.
Trip level: 0 - 2,040 V in 8 V increments
Warning level: 0 - 2,040 V in 8 V increments
Event
- Warning level I<
Voltage U
min
Trip level: U<
Trip level activity
Response at trip level
Trip delay
Hysteresis
1
)
Event
See
Table 5-7
Voltage monitoring
- Trip level I<
Switching
off
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
via
current/voltage
measuring module
Warning level: U<
Warning level activity
Response at warning level
Warning delay
See
Table 5-8
1)Hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi), power
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 5-9
Activity of the trip level and warning level
Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning
level is to take effect:
Response at trip level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the trip level is
undershot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Table 5-7: "Trip level" response for voltage monitoring
Response at warning level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning
level is undershot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Table 5-8: "Warning level" response for voltage monitoring
Hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi), power
Here you can set the hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi) and
power:
• Always, except in the case of TPF
(on+) (d)
Trip level/warning level always takes effect,
regardless of whether the motor is running or
stationary;
Exception: 'TPF', i.e. motor feeder is in test
position.
• When the motor is on, except in the
case of TPF (run)
Trip level/warning level only takes effect if the
motor is on and not in the test position
Response Trip level
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn -
Switch off X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
Response Warning level
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn X
Switch off -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
Hysteresis for voltage, power factor
(cos phi), power
0 to 15% of the response level value
in 1% increments
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
5-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5.4 Power Factor (cos phi) Monitoring
Description
Power factor (cos phi) monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive
loads. The main field of application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or
3-phase networks, whose loads vary greatly. The measuring principle for the
power factor (cos phi) is based on the evaluation of the phase displacement
between voltage and current in one phase. If the set trip or warning level is
undershot, a signal is generated or the motor is switched off depending on
the setting.
Figure 5-5: "Power factor (cos phi) monitoring" function block
Trip level, warning level
You can parameterize 2 different response levels (trip level/warning level) for
power factor (cos phi) monitoring.
Activity of the trip level and warning level
The trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is running and the
start-up procedure is finished, and there is no test position feedback (run+).
Trip level: 0 to 100%
Warning level: 0 to 100%
Trip level
Response
Delay
Warning level
Response
Delay
Event
See
Table 5-9
See
Table 5-10
Power factor (cos phi) monitoring
- Trip level power factor
Event
- Warning level power factor
Switching
off
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Power factor (cos phi)
from current/voltage
measuring
Hysteresis
1
)
1) Hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi), power
(see "Voltage monitoring" function block)
module
(cos phi) <
(cos phi) <
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 5-11
Response at trip level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the set trip
level is undershot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Table 5-9: "Trip level" response for power factor (cos phi) monitoring
Response at warning level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning
level is undershot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Table 5-10: "Warning level" response for power factor (cos phi) monitoring
Response Trip level
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn -
Switch off X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
Response Warning level
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn X
Switch off -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
5-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5.5 Active Power Monitoring
Description
SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor the state of a device or system via
the active power. For example, by monitoring the active power of a pump
motor, conclusions can be drawn from the active power level about the flow
rate or fluid fill levels.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for
upper and lower current limits which can be freely chosen. The response of
SIMOCODE pro when a pre-warning or trip level is reached can be freely
parameterized and delayed.
Current/voltage measuring modules are used to measure the active power.
Figure 5-6: "Power monitoring" function block
Event
Event
Event
- Trip level P>
Event
- Warning level P>
- Trip level P<
- Warning level P<
Trip level: P>
1
)
Response when P>
Delay when P>
Warning level: P>
Response when P>
Delay when P>
Trip level: P<
2
)
Response when P<
Delay when P<
Warning level: P<
Response when P<
Delay when P<
See
Table 5-11
See
Table 5-12
See
Table 5-11
See
Table 5-12
Power monitoring Switching
off
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Active power from
current/voltage
measuring module
Hysteresis
3
)
1) Upper limit
2) Lower limit
3) Hysteresis for voltage, power factor (cos phi), power
(see "Voltage monitoring" function block)
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 5-13
Trip level, warning level
You can parameterize 2 different response levels (trip level/warning level) for
upper and lower limits for active power monitoring.
Activity of the trip level and warning level
The trip level/warning level only takes effect if the motor is running and the
start-up procedure is finished, and there is no test position feedback (run+).
Response when trip level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the set trip
level is overshot or undershot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Table 5-11: "Trip level" response for active power monitoring
Response when warning level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the warning
level is undershot or overshot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Table 5-12: "Warning level" response for active power monitoring
Trip level
• P> (upper limit)
• P< (lower limit)
0.000 - 4294967.295 kW
Warning level:
• P> (upper limit)
• P< (lower limit)
0.000 - 4294967.295 kW
Response Trip level
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn -
Switch off X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
Response Warning level
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn X
Switch off -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
5-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5.6 0/4 A-20 mA Signal Monitoring
Description
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a
measuring transducer (normalized output signal 0/4-20 mA). The analog
signals are fed to the "0/4-20 mA" function block via the analog module.
Figure 5-7: "0/4-20 mA signal monitoring" function block
Trip level 0/4-20 mA >
Trip level activity
Response at trip level
Trip delay
Event
See
Table 5-13
0/4-20 mA signal monitoring
Trip level
Switching
off
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Analog input 1 of the
Marking trip level
Warning level 0/4-20 mA >
Warning level activity
Response at warning level
Warning delay
See
Table 5-14
Marking Warning Level
0/4 A -20 mA >
Event
Warning level
0/4 A -20 mA >
Trip level 0/4-20 mA <
Trip Level activity
Response at trip level
Trip delay
Event
See
Table 5-13
Trip level
Marking trip level
Warning level 0/4-20 mA <
Warning level activity
Response at warning level
Warning delay
See
Table 5-14
Marking warning level
0/4 A -20 mA <
Event
Warning level
0/4 A -20 mA <
analog module
(AM input 1)
Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 5-15
Trip level, warning level
You can parameterize 2 different response levels (trip level/warning level) for
upper and lower limits for 0/4-20 mA signal monitoring.
Activity of the trip level and warning level
Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level/warning
level is to take effect:
Response when trip level 0/4-20 mA> (upper limit), 0/4-20 mA< (lower limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the set trip
level is undershot or overshot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes".
Table 5-13: "Trip level" response for 0/4-20 mA signal monitoring
Trip level
• 0/4-20>(upper limit)
• 0/4-20<(lower limit)
0.0 - 23.6 mA
Warning level:
• 0/4-20>(upper limit)
• 0/4-20<(lower limit)
0.0 - 23.6 mA
• Always (on) (d) Trip level/warning level always takes effect,
regardless of whether the motor is running or
stationary
• Always, except in the case of TPF
(on+) (d)
Trip level/warning level always takes effect,
regardless of whether the motor is running or
stationary with the exception of "TPF", i.e.
motor feeder is in test position
• When the motor is on, except in the
case of TPF (run)
Trip level/warning level only takes effect if the
motor is on and not in the test position
• When the motor is on, except in the
case of TPF, with start hiding (run+)
The trip level/warning level only takes effect if
the motor is running and the start-up proce-
dure is finished, and there is no test position
feedback (TPF)
Response Trip level
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn -
Switch off X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
5-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Response when warning level 0/4-20 mA> (upper limit), 0/4-20 mA< (lower limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the set
warning level is undershot or overshot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter
"Important Notes".
Table 5-14: "Warning level" response for 0/4-20 mA signal monitoring
Marking
Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g. "0/4-20>"; Range: up to
10 characters.
Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA signal
Here you can set the fluctuation range for the analog signal:
Note
Free limit monitors can, for example, be used to monitor a second process
variable via input 2 of the analog module.
Response Warning level
Deactivated X (d)
Signal X
Warn X
Switch off -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
Hysteresis for the analog signal 0 to 15% in 1% increments
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 5-17
5.7 Operation Monitoring
5.7.1 Description
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor
and limit the number of motor start-ups in a defined time frame. This avoids
plant downtimes due to failed motors because they were either running too
long (wear-out) or they were stopped for too long a period of time.
For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal can be issued
which can indicate that maintenance on the relevant motor is necessary or
even that the motor should be replaced.
After replacing the motor, the operating hours and stop times can be reset.
In order to avoid excessive thermal strain on a motor and its premature
aging, the number of motor start-ups in a selected time frame can be
limited. The number of starts still possible is available for further processing
in SIMOCODE pro.
The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings.
Note
All signals can be processed internally (limits) and/or registered by the bus..
Figure 5-8: "Operation monitoring" function block
Level
Response
Event
Control
function
Operating hours
Level
Response
Event - Stop time >
Stop time
Number of starts
Permissible starts
Time range for starts
Response at overshoot
Response at pre-warning
Interlocking time
Event
Operating hours >
- Number of motor starts >
- Just one start possible
See
Table 5-15
See
Table 5-15
See
Table 5-15
See
Table 5-15
- No start permitted
Switching
off
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
Operation monitoring
Permissible starts
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
5-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Response
Table 5-15: "Operation monitoring" response
5.7.2 Operating Hours Monitoring
The operating hours monitoring function offers the option of measuring the
operating hours (service life) of a motor and if necessary, generating mainte-
nance prompts for the motor in good time.
Response level
If the operating hours exceed the set response level, the monitoring
function is activated.
Activity
Unless it has been deactivated, this function is always active, independent
of whether the motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
Response
You can set the response at overshoot here.
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes" and Table 5-15.
5.7.3 Stop Time Monitoring
In system parts for important processes, dual drives are often in operation
(A and B drives). It must be assured here that these drives are always alter-
nately run to avoid long stop times and reduce the risk of non-availability.
The stop time monitoring function can be used, for example, to issue a
warning which causes the other motor not presently in operation to be con-
nected.
Response level
The length of the stop time is set here. The monitoring function is activated
when this stop time interval is exceeded.
Response Operating
hours monito-
ring - level
Stop time
monitoring -
level
Number of
starts
response at
overshoot
level
Number of
start
pre-warnings
Deactivated X (d) X (d) X (d) X (d)
Signal X X X X
Warn X X X X
Switch off - - X -
Response level: 0 to 1,193,046 hours
Response level: 0 to 65,535 hours
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 5-19
Activity
Unless it has been deactivated, this function is always active, independent
of whether the motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
Response
Here you can determine the response when the permissible stop time is
exceeded:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes" and Table 5-15.
5.7.4 Monitoring the Number of Starts
The function for monitoring the number of starts is used to protect system
parts (motor, switching devices like e.g. soft starters, and converters)
against too many impermissible start processes inside a parameterizable
time frame and thus to prevent damage from occurring. This is especially
useful for start-up or manual control.
The following schematic shows the principle of the function for monitoring
the number of starts.
Figure 5-9: Monitoring the number of starts
Permissible starts
The maximum number of starts is set here. With the first start, the time
interval "Time range for starts" starts to run. After the second to the last per-
missible start has been executed, a pre-warning "Another start permitted" is
issued.
Time range for starts
The time frame of the start process is set here. The maximum number of
starts is only available again after the parameterizable time range for starts
has ended. The available starts are shown by the analog value "Permissible
starts - actual value".
Activity
Unless it has been deactivated, this function is always active, independent
of whether the motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
Permissible starts 1 to 255
Time range for starts 0 to 65,535 seconds
Time frame
1. Start within the time frame
t
Example:
3 starts allowed
Pre-warning Overshooting
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
5-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Response at Overshoot
Here you can set the response to be carried out when the permissible num-
ber of starts within the time range for starts have been overshot:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes" and Table 5-15.
Response at Pre-Warning
Here you can set the response to be carried out after the second to the last
start:
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
chapter "Important Notes" and Table 5-15.
Interlocking time
If a new start command is issued within the time frame after the last per-
missible start has been carried out, this new start command will no longer
be executed by the setting "Response at Overshoot- switching off". The
"Fault - number of starts >" and the set interlocking time is activated.
Interlocking time 0 to 65,535 seconds
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 5-21
5.8 Analog Temperature Monitoring
Schematic and characteristic curve
Up to three analog temperature sensors, such as NTC, KTY 83/84, PT100,
PT1000, can be used for temperature monitoring of, for example, the motor
windings, the motor bearings, the coolant and the gearbox temperature.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring for overtemperature: sepa-
rate response levels can be set for the warning temperature and the switch
off temperature.
Temperature monitoring is based on the highest temperature present in all
the sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module.
Figure 5-10: "Temperature monitoring" function block
Settings
Temperature Description
Trip level T> -273 °C - 65,262 °C
Response at trip level
T >
Set response when the temperature is overshot (see the follo-
wing table and chapter "Important Notes")
Marking: Trip level T > No parameters. Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g.
"Temperature >"; Range: up to 10 characters
Warning level T > -273 °C -65,262 °C
Response warning-
level T >
Set response when the temperature is overshot (see the follo-
wing table and chapter "Important Notes")
Marking: Warning
level T >
No parameters. Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g.
"Temperature >"; Range: up to 10 characters
Hysteresis 0 - 255 °C in 1 °C increments
Table 5-16: Temperature monitoring settings
Temperature monitoring
Trip level (2)
Warning level (1)
Hysteresis
QE1
QE2
QE3
QE4
QE5
- Temperature module
Switching
off
Response at trip level
Response at warning level
See
Tables
(Marking)
(Marking)
Event
Trip level T>
- Temperature module
Warning level T>
Max. temperature of all
the sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature
"Response"
See
Tables
"Response"
module
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
5-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Trip level activity and warning level activity
The trip level/warning level always takes effect, independent of whether the
motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
Response
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter
"Important Notes".
• Overtemperature: Here you can choose how SIMOCODE pro should respond
if the temperature overshoots the warning level/trip level.
Table 5-17: "Overtemperature" response
Attention
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to "switch
off"!
Note
The sensor type, the number of measuring circuits in use and the response
to a sensor fault must be set in the "Temperature module inputs
(TM inputs)" function block when temperature monitoring is used.
Response Warning limit T> Trip level T>
Deactivated X -
Signal X X
Warn X (d) -
Switch off - X (d)
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 5-23
Time
Trip level >
Warning level >
Trip level <
Warning level <
Hysteresis *)
Hysteresis *)
Hysteresis *)
Hysteresis *)
0
1
Time
0
1
**)
Time
0
1
**)
Time
0
1
Time
**)
Signaling
Trip level >
Signaling
Warning level <
Signaling
Trip level <
Signaling
Warning level >
**) The trip and warning level events can also be delayed individually.
Measured
value
**)
*)The hystereses are always based on the respectively set response level
(exception: temperature monitoring)
5.9 Hysteresis for Monitoring Functions
The following diagram shows the function of the hysteresis with the monito-
ring functions:
Figure 5-11: The operating principle of hysteresis for the monitoring function
Monitoring Functions
SIMOCODE pro
5-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 6-1

Outputs 6
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the outputs of
SIMOCODE pro:
• Relay outputs on the basic unit and the digital modules
• Analog module output
• Light-emitting diodes of the operator panel
• Signaling data on the PROFIBUS DP.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• planners and configurators
• programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• PROFIBUS DP.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Further function blocks > Outputs.
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6.1 Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro has different types of outputs. These are represented by
the different function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. They are the external inter-
faces of SIMOCODE pro. Within SIMOCODE pro, the outputs are represen-
ted as plugs on the corresponding function blocks and can be assigned via
connections to arbitrary functions or signals.
The outputs include, for example:
• Output terminals located on the outside of the basic units and digital
modules
• LED on the operator panel for visualizing the operating state or different stati
• Outputs to PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the different
types of outputs:
Figure 6-1: General display of the different types of outputs
SIMOCODE pro
DP PROFIBUS DP
LED operator panel
Output
Output
Output
Output terminals
SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs
Plugs
Plugs
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 6-3
Extent and application
Outputs are used, e.g. for controlling motor contactors, displaying the sta-
tus or signaling via PROFIBUS DP. The system provides different types of
outputs depending on the device series and the expansion modules in use:
Table 6-1: Outputs
SIMOCODE
Outputs pro C (BU1) pro V(GG2)
Basic unit BU (BU outputs) ✓ ✓
Operator panel LED (BU LED) ✓ ✓
Digital module 1 outputs (DM1 outputs) — ✓
Digital module 2 outputs (DM2 outputs) — ✓
Analog module output (AM output) — ✓
Acyclic signaling data (Acyclic Send) ✓ ✓
Cyclic signaling data (Cyclic Send) ✓ ✓
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6.2 Basic Unit Outputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU - outputs" function block with 3 relay outputs. You
can e.g. switch contactors or lamps via the relay outputs. For this, the inputs
(plugs) of the function block must be connected to the corresponding sok-
kets (typically the contactor controls QE. of the control function). The "BU -
outputs" function block consists of
• 3 plugs, corresponding to the relay outputs Out1 to Out3
• 3 relays
• Output terminals.
In total there is:
– 1 "BU - outputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU - outputs" function block:
Figure 6-2: "BU - outputs" function block
Application examples
• Controlling the main contactor in the motor feeder:
You can e.g. define which relay output is used for controlling the motor con-
tactor in the motor feeder. For this, connect the desired relay output with the
corresponding "QE." contactor control.
• Controlling lamps for displaying the operating states:
You can e.g. define which relay outputs are used for controlling lamps/
LEDs displaying the operating states of the motor (fault, ON, OFF, fast,
slow...).
For this, connect the desired relay output to the corresponding "QE." con-
tactor control. These are specially designed for controlling lamps and
LEDs:
The "QL..." lamp controls also automatically signal to the status displays
via a 2 Hz flashing frequency:
– Test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing)
– Unacknowledged fault case (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
– Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the
1
2
BU - output
3
1
2
3
6
7
Out1
Out2
Out3
Output terminals
Terminal numbers
SIMOCODE pro
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 6-5
relay outputs
– Lamp test: all QL outputs are activated for approx. 2s.
Settings
BU outputs Description
Outputs 1 to 3 Controls the "BU- outputs" function block from an arbitrary signal
(optional sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc. (usually from the QE contactor controls)
Table 6-2: BU output settings
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6.3 Operator Panel LEDs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has an "OP - LED" function block to control the 7 freely
usable 7 LEDs. The LEDs are on the operator panel and can be used for arbi-
trary status displays. For this, the inputs (plugs) of the "OP - LED" function
block must be connected to the corresponding sockets (e.g. with the sok-
kets for the status signals of the control function).
Note
The "OP - LED" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is
connected and parameterized in the device configuration!
The "OP - LED" function block contains
• 4 plugs, "OP - LED green 1" to "OP - LED green 4", corresponding to the green
LEDs. The green LEDs are optically/logically assigned to the buttons of the
operator panel. They usually display the feedback of the motor operating state
• 3 plugs, "OP - LED yellow 1" to "OP - LED yellow 3", corresponding to the yel-
low LEDs
• 4 green LEDs
• 3 yellow LEDs
In total there is:
– 1 "OP - LED" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Operator panel LEDs
The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with the
LEDs:
Figure 6-3: LEDs of the operator panel
TEST/
RESET
DEVICE BUS GEN. FAULT
Green 1 Green 2 Green 3 Green 4
Yellow 1 Yellow 2 Yellow 3
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 6-7
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP - LED" function block:
Figure 6-4: Schematic of the "OP - LED" function block
Application examples
• Displaying operating states:
You can e.g. define which LEDs are to be activated for displaying the motor
operating states (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...).
For this, connect the desired LED to the corresponding "QL." lamp control of
the control function.
• Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the yellow
LEDs.
Settings
OP LED Description
Green 1 - Green 4 Controls the "OP - LED" function block from an arbitrary signal
(arbitrary sockets , e.g. feedback operating state "motor")
Yellow 1 - Yellow 3 Controls the "OP - LED" function block from an arbitrary signal
(arbitrary sockets , e.g. displays for status, events, faults)
Table 6-3: OP LED settings
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Yellow 3
Green 1
Green 2
Green 3
Green 4
OP - LED
LED
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6.4 Digital Module Outputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has 2 function blocks: "DM1 - outputs" and "DM2 - outputs",
with 2 relay outputs each. You can e.g. switch contactors or lamps via the
relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs of the "DM - outputs" function
blocks) must be connected to the corresponding sockets (e.g. of the control
function).
Note
Function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM)
are connected and parameterized in the device configuration!
Each function block contains
• 2 plugs, corresponding to the relay outputs Out1, Out2
• 2 relays
• Output terminals.
In total there is
– 1 "DM1 - outputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.
– 1 "DM2 - outputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM - outputs" function blocks:
Figure 6-5: Schematic of the "DM1 - outputs"/"DM2 - outputs" function block
Application examples
• Controlling the motor contactor in the motor feeder:
You can e.g. define which relay output is to be used for controlling the main
contactor in the motor feeder.
For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding "QE." con-
tactor control of the control function.
• Controlling lamps for displaying the operating states:
You can e.g. define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the
lamps/LEDs displaying the motor operating states (fault, ON, OFF, fast,
slow ...).
For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding "QL..." lamp
control of the control function.
• Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay
outputs.
1
2
DM1 - outputs
Out1
Out2
1
2
DM2 - outputs
Out1
Out2
Output terminals Output terminals
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 6-9
Settings
DM1 / DM2 output
settings
Description
Outputs 1 to 2 Controls the "DM1 outputs" and "DM2 outputs" function blocks
from an arbitrary signal , e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc. (usually from the QE contactor controls)
Table 6-4: "DM1/DM2 - outputs" settings
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6.5 Analog Module Output
Description
You can expand the basic unit 2 by an analog output using the analog
module. The corresponding function block allows every analog value (2 byte/
1 word) in SIMOCODE pro to be output as a 0/4 A - 20 mA signal, for
example, on a pointer instrument which is connected. By activating the
function block via the "Assigned analog output value" plug with an arbitrary
integer value between 0 and 27,648, an equivalent analog signal of
0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA is outputted to the output terminals of the analog
module..
Note
The "AM - output" function block can only be used if the analog module (AM)
is connected and parameterized in the device configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM - output" function block:
Figure 6-6: Schematic of the "AM - output" function block
Settings
Table 6-5: "AM - output" settings
Signal/value Range
Assigned analog output value Arbitrary value (1 word/2 bytes) in
SIMOCODE pro
Output signal 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Start value range 0 - 65,535
End value range 0 - 65,535
Out+
AM - output
Out+
Assigned
Start value range
End value range
Output signal
analog output value
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 6-11
Application examples
1) Output of the effective motor current - over the entire motor current
range
The motor current of a motor is within the range of 0 to 8 A.
The nominal current I
N
of the motor at the rated load is 2 A.
The set current I
e
parameterized in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the nomi-
nal current I
N
(2 A). In SIMOCODE pro, the representation of the effective
phase currents or of the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3,
max. current I_max) is according to the range chosen proportional to the
parameterized set current I
e
:
– 0 A motor current corresponds to 0 % of I
e
– 8 A motor current corresponds to 400 % of I
e
– The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is
1 % (see measured values data record 94).
Figure 6-7: Application example (output of the motor current - entire range)
As a result,
– the "Start value range" that can be chosen is: 0
– the "End value range" that can be chosen is: 400.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:
– 0 % motor current corresponds to: 0 mA on the analog module output
– 400 % motor current corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 - 20 mA:
– 0 % motor current corresponds to: 4 mA on the analog module output
– 400 % motor current corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output.
8 A / 400
t [s]
motor curent lmax
[lmax / % of le])
2 A (lN) / 100
0
entire range
motor current (0 ... 400 % of le)
lN = le = 2 A
Max. current I_max
Out+
AM - output
Out+
Start value range
End value range
Output signal
0
400
0-20 mA
Assigned
analog output value
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
2) Output of the effective motor current - partial range (overload range)
of the motor current only
The motor current of a motor is within the range of 0 to 8 A.
The nominal current I
N
of the motor at the rated load is 2 A.
The set current I
e
parameterized in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the nomi-
nal current I
N
(2 A). However, only the overload range (2 A - 8 A) is to be dis-
played on a pointer instrument via the analog module output.
In SIMOCODE pro, the representation of the effective phase currents or of
the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max) is accor-
ding to the range chosen proportional to the parameterized set current I
e
:
– 2 A motor current corresponds to 100 % of I
e
– 8 A motor current corresponds to 400 % of I
e
– The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is
1 % (see measured values data record 94).
Figure 6-8: Application example: output of the motor current - overload range
As a result
– the "Start value range" that can be chosen is: 100
– the "End value range" that can be chosen is: 400.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:
– 100 % motor current corresponds to: 0 mA on the analog module output
– 400 % motor current corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 - 20 mA:
– 100 % motor current corresponds to: 4 mA on the analog module output
– 400 % motor current corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output
8 A / 400
t [s]
motor current lmax
[lmax / % of le])
2 A (lN) / 100
0
Partial range of the motor current
Overload range (100 ... 400 % of le)
lN = le = 2 A
Max. current I_max
Out+
AM - output
Out+
Start value range
End value range
Output signal
100
400
0-20 mA
Assigned
analog output value
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 6-13
3) Cyclic output of an analog value from the automation system via the
PROFIBUS
It is possible to cyclically transmit a word (2 bytes) from the automation
system to SIMOCODE pro via the PROFIBUS. An arbitrary value can be out-
putted as a 0/4 to 20 mA signal by directly connecting this cyclic control
word from PROFIBUS to the analog module output. If the transmitted value
is in S7 Format (0 to 27648), this should be taken into consideration for the
parameterization:
As a result,
– the "Start value range" that can be chosen is: 0
– the "End value range" that can be chosen is: 27648.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 - 20 mA:
– 0 corresponds to: 0 mA on the analog module output
– 27648 corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 - 20 mA:
– 0 corresponds to: 4 mA on the analog module output
– 27648 corresponds to: 20 mA on the analog module output.
Zyklisch Steuern 2/3
Assigned
analog output value
(1 cycl. word from the PLC)
Out+
AM - output
Out+
Start value range
End value range
Output signal
0
27648
0-20 mA
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6.6 Cyclic Send
Description
The "Cyclic signaling" function blocks are used to determine which informa-
tion is given cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.
The "Cyclic signaling" function blocks consists of
• 8 bits each (2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• 4 words (= 8 bytes, byte 2 to byte 9 for four analog values, freely parame-
terizable)
• 1 output each to the PROFIBUS DP.
In total there are
– 3 "Cyclic Send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/9).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Send" function blocks:
Figure 6-9: Schematic of the "Cyclic Send" function block
Cyclic Send 2/9
DP
Byte 4/5
Byte 6/7
Byte 8/9
Byte 2/3
To the
PROFIBUS DP
Basic type 1 (for GG2)
Cyclic Send 2/9 with 4 word (8 bytes)
for up to four analog values
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Cyclic Send
DP to PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0
Byte 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Cyclic Send
DP to PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0
Byte 1
Cyclic Send 2/9
DP
To the
PROFIBUS DP
Byte 2/3
Basic type 2 (for GG2)
Basic type 1 (for GG2)
Basic type 2 (for GG2)
Basic type 1 (for GG2)
Basic type 2 (for GG2)
Cyclic Send 0 with 8 Bits
Cyclic Send 1 with 8 Bits
for binary Information
for binary information
Cyclic Send 2/3 with 1 word (2 bytes)
for one analog value
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 6-15
Cyclic services
Cyclic send data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between the DP
master and the DP slave. In this case, the DP master sends the cyclic con-
trol data to SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic
send data to the DP master.
Settings
Cyclic signaling
data
Description
Byte 0 to 1
Bit 0 to bit 7
Basic types 1, 2
Controls the bits with arbitrary signals
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, signaling data, etc.)
Byte 2/3
Basic types 1, 2
Controls 1 word (2 bytes) with arbitrary analog values
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling time, actual value of
timers, etc.)
Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9
Basic type 1
Controls 4 words (8 bytes) with arbitrary analog values
(arbitrary sockets
Table 6-6: Cyclic Send data settings
Byte 0 of the signaling data is already preset. Byte 2/3 is preset with the
max. current!
For this, see also chapter 12.2 "Transmitting Data".
Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
6-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
6.7 Acyclic Send
Description
In addition to "Cyclic Send", it is also possible to transmit an additional 16
bits of information to the PLC/PC via acyclic services.
The "Cyclic Send" function block is used to determine which information is
issued cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. For this, the
inputs (plugs) of the function blocks must be connected to the correspon-
ding sockets.
The "Cyclic Send" function block consists of
• 8 bits each (2 byte, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• 1 output each to the PROFIBUS DP.
In total there are
• 2 "Acyclic Send" function blocks for the BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic signaling" function blocks:
Figure 6-10: Schematic of the "Acyclic signaling" function block
Acyclic services
Acyclic signaling data is only transmitted on request.
The information (2 bytes) is in data record 203.
This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) which supports
the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.
Settings
Acyclic Send data Description
Byte 0 to 1
Bit 0 to bit 7
Controls the bits with arbitrary signals
(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, signaling data, state infor-
mation, fault signals, etc.)
Table 6-7: Acyclic Send data settings
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Acyclic Send
DP to PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0
Byte 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Acyclic Send
DP to PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0
Byte 1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 7-1

Inputs 7
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the inputs of SIMOCODE pro.
The inputs include:
• Binary inputs on the basic units and digital modules
• Operator panel buttons
• Temperature module inputs
• Analog module inputs
• Control data from PROFIBUS DP.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• planners and configurators
• programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device parameters > Inputs.
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7.1 Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro has different inputs. These are represented by the different
function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. They are the external interfaces of
SIMOCODE pro. Within SIMOCODE pro, these inputs are represented as
sockets on the corresponding function blocks and can be assigned via con-
nections to arbitrary functions. The inputs can be:
• Input terminals , located on the outside of the basic units and digital
modules
• Buttons on the operator panel (1 button test/reset, 4 freely parameterizable
buttons) and basic units (1 button test/reset)
• Temperature module inputs
• Analog module inputs
• Inputs from PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the different
types of inputs:
Figure 7-1: General representation of the input types
SIMOCODE pro
DP PROFIBUS DP
Input
Input
Input
Input terminals
SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
Buttons
- Control commands
- Test/reset
Sockets
Sockets
Sockets
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 7-3
Extent and application
Inputs are used, for example, for inputting external signals e.g. via pushbut-
tons, key-operated switches, etc. These external signals are processed fur-
ther internally via corresponding connections. The system provides different
inputs, depending on the device series:
SIMOCODE
Inputs pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Basic unit inputs (BU inputs) ✓ ✓
Operator panel buttons (OP buttons) ✓ ✓
Digital module 1 - inputs (DM1 inputs) — ✓
Digital module 2 - inputs (DM2 inputs) — ✓
Temperature module inputs (TM inputs) — ✓
Analog module inputs (AM inputs) — ✓
Acyclic Receive ✓ ✓
Cyclic Receive ✓ ✓
Table 7-1: Inputs
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7.2 Basic Unit Inputs
Description
The basic unit has a function block "BU - inputs" function block with 4 grou-
ped binary inputs. You can connect e.g. the buttons for a local control sta-
tion to the inputs. These signals can be used for further processing in
SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting the sockets of the "BU - inputs"
function block.
The "BU - inputs" function block consists of
• Input terminals , located on the outside of the basic unit, corresponding
to the sockets "BU - input 1" to "BU - input 4"
• Sockets in SIMOCODE pro which can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the
"control stations" function block
• A socket for the "TEST/RESET" button:
The function of the "test/reset" button is generally dependent on the opera-
ting status of the device:
- Reset function for the acknowledgement of faults
- Test function for carrying out device tests.
In addition, other functions can be assigned to the "TEST/RESET" button
(e.g. operation of the memory module, addressing plug).
For this, see also chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset".
In total there is:
– 1 "BU - inputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU - inputs" function block:
Figure 7-2: Schematic of the "BU - inputs" function block
Basic unit (BU)
9
10
4
5
BU - inputs
1
2
3
4
Terminal
numbers
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
BU - test/reset button
8
Taste
Test/reset
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 7-5
Application examples
The inputs can be used, for example, to connect the start and stop buttons
of the local control station, which can then be assigned to the "local control"
internal control station.
Via the corresponding assignments, the input signals can be used to acti-
vate, for example, function blocks such as "Reset" or "External fault".
Supplying the inputs
See chapter 1.7.1 "Basic Units (BU)".
Settings
Basic unit Description
Delay Inputs If necessary, you can set a delay time for the inputs.
Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms (default setting: 16 ms).
Table 7-2: "BU - inputs" settings
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7.3 Operator Panel Buttons
Description
The operator panel contains the buttons 1 to 4 and the "TEST/RESET"
button. Correspondingly, the "OP - buttons" function block has 5 available
sockets in SIMOCODE pro.
Note
The "OP - LED" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is
connected and parameterized in the device configuration!
• Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4:
The buttons 1 to 4 are usually intended for inputting control commands for
the motor feeder. Control commands can be:
– motor on (ON>), motor off (OFF) for a direct starter
– motor left (ON<), motor off (OFF), motor right (ON>) for a reversing
starter
– motor slow (ON>), motor fast (ON>>), motor off (OFF) for a Dahlander
circuit.
However, the buttons 1 to 4 are not rigidly assigned to the above mentio-
ned control commands and can also be assigned to other functions by
internally connecting the corresponding sockets of the function block in
SIMOCODE pro.
• Operator panel, "TEST/RESET" button
The function of the "TEST/RESET" button is generally assigned to fixed
functions:
– Reset function for the acknowledgement of faults
– Test function for carrying out device tests.
– Operation of the memory module or the addressing plug
Despite this, the status of the "TEST/RESET" button can be read from the
corresponding socket of the function block and can be assigned to further
functions in SIMOCODE pro.
For this, see also chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset".
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 7-7
Operating panel buttons
The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with but-
tons:
Figure 7-3: Operator panel buttons
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP - buttons" function block:
Figure 7-4: Schematic of the "OP - buttons" function block
DEVICE BUS GEN. FAULT
Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4
TEST/
RESET
"TEST/RESET" button
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Button 4
Button
TEST/RESET
OP - button 1
OP - button 2
OP - button 3
OP - button 4
OP - Test/Reset button
OP - buttons
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7.4 Digital Module Inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM - inputs" function blocks with 4 grouped binary
inputs. You can connect e.g. the buttons for a local control station to the
inputs. These signals can be used for further processing in SIMOCODE pro
by internally wiring the of the sockets of the "DM - inputs" function blocks.
Note
The "DM - inputs" function block can only be used if the corresponding digi-
tal module (DM) is connected and parameterized in the device configura-
tion!
Every "DM - inputs" function block consists of
• Input terminals , located on the outside of the digital module, correspon-
ding to the sockets "DM - input 1" to "DM - input 4"
• Sockets in SIMOCODE pro which can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the
"control stations" function block.
In total there is:
– 1 function block "DM1 - input" and "DM2 - input" for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM - inputs" function blocks:
Figure 7-5: Schematic of the "DM - inputs" function block
Digital module (DM)
23
24
26
27
DM1 - inputs
1
2
3
4
Terminal
numbers
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
Digital module (DM)
23
24
26
27
DM2 - inputs
1
2
3
4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
25 25
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 7-9
Application examples
Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the number of binary
inputs and outputs on basic device 2.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs
and 7 binary outputs. Via the corresponding assignments, the input signals
can be used to activate, for example, function blocks such as "Reset" or
"External fault". An external fault can be the binary signal of an external rota-
tional-speed monitor which signals that the setpoint speed of a motor has
been undershot.
Supplying the inputs
See chapter 1.7.5 "Expansion Modules for the SIMOCODE pro V Device
Series".
Settings
Basic unit Description
Delays Inputs If necessary, you can set a delay time for the inputs.
Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms. Default setting: 16 ms.
These values are valid for digital modules with a 24 V DC input
supply.
For digital modules with a 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply, the
values are about 40 ms higher.
Table 7-3: "DM - inputs" settings
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7.5 Temperature Module Inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "TM - inputs" function block with three analog sockets
corresponding to the three sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module. The temperature (°C) of the three measuring circuits can be read
from these sockets and processed internally. An additional analog socket
supplies the maximum temperature of the three measured temperatures.
The two binary sockets of the function block represent the status of the
sensor measuring circuits. The temperatures can be processed internally
and/or transmitted to the automation system via the "Cyclic Send" function
block.
Note
The "TM - inputs" function block can only be used if the corresponding tem-
perature module (TM) was connected and parameterized in the device confi-
guration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "TM - inputs" function block:
Figure 7-6: Schematic of the "TM - inputs" function block
Notes on wiring
You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors. Further
information can be found in chapter 13.3 "Wiring".
TM - inputs
Max. temperature
Temperature 1
Temperature 2
Temperature 3
Signal
Sensor fault
u
R
1 2
PT / KTY
u
R
1 2
NTC
Out of range
1T3
2T3
3T3
1T2
2T2
3T2
50
51
52
53
54
55
Inputs
T1 56
T1 57
Sensor type
Response to sensor
fault /Out of range
Number of act. sensors
Terminal
numbers
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 7-11
Application examples
You can monitor, amongst others, the following motor components:
• Motor windings
• Motor bearings
• Motor coolant temperature
• Motor gearbox oil temperature.
The individual temperatures of the 3 sensor measuring circuits can be moni-
tored independently of each other by means of a connection to free limit
monitors.
Settings
Table 7-4: Temperature module input settings
1)
Table 7-5: "Sensor fault/Out of range" response
For this, see also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter
"Important Notes".
Temperature module Description
Sensor Type: PT100, PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, NTC
Response
1
) to sensor fault/
Out of range
Deactivated, signal, warn (d), switch off
Number of active sensors 1 sensor, 2 sensors, 3 sensors
Response Sensor fault/Out of range
Deactivated X
Signal X
Warn X (d)
Switch off X
Delay -
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7.6 Analog Module Inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "AM - inputs" function block with two analog sockets
corresponding to the two analog inputs of the analog module. The current
analog value of each input can be read from these sockets and processed
internally. An additional binary socket of the function block represents the
status of the sensor measuring circuits. The analog values can be processed
internally and/or transmitted cyclically to the automation system via the
"Cyclic Send" function block.
Note
The "AM - inputs" function block can only be used if the corresponding ana-
log module (AM) was connected and parameterized in the device configura-
tion!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM - inputs" function block:
Figure 7-7: Schematic of the "AM - inputs" function block
signal
AM - inputs
IN1 30
31
33
34
Inputs
IN2
IN1
IN2
Input 1
Input 2
Wire break
Input signal
Response to
wire break
Active inputs
Terminal
numbers
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 7-13
Application examples
Typical applications are, for example:
• Fill level monitoring for implementing dry running protection for pumps
• Monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer.
Settings
Table 7-6: Analog module inputs settings
Safety instructions
Attention
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs. This means that in order
to configure an analog input circuit, every input requires an additional exter-
nal current source connected in series. If the output of the analog module is
not being used by another application, it can be used as a current source for
an input circuit of the analog module. To make use of this option, the "Start
value range" and the "End value range" must be set to 65535. In this way,
the max. possible current is made available via the analog module output.
Analog module Description
Input signal 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Response to wire break Deactivated, signal, warn (d), switch off
Active inputs 1 input, 2 inputs
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
7.7 Cyclic Receive
Description
With the "Cyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which cyclic infor-
mation from PROFIBUS DP will be processed further in SIMOCODE pro.
This is normally in the form of binary control commands from the PLC/DCS.
The motor can be made controllable via the PROFIBUS DP, by means of a
connection with the "control stations" function block in SIMOCODE pro. The
"Cyclic Receive" function blocks consist of:
• 8 bits each (2 byte, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• 1 word (= 2 bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely programmable)
for basic type 1
• 1 input each from PROFIBUS DP.
In total there are:
– 3 "Cyclic Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Receive" function blocks:
Figure 7-8: Schematic of the "Cyclic Receive" function block
Cyclic services
The cyclic data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between DP master
and DP slave. The DP master sends the cyclic control data (cyclic receive) to
SIMOCODE pro. As a response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic signal
data (cyclic send) to the DP master.
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Byte 0
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Cyclic Receive 0
DP From the PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Byte 1
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Cyclic Receive 1
DP From the PROFIBUS DP
Byte 2/3
Cyclic Receive 2/3
1
)
Analog value
DP
1)

BU2 with basic type 1 only
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 7-15
7.8 Acyclic Receive
Description
In addition to "Cyclic Receive", there is also the option of transferring further
information acyclically to SIMOCODE pro via the PROFIBUS DP. With the
"Acyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which acyclic information
from PROFIBUS DP will be processed further in SIMOCODE pro.
For this, you must connect the sockets of the "Acyclic Receive" function
block to arbitrary function blocks in SIMOCODE pro.
The "Acyclic Receive" function blocks consists of:
• 8 bits each (= 2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary Information)
• 1 word (= 2 bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely parameterizable)
• 1 input each from PROFIBUS DP
In total there are:
• 3 "Acyclic Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic Receive" function blocks:
Figure 7-9: Schematic of the "Acyclic Receive" function block
Acyclic services
Acyclic data is only transferred on request.
The information (4 bytes) is in data record 202.
This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) which supports
the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1. Connection monitoring is activated
after the receipt of each data set. The content of the data sets is deleted
after the time-out has elapsed.
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Byte 0
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Acyclic Receive 0
DP From the PROFIBUS DP
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Byte 1
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Acyclic Receive 1
DP From the PROFIBUS DP
Byte 2/3
Acyclic Receive 2/3
1
)
Analog value
DP
1)

BU2 with basic type 1 only
Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
7-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 8-1

Analog Value Recording 8
In this chapter
This chapter provides information regarding the possibility of recording the
measuring curves of different measured values, e.g. the motor current
when the motor is running, using SIMOCODE pro V.
The increasing wear on the motor and the equipment driven by the motor all
cause the motor current to change over time. By recording the characteristic
curve of the motor current at different points in time and making direct com-
parisons, conclusions can be drawn regarding the condition of the motor
and the equipment.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• programmers
• commissioners
• service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• SIMOCODE pro
• motor protection, motor control
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• knowledge of electrical drive engineering.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device parameters > Motor control.
Analog Value Recording
SIMOCODE pro
8-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Description
The "Analog value recording" function block can be used to record various
analog values (2 bytes/1word) in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time.
For example, you can use this function block to record the characteristic
curve of the motor current when the motor is started.
Recording is carried out directly in SIMOCODE pro on the basis of the motor
feeder and independently of PROFIBUS or the automation system. Every
analog value present at the "Allocated analog value" analog socket is recor-
ded and saved. The recording starts on the basis of the edge (positive/nega-
tive) via any binary signal at the trigger input of the function block. Up to 60
values can be saved internally in the device. The time frame of the recording
is indirectly determined by the selected sampling rate:
Sampling time = sampling rate[s]
*
60 values.
The pre-trigger can be used to specify how far in advance the recording
should commence before the trigger signal is issued. The pre-trigger is set
as a percentage of the entire sampling time. In addition, you can also export
the measuring curve into a *.csv file for further processing, for example, in
MS Excel.
Functional principle
Figure 8-1: Functional principle of the analog value recording
The old measuring curve will be overwritten in SIMOCODE pro each time a
new trigger signal is sent to the trigger input.
Sampling time = Sampling rate [s] * 60
Pre-trigger [%]
time
Sampling rate [s]
Allocated analog value
(e.g. motor current lmax [%])
0
1
Trigger input
time
Trigger edge = "positive"
Analog Value Recording
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 8-3
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Analog value recording" function block:
Figure 8-2: Schematic of the "Analog value record" function block
Settings
Table 8-1: "Analog value record" settings
Application example
Record of the motor current when the motor starts/sampling time = 12 s/
pre-trigger = 25% (3 s):
Figure 8-3: Application example of the analog value record
Signal/value Range
Trigger input The analog value recording starts when
any signal is issued (arbitrary sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, motor current flowing)
Allocated analog value Arbitrary value (1 word/2 bytes) in
SIMOCODE pro
Trigger edge Positive/negative
Sampling rate 0.1 to 50 s in 0.1s increments
Pre-trigger 0 to 100% in 5% increments
Record
Allocated
Trigger input
Trigger edge
Sampling rate
Pre-trigger
analog value
0.2 s
25%
Motor current flowing
Record
Trigger edge
Sampling rate
Pre-trigger
Max. current I_max
positive
Analog Value Recording
SIMOCODE pro
8-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 9-1

3UF50 Compatibility Mode 9
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the 3UF50 compatibility mode.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Device parameters > 3UF50 compatibility mode.
Description
The 3UF50 compatibility mode is applied when a SIMOCODE-DP device is
to be replaced by a SIMOCODE pro device without changing the configura-
tion.
In the 3UF50 compatibility mode you can operate a SIMOCODE pro-V basic
unit 2 with a 3UF50 configuration.
In this case, the communication using SIMOCODE pro behaves the same as
communication using SIMOCODE-DP from the point of view of the PLC
(Master class 1).
SIMOCODE-DP supports cyclic communication (basic types 1-3), diagnosis
as well as DPV1 date records (DR 130, DS 131, DS 133).
Win SIMOCODE DP converter
In order for the technical functions (parameterization) of SIMOCODE-DP to
be integrated into the technical functions of SIMOCODE pro V, the device
parameters must be adjusted accordingly. The "Win-SIMOCODE-DP Conver-
ter" software supports you in this process. This software enables you to con-
vert the parameter files (smc files) created with Win-SIMOCODE-DP into
SIMOCODE ES parameter files (sdp files).
3UF50 Compatibility Mode
SIMOCODE pro
9-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Safety instructions
Attention
Communication with a DP-Master (Master class 2), e.g. with the Win-SIMO-
CODE-DP Professional software via PROFIBUS DP, is not covered by the
3UF50 compatibility mode.
Attention
In the 3UF50 compatibility mode, the start-up parameter block is always set,
i.e. the transmission of the device parameters created using SIMOCODE-
DP-GSD or the object manager SIMOCODE-DP cannot be integrated into
SIMOCODE pro V.
Attention
The 3UF50 compatibility mode supports SIMOCODE-DP projects in which
SIMCODE-DP is integrated via GSD SIEM8031.gs?, SIEM8069.gs? or via the
object manager (OM) SIMOCODE DP.
3UF50 Compatibility Mode
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 9-3
Diagram of the control and signaling data
The following table shows the control and signaling data in the compatibility
mode:
Table 9-1: "Controlling" configuration
Table 9-2: "Signalling" configuration
Controlling
Basic type 1
SIMOCODE-
DP
Basic type 1
SIMOCODE
pro V
Basic type 2
SIMOCODE-
DP.
Basic type 2
SIMOCODE
pro V
Basic type 3
SIMOCODE-
DP
Basic type 3
SIMOCODE
pro V
0
Control data
Cyclic receive - bit
0 1.7
0
Control data
Cyclic receive - bit
0 1.7
0
Control data
Cyclic receive - bit
0 1.7
1 1 1
2 Not supported 2 Not supported 2 Not supported
3 3 3
Signalling
Basic type 1
SIMOCODE-
DP
Basic type 1
SIMOCODE
pro V
Basic type 2
SIMOCODE-
DP
Basic type 2
SIMOCODE
pro V
Basic type 3
SIMOCODE-
DP
Basic type 3
SIMOCODE
pro V
0
Signaling data
Cyclic signaling
Bit[0.0] 1.7
0
Signaling data
Cyclic signaling
Bit[0.0] 1.7
0
Signaling data
Cyclic signaling
Bit[0.0] 1.7
1 1 1
2
Motor current
Specified: Max.
current I_max
2
Motor current
Specified: Max.
current I_max
2 Acycl. signalling
Bit[0.0] 1.7
3 3 3
4 Number of
starts
Number of starts
(Bytes 0 - 3)
5
6
7 Value
counter 1
Counter 1
Actual value
8
9 Value
counter 2
Counter 2
Actual value
10
11 Value sensor TM - Max.tempe-
rature
3UF50 Compatibility Mode
SIMOCODE pro
9-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Diagram of the diagnosis data
The following table shows the diagnosis data in the 3UF50 compatibility
mode:
Byte
Bit
Setup 3UF50 -
Device-specific diagnosis
acc. to DP standard
SIMOCODE-DP
Byte
Bit
Setup 3UF50 -
Device-specific diagnosis
acc. to DP standard
Equivalent in SIMOCODE pro V
6 0x0B
Same as 3UF50 diagnosis
7 0x81
8 0x04
6 0x0E 9 0x00
7.0 Free 10.0 Free
7.1 Event: DP block 10.1 Event: DP block Event - Start-up parameter
block active
7.2 Event: Emergency start 10.2 Event: Emergency start Status - Emergency start performed
7.3 Event: HW test ok 10.3 Event: HW test ok •No fault - HW fault basic unit
•No fault - module fault
•No fault - Temporary components
7.4 Free 10.4 Free -
7.5 Event: Ext. event 1 10.5 Event: Ext. event 1 Event - Ext. fault 5
7.6 Event: Ext. event 2 10.6 Event: Ext. event 2 Event - Ext. fault 6
7.7 Event: Ext. event 3 10.7 Event: Ext. event 3 -
8.0 Warning: Ext. warning 11.0 Warning: Ext. warning Warning - Ext. fault 3
8.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40% 11.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40% Warning - Unbalance
8.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU 11.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU Status - PLC/DCS
8.3 Warning: Sensor short circuit 11.3 Warning: Sensor short circuit Warning - Thermistor short circuit
8.4 Event: Cooling down time active 11.4 Event: Cooling down time active Status - Cooling down time active
8.5 Status: TPF 11.5 Status: TPF Status - test position (TPF)
8.6 Free 11.6 Free -
8.7 Free 11.7 Free -
9.0 Warning: Earth fault 12.0 Warning: Earth fault •Warning - Int. earth fault
or
•Warning - Ext. earth fault
9.1 Warning: Overload 12.1 Warning Overload Warning - Overload
9.2 Warning: Overload + Unbalance 12.2 Warning: Overload + Unbalance Warning - Overload + phase failure
9.3 Warning: I1 response level
overshot
12.3 Warning: I1 response level
overshot
Warning - Warning level I>
9.4 Warning: I1 response level
undershot
12.4 Warning: I1 response level
undershot
Warning - Warning level I<
9.5 Warning: I2 response level
overshot
12.5 Warning: I2 response level
overshot
-
9.6 Warning: I2 response level
undershot
12.6 Warning: I2 response level
undershot
-
Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnosis data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode
3UF50 Compatibility Mode
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 9-5
9.7 Warning: Thermistor 12.7 Warning: Thermistor •Warning - Thermistor overload
•Warning - Thermistor wire break
•Warning - TM warning T>
•Signal - TM sensor error
•Warning - TM out of range
10.0 Trip: Earth fault 13.0 Trip: Earth fault •Fault - Int. earth fault
or
•Fault - Int. earth fault
10.1 Trip: Overload 13.1 Trip: Overload Fault - Overload
10.2 Trip: Overload + Unbalance 13.2 Trip: Overload + Unbalance Fault - Overload + phase failure
10.3 Trip: I1 response level overshot 13.3 Trip: I1 response level overshot Fault - trip level I>
10.4 Trip: I1 response level undershot 13.4 Trip: I1 response level undershot Fault - trip level I<
10.5 Trip: I2 response level overshot 13.5 Trip: I2 response level overshot -
10.6 Trip: I2 response level undershot 13.6 Trip: I2 response level undershot -
10.7 Trip: Thermistor 13.7 Trip: Thermistor •Fault - Thermistor overload
•Fault - Thermistor short circuit
•Fault - Thermistor wire break
•Fault - TM tripping T>
•Fault - TM sensor error
•Fault - TM out of range
11.0 Trip: F ON* 14.0 Trip: F ON* Fault - Feedback ON
11.1 Trip: F OFF 14.1 Trip: F OFF Fault - Feedback ON
11.2 Trip: Motor blocked 14.2 Trip: Motor blocked Fault - Blocking
11.3 Trip: Positioner blocked 14.3 Trip: Positioner blocked Fault - Blocking positioner
11.4 Trip: Double 0 14.4 Trip: Double 0 Fault - Double 0
11.5 Trip: Double 1 14.5 Trip: Double 1 Fault - Double 1
11.6 Trip: End position 14.6 Trip: End position Fault - End position
11.7 Trip: Antivalence 14.7 Trip: Antivalence Fault - Antivalence
12.0 Trip: Ready for Switch-on 15.0 Trip: Ready for Switch-on Fault - Ext. fault 4
12.1 Trip: OPO 15.1 Trip: OPO Fault: Operational protection off (OPO)
12.2 Trip: UVO 15.2 Trip: UVO Fault - Undervoltage (UVO)
12.3 Trip: Ext. fault 1 15.3 Trip: Ext. fault 1 Fault - Ext. fault 1
12.4 Trip: Ext. fault 2 15.4 Trip: Ext. fault 2 Fault - Ext. fault 2
12.5 Trip: TPF fault 15.5 Trip: TPF fault Fault - Cold starting (TPF) error
12.6 Trip: Runtime ON 15.6 Trip: Runtime ON Fault - Execution ON command
12.7 Trip: Runtime OFF 15.7 Trip: Runtime OFF Fault - Execution OFF command
13.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 16.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 Fault - Parameterization
13.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 16.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 -
13.2 Trip: Parameter fault 2 16.2 Trip: Parameter fault 2 -
13.3 Trip: Parameter fault 3 16.3 Trip: Parameter fault 3 -
13.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 16.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 Fault - Configuration fault
13.5 Trip: Parameter fault 5 16.5 Trip: Parameter fault 5 -
13.6 Trip: Parameter fault 6 16.6 Trip: Parameter fault 6 -
13.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 16.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 Fault - Configuration fault
Byte
Bit
Setup 3UF50 -
Device-specific diagnosis
acc. to DP standard
SIMOCODE-DP
Byte
Bit
Setup 3UF50 -
Device-specific diagnosis
acc. to DP standard
Equivalent in SIMOCODE pro V
Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnosis data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode (cont.)
3UF50 Compatibility Mode
SIMOCODE pro
9-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
14 -
15
Number of overload trips Number of overload trips
16 -
17
I of the overload trip [%/IE)] Last tripping current
18 -
19
Operating hours [10h] Motor operating hours
Byte
Bit
Setup 3UF50 -
Device-specific diagnosis
acc. to DP standard
SIMOCODE-DP
Byte
Bit
Setup 3UF50 -
Device-specific diagnosis
acc. to DP standard
Equivalent in SIMOCODE pro V
Table 9-3: Diagram of the diagnosis data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 10-1

Standard Functions 10
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the standard functions stored
as function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. Standard functions are typical motor
functions which can be activated according to need and can be set indivi-
dually for each motor feeder.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• programmers of application programs for comprehension purposes.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• Motor protection
• control functions, control stations.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Further function blocks > Standard functions.
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
10.1 Introduction
Description
In SIMOCODE pro there are also so-called "standard functions" in
the form of function blocks for use according to need. These function blocks
can contain:
• Plugs )
• Sockets ) in the form of a signal
• Setting values, e.g. the response when external faults occur ("Signal", "Warn"
or "Switch off").
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the function
block of a standard function:
Figure 10-1: General representation of the function block of a standard function
Extent and application
These function blocks work independently of the selected control function
and can be used as optional supplements. They are already available and
only have to be activated by connecting the plug(s) of the respective
function block.
Depending on the device series, the system offers several different function
blocks for such standard functions:
SIMOCODE pro
Function block pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Test 2 2
Reset 3 3
Test position feedback (TPF) 1 1
External fault 4 6
Operational protection off (OPO) — 1
Power failure monitoring (UVO) — 1
Emergency start 1 1
Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS) 1 1
Timestamping — 1
Table 10-1: Function blocks
Plug 1 - n
Plug 1 - n
Plug 1 - n
Standard function
Setting value
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 10-3
10.2 Test/Reset
Test/reset description
The function of the "test/reset" button is generally dependent on the opera-
ting status of the device:
• Reset function: When a fault occurs
• Test function: In other operating states.
In addition to the TEST/RESET buttons, SIMOCODE pro offers a further
option to trip an internal Test/Reset via the "Test" function block. The "Test"
function block consists of:
• 1 plug.
In total there are:
• 2 "Test 1" and "Test 2" function blocks for BU1 and BU2, whereby the function
blocks differ from each other functionally:
– Test 1: when testing/switching off the output relays
– Test 2: without switching off the output relays (normally for a test via the
bus).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the "Test/
Reset" function block:
Figure 10-2: "Test/reset" function blocks
Reset 3
Test 1
Test/reset buttons locked
Test 2
Reset 1
Reset 2
"TEST/RESET" BU button
Control functions
"Test/reset" function block
"TEST/RESET" OP button
Test 1
Test 2
Reset 1
Reset 2
Reset 3
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Carrying out the test
The test can be carried out as follows:
• Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic device and on the operator panel
(can be deactivated) as well as via PC using the SIMOCODE ES software.
• Via the plugs of the internal "Test 1" and "Test 2" function blocks
The test function can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the
thermal motor model/overload function, i.e. after switching off using Test, it
can immediately be switched back again.
Switching off only occurs for Test 1 if the operating mode is set to "Remote".
Reset function:
The reset function can be carried out as follows:
• Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the basic device and on the operator panel
(can be deactivated) as well as via PC using the SIMOCODE ES software.
• Via the "Reset input" plug of the internal function blocks via the plugs of the
internal function blocks "Reset 1", "Reset 2" and "Reset 3".
The "Reset" function block consists of:
• 1 plug.
In total there are:
– 3 function blocks, "Reset 1 to 3" for BU1 and BU2.
All reset inputs (sockets) are equal (OR function).
Test function:
A function test of SIMOCODE pro can also be initialized using the test
function.
The test function includes the following steps:
• Lamp/LED test (test function activated < 2 s)
• Testing the device functionality (test function activated 2 to -5 s)
• Only for the "Test 1" function block: Switching off the QE (test function activa-
ted > 5 s).
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 10-5
Test phases
The following table shows the test phases carried out when the "TEST/
RESET" button is pressed for the respective period of time:
Test settings
Test
phase
Status Without main current With main current
O.K. Fault *) O.K. Fault
Hardware test/lamp test

< 2s
"DEVICE" LED Orange Green Orange Green
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged
Show QL*
Results of the hardware test/lamp test

2s - 5s
"DEVICE" LED Green Red Green Red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated
Relay test

> 5s
"DEVICE" LED Green Red Green Red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
LED lit/activated LED flashing LED flickering LED off
*) "Fault" displayed after 2 s
Table 10-2: States of the status LEDs/contactor controls during the test
Test 1 to 2 - Description
Input Activates the "Test" function block using any signal (arbitrary sok-
kets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Test/reset button
locked
The blue test/reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel
are designed for acknowledgement of faults and for carrying out
device tests.
The buttons can be locked using "Test/reset button locked". They
can then be used for other purposes.
Table 10-3: Test settings
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Acknowledgement of faults
The following applies to the acknowledgement of faults:
• Faults can only be acknowledged
– when the cause of the fault has been eliminated
– there is no "ON" control command.
• No reset will be carried out when a reset command is issued if the cause of
the fault or an "ON" control command is still present. The reset is saved,
depending on the type of fault. The saving of the reset is indicated by the
"GEN. FAULT" LED on the basic unit and the control panel. The LEDs change
from flashing to a continuous signal.
Automatic acknowledgement of faults
Faults are automatically acknowledged in the following cases:
• A reset is saved and the cause of the fault disappears (user previously ack-
nowledged fault)
• An overload tripping or thermistor tripping is automatically reset if motor pro-
tection reset = Auto (the acknowledgement occurs automatically after the
cooling down time expires). The motor cannot start immediately since a reset
cannot occur if an ON command is present.
• If a configured module fails, all associated faults are automatically acknowled-
ged. However, a configuration fault is generated (exception: operator panel
when parameterized accordingly). This ensures that a module fault does not
cause the general fault to be acknowledged automatically.
• If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via parame-
terization), all associated faults are acknowledged automatically (the motor
cannot start immediately since no parameters can be entered if an ON com-
mand is present).
• If a function’s parameter is changed from "Switch off" to "Warn", "Signal" or
"Deactivated", all associated faults are automatically acknowledged.
• For an external fault: with its own parameter: "Auto reset".
Reset settings
Reset 1 to 3 - Description
Input Activates the "Reset" function block from any signal
(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Test/reset button
locked
The blue test/reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel
are designed for acknowledgement of faults and carrying out
device tests.
The buttons can be locked using "Test/reset button locked". They
can then be used for other purposes.
Table 10-4: Reset settings
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 10-7
10.3 Test Position Feedback (TPF)
Description
You can carry out the "Cold starting" function test using the "test position
feedback (TPF)" function. The input (plug) of the function block must be con-
nected to the corresponding socket. The active test position is indicated by
a flashing QL of the control function.
The "Test position feedback (TPF)" function block consists of
• 1 plug
• 1 "Status - test position" socket
It is set when a signal is issued to the input.
• 1 "Fault - test position feedback fault" socket.
It is set when
– "TPF" is activated, even if current is flowing in the main circuit
– "TPF" is activated, and current is flowing in the main circuit.
In total there is
– 1 "Test position feedback" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Note
When the test position is enabled, the QLE/QLA sockets of the control
function are controlled through blinking to indicate test operation, for
example, of the motor feeder via a blinking LED button.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Test position feedback" function block:
Figure 10-3: "Test position feedback" function block
Input
Fault -
Feedback fault test position
Status -
Test position
TPF
Type
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Cold starting
If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the
network. However, the control voltage is connected.
The "Cold starting" function test is carried out in this status. Cold starting is
defined as the testing of the motor feeder without current in the main cir-
cuit.
This function must be enabled via the socket to differentiate this function
from normal operation.
The feedback that the motor feeder is isolated from the mains voltage can
be achieved using an auxiliary contact of the main switch in the motor fee-
der which is connected to any device input (terminal). This is then internally
connected to the "Test position feedback (TPF)" plug of the function block.
When using current/voltage measuring modules, this type of auxiliary con-
tact is no longer needed. The "RMT" function module can be enabled by
monitoring for undervoltage ("Voltage monitoring").
Following this, the contactor outputs can be set via the control stations (see
chapter 4"Motor Control"), which enables the current-free status to be
tested.
If current falsely flows during the test operation, the contactor outputs are
switched off with the message "Fault - Test position feedback fault".
"Fault - Test position feedback (TPF)" fault message and acknowledgement
Attention
"Fault - Test position feedback (TPF)" is generated when:
• "TPF" is activated, even if current is flowing in the motor feeder
• "TPF" is activated, and current is flowing in the motor feeder
Acknowledge with "Reset".
Settings
Test position
feedback (TPF)
Description
Input Controls the "Test position feedback (TPF)" function block using any
signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device input)
Type Specifies the input logic
• NO contact (1-active)
• NC contact (0-active)
Table 10-5: Test position feedback (TPF) settings
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 10-9
10.4 External Fault
Description
The "External faults 1-6" function blocks can optionally be used to monitor
any statuses and/or external devices and to create fault messages. In order
to do this, the inputs (plugs) of the "External fault" function blocks must be
connected to any sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.). External faults can also be "labeled" in SIMOCODE pro.
This makes it easier to allocate them to the actual malfunction. Example:
monitoring the rotational speed of the motor using an external rotational-
speed monitor.
The "External fault" function block consists of
• 2 plugs (1 plug for setting, 1 plug for resetting)
• 1 "Event - external fault" socket. It is set when a signal is issued to the input.
In total there are:
– 4 "External faults 1 to 4" function blocks for BU1
– 6 "External faults 1 to 6" function blocks for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "External fault" function blocks:
Figure 10-4: "External fault" function blocks
Event -
Input
Type
Reset
External fault 1
Type
Activity
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Ext. fault 1
Event -
Input
Type
Reset
External fault 2
Type
Activity
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Ext. fault 2
Event -
Input
Type
Reset
External fault 3
Type
Activity
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Ext. fault 3
Event -
Input
Type
Reset
External fault 4
Type
Activity
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Ext. fault 4
Event -
Input
Type
Reset
External fault 5
Type
Activity
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Ext. fault 5
Event -
Input
Type
Reset
External fault 6
Type
Activity
Response
Reset
(Marking)
Ext. fault 6
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Special reset options:
A reset input is also available in addition to the other reset options (remote
reset, test/reset button, OFF command reset). Furthermore, auto reset can
also be activated.
See below.
Settings
"External fault" response
Table 10-7: "External fault" response
External fault
1 to 6 -
Description
Input Activates the "External fault" function block using the monitored
signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Type Specifies the input logic:
• NO contact (1-active)
• NC contact (0-active)
Activity Specifies in which motor operating state the external fault should
be evaluated:
• Always:
Always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or
stationary.
• only when the motor is ON:
Evaluation only when the motor is switched ON.
Response Specifies the response to an external fault when activated via the
input (see the following table and the chapter "Important Notes").
Reset Acknowledges the "External fault" fault using any signal
(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset also by Specifying further (common) acknowledgement possibilities using
additional reset types:
• Test/Reset Buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel (panel
reset)
• Remote Reset: Acknowledgement via Reset 1-3, DPV1, "Reset"
command
• Auto-Reset: Fault resets itself after the cause of the fault has
been eliminated (after removal of the activation signal)
• Off Command-Reset: "OFF" control command resets the fault.
Marking No parameters. Optional markIng to designate the signal,
e.g. "Rotational speed >", e.g. using SIMOCODE ES.
Range: Up to a maximum of 10 characters.
Table 10-6: External fault settings
Response External fault
Tripping X
Warning X
Signalling X (d)
Disabled -
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 10-11
10.5 Operational Protection OFF (OPO)
10.5.1 Response for positioner control function
Description
The "Operational protection off (OPO)" function block puts the positioner into
the safe mode. In order to do this, the input (plug) must be connected to the
corresponding socket (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP,
etc.).
The "Operational protection off" function block consists of
• 1 plug
• 1 "Status - OPO" socket. It is set when a signal is issued to the input.
• 1 "Fault - OPO fault" socket. It is set when the corresponding safe end posi-
tion is reached.
In total there is:
– 1 "Operational protection off (OPO)" function block for BU2.
The following table shows the main functionality:
Table 10-8: Main functionality of Operational protection off (OPO) for "positioner" control function
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Operational protection off (OPO)"
function block:
Figure 10-5: "Operational protection off (OPO)" function block
OPO Initial position when OPO occurs
Positioner is
open
Positioner
opens
Positioner
stopped/OFF
Positioner
closes
Positioner is
closed
Reaction to OPO
Parameterized
"Positioner
closed"
response
Fault Reset:
with close
command

Closes
Fault Reset:
with close
command

Closes
Fault Reset:
with close
command

Closes
-
Closes
-
Parameterized
"Positioner
open" response
- -


Opens
Fault
Reset: with
open command
Opens
Fault
Reset: with
open command
Opens
Fault
Reset: with
open command
Opens
Input
Fault -
Operational protection off (OPO)
Status -
Operational protection off (OPO)
Positioner response
Type
Operational protection off (OPO)
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Settings
Safety instructions
Note
No "Fault - Operational protection off (OPO)" fault message is created when
the "OPO" command tries to move the positioner to the end position which
it is already in or to the position towards which it is already heading.
Note
No other control command (counter command or stop command) is carried
out while "Operational protection off (OPO)" is active.
Note
The "Fault - Operation protection off (OPO)" fault message must be acknow-
ledged using the open or close control command, depending on the present
end position reached via "OPO".
Note
The acknowledgement is carried out even if the desired end position has not
yet been reached.
Note
The fault message is available as diagnosis via the PROFIBUS DP.
Operational
protection off
(OPO)
Description
Input Activates the "Operational protection off" function block using the
monitored signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, etc.)
Positioner
response
Specifies the response for the "positioner" control function when
activated via the input:
• CLOSE: Positioner moves to the "Closed" end position
• OPEN: Positioner moves to the "Open" end position.
Type Specifies the input logic
• NO contact (1-active)
• NC contact (0-active)
Table 10-9: Operational protection off settings
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 10-13
10.5.2 Response to other control functions
Description
For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated if
OPO is used:
• The motor is running: The motor switches off with a "Fault - Operational pro-
tection off (OPO)" fault.
• The motor is off. Initially no fault. The "Fault - Operational protection off
(OPO)" fault only occurs when the "ON command" is issued.
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
10.6 Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)
Description
The "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" is enabled via the plug. This is carried
out via an external voltage relay which is connected to the function block via
the binary inputs of SIMOCODE pro.
Process (see process diagram below).
1) All contactors (QE) are immediately deactivated after the monitoring relay/
activation of the input (UVO) have been addressed.
2) The motor switches back into its previous status if the voltage returns within
the "Power failure time". This can either take place immediately or can be
additionally delayed (restart delay).
3) If the "Power failure time" expires before the voltage returns, the device
signals a fault (UVO fault).
Condition: The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is buffered and is not inter-
rupted.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Power failure monitoring (UVO)"
function block:
Figure 10-6: Schematic of the "Power failure monitoring (UVO)" function block
Figure 10-7: Power failure monitoring (UVO) process diagram
Input*
Fault -
Power failure monitoring (UVO)
UVO
Type
Power failure time
*Activation
External power failure monitoring
Restart delay
QE
t
Power failure
time
UVO
t
Fault
t
Fault
1)
2)
3)
Power failure
time
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 10-15
Settings
Power failure
monitoring (UVO)
Description
Input Activates the "Power failure monitoring" function block using the
monitored signal (arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control
bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Type Specifies the type of power failure monitoring:
• Deactivated
• Service supply is not interrupted.
The control voltage from SIMOCODE pro remains constant.
The interruption of the mains voltage must be measured by a
separate voltage relay (for example).
Power failure time The time at which the power failure starts.
If the mains voltage returns within the power failure time period, all
the drives that were connected before the power failure are auto-
matically reconnected.
If the mains voltage does not return within this time period, the
drives remain disconnected and the "Fault - Power failure UVO" fault
message is generated.
The fault message can be acknowledged using "Reset" once the
mains voltage returns.
Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds
Restart delay (stag-
gered)
The restart delay can be set so that not all motors restart at the
same time (mains voltage would otherwise collapse again).
Range: 0 to 255 seconds
Table 10-10: Power failure monitoring settings
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
10.7 Emergency start
Description
The emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro
each time it is activated. This enables the motor to restart immediately after
an overload tripping. This function can be used to:
– Enable a reset and start up the motor again immediately after an overload
switch-off
– delete the thermal memory (motor model) during operation if required.
Caution
If emergency starts are carried out too frequently, this could lead to thermal
overloading of the motor!
Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, it is not possible for this
function to continuously affect the thermal motor model.
The emergency start is carried out as follows:
• Via the plug of the function block. In order to do this, the input (plug) of the
function block must be connected to any socket (e.g. device inputs, control
bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.).
The "Emergency start" function block consists of:
• 1 plug
• 1 "Status - emergency start carried out" socket. It is set when the emergency
start is carried out.
In total there is:
– 1 "Emergency start" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Emergency start" function block:
Figure 10-8: "Emergency start" function block
Settings
Emergency start Description
Input Activates the "Emergency start" function block using any signal
(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs,
control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Table 10-11: Emergency start settings
Input
Status -
Emergency start Emergency start
carried out
1
)
1) The "Emergency start carried out" signal is triggered by the edge (input) and reset
when current flows again.
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 10-17
10.8 Watchdog (Bus Monitoring, PLC/DCS Monitoring)
Description
The "Watchdog" function block monitors both the communication with the
PLC using PROFIBUS DP as well as the operating state of the PLC in the
"Remote" operating mode.
Schematic
Bus monitoring:
With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - Bus" fault is generated if
• "Bus monitoring" is active
• The cyclic data transfer between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted,
e.g. by an interruption to the PROFIBUS DP connection when in the "Remote"
operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1).
• The "Status - Bus O.K." can always be evaluated. If the SIMOCODE pro is
cyclically exchanging data with the PLC, the "Status - Bus O.K." is set to "1".
PLC/DCS monitoring:
With this type of monitoring, "Fault - PLC/DCS" is generated if
• "PLC/DCS monitoring" is activated.
• The PROFIBUS DP switches to the "CLEAR" status when in the "Remote"
operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1).
• The "Status - PLC/DCS in Run" can always be evaluated. If the PROFIBUS DP
is in the "CLEAR" status, the "Status - PLC/DCS in Run" is set to "0".
If the "PLC/DCS monitoring - input" is connected by default to the "Cyclic
receive - Bit 0.7" bit, the status of the PLC is deduced from this bit alone.
Figure 10-9: "Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS)" function block
PLC/DCS monitoring - input
Fault - PLC/DCS
Watchdog (Bus monit.) PLC/DCS
Bus/PLC fault - reset
Bus monitoring
Cyclic communication
Status - PLC/DCS in Run
(level sensitive)
PLC/DCS monitoring
Status - Bus O.K. (bus is active)
Fault - bus
Bus response
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Settings
"Bus fault"/"PLC/DCS fault" response
Table 10-13: "Bus fault"/"PLC/DCS fault" response
Watchdog - Description
PLC/DCS monito-
ring - input
Activates the "Watchdog" function block using the monitored signal
(arbitrary sockets , e.g. control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Bus monitoring • Activated:
If a bus fault occurs, the "Fault - Bus" fault message is generated,
which must be acknowledged
• Deactivated:
No fault message
PLC/DCS
monitoring
• Activated:
If an SPS fault occurs, the "Fault - PLC/DCS" fault message is
generated, which must be acknowledged
• Deactivated:
No fault message
Bus/PLC fault -
reset
You can select whether the faults are to be acknowledged automa-
tically or manually.
Range: Manual/automatic
Table 10-12: Watchdog settings
Response Bus fault PLC/DCS fault
Tripping X X
Warning - -
Signalling - -
Disabled X (d) X (d)
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 10-19
10.9 Timestamping
10.9.1 Timestamping in the fault memory
The timestamping in the fault memory is based on the operating hours
(resolution: 1 s) of SIMOCODE pro.
The "Error/Fault" and "Mains on" events are recorded. Each of these events is
annotated with a timestamp.
• Error/Fault:
The last 21 faults are stored in a ring buffer. The fault that occurs (rising edge)
is always recorded. A fault that is disappearing (falling edge) is not recorded.
• Mains on:
If the most recent entry was "Mains on", this is not recorded multiple times.
Instead, the fault number is used as a mains-on counter. This means that the
fault memory cannot be deleted by frequent ON/OFF operations.
Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest.
The data is displayed using the "SIMOCODE ES" software.
Example:
Figure 10-10: Example of event recording using the "SIMOCODE ES" software
Screenshot
Standard Functions
SIMOCODE pro
10-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Schematic
The standard function "Timestamping" consists of
• 8 sockets "Timestamping - input 0 to input 7".
In total there is:
• 1 "Timestamp" function block for BU2.
Figure 10-11: "Timestamp" function block
Settings
You can activate/deactivate the timestamping function via the "Timestam-
ping active" checkbox.
10.9.2 Timestamping/time synchronization via PROFIBUS
See chapter 12.8 "Timestamping".
Input 0
Input 2
Input 6
Input 4
Input 1
Input 3
Input 7
Input 5
Timestamp
Timestamping active
Signal - timestamp function active+O.K.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 11-1

Logic Modules 11
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the logic modules of
SIMOCODE pro. Logic modules are function blocks which are modeled not
only on standard logic functions, e.g. truth tables (AND, OR,...), but also on
counters and timers. In addition to the predefined control functions, you can
use this, for example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions
and counter functions without being dependent on external components
(relays).
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• basics of digital signal processing, e.g. timer, counter etc.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Further function blocks > Logic modules.
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11.1 Introduction
Description
Freely programmable logic modules are function blocks that process input
signals and provide binary or analog output signals according to their inter-
nal logic components. Logic modules can contain:
• plugs
• an internal logic component
• sockets )
• settings, e.g. the time for a timer.
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of a logic module:
Figure 11-1: General representation of a logic module
Extent and application
If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use
the logic modules. These can be used, for example, to implement logical
functions, time relay functions and counter functions. Depending on the
device series, the system provides several logic modules:
SIMOCODE pro
Logic module pro C
BU1
Number
pro V
BU2
Number
Truth tables for 3 inputs/1 output 3 6
Truth tables for 2 inputs/1 output — 2
Truth tables for 5 inputs/2 outputs — 1
Timers 2 4
Counters 2 4
Signal conditioners 2 4
Non-volatile elements 2 4
Flashing 3 3
Flickering 3 3
Limit monitor — 4
Table 11-1: Logic modules which can be programmed freely
Logic module
Plug 1
Plug n
Plug 1 - n
(Logic component)
Setting value
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 11-3
11.2 Truth Table for 3I/1O
Description
The truth table for 3I/1O contains
• 3 plugs
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
You can choose among 8 possible input conditions with which you want to
create an output signal.
In total there are:
– 3 truth tables 1 to 3 for BU1
– 6 truth tables 1 to 6 for BU2
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth table for 3I/1O" logic modules:
Figure 11-2: "Truth table for 3I/1O" logic modules
Truth table 1 for 3I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output
Truth table 3 for 3I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output
Truth table 5 for 3I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output
Truth table 2 for 3I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output
Truth table 4 for 3I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output
Truth table 6 for 3I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example
You want to implement the following circuit:
Figure 11-3: Example of a truth table
Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:
S1=
Input 1
S2=
Input 2
S3=
Input 3
K1=
Output
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1
S1 S2
S3
K1
Circuit:
K1 switches with:
(S1 or S2) and S3
or
S1 and S2 and S3
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 11-5
Switching and parameterizing
Figure 11-4: Example circuit and parameterization for truth table 3E/1A
Settings
Truth tables 1-6 for
3I/1O -
Description
Input 1 to 3 Activate the truth table with any signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Table 11-2: Settings for truth table for 3I/1O
S2
S3
S1
Circuit:
1
2
Out1
3
Truth table 1 for 3I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output
1
2
3
4
L1
N
BU
Connecting inputs, i.e.
connecting the plugs with the sockets
Setting of bits
Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
for output signals
K1
BU - inputs BU - outputs
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11.3 Truth Table for 2I/1O
Description
The truth table for 2I/1O contains
• 2 plugs
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
You can choose between 4 possible input conditions with which you want to
create an output signal.
In total there are:
– 2 truth tables 7 to 8 for BU2
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth table for 2I/1O" logic modules:
Figure 11-5: "Truth table for 2I/1O" logic modules
Example
You want to implement the following circuit:
Figure 11-6: Example of truth table for 2I/1O
Truth table 7 for 2I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Output
Truth table 8 for 2I/1O
Input 1
Input 2
Output
Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:
S1=
Input 1
S2=
Input 2
K1=
Output
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
S1 S2
K1
Circuit:
K1 switches with:
S1 or S2
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 11-7
11.4 Truth Table for 5I/2O
Description
The truth table for 5I/2O contains
• 5 plugs
• 1 logic component
• 2 sockets.
You can choose between 32 possible input conditions with which you want
to create up to 2 output signals.
In total there is:
– 1 truth table 9 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth table for 5I/2O" logic modules:
Figure 11-7: "Truth table for 5I/2O" logic modules
Settings
Truth table 9 for
5I/2O -
Description
Input 1 to 5 Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Table 11-3: Settings for truth table for 5I/2O
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Output 1
Input 4
Input 5
Output 2
Truth table 9 for 5I/2O
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11.5 Counters
Description
Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are activated
via the plugs "+2" or "-".
The counter output switches to "1" when the preset limit is reached. The
counter is reset with "Reset".
The actual value is available as a socket for further processing and can also
be transmitted to the automation system.
• Plug +: increases actual value by 1 (maximum: limit value)
• Plug –:decreases actual value by 1 (minimum: 0)
• Reset: resets the actual value to 0.
The counter contains
• 3 plugs (input +, input – and reset)
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
• 1 "actual value" analog socket with the current value in the range between
0 up to the limit value. It remains constant in the case of a voltage failure.
In total there are:
• 2 counters 1 to 2 for BU1
• 4 counters 1 to 4 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Counters" logic modules:
Figure 11-8: "Counters" logic modules
Counter 1
Input +
Input –
Reset
Output
Counter 2
Input +
Input –
Reset
Output
Limit value Limit value
Counter 3
Input +
Input –
Reset
Output
Counter 4
Input +
Input –
Reset
Output
Limit value Limit value
Actual value Actual value
Actual value Actual value
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 11-9
Safety instructions
Note
The time between the events to be counted depends on
- the input delay
- the device cycle time-.
Note
The actual value remains the same
- during parameterization or failure of the supply voltage
- if there are simultaneous input signals at input + and input -.
Note
The output is always 0 following a reset.
Settings
Counters 1 to 4 - Description
Input + Increases the actual value by 1.
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Input – Decreases the actual value by 1.
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset Resets the counter to 0 (count value and output)
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Limit value The maximum value that can be reached when counting and where
the counter provides an output signal.
Range: 0 - 65535
Table 11-4: Counter settings
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11.6 Timer
Description
The timer contains
• 2 plugs (input and reset)
• 1 socket.
• 1 "Actual value" analog socket with the actual value.
The actual value is available as a socket for further processing and can also
be transmitted to the automation system.
If there is an input signal, the timer can provide an output signal according
to the chosen timer type:
• With closing delay
• With closing delay with memory
• With OFF delay
• With fleeting closing.
In total there are:
– 2 timers 1 to 2 for BU1
– 4 timers 1 to 4 for BU2
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Timer" logic modules:
Figure 11-9: "Timer" logic modules
Note
The output is always 0 following a reset.
Timer 1
Input
Reset
Output
Value
Type
Timer 2
Input
Reset
Output
Value
Type
Timer 3
Input
Reset
Output
Value
Type
Timer 4
Input
Reset
Output
Value
Type
Actual value Actual value
Actual value Actual value
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 11-11
Output response
Figure 11-10: Output response of the timer
With closing delay:
Input
Reset
Time
Output
With closing delay with memory:
Input
Reset
Time
Output
With OFF delay:
With fleeting closing:
t t
t t t
Input
Reset
Time
Output
t t t
Input
Reset
Time
Output
t
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Settings
Timers 1 to 4 - Description
Input Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset Resets the actual value to 0.
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Type Different output responses
Range: Closing delay, closing delay with memory
Closing delay, with fleeting closing
Value Time during which the timer provides an output signal when activa-
ted, depending on the output response (type).
Range: 0 to 65535, unit 100 ms
Table 11-5: Timer settings
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 11-13
11.7 Signal Conditioner
Description
If there is an input signal, the signal conditioner can provide an output signal
according to the chosen timer type:
• Not inverting
• Inverting
• Edge rising with memory
• Edge falling with memory.
You can set the output response.
The signal conditioner contains
• 2 plugs (input and reset)
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
In total there are:
– 2 signal conditioners for BU1 (signal conditioners 1 to 2)
– 4 signal conditioners for BU2 (signal conditioners 1 to 4).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Signal conditioner" logic modules:
Figure 11-11: "Signal conditioner" logic modules
Note
The output is always 0 following a reset.
Signal conditioner 1
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Signal conditioner 2
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Signal conditioner 3
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Signal conditioner 4
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Types of signals/output responses
Figure 11-12: Types of signals/output responses of the signal conditioners
Level inverted
Edge rising with memory
Edge falling with memory
Input
Output
Reset
Input
Output
Reset
Input
Output
Reset
Level not inverted
Input
Output
Reset
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 11-15
NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "level inverted" type of signal:
Table 11-6: NOR function
Settings
Input Reset Output Schematic
0 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
1 1 0
Signal
conditioners
1 to 4 -
Description
Input Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset Resets the signal conditioner to 0.
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Type Different output responses
Range:
Level not inverted, level inverted,
Edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory
Table 11-7: Signal conditioner settings
Input
Reset
Output
>
=
1
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11.8 Non-volatile Elements
Description
Non-volatile elements behave like signal conditioners.
The output signals remain after failure of the supply voltage.
If there is an input signal, the signal conditioner can provide an output signal
according to the type of signal conditioner chosen:
• Not inverting
• Inverting
• Edge rising with memory
• Edge falling with memory.
You can set the output response.
The non-volatile element contains
• 2 plugs (input and reset)
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
In total there are:
– 2 non-volatile elements1 to 2 for BU1
– 4 non-volatile elements1 to 4 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Non-volatile elements" logic modules:
Figure 11-13: "Non-volatile elements" logic modules
Note
The output is always 0 following a reset.
Non-vol. elem. 1
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Non-vol. elem. 2
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Non-vol. elem. 1
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Non-vol. elem. 2
Input
Reset
Output
Type
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 11-17
Types of signals/output responses
Figure 11-14: Signal types/output responses of non-volatile elements
Level inverted
Edge rising with memory
Edge falling with memory
Input
Output
Reset
Input
Output
Reset
Input
Output
Reset
Level not inverted
Input
Output
Reset
Voltage failure,
Voltage failure,
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "level inverted" type of signal:
Table 11-8: NOR function
Settings
Input Reset Output Schematic
0 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
1 1 0
Non-volatile
elements
1 to 4 -
Description
Input Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Reset Resets the signal conditioner to 0.
Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Type Different output responses
Range: Level not inverted, level inverted,
Edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory
Table 11-9: Non-volatile elements settings
Input
Reset
Output
>
=
1
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 11-19
11.9 Flashing
Description
If there is an input signal at its plug, the "Flashing" function block provides a
signal at its socket, which alternates between
binary 0 and 1 with a fixed frequency of 1 Hz. You can use this to make the
LEDs on the operator panel flash.
The logic module consists of
• 1 plug
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
In total there are:
– 3 "Flashing 1 to 3" logic blocks for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flashing" logic modules:
Figure 11-15: "Flashing" logic modules
Settings
Flashing 1 to 3 - Description
Input Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, signals, status, etc.)
Table 11-10: Flashing settings
Flashing 1
Input
Output
Flashing 2
Input
Output
Flashing 3
Input
Output
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
11.10 Flickering
Description
With the "flickering" function blocks, you can e.g. assign the "flickering"
function to the operator panel LEDs.
If there is an input signal, the "Flickering" function block provides an output
signal with a frequency of 4 Hz.
The function block contains
• 1 plug
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
In total there are:
– 3 "Flickering 1 to 3" logic blocks for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flickering" logic modules:
Figure 11-16: "Flickering" logic modules
Settings
Flickering 1 to 3 - Description
Input Activation by any signal
(arbitrary sockets ,
e.g. signals, etc.)
Table 11-11: Flickering settings
Flickering 1
Input
Output
Flickering 2
Input
Output
Flickering 3
Input
Output
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 11-21
11.11 Limit Monitor
Description
Any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) can be monitored for limiting overshoo-
ting or undershooting. The limit monitor issues the "Limit value" signal to its
socket. In addition, limit monitors can be "labeled" according to their
function. Example: Monitoring the individual sensor measuring circuits of
the temperature module (Temperature 1 - 3) for overtemperature.
The limit monitor consists of
• 1 analog plug
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
In total there are:
– 4 limit monitors 1 to 4 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Limit monitor" logic modules:
Figure 11-17: "Limit monitor" logic modules
Response
Table 11-12: Response of the limit values
See also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important
Notes".
Response Limit values 1 to 4
Tripping -
Warning -
Signalling X (d)
Disabled -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s
Limit monitor 1
Event - Type
Limit value
Activity
(Marking)
Limit value 1
Event -
Limit value 2
Limit monitor 3
Event - Type
Limit value
Activity
Limit value 3
Limit monitor 4
Event - Type
Limit value
Activitiy
Limit value 4
Response
(Marking)
Response
(Marking)
Response
Input Input
Input Input
Limit monitor 2
Type
Limit value
Activity
(Marking)
Response
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Functional principle
The limit value signal issued depends on
• the operating state of the motor
• the TPF function
• the parametrized "activity":
– ON
– On+
– Run
– Run+.
The following display shows a flow chart with the different "activity" parame-
ters.
Figure 11-18: Functional principle of the limit monitor
OFF Start Motor is running OFF
"ON"
"On+"
"Run"
"Run+"
Class-time
Not with TPF
1)
Not with TPF
1)
Not with TPF
1)
Time
Activity
TPF: There is test position feedback, the motor feeder is in the test posi-
tion, i.e. its main circuit is isolated from the network. However, the con-
trol voltage is connected.
1)
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 11-23
Settings
Limit monitor - Description
Input Analog plug of the limit monitor to be connected with the analog
value (2 bytes) which is to be monitored,
e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling time, actual value of
timers, etc.).
Type Specifies if the limit value has to be monitored for overshooting or
undershooting.
Activity Determines in which motor operating state the limit monitor is to
be evaluated:
• on, i.e. always evaluate, independent of whether the motor is run-
ning or not (default)
• on+, i.e. always evaluate, independent of whether the motor is
running or not
Exception: 'TPF', i.e. motor feeder is in test position.
• run, i.e., evaluate only if the motor is in the ON state (TPF)
• run+, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is running and the start-up
procedure is finished (i.e. the "Start active" message is not
issued) and there is no test position feedback (TPF);
Example: Monitoring the power factor.
Limit value Monitor response value. The return value is always determined by
the "Limit monitor - delay" parameter.
Range: 0 - 65535.
Delay Specifies the time period for which the limit value must be con-
stantly exceeded before the "Signal - limit" output is set.
Range: 0 - 25.5 s
(Marking) No parameters. Optional marking to designate the signal,
e.g. "0/4-20>"; Range: Up to a maximum of 10 characters.
Table 11-13: Limit monitor settings
Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
11-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 12-1

Communication 12
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the possibilities of SIMO-
CODE pro communication, e.g. with a PLC. The presetting of the control,
signaling and diagnostic data is sufficient for almost all applications so that
the parameterization only has to be changed to a small extent. Otherwise,
you can adapt the settings of the individual bits specifically for your applica-
tion.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the following dialogs in SIMOCODE ES:
Device parameters > Bus parameters
Further function blocks > Outputs > Acyclic signaling data
Further function blocks >Outputs > Cyclic signaling data
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12.1 Definitions
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol. DP stands for decentralized
periphery. The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange bet-
ween the central DP master and the periphery devices.
PROFIBUS DPV1
PROFIBUS DPV1 is an extension of the DP protocol. With this, acyclic data
exchange of parameter, diagnostic, control and test data is also possible.
DP master
A master is designated as a DP master if it works with the DP protocol
according to the EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Class 1 master
A class 1 master is an active station on the PROFIBUS DP. The cyclic data
exchange with other stations is characteristic for this type of master. Typical
class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP connection.
Class 2 master
A class 2 master is an optional station on the PROFIBUS DP. Typical class 2
masters are, for example,
• PC/programing devices with the SIMOCODE-ES professional software
• SIMATIC PDM (PCS7)
• PC with SIMATIC powercontrol software (power management).
DPV1 slave
A slave is designated as a DPV1 slave if it is operated on the PROFIBUS bus
with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50 170 stan-
dard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
GSD (device data)
Device data (GSD) include DP slave descriptions in a uniform format. Using
GSD (device data) makes it easier to parameterize the
DP slave in a DP master system.
OM SIMOCODE pro
OM SIMOCODE pro (object manager) is used instead of GSD (device data)
to integrate SIMOCODE pro into STEP7.
OM SIMOCODE pro enables the use of SIMOCODE ES Professional (if it is
installed) for parameterizing within STEP7.
SIMATIC PDM
Software package for the configuration, parameterization, commissioning
and maintenance of devices (e.g. transducers, controllers, SIMOCODE) and
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 12-3
for configuring networks and PCs.
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a slave which is fully integrated into Step7. It is
connected via OM SIMOCODE pro. It supports the S7 model (diagnostic
alarms, process alarms)
Writing data
Writing data means that data is transmitted to the SIMOCODE pro system.
Reading data
Reading data means that data is transmitted from the SIMOCODE pro
system.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12.2 Transmitting Data
Options for data transfer
The following figure shows the options for data transfer:
Figure 12-1: Options for data transfer
Communication principle
The following figure shows the communication principle in which different
data is transmitted depending on the master and slave modes of operation:
Figure 12-2: Communication principle
Data transfer to class 1 master,
depending on the slave mode of
operation: (table below, "Slave
modes of operation")
PROFIBUS DPV1 standard extension: Parameterization,
diagnostics, controlling, signaling, testing via PROFIBUS DPV1
PC/PD e.g. with SIMOCODE ES Smart
Parameterizing, diagnostics, controlling,
signaling, testing via system interface
Maximum of 2 class 2
masters possible
Class 1 master
SIMATIC S7 with PROFIBUS DP communication processor
Class 2 master
PC or programming device with
SIMOCODE ES Professional
PLC
3UF7
PLC-CPU
Communication processor
Cyclic signalling data
Cyclic control data
Configuration
cyclic I/O acyclic
GSD
Parameters
Start-up
parameter
block
acyclic
DPV1
Master Class 1
acyclic
PC or DCS
e.g.
SIMOCODE ES
Professional
Master Class 2 (Max. 2)
SIMOCODE pro
Diagnostics Alarms
DPV0
DPV1
Data records Data records
PLC-CPU
Communication processor
Cyclic signalling data
Cyclic control data
Configuration
cyclic I/O acyclic
GSD
Parameters Parameters
Start-up
parameter
block
acyclic
DPV1
Master Class 1
acyclic
PC or DCS
e.g.
SIMOCODE ES
Professional
Master Class 2 (Max. 2)
SIMOCODE pro
Diagnostics Alarms
DPV0
Diagnostics Diagnostics Alarms Alarms
DPV0
DPV1
Data records Data records Data records Data records Data records Data records
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 12-5
12.3 Telegram Description and Data Access
12.3.1 Cyclic Data
The cyclic data is exchanged once every DP cycle between the
PROFIBUS DP master and DP slave. The PROFIBUS DP master module
then sends the control data to SIMOCODE pro.
In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the signaling data to the master
module.
Access to the cyclic data is via the inputs (signaling data) and outputs (con-
trol data) in the program of the PLC.
The length of the cyclic data which is to be transmitted is already set when
SIMOCODE pro is integrated into the DP master system. This is achieved by
selecting the basic type which determines the structure and the length of
the cyclic data.

The following basic types are available:
• Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro:
Table 12-1: Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro
• Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master:
Table 12-2: Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master
The cyclic data contents (digital/analog information) is set by parameteriza-
tion, e.g. with the "SIMOCODE ES" software.
The cyclic I/O data is already preset when the type of application (control
functions) is selected when the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization software
is selected (see chapter B.20 "Assignment of Cyclic Control and Signaling
Data for Predefined Control Functions").
Specification Length Specification Information
Basic type 1 4 bytes of control data Cyclic receive -
Bit 0.0 to 1.7
BU2
Cyclic receive -
analog value
Basic type 2 2 bytes of control data Cyclic receive -
Bit 0.0 to 1.7
BU1/BU2
Specification Length Specification Information
Basic type 1 10 bytes of signaling data Cyclic Send
Bit 0.0 to 1.7
BU2
Cyclic Send -
analog inputs 1 to 4
Basic type 2 4 bytes of signaling data Cyclic Send -
Bit 0.0 to 1.7
BU1/BU2
Cyclic Send -
analog input 1
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12.3.2 Diagnostic Data and Alarms
The diagnostic data contains important information about the status of
SIMOCODE pro. This simplifies troubleshooting.
In contrast to the cyclic data, the diagnostic data is only transmitted to the
master module if it changes.
PROFIBUS DP differentiates between:
• Standard diagnostics
• Status messages
• Channel-related diagnostics
• Process and diagnostic alarms according to DPV1.
Configuration of the diagnostic response
For SIMOCODE pro, you can set which diagnostic events are to trigger the
transmission of diagnostic data or the alarms to the PLC:
• Diagnostics for device errors, e.g. parameterization errors, hardware faults
• Diagnostics for process faults:
Diagnostic data or alarms are transmitted to the PLC for all events in
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics which are marked in
the "DP Diagnostics" column with an "F"
• Diagnostics for process warnings:
Diagnostic data or alarms are transmitted to the PLC for all events in
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics which are marked in
the "DP Diagnostics" column with a "W"
• Diagnostics for process messages:
Diagnostic data or alarms are transmitted to the PLC for all events in
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics which are marked in
the "DP Diagnostics" column with a "M".
Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
Set the response in the "Device parameters > Bus parameters > Diagno-
stics" dialog.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 12-7
12.3.3 Configuration of the Slave Diagnostics
Figure 12-3: Configuration of the slave diagnostics
The maximum length of the diagnostic telegram is 62 bytes.
.
.
.
Station status 1 to 3
Master PROFIBUS address
High byte
Low byte
Manufacturer's ID
Identification-related diagnostics
Status messages
Channel-related diagnostics
(dynamic, n = 0; 3; 6)
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 8
Byte 27
Byte 28
Byte 29
Byte 30
Byte 6
Byte 7
Standard
diagnostics
Channel-related diagnostics
(dynamic, n = 0; 3; 6)
Byte 31
Byte 32
Byte 33
Byte 28+n
Byte 48+n
Diagnostic alarm (temporary)
Byte 28+n
Byte 48+n
.
.
.
.
.
.
Diagnostic alarm (temporary)
Extended
diagnostics
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Station status - definition
The station status provides an overview of the state of a DP slave.
Station status 1
Table 12-3: Configuration of station status 1 (byte 0)
Bit Meaning Cause/corrective measures
0 The DP slave cannont be addressed
by the DP master.
Check the following:
• Is the correct PROFIBUS address set on
the DP slave?
• Is the bus connection plug plugged in?
• Is the DP slave supplied with power?
• Is the RS-485 repeater configured cor-
rectly?
1 The DP slave is not yet ready for the
data transfer.
The DP slave is just starting up.
Wait until the start-up is completed.
2 The configuration data sent from the
DP master to the DP slave does not
correspond to the configuration of
the DP slave.
Check whether the correct station type or
the correct configuation of the DP slave has
been entered in the configuration software.
3 There are external diagnostics pre-
sent (general diagnostic display).
Evaluate the identification-related diagno-
stics, the status messages and/or the chan-
nel-related diagnostics.
As soon as all errors are rectified, bit 3 is
reset. The bit is reset if there is a new dia-
gnostic message in the bytes of the above-
mentioned diagnostics.
4 The required function cannot inter-
pret the response of the DP slave
Check the configuration.
5 The DP master cannot interpret the
response of the DP slave.
Check the bus configuration.
6 The DP slave type does not corre-
spond to the software configuration.
Enter the correct station type in the confi-
guration software.
7 The DP slave has been parameteri-
zed by another DP master (not by
the DP master which has access to
the DP slave at the moment).
Bit is always 1 when you are e.g. accessing
the DP slave from the programming device
or from another DP master.
The PROFIBUS address of the DP master
which parameterized the DP slave is in the
"Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic
byte.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 12-9
Station status 2
Table 12-4: Configuration of station status 2 (byte 1)
Station status 3
Station status 3 is not relevant for slave diagnostics.
Table 12-5: Configuration of station status 3
Master PROFIBUS address - definition
The PROFIBUS address of the DP master (class 1 master) is stored in the
"Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte:
• which the DP slave parameterized and
• which has read and write access to the DP slave.
The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.
Manufacturer's identification - definition
A code is stored in the manufacturer's identification which describes the
DP slave type.
Table 12-6: Configuration of the manufacturer's identification
Bit Meaning
0 The DP slave must be parameterized anew.
1 There is a diagnostic message. The DP slave does not work until the error is rec-
tified (static diagnostic message).
2 The bit is always "1" when the slave is present with this PROFIBUS address.
3 The address monitoring is activated for this DP slave.
4 The DP slave received the "FREEZE" control command
1
).
5 The DP slave received the "FREEZE" control command
1
).
6 0: Bit is always "0".
7 The DP slave is deactivated, i.e. it is decoupled from the current processing.
1) Bit is only updated if another diagnostic message is changed.
Bit Meaning
0 to 7 Bits are always "0".
Byte 4 Byte 5 Manufacturer's identification for
80
H
FD
H
SIMOCODE pro
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Identification-related diagnostics - definition
The identification-related diagnostics begins at byte 6 and is 2 bytes long.
Identification-related diagnostics - Configuration
Figure 12-4: Configuration of the identification-related diagnostics
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
7 6 5 0
Byte 6
Bit number
= 0x42
Length of the identification-related diagnostics
including byte 6 (= 2 bytes)
Code for identification-related diagnostics
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x
7 6 5 0
Byte 7
Bit number
0: Identification-related diagnostics are not available
1: Identification-related diagnostics are available
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x
7 6 5 0
Byte 7
Bit number
0: Identification-related diagnostics are not available
1: Identification-related diagnostics are available
GSD (device data)
OMSIMOCODE pro
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 12-11
Status messages - definition
The status messages yield the detailed status of SIMOCODE pro.
Status messages - configuration
The status messages are configured as follows:
Figure 12-5: Status messages configuration
The detailed messages can be found in chapter A.5 "Detailed Events of the
Slave Diagnostics".
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
7 6 5 0
Byte 8
Bit number
= 0x14
Length of the status message
including byte 9 (= 20 bytes)
7 6 5
Byte 12
Bit number
7 0
Byte 9
0x81
7 0
Byte 10
x
Byte 11
0x00
4 3 2 1 0
Slot number
Status message
GSD (device data):
OMSIMOCODE pro: 0x04
0x01
Detailed messages
.
.
.
Byte 27
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Channel-related diagnostics - definition
Channel-related diagnostics are a detailed version of the identification-rela-
ted diagnostics. They supply information about the device errors of
SIMOCODE pro.
Channel-related diagnostics - configuration
The channel-related diagnostics are configured as follows:
Figure 12-6: Configuration of the channel-related diagnostics
The block for the channel-related diagnostics, which has a length of 3 bytes,
is either missing (if there are no channel-related diagnostics) or is available
once or twice.
Error types
The diagnostic message is signaled on channel 0.
Table 12-7: Error types
No. Error type Meaning/cause
F9 01001:
Error
• Internal error/device error
• Error during self-test
Exact information: See
chapter B.7 "Data Record
92 - Device Diagnostics".
F16 10000:
Parameterization
error
• Incorrect parameter value
1 0 0 0 0 0 x x
7 6 5 0
Byte 28
Bit number
Code for channel-related diagnostics
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 6 5 0
Byte 29
Bit number
Input/output channel
7 6 5 0
Byte 30
Bit number
Channel type:
Error type 9 or 16 (table below)
000
B
: No special channel type
Byte 31 to Next channel-related diagnostics message
(Allocation as for byte 28 to 30) Byte 33
0 0 0
0x80 GSD
0x83 OM SIMOCODE pro
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 12-13
Alarms
Alarms - diagnostic alarm
Device errors or parameter errors are alarm sources for diagnostic alarms.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a diagnostic alarm, the OB 82 diagnostic
alarm is started in the SIMATIC-S7.
Diagnostic alarm - configuration
The diagnostic alarm is configured as follows:
Figure 12-7: Configuration of the diagnostic alarm
The first byte of the block for diagnostic alarms can be moved by 3 or
6 bytes depending on the number of blocks for the channel-related diagno-
stics.
You will find a detailed description of the information contained in data
record 1 in chapter B.2 "Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnostics".
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 = 0x14
Length of the diagnostic alarm
including header byte 9 (= 20 bytes)
7 0
0x01
7 0
x
0x00
Slot number
Diagnostic alarm
GSD (device data):
OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04
0x01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Byte 28+n
Byte 29+n
Byte 30+n
Byte 31+n
Byte 32+n
Byte 48+n
Contents of data record 1
n = 0; 3; 6
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Alarms - process alarm
Process messages, warnings and errors are alarm sources for process
alarms.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a process alarm, the OB 40 process alarm
is started in the SIMATIC-S7.
Process alarm - configuration
The process alarm is configured as follows:
Figure 12-8: Configuration of the process alarm
The first byte of the block for process alarms can be moved by 3 or 6 bytes
depending on the number of blocks for the channel-related diagnostics.
The detailed messages can be found in chapter A.5 "Detailed Events of the
Slave Diagnostics".
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 = 0x14
Length of the process alarm
including header byte 9 (= 20 bytes)
7 0
7 0
x
0x00
Slot number
Process alarm
GSD (device data):
OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04
0x01
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Byte 28+n
Byte 29+n
Byte 30+n
Byte 31+n
Byte 32+n
Byte 48+n
Detailed messages
n = 0; 3; 6
7 6 5 0 Bit number
0x02
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 12-15
12.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems
12.4.1 Slave Modes of Operation
The following table shows an overview of the slave modes of operation
which SIMOCODE pro can be operated with on the class 1 master:
Table 12-8: Slave modes of operation of SIMOCODE pro
12.4.2 Preparing the Data Transfer
A connection according to Table 12-8: Slave modes of operation of
SIMOCODE pro as well as the setting of the PROFIBUS-DP address are
required for communication with the class 1 master (OLC).
See chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address" for more informa-
tion about setting the address.
SIMOCODE pro
connected as:
Class 1 master
DP master
manufacturer-
independent,
without DPV1 alarms
DP master
manufacturer-
independent,
with DPV1 alarms S7 master
• DPV1 slave
via GSD (device
data)
• Cyclic data transfer
• Standard diagno-
stics
• Status messages
• Parameterization
start-up (only BU1)
• Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records (if sup-
ported by the
master)
• Cyclic data transfer
• Standard diagno-
stics
• Status messages
• Process and diagno-
stic alarm
• Parameterization
start-up (only BU1)
• Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records
• Cyclic data transfer
• Standard diagno-
stics
• Status messages
• Process and diagno-
stic alarm
• Parameterization
start-up (only BU1)
• Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records
• S7 slave via
OM
SIMOCODE pro
— — • Cyclic data transfer
• Standard diagno-
stics
• Process and diagno-
stic alarm
• Parameterization
start-up
• Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12.4.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 Slave via GSD in the
Configuration Software
SIMOCODE pro is connected as a standard slave in your system via the
GSD file.
You can download the GSD file
• From the Internet under http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_d/gsd ( -> Product
Support)
• Via a modem under the telephone number +49 (0)911 737972.
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro C :
• SI0180FD.GSG (German)
• SI0180FD.GSE (English).
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro V :
• SI1180FD.GSG (German)
• SI1180FD.GSE (English).
Attention
If you want to use the complete functionality of SIMOCODE pro (e.g.
timestamping), your configuration tool must support GSD files - Rev.5 such
as e.g. STEP7 V5.3 and higher.
The following table describes how to integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7
and SIMOCODE pro from the hardware catalog.
Table 12-9: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as DPV1 slave via GSD in the Configuration Software
Step STEP 7, from V5.1 + SP2
1 Start STEP 7 and call the menu command
"Extras > Install new GSD file" in the HW configuration.
2 In the following dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm
with "OK" --> The field device is displayed in the hardware catalog in the
"PROFIBUS DP" directory under "Further field devices > Switching devices
> SIMOCODE pro".
3 Insert "SIMOCODE pro C" or "SIMOCODE pro V" on the PROFIBUS.
4 Ony for SIMOCODE pro V:
SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or
basic type 2). See chapter 12.3.1 "Cyclic Data".
Insert the desired basic type "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2" as a module.
5 Check the set DP alarm mode
(DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the enable of the DPV-1 alarms in the proper-
ties of the DP slave.
These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostic data and the
alarms (see chapter 12.5 "Evaluating Diagnostic Data" and
chapter 12.8 "Timestamping").
6 Ony for SIMOCODE pro C:
It is possible to set the device parameters which are automatically trans-
mitted to SIMOCODE pro during every start-up in the object properties
under "Parameterization > Device-specific parameters" (see chapter 12.7.3
"Starting up Parameter Data").
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 12-17
12.4.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM Object (DPV-1 Slave via
GSD) in STEP7-HW Config
SIMOCODE pro can be integrated as a PDM-Objekt in the STEP7-
HW Config as of version 6.0 + SP1 of the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device
Manager) software. The PDM option "Integration in STEP 7" is required for
this.
The following table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro as a
PDM objekt in the STEP7-HW Config from the hardware catalog.
Table 12-10: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM object (DPV-1 slave via GSD)
in STEP7-HW Config
Step STEP 7, from V5.1 + SP2
1 Start STEP 7 and call the "HW Config".
2 To integrate SIMOCODE pro as a PDM object, navigate in the hardware
catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP > Switching devices" directory.
3 Insert
"SIMOCODE pro C (PDM)" or
"SIMOCODE pro V (PDM)" on the PROFIBUS.
Ony for SIMOCODE pro V:
SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or
basic type 2). See chapter 12.3.1 "Cyclic Data".
Insert the desired basic type "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2" as a module.
4 Check the set DP alarm mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the enable of the
DPV-1 alarms in the properties of the DP slave.
These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostic data and the
alarms (see chapter 12.5 "Evaluating Diagnostic Data" and chapter 12.8
"Timestamping").
5 Start SIMATIC PDM to create the device parameters by double clicking on
the slave symbol (see chapter 12.7.2 "SIMATIC PDM").
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12.4.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 Slave via OM SIMOCODE pro
The "OM SIMOCODE pro" software must be installed to utilize the advan-
tages of SIMOCODE ES Professional to parameterize SIMOCODE pro from
the STEP7-HW Config. OM SIMOCODE pro is included in the scope of deli-
very of the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software.
Install the corresponding software.
The follwoing table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro in
the STEP7-HW Config from the hardware catalog.
Table 12-11: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 Slave via OM SIMOCODE pro
Step STEP 7
1 Start STEP 7 and call the "HW Config".
2 To integrate SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave, navigate in the hardware
catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP > Switching devices > Motor Management
System" directory.
3 Insert
SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro V (basic type 1) or
SIMOCODE pro V (basic type 2) on the PROFIBUS.
Ony for SIMOCODE pro V:
SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or
basic type 2). See chapter 12.3.1 "Cyclic Data".
Insert the desired basic type "basic type 1" oder "basic type 2"
as module.
4 Start the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software to create the device
parameters with the "Parameters" button under "Parameters" in the object
properties of slot 4 of this S7 slave. The parameters created are accepted
in STEP 7 and are automatically transmitted to SIMOCODE pro for every
start-up (see chapter 12.7.3 "Starting up Parameter Data").
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 12-19
12.5 Evaluating Diagnostic Data
The way in which the diagnostic data is read out depends on which
DP master system you have integrated in SIMOCODE pro and how the inte-
gration was carried out (see chapter 12.4 "Integration of SIMOCODE pro in
the DP master systems").
12.5.1 SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD
The DP master with DPV1 alarm support (DPV1 alarm mode) (e.g. all newer
SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)
The diagnostic data is transmitted and evaluated via diagnostic alarms in DP
master systems with DPV1 alarm support.
A precondition is that the alarms in the PROFIBUS configuration tool (dia-
gnostic alarms, process alarms) are enabled.
You can ascertain in which DP alarm mode the integration has been caried
out and whether the alarms are enabled using the configuration tool in the
properties of the DP slave. In SIMATIC STEP 7 this is carried out in HW-Con-
fig via the properties of the DP slave.
• Response and process in STEP 7
A diagnostic alarm (OB82) is triggered in the CPU for every new diagnosis of
a device error, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every new
diagnosis of porcess faults/warnings/events. If the OB 82 or the OB 40 is not
programmed, the CPU goes into the "STOP" mode.
• Alarms from a DPV1 slave received with STEP 7
The alarms are read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with the SFB 54 "RALRM".
The data region which is addressed with the SFB 54 via the "AINFO" parame-
ter contains written alarm information in section "Diagnostic alarm - configura-
tion" and in section "Process alarm - configuration" in chapter 12.3.2 "Diagno-
stic Data and Alarms". The first byte which is read corresponds to byte 28.
Note
The interface of the SFB 54 "RALRM" is identical to the interface of the FB
"RALRM" as defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline PROFIBUS Communica-
tion and Proxy Function Blocks according to IEC 61131-3" standard.
You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.
The DP master without DPV1 Alarm Support (DPV1 Alarm Mode) (e.g. all newer
SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP Master Systems)
The SIMOCODE pro diagnostic data can be evaluated via device-specific
diagnostics (status messages) as well as channel-related diagnostics as part
of extended diagnostics in DP master systems (see chapter 12.3.3 "Diagno-
stic alarm - configuration").
You can ascertain in which DP alarm mode the integration has been carried
out using the configuration tool in the properties of the DP slave.
The device-specific diagnostics contain detailed information about
faults, warnings and events which are recorded by the process via
SIMOCODE pro, while information about faults which concern the hardware
of the device are transmitted via the channel-related diagnostics.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
• Response and process in STEP 7:
The OB 82 in the CPU is started for every new diagnosis (diagnosis of device
errors, diagnosis of process faults/warnings/events). If the OB 82 is not pro-
grammed, the CPU goes into the "STOP" mode.
• Reading out the slave diagnostics with STEP 7:
It can be ascertained which DP slave has transmitted diagnostic data by eva-
luating the start information of the OB82 ("OB82_MDL_ADDR" variable).
OB82_MDL_ADDR corresponds to the configured diagnostic address of the
slave in the HW Config. The diagnostic data is then read e.g. in the cyclic part
of the user program with the SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG".
The diagnostic data which is read with the SFC 13 corresponds to the confi-
guration described in chapter 12.3.3 "Diagnostic alarm - configuration".
You will find further information about SFC 13 in the STEP7 online help.
12.5.2 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES
The diagnostic data about the diagnostic alarms and process alarms is trans-
mitted and evaluated during the integration of SIMOCODE pro as an
S7 slave.
DP masters which are operated in "DPV1" DP mode (e.g. all newer SIMATIC S7-300/
400 DP master systems)
Response and process in STEP 7:
A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new diagnosis
of a device error, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every
new diagnosis of process faults/warnings/events. If the OB 82 or the OB 40
is not programmed, the CPU goes into the "STOP" mode.
• Alarms from a DPV1 slave received with STEP 7:
The alarms are read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with the SFB 54 "RALRM".
The data region which is addressed with the SFB 54 via the "AINFO" parame-
ter contains written alarm information in section "Diagnostic alarm - configura-
tion" and in section "Process alarm - configuration" in chapter 12.3.2 "Diagno-
stic Data and Alarms". The first byte which is read corresponds to byte 28.
You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.
DP masters which are operated in "S7 compatible" DP mode (e.g. all newer SIMATIC
S7-300/400 DP master systems)
Response and process in STEP 7:
A diagnostic alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new diagnosis
of a device error, whereas a process alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every
new diagnosis of process faults/warnings/events. If the OB 82 or the OB 40
is not programmed, the CPU goes into the "STOP" mode.
You will find more information about device errors in the start information of
the OB 82 in the "OB82_MDL_DEFECT" variable.
The data written in the bytes 32 to 35 of the process alarm is contained in
the "OB40_POINT_ADDR" variable in the start information of the OB 40 (see
section "Diagnostic alarm - configuration" in chapter 12.3.2 "Diagnostic Data and
Alarms"). The reading of all diagnostics can e.g. be initiated from the OB 40,
while the complete diagnostic data record 92 is read e.g. in the cyclic user
program with the SFC 59 "RD_REC".
You will find further information about SFC 59 in the STEP7 online help.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 12-21
12.6 Data Records
Data records contain additional information about the DP slave which can
only be read or partly written.
These data records can be accessed for reading and writing via cyclic DPV1
services. This makes it possible, for example, to operate, monitor and para-
meterize SIMOCODE pro.
You can use these functions if they are supported by the DP master. You will
find an overview of the data records available from SIMOCODE pro in chap-
ter B "Data Formats and Data Records".
Unlike access to cyclic I/O data, special function blocks must be started in
the user program in the PLC for access to the DPV1 data records.
Access to data records in STEP 7
Reading and writing access to data records is gained by starting the system
functions SFC 59 "RD_REC" and SFC 58 "WR_REC" or at the CPU which sup-
ports the "DPV1" mode with the system function blocks SFB 52 "RDREC"
and SFB 53 "WRREC".
Note
The interface of the SFB 52 "RDREC" and the SFB 53 "WRREC" is identical to
the FB "RDREC" and "WRREC" as defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline
PROFIBUS Communication and Proxy Function Blocks according to IEC
61131-3" standard.
You will find further information about SFB and SFC in the STEP7 online
help.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12.7 Parameterization via PROFIBUS
12.7.1 SIMOCODE ES Professional
With SIMOCODE ES Professional you can parameterize all the
SIMOCODE pro devices which are connected to the same PROFIBUS DP
network from a central location. Parameter data which has been previously
created with the software can therefore be transmitted directly via
PROFIBUS DP to SIMOCODE pro.
Note
A PC with a system connection for PROFIBUS (e.g. SIMATIC NET CP 5512
or CP 5611) is required to carry out online functions via PROFIBUS DP, e.g.
transmitting of SIMOCODE pro parameters.
The above-mentioned system connections for PROFIBUS are operated toge-
ther with SIMOCODE ES Professional as a class 2 master and use acyclic
DPV1 communication functions for the communication with
SIMOCODE pro.
Attention
The start-up parameter block (device parameter > bus parameter) must
always be set for this form of parameterization to avoid overwritting the
device parameters with any existing parameter data at start-up.
12.7.2 SIMATIC PDM
The standard version of SIMATIC PDM (PDM Basic) provides you with
a comparable functionality for parameterization of SIMOCODE pro via
PROFIBUS as with SIMOCODE ES Professional.
The following additional functions are available with the PDM option "Inte-
gration in STEP 7":
• "Offline saving" of SIMOCODE pro parameter data in the STEP7 project and
manual transmission (no automatic transmission of parameter data at start-
up!)
• "Routing via S7 stations".
Example: Parameterization of all SIMOCODE pro devices from a central engi-
neering station, together with hardware components which provide a data
record gateway (CP443-5 Extended, IE/PB link), also in connection with diffe-
rent networks.
Attention
The start-up parameter block (device parameter > bus parameter) must
always be set for this form of parameterization to avoid overwritting the
device parameters with any existing parameter data at start-up.
You will find further information about SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC-PDM
manual.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 12-23
12.7.3 Starting up Parameter Data
For every start-up of SIMOCODE pro on PROFIBUS DP, parameters are
transmitted to the device.
Depending on the master module and the type of integration used, either
standard parameters or standard parameters and device-specific parame-
ters (SIMOCODE pro parameters) are transmitted. The parameters are
saved in the PLC or in the DP master and are transmitted automatically to
the DP slave at the systemstart-up.
You can set the device-specific parameters
• with the configuration tool when the GSD (BU1 only) is loaded, e.g. with
STEP7-HW Config. This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C. The
SIMOCODE pro parameters are created by setting the device-specific para-
meters in the slave properties.
• in the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software during the integration of
SIMOCODE pro in STEP7 HW Konfig as a S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro.
This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V. You can
start the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software to conveniently create the
parameterization from STEP7-HW Konfig with the button in the "Parameter"
tab in the object properties of slot 4.
Attention
In order to be able to carry out the device parameterization at start-up, the
start-up parameter block (device parameter > bus parameter) must remain
unset.
SIMOCODE pro is then parameterized with the device-specific parameters
stored in the DP master, and any existing parameters in the device are over-
written.
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12.8 Timestamping
Prerequisite:
To use SIMOCODE pro V timestamping, the DP master used must support
the time synchronization functions via PROFIBUS (e g. DP master interface
connections for SIMATIC S7-400) or a time master (e.g. SICLOCK) must be
used.
Process in STEP 7
The time synchronization activation for SIMOCODE pro V is carried out in
STEP 7 HW Konfig in the slave properties unter "Time synchronization".
Attention
The set synchronization interval must correspond to the configuration of the
time master.
In SIMOCODE pro the transmission of time-stamped information occurs in
analogy to the transmission with SIMATIC S7 IM 153-2.
For this reason, the "FB 62 TIMESTMP" function block for the transmission
of time-stamped messages from the "Standard Library > Miscellaneous
Blocks" library can be used for further processing of time-stamped informa-
tion in the CPU.
Note
The "LADDR" parameter contains the diagnostic address of the DP slave
from STEP 7 HW Konfig.
LADDR2 contains the diagnostic address of slot 2 of SIMOCODE pro in the
DP mode "DPV1" of the DP master (integrated via OM SIMOCODE pro). In
all other configurations LADDR2 contains the same address as LADDR.
You will find further information about FB 62 in the STEP7 online help.
Timestamping in the fault memory
See chapter 10.9 "Timestamping".
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 12-25
Communication
SIMOCODE pro
12-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-1

Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces 13
In this chapter
This chapter contains information about how the individual SIMOCODE pro
components are mounted and wired.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• mechanics
• electricians
• maintenance and service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13.1 General Information about Mounting and Wiring
Safety instructions
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electrical shock and
burns. Disconnect the device from the system before beginning work.
Attention
Follow the information contained in the operating manual.
Fixing lugs for screw attachments
Attention
For technical reasons, there are two sorts of mounting lugs for screw attach-
ments:
For basic units and expansion modules: Order No. 3RP1903
For current measuring modules,
45 mm and 55 mm width: Order No. 3RP1900-0B
Removable terminals
Attention
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and only fit in a particular
position!
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-3
13.2 Mounting
13.2.1 Basic Units and Expansion Modules
You can attach these system components in the following manner:
• Snap-on mounting onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail without requiring
tools
• Snap-on mounting of the basic units onto current measuring modules with a
width of 45 mm and 55 mm (up to 100 A) with integrated standard mounting
rail
• Screw attachment with mounting lugs (order No: 3RP1903) and screws on a
level surface.
These mounting lugs are only suitable for basic units and expansion modules!
Figure 13-1: Mounting the basic unit
SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro V
with increased mounting depth
Snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rails
Screw attachment
3RP1903
Ø 5 mm
Expansion module
Ø 5 mm
3RP1903
Snap-on mounting onto the current measuring module
e.g. 45 mm wide current measuring module with BU1
Standard mounting rails
BU1 BU2
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13.2.2 Current Measuring Modules
You can attach these system components in the following manner:
• Current measuring module up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or
screw attachment with mounting lugs (order No: 3RP1903-0B) and screws on
a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for the current measu-
ring modules (and current/voltage measuring modules)! For the current
measuring modules up to 25 A you also require an additional 25 mm long spa-
cer.
• Current measuring module up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or
screw attachment.
• Current measuring module up to 630 A: Screw attachment.
Figure 13-2: Mounting the current measuring modules
3RP1900-0B
3UF7000-1AU00-0
3UF7101-1AA00-0
25 mm spacer
3RP1900-0B
Snap-on mounting
3UF7102-1AA00-0
Screw attachment
45 mm width
55 mm width
3UF7103-1AA00-0 3UF7103-1BA00-0 3UF7104-1BA00-0
0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A 10 A up to 100 A
20 A up to 200 A 20 A up to 200 A 63 A up to 630 A
Screw attachment
Snap-on mounting or
Screw attachment
Snap-on mounting or
Screw attachment
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-5
13.2.3 Current/voltage Measuring Modules
You can attach these system components in the following manner:
• Current/voltage measuring modules up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail
mounting or screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order No: 3RP1903-0B)
and screws on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for the
current/voltage measuring modules (and current measuring modules)! For the
current/voltage measuring modules up to 25 A you also require an additional
25 mm long spacer.
• Current/voltage measuring modules up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail
mounting or screw attachment.
• Current/voltage measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw attachment.
Figure 13-3: Mounting the current/voltage measuring modules
3UF7101-1AA00-0
3UF7101-1AA00-0
25 mm spacer
3RP1900-0B
Snap-on mounting
3UF7101-1AA00-0
Screw attachment
45 mm width
55 mm width
3UF7101-1AA00-0 3UF7104-1BA00-0 3UF7104-1BA00-0
0.3 A up to 3 A
2.4 A up to 25 A 10 A up to 100 A
20 A up to 200 A 20 A up to 200 A 63 A up to 630 A
Screw attachment
Snap-on mounting or
Screw attachment
Snap-on mounting or
Screw attachment
3RP1900-0B
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13.2.4 Operator Panel
The operator panel is designed to be installed e.g. in the front panel of
motor control centers or in switchgear cabinet doors. For this, carry out the
following steps:
Table 13-1: Procedure for mounting an operator panel
Figure 13-4: Mounting the operator panel
Step Description
1 Create a cutout, e.g. in the front panel or switchgear cabinet door. See dia-
gram for dimensions.
2 Place the operator panel in the cutout.
3 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel.
4 Lock the operator panel in position by tightly screwing the four screws of the
mounting bracket.
4x
90
+0.5
3
0
+
0
.
5
Front panel
Cutout
Switchgear
cabinet door
Operator panel Mounting bracket
etc.
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-7
13.3 Wiring
13.3.1 Basic Units and Expansion Modules
Basic units and expansion modules have removable terminals. You do not
have to detach the wiring to replace the components!
Figure 13-5: Removable terminals for basic units and expansion modules
Attention
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and only fit in a particular
position!
Cables
The cable cross section is the same for all devices. The following table
shows the cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the
cables for the removable terminals:
Table 13-2: Cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables
Removable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque
TORQUE: 7 IN LB - 10.3 IN LB
0.8 Nm -1.2 Nm
Strip lengths Cable cross-section
2x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/
1x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
2x 0.5 mm
2
-0.06 in
2
/
1x 0.5 mm
2
-0.10 in
2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
Removable terminals
Basic units Expansion modules
A
D
C
A, C, D: coded
A
C
D
PZ2/
Ø 5 mm - 6 mm
10
Solid
10 Stranded
with/without with/without
end sleeves
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Supplying the inputs of the basic unit
You have three possibilities for supplying the inputs:
• a): 24 V DC internal.
• b): 24 V DC external. However, input 3 is the reference potential, i.e.
3 inputs are available.
• c): 24 V DC external. Only possible for the basic unit with a supply
voltage of 24 V DC!
Figure 13-6: 24 V DC for supplying the inputs
All inputs work reaction-free, i.e. the signal states on the neighboring inputs
do not influence each other.
Basic unit (BU)
BU - inputs
1
2
3
4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
24 V DC internal, 4 inputs usable
Basic unit (BU)
BU - inputs
1
2
3
4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
24 V DC external, 3 inputs usable
Basic unit (BU)
BU - inputs
1
2
3
4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
24 V DC external, 4 inputs usable
A1
A2
a) b) c)
Only possible for the basic unit with a
supply voltage of 24 V DC !
24 V DC
(not usable)
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-9
Basic unit pin assignment
The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Table 13-3: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the basic unit
Procedure for wiring the removable terminals of basic units
Carry out the following steps:
Table 13-4: Wiring the detachable terminals of the basic unit
Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
1 Roots of relay outputs 1 and 2
2 Relay output OUT1
3 Relay output OUT2
4 Digital input IN3
5 Digital input IN4
T2 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
6 Relay output OUT3
7 Relay output OUT3
8 24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4
9 Digital input IN 1
10 Digital input IN2
T1 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
Lower terminals
A1 Pin 1 supply voltage
A2 Pin 2 supply voltage
A PROFIBUS DP Pin A
B PROFIBUS DP Pin B
SPE/PE Shielded/PE
Step Description
1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.
2 If you want to use terminals A/B for PROFIBUS DP, place the PROFIBUS DP
cable-shielding on the SPE/PE terminal.
Attention
The A/B terminals are an alternative to the 9-pole SUB-D connection! Baud
rates up to 1.5 MBit/s are possible!
3 Connect the system shielding to the SPE/PE terminal.
1 OUT1 2 .2 3 4 IN3 IN4 5 T2
OUT3 7 8 9 IN1 IN210 T1 6
DEVICE
BUS
GEN. FAULT
ϑ
TEST/
RESET
P
R
O
F
I
B
U
S

D
P
A1 A2 A B SPE/PE
24 V
SIMOCODE pro
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example for connecting the terminals of the basic unit
Figure 13-7: Example for connecting the terminals of the basic unit
Device
Bus
Gen. Fault
9 10 4 5 8
1
2
3
6
7
PROFIBUS DP
SPE/PE A B
a)
b)
T1 T2
A1 A2
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 24 V
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
max. 1.5 MBd
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-11
Supplying the inputs of the digital module
• Digital module with 24 V DC input supply
• Digital module with 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply.
Figure 13-8: Supplying the inputs of the digital module
Digital module pin assignment
The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Table 13-5: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module
Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
20 Roots of relay outputs 1 and 2
21 Relay output OUT1
22 Relay output OUT2
23 Digital input IN1
24 Digital input IN2
25 N/M for IN1 to IN4
Lower terminals
26 Digital input IN3
27 Digital input IN4
PE PE
24 V DC external 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC external
Digital module (DM)
DM - inputs
1
2
3
4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
N/M
Digital module (DM)
DM - inputs
1
2
3
4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
N/M
~
20 21 22 OUT1 .2
23 24 25 IN2
READY
26 27 PE IN3 IN4
IN1
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example for connecting the terminals of the digital module
Figure 13-9: Example for connecting the terminals of the digital module
Ready
23 24 26 27
20
21
22
PE
25
+

~
AC
DC
N/M IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4
OUT1
OUT2
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-13
Earth-fault module pin assignment
The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Table 13-6: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the earth-fault module
Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
40 Input C1 - Summation current trans-
former
43 Input C2 - Summation current trans-
former
Lower terminals
PE PE
40
READY
C1
43 C2
EM
3UF7 500–1AA00–0
G/JJMMTT
*
Exx
*
PE
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example for connecting the terminals of the earth-fault module
Figure 13-10: Example for connecting the terminals of the earth-fault module
*) Cable shielding recommended.
Ready
C1
PE
3UL22
Z1
C2
40 43
L1
L2
L3
N
Z2
*)
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-15
Temperature module pin assignment
The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Table 13-7: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the temperature module
You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors.
• 2-wire temperature sensors:
Bridge the T2 terminals with the T3 terminal.
• 3-wire temperature sensors.
Doubly assign terminals 56 and 57 if three sensors are used.
Connectio
n
Assignment
Upper terminals
50 Input T3, temperature sensor 1
51 Input T3, temperature sensor 2
52 Input T3, temperature sensor 3
53 Input T3, temperature sensor 1
54 Input T3, temperature sensor 2
55 Input T3, temperature sensor 3
Lower terminals
56 Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3
57 Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3
PE Shielded/PE
READY
TM
3UF7 700–1AA00–0
G/JJMMTT
*
Exx
*
50 1T3 51 2T3 52 3T3
53 1T2 54 2T2 55 3T2
56 T1 57 PE
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example for connecting the terminals of the temperature module
Figure 13-11: Example for connecting the terminals of the temperature module
NTC Type: B 57227-K333-A1
J
R Q 63022-K7182-S1
Ready
T1
PE
1T2
56 57
1T3
1)
ϑ
3 x max.
53
1T2
T1
50
1T3
54
2T2
51
2T3
55
3T2
52
3T3
2)
ϑ
3 x max.
T1
T1 2T2 2T3
T1 3T2 3T3
T1 1T2 1T3
T1 2T2 2T3
T1 3T2 3T3
*) *) *) Cable shielding recommended.
Temperature sensor NTC:
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-17
Analog module pin assignment
The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Table 13-8: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the analog module
Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
30 Analog input IN1+
31 Analog input IN2+
33 Analog input IN1+
34 Analog input IN2+
Lower terminals
36 Analog output OUT+
37 Analog output OUT+
PE PE
READY
AM
3UF7 400–1AA00–0
G/JJMMTT
*
Exx
*
33 IN1- 34IN2-
36 +OUT- PE 37
30 IN1 31IN2+
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example for connecting the terminals of the analog module
Figure 13-12: Example for connecting the terminals of the analog module
Procedure for wiring the removable terminals of expansion modules
Carry out the following steps:
Table 13-9: Wiring the removable terminals of the expansion module
Step Description
1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.
2 Connect the system shielding to the PE terminal.
Ready
PE
36 37
30
IN1+
33
IN1-
31
IN2+
34
IN2-
L+
+
-
IN1 IN1-
R
L
R
L
< 500 Ohm
+
-
I
IN
(0/4 mA - 20 mA)
OUT+ OUT-
I
OUT
(0/4 A - 20 mA)
IN2+ IN2-
2 x max.
*)
M
*) *) Cable shielding recommended for up to 30 m,
Cable shielding required for over 30 m
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-19
13.3.2 Current Measuring Modules
The size of the motor current determines the size of the corresponding cur-
rent measuring module that should be chosen for current measuring:
• Push-through system up to 200 A: The cables of the 3 phases are passed
through the push-through openings.
• Rail connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection
to Siemens contactors.
The following table shows the different current measuring modules:
Attention
Pay attention to the correct assignment and the correct routing direction
when connecting or routing the cables of the single phases of the main cir-
cuit!
Follow the information in the operating instructions!
Current measuring module Main current connections
3UF7000-1AU00-0
0.3 A -3 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 7.5 mm
Push-through system
3UF7101-1AA00-0
2.4 A - 25 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7102-1AA00-0
10 A - 100 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 14 mm
3UF7103-1AA00-0
20 A -200 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 25 mm
3UF7103-1BA00-0
20 A -200 A
Pin cross section:
16 mm² - 95 mm²,
AWG 5 to 3/0
Rail connection
system
3UF7104-1BA00-0
63 A -630 A
Pin cross section:
50 mm² - 240 mm²,
AWG 1/0 kcmil to
500 kcmil
Table 13-10: Current measuring modules
Ø
L1
L2
L3
N
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
M
~ 3
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13.3.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
The size of the motor current determines the size of the corresponding cur-
rent/voltage measuring module that should be chosen for current/voltage
measuring:
• Push-through system up to 200 A: The cables of the 3 phases are passed
through the push-through openings.
• Rail connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection
to Siemens contactors.
The following figure shows the different current/voltage measuring modu-
les:
Current/voltage measuring module Connection
Main circuit
3UF7101-1AA00-0
0.3 A - 3 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 7.5 mm
Push-through system
3UF7111-1AA00-0
2.4 A -25 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7101-1AA00-0
10 A - 100 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 14 mm
3UF7101-1AA00-0
20 A - 200 A
Ø Push-through
openings: 25 mm
3UF7113-1BA00-0
20 A up to 200 A
Pin cross section:
16 mm² - 95 mm²,
AWG 6 to 3/0
Rail connection
system
3UF7104-1BA00-0
63 A - 630 A
Pin cross section:
50 mm² - 240 mm²,
AWG 1/0 kcmil to
500 kcmil
Table 13-11: Current/voltage measuring modules
L1
L2
L3
N
M
~ 3
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
L1 L2 L3
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-21
Safety instructions
Attention
Measuring of the measured values relating to voltage or power:
Connect the main circuit L1, L2, L3 using a 3-core, short-circuit proof cable
with the terminals (L1, L2, L3) of the removable terminals on the current/
voltage measuring module.
Attention
Pay attention to the correct assignment of the phases on the current/voltage
measuring modules and the correct routing direction when connecting or
routing the cables of the single phases of the main circuit! Follow the infor-
mation in the operating instructions!
Removable terminals
The following table shows the cable cross sections, strip lengths and tighte-
ning torques of the cables for the removable terminals:
Table 13-12: Cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables
The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Fig. 13-13: Pin assignment of the terminals of the current/voltage measuring modules
Caution
The phases L1 and L3 are interchanged at the upper/lower terminals!
Removable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque
TORQUE: 7 IN LB - 10.3 IN LB
0.8 Nm -1.2 Nm
Strip lengths Cable cross section
2x 0,5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/
1x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
2x 0.5 mm
2
- 1.5 mm
2
/
1x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
PZ2/Ø 5 mm -
6 mm
10
Solid
10 Stranded
with/without with/without
end sleeves
L1, L2, L3:
Terminals for connecting the 3-core
cable of the main circuit
Lower: Upper
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13.3.4 Current Measuring with an External Current Transformer (Interposing
Transformer)
Description
SIMOCODE pro can be operated with external current transformers. The
secondary cables of the current transformer are looped through the push-
through openings and short-circuited. The secondary current of the external
current transformer is the primary current of the current measuring module
of SIMOCODE pro.
Attention
If the rated current is used in the maid circuit, the secondary current of the
current transformer must be within the setting range of the current measu-
ring module!
Figure 13-14: Current measuring with an external 3UF18 current transformer
Transformation ratio
The transformation ratio is calculated using the following formula:
Transformation ratio =
In the following examples, the displayed actual current does not need to be
converted, even when an interposing transformer is used, because
SIMOCODE pro only outputs the proportional value in relation to the para-
meterized set current le.
M
3~
L1L2L3
K1
K2
K3
L
Main circuit
3UF 71 current
measuring
3UF18 current transformer
3UF 70
Secondary circuit
module
basic unit
Primary current (external current transformer)
Secondary current x Number of loops n
(ext. current transformer) (current measuring module)
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-23
Technical data of the current transformer
• Secondary current: 1 A
• Frequency: 50 Hz/60 Hz
• Transformer rating: Recommended > 2.5 VA, depending on the secondary
current and the cable length
• Overcurrent factor: 5P10 or 10P10
• Accuracy class: 1
Example 1:
• 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
– Primary current: 820 A at nominal load
– Secondary current: 1 A
• SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 current measuring module,
Set current 0.3 to 3 A;
This means:
– the secondary current of the current transformer is 1 A at the rated load
and is therefore within the 0.3 to 3 A setting range of the current
measuring module used
– the set current le to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 1 A.
Figure 13-15: Example (1 of 2) for current measuring with an external 3UF18 current transformer
M
3~
L1 L2 L3
K1
K2
K3
L
Main circuit
3UF 71 current
measuring module
3UF18 current transformer
3UF 70 basic
Secondary circuit
Primary current at
nominal load: 820 A
Secondary current: 1 A Set current Ie: 1 A
Setting range:
0.3 A - 3 A
unit
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example 2:
• 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
– Primary current: 205 A at nominal load
– Secondary current: 0.25 A
• SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 current measuring module,
set current 0.3 to 3 A;
This means:
– The secondary current of the current transformer is 0.25 A at the rated
load and is therefore not within the 0.3 A to 3 A setting range of the
current measuring module used
– The secondary current must be boosted by multiple looping through of
the secondary cables through the push-through openings of the current
measuring module. For double looping,
2 x 0.25 A = 0.5 A
– The set current le to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 0.5 A.
Figure 13-16: Example (2 of 2) for current measuring with an external 3UF18 current transformer
M
3~
L1 L2 L3
K1
K2
K3
L
Main circuit
3UF18 current transformer
3UF 70 basic
Secondary circuit
Primary current at
nominal load: 205 A
Secondary current: 2 x 0.25 A Set current Ie: 0.5 A
3UF 71 current
measuring module
Setting range:
0.3 A - 3 A
Double-looping through of the secondary cables
unit
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-25
13.4 System Interfaces
13.4.1 General
Please observe the following notes:
• SIMOCODE pro system components are connected to each other via the
system interfaces.
• There are various different lengths of connecting cables that can be used to
join the system components.
• The system is always expanded from the basic unit. Basic units have 2
system interfaces:
– Bottom: For outgoing connection cables leading from BU1 to the current
measuring module.
– Front: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module
or operator panel and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing
plugs.
• Current measuring modules have one system interface:
– Bottom or front incoming connecting cable leading from the basic unit.
• Expansion modules have 2 interfaces on the front.
– Left: For incoming connecting cable leading from the upstream expan-
sion module or basic unit BU2.
– Right: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module
or operator panel and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing
plugs.
• The operator panel has 2 system interfaces:
– Front: For PC cables, memory modules and addressing plugs.
– Rear side: For incoming connecting cable leading from the upstream
expansion module or basic unit.
• System interfaces that are not used are closed with a cover.
Attention:
Applies to system interfaces on operator panels and door adapters (IP54
degree of protection): Press the cover firmly against its stop in the socket
when using for the first time!
Figure 13-17: Closing the system interface with the system interface cover on the door adapter and
the operator panel
0
0
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example
The following figure shows the configuration for SIMOCODE pro V:
Figure 13-18: Example of system interfaces
U
F
-
0
1
1
3
0
SIMOCODE pro V
Basic unit (BU2)
Current measuring
module (IM)
Operator panel (OP)
Expansion module
Expansion modules (DM, AM, EM, TM)
Incoming, from
• Expansion module
• Basic unit BU2
Outgoing, to
• Expansion module
• Operator panel
Incoming, from
• Basic unit
U
F
-
0
1
1
3
0
Operator panel (OP)
Incoming, from
• Upstream expansion module
• Basic unit
Cover
Basic unit (BU)
Outgoing, to
• Current measuring module
Outgoing, to
• Expansion module
• Operator panel
Current measuring module (IM)
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-27
13.4.2 System Interfaces on Basic Units, Expansion Modules, Current Measuring
Modules and Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
The system interfaces are located on the front and bottom of the basic
units. Other system components can be
• joined to them using a connecting cable, e.g. digital modules, current measu-
ring modules
• directly plugged into them, e.g. addressing plugs and memory modules.
Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use.
Attention
Only connect system interfaces when there is no voltage applied!
Figure 13-19: Connecting system components to the system interface
Memory module,
Connecting cable
Expansion modules Basic units
Current measuring modules
2 system
interfaces
System
interface
Connecting cable
System
interfaces
addressing plug
System interface cover
Current/voltage measuring modules
System
interface
Connecting cable
Removable terminals
Removable terminals
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Procedure for joining connecting cables to the system interface
Carry out the following steps:
Table 13-13: Connecting the system interface
Figure 13-20: Procedure for connecting the system interfaces
Safety instructions
Attention
For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be
used for the current measuring module!
Attention
Follow the color coding on the connecting cable (see figure)!
Step Description
1 Place the plug in the plug shaft as straightly as possible. Ensure that the cat-
ches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into place.
For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be
used for the current measuring module!
2 Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use
Connecting
cable
Cover
System interfaces on the
1
2
3
front side and the bottom
Example: SIMOCODE pro C
Catches
Catches
Color-coded
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-29
13.4.3 System Interfaces on the Operator Panel
The operator panel has two system interfaces:
• system interface on the rear. This is normally accessible when an integrated
operator panel is used. The incoming cable leading from the basic unit or an
expansion module is always connected here.
• system interface on the front. This is normally accessible when an integrated
operator panel is used. Components are connected directly when required
and then removed again afterwards.
These can include:
– Memory module
– Addressing plug
– PC cable to connect a PC/programming device
– Cover (if a system interface is not being used).
Figure 13-21: System interfaces on the operator panel
Procedure for joining connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel
Carry out the following steps:
Table 13-14: Connecting system components to the system interface
Attention
In order to ensure Degree of Protection IP54, press the cover firmly against
its stop in the socket when using for the first time (see figure!).
Attention
For the duration of the connecting procedure you can place the cover in one
of the two "park positions" (see Fig. 13-22).
Step Description
1 Place the plug in the plug shaft as straightly as possible. Ensure that the cat-
ches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into place.
The incoming connecting cable is connected to the rear side.
2 Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use
Rear system interface Front system interface
e.g. memory module
Connecting cable
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Figure 13-22: Procedure for joining connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel
Attention
Follow the color coding on the connecting cable (see figure)!
Connecting cable
2
1
1
Catches
Catches
Color coded
Cover
Park pos.
Front Rear side
0
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 13-31
13.5 PROFIBUS DP on a 9-pole SUB-D socket
The PROFIBUS DP can only be connected to the basic unit.
Attention
The 9-pole SUB-D connection is an alternative to A/B terminals!
Procedure for connecting PROFIBUS DP to the basic unit
Carry out the following steps:
Table 13-15: Wiring the removable terminals of the digital module
Figure 13-23: Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the 9-pole SUB-D socket
Step Description
1 Connect the PROFIBUS DP cable with the 9-pole SUB-D plug to the
PROFIBUS DP interface.
Example: SIMOCODE pro C
PROFIBUS DP cable
PROFIBUS DP interface
9-pole
SUB-D plug
9-pole SUB-D socket
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
13-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
13.6 Installation Guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP
Specifications
The key data included in this chapter is valid for Siemens products and
cables.
PROFIBUS user organization (PUO) installation guidelines
For electrical PROFIBUS networks, please also adhere to the
PROFIBUS DMP/FMS installation guidelines from the PROFIBUS user orga-
nization. They contain important information about the cable arrangement
and commissioning of
PROFIBUS networks.
Publisher:
PROFIBUS User Organization e. V.
Haid-und-Neu-Straße 7
76131 Karlsruhe, Germany
Tel.: ++721 / 9658 590
Fax: ++721 / 9658 589
Internet: http://www.profibus.com
Guidelines, Order No. 2.111
Also see the "SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks" manual at
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/1971286.
Application of bus termination modules
The 3UF1900-1K.00 bus termination module is primarily designed for use in
MCC motor feeders. It provides proper bus termination even for removed
MCC plug-in units. The bus termination module can also be utilized when no
(SUB-D) standard plug can be used in the last device on a bus line.
The 3UF1900-1KA00 bus termination module can also be connected to
220/230 V, 380/400 V, 115/120 V or 24 V AC. The 3UF1900-1KB00 version
can also be used for 24 V DC.
Figure 13-24: Bus termination module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 14-1

Commissioning and Servicing 14
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find e.g. information on how SIMOCODE pro is com-
missioned, how components are replaced and how statistics are read.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• commissioners
• mechanics
• maintenance and service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• general basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro e.g. from Chapter 1
• SIMOCODE ES software.
Commissioning and Servicing
SIMOCODE pro
14-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
14.1 General Information about Commissioning and
Servicing
Safety instructions
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electrical shock and
burns. Disconnect the device from the system before beginning work.
Attention
Follow the information contained in the operating manual.
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for commissioning and ser-
vicing:
• SIMOCODE pro is already mounted and wired
• The motor is switched off.
Notes on parameterizing
You can parameterize SIMOCODE pro as follows:
• With the memory module on which the parameters from a basic unit have
already been saved: the memory module is plugged into the system inter-
face. If the memory module is connected to the system interface and the
supply voltage returns to the basic unit, the basic unit is automatically para-
meterized by the memory module. The parameters can also be loaded from
the memory module into the basic unit by pressing the Test/reset button.
• With the SIMOCODE ES software via the serial interface:
The PC/programming device is connected to the system interface with the
PC cable.
• With an automation system and/or SIMOCODE ES software via
PROFIBUS DP: For this, the PROFIBUS DP cable is connected to the
PROFIBUS DP interface of the basic unit.
Possible cases for commissioning
There are 2 possible cases for commissioning:
1. Standard case: SIMOCODE pro was not yet parameterized and has the basic
factory default settings:
When connected to PROFIBUS DP, the "bus" LED flashes green if a
DP master is connected.
2. SIMOCODE pro was already parameterized:
– The parameters were already loaded into the basic unit in advance.
– The parameters from a previous application are still present. Check if
the parameters, e.g. the set current, are correct for the new application.
Change these correspondingly, if necessary.
Commissioning and Servicing
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 14-3
14.2 Commissioning
14.2.1 Sequence of steps
Note the information in the previous chapter "General Information about
Commissioning and Servicing" on page 14-2.
Carry out the following steps to commission SIMOCODE pro:
Table 14-1: Commissioning the basic unit
Figure 14-1: Connecting a PC to the basic unit
Step Description
1 Switch on the supply voltage. In an error-free state, the following LEDS should
light up or flash green:
• "Device" (green) lights up
• "Bus" if PROFIBUS DP is connected (lights up or flashes).
Continue with Step 2.
Otherwise, carry out diagnostics according to the LED display. You will find
further information in chapter "Diagnostics via LED Display" on page 14-5. Try
to rectify the error.
2 If you want to make SIMOCODE pro available on the PROFIBUS DP, set the
PROFIBUS DP address. You will find further information on this in chapter
"Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address" on page 14-4.
3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the current parameterization e.g. with
a PC with the SIMOCODE ES software installed.
For this, connect the PC/programming device to the system interface with the
PC cable (see the figure below).
Attention
For basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro ), only use the system interface on the front!
4 Start SIMOCODE ES.
PC cable,
Order number 3UF7940-0AA00-0
Commissioning and Servicing
SIMOCODE pro
14-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
14.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Carry out the following steps:
Table 14-2: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Carry out the following steps:
Table 14-3: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Step Description
1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.
The switches are numbered.
Example address 21: Put the switches "16"+"4"+"12" in the "ON position".
2 Plug the addressing plug in the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up
yellow.
3 Briefly press the test/reset button. The set address is accepted.
The "Device" LED blinks yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
4 Pull out the addressing plug from the system interface.
Step Description
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2 Start SIMOCODE ES.
3 Open the menu Switchgear > Open online.
4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.
Press OK to confirm.
5 Open the dialog Device parameters> Bus parameters.
6 Select the DP address.
7 Save the data in the basic unit with
Target system > Load to switchgear. The address is set.
Commissioning and Servicing
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 14-5
14.2.3 Diagnostics via LED Display
The basic units and the operating panel have 3 LEDs which display certain
device states:
Table 14-4: Diagnostics via LED display
LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for
errors
Device Device
status
Green Device ready for use —
Green
flickering
Internal error Send back the basic unit
Yellow Memory module or
addressing plug
recognized, test/reset
buttons control the
memory module or
addressing plug

Yellow
flashing
Memory module/
addressing plug read in;
basic factory default
settings configured
(duration: 3 s)

Yellow
flickering
Memory module pro-
grammed (duration: 3 s)

Red Parameterization defec-
tive (also Gen. Fault on)
Parameterize anew and
switch the control
voltage off and on again
Basic unit defective
(also Gen. Fault on)
Exchange
basic unit!
Red
flashing
Memory module,
addressing plug
Expansion module
defective (also Gen.
Fault on - flashing)
Reprogram/replace the
memory module,
replace the expansion
module
Off Supply voltage too low Check if the supply
voltage is connected/
turned on
Bus Bus
status
Off Bus not connected or
bus error
Connect the bus or
check the bus parame-
ters
Green
flashing
Baud rate recognized/
communication with
PC/programming device

Green Communication with
PLC/DCS

Gen.
Fault
Error
status
Red Error present; reset is
saved
Rectify error, e.g. over-
load
Red
flashing
Error present; no reset
saved
Rectify error, e.g. over-
load
Off No error —
Commissioning and Servicing
SIMOCODE pro
14-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
14.3 Servicing
14.3.1 Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance is an important step in avoiding faults and unfore-
seen costs. Industrial plants require regular professional maintenance in
order to e.g. prevent halts in production due to plant downtimes. Preventive
maintenance ensures that all components always work properly.
Reading out the statistical data
SIMOCODE pro provides statistical data which you e.g. can read out with
SIMOCODE ES under Target system > Service data/Statistical data. By
specifying "Motor operating hours" and "Number of starts", for example, you
can decide whether motor and/or motor contactors should be replaced.
Figure 14-2: Reading out statistical data
Commissioning and Servicing
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 14-7
14.3.2 Saving the Parameters
Always save the parameters in the memory module or in a
SIMOCODE ES file. This especially applies if you replace a basic unit or if
you want to transfer data from one basic unit to another.
Saving parameters from the basic unit into the memory module
Carry out the following steps:
Table 14-5: Saving the parameters into the memory module.
Saving parameters from the basic unit into a SIMOCODE ES file
Carry out the following steps:
Table 14-6: Saving parameters into a SIMOCODE ES file
Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit
Carry out the following steps:
Table 14-7: Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit
Attention
When the memory module is plugged in, the parameters are transferred
from the memory module to the basic unit when the supply voltage is swit-
ched on.
Step Description
1 Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up
yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "Test/reset" button
for approx. 3 seconds. The parameters are saved in the memory module. After
successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx.
3 seconds.
2 If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.
Step Description
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2 Start SIMOCODE ES.
3 Open the menu Target system > Load into PC. The parameters are loaded
into the main memory from the basic unit.
4 Click on the menu Switchgear >Save copy as .... The parameters from the
main memory are saved into a SIMOCODE ES file.
Step Description
1 Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up
yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "test/reset" button
for a short period of time. The parameters are saved into the basic unit. After
successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx.
3 seconds.
2 If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.
Commissioning and Servicing
SIMOCODE pro
14-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into a basic unit
Carry out the following steps:
Table 14-8: Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to a basic unit
Step Description
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2 Start SIMOCODE ES.
3 Click on the menu Switchgear > Open. The parameters from the
SIMOCODE ES file are saved in the main memory.
4 Click on the menu Target system > Load into switchgear. The parameters
are loaded from the main memory into the basic unit.
Commissioning and Servicing
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 14-9
14.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro Components
Replacing a basic unit
Carry out the following steps:
Table 14-9: Replacing a basic unit
Replacing an expansion unit
Carry out the following steps:
Table 14-10: Replacing expansion units
Step Description
1 Save the parameters. You will find more information on this in chapter "Saving
the Parameters" on page 14-7.
2 Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic
unit.
3 If necessary, pull out the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable of the
system interface.
4 Remove the removable terminals. You do not need to remove the wiring.
5 Demount the basic unit.
6 Remove the removable terminals of the new basic unit.
7 Mount the new basic unit.
8 Plug in the wired removable terminals.
9 Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.
10 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
11 Save the parameters in the basic unit. You will find more information on this in
chapter "Saving the Parameters" on page 14-7.
12 Switch on the main power for the feeder.
Step Description
1 Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic
unit.
2 If necessary, pull out the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable of the
system interface.
3 Remove the removable terminals. You do not need to remove the wiring.
4 Demount the expansion module.
5 Remove the removable terminals of the new expansion unit.
6 Mount the new expansion module.
7 Plug in the wired removable terminals.
8 Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.
9 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
10 Switch on the main power for the feeder.
Commissioning and Servicing
SIMOCODE pro
14-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage measuring module
Safety instructions
Warning
The main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit
must be switched off before replacing current measuring modules and cur-
rent/voltage measuring modules.
Attention
Follow the information contained in the operating manual!
Attention
You do not have to detach the wiring from the removable terminals to
replace the components!
Carry out the following steps:
Table 14-11: Replacing the current measuring module and the current/voltage
measuring module
Step Description
1 Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic
unit.
2 Pull out the connecting cable from the system interface.
3 Pull out the removable terminals from the module as illustrated below (only
current/voltage measuring modules).
4 Disconnect the 3 cables of the 3 phases of the main circuit.
5 Replace the module (see chapter 13.2.2 "Current Measuring Modules" and
chapter 13.2.3 "Current/voltage Measuring Modules").
6 Connect the 3 cables of the main circuit and lead them through the push-
through openings.
7 Plug the removable terminals onto the module (current/voltage measuring
modules only).
8 Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.
9 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
10 Switch on the main power for the feeder.
Commissioning and Servicing
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 14-11
Figure 14-3: Replacing current/voltage measuring modules
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
Commissioning and Servicing
SIMOCODE pro
14-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
14.3.4 Resetting the Basic Factory Default Settings
With the basic factory default settings, all parameters are reset to the fac-
tory values.
Resetting the basic factory default settings with the test/reset button on the basic
device
Carry out the following steps:
Table 14-12: Resetting basic factory default settings with the test/reset button on the basic device
Attention
If one of the steps is not carried out correctly, the basic unit reverts to nor-
mal operation.
Attention
This function is always active, independent of the "Test/reset buttons locked"
parameter.
Resetting the basic factory setting with the SIMOCODE ES software
Prerequisite: SIMOCODE pro is connected via PROFIBUS DP or via the
system interface with the PC/programming device and SIMOCODE ES is
started.
Carry out the following steps:
Table 14-13: Resetting the basic factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software
Step Description
1 Switch off the supply voltage for the basic unit.
2 Press the test/reset button on the basic unit and keep it pressed.
3 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. The "Device" LED lights up yel-
low.
4 Release the test/reset button after approx. two seconds.
5 Press the test/reset button again after approx. two seconds.
6 Release the test/reset button after approx. two seconds.
7 Press the test/reset button again after approx. two seconds.
9 Basic factory default settings are reset.
Step Description
1 Click on the menu Switchgear > Open online.
2 In the menu, select Target system > Command > Basic factory settings.
3 Press "Yes" to confirm.
4 Basic factory default settings are reset.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 15-1
Alarm, Faults and System Messages 15
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on troubleshooting.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• commissioners
• maintenance and service personnel.
• configurators
• PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
• knowledge about SIMOCODE ES software
• knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
SIMOCODE pro
15-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Event
(alphabetical)
Description

Error processing

Acknow-
ledgement
Contactor
control

Analog module
open circuit
A wire break has occurred in the
analog value measuring circuit.
Check the measuring
transducer and the
measuring circuit.
Reset Switched off
Another start
permitted
The start after the next one
should not be carried out until the
interlocking time has expired.
Blocked positio-
ner
The torque switch has been acti-
vated without or before the corre-
sponding limit switch.
• The positioner is possi-
bly blocked.
• Acknowledge the fault
with "free-wheeling"
with the counter com-
mand "Open/Close".
• Check the slide appli-
cation and the limit
switches.
Counter com-
mand
"Open/Close".
Switched off
Blocking The maximum motor current has
exceeded the threshold for the
blocking protection.
Possible cause: The motor is blok-
ked.
Please check the applica-
tion which is driven by
the motor.
Reset Switched off
Changing of the
parameters is not
permissible in
the current mode
Changing of a least one parame-
ter is not possible in the current
operating state.
A lot of parameters can
only be changed when
the motor feeder is swit-
ched off and is not in the
"Remote" operating
mode.
For an overview of the
parameters that can
always be changed:
See chapter "Data For-
mats and Data Records"
on page B-1.
Configuration
fault
The configured device configura-
tion does not match the current
configuration.
• Please check if all con-
figured components
are present.
• Check the actual confi-
guration using "Confi-
guration".
Rectify the
fault; Reset
Switched off
Double 0 Both torque switches have been
activated simultaneously. The
motor feeder was turned off.
• Open circuit torque
switch.
• Torque switch is defec-
tive.
Switched off
Double 1 Both limit switches have been
activated simultaneously.
Limit switch is defective. Switched off
Execution ON
command
The motor feeder could not be
turned on after an ON command.
• Main circuit is interrup-
ted (fuse, circuit brea-
ker).
• Motor contactor or
contactor control is
defective.
• Parameter execution
time is too short.
Reset Switched off
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 15-3
Execution stop
command
The motor feeder could not be
turned off after a Stop command.
• The contactor contact
is welded.
• Parameter execution
time is too short.
• The "Open" end posi-
tion has not been rea-
ched during the
parameterized runtime
(only in the case of the
"Positioner" and "Valve"
control functions).
Reset; Counter
command
Switched off
External earth
fault
The external earth-fault monito-
ring has been activated. A fault
current of too high a value is flo-
wing.
Please check the motor
connection cable for
damage.
Reset Switched off
External fault
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
A signal is pending at the input
(socket) of the standard function
"External fault 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6".
Check the motor feeder. Depends on the
parameteriza-
tion
Switched off
Fault - Antiva-
lence
The limit switches are not registe-
ring any antivalent signals.
• Open circuit of the
limit switch.
• Please check the slide
application and the
limit switches.
Counter com-
mand
"OPEN/CLOSE".
Switched off
Fault - Bus The PROFIBUS DP communica-
tion has been or is being interrup-
ted
Check the
PROFIBUS connection
(plugs, cables, etc.)
Reset, Auto-
reset
Switched off
Fault - End posi-
tion
Positioner/solenoid valve has left
the final position without a com-
mand being issued. The motor
feeder was turned off.
Acknowledge the fault
with "free-wheeling" by
the counter command
"OPEN/CLOSE".
Reset; Counter
command
Switched off
Fault - PLC/DCS The PLC which controls the fee-
der was or is in the STOP state.
Please check the opera-
ting status of the PLC.
Reset, Auto-
reset
Switched off
Fault - Temporary
components
(e.g. memory
module)
One of the following compon-
ents is defective:
• Addressing plug
• Memory module
• PC cable.
Please replace the defec-
tive components.
For this, see
chapter 13 "Mounting,
Wiring, Interfaces".
Rectify the
fault; Reset
Switched off
Feedback (F) OFF The current flow in the motor fee-
der was interrupted without the
motor feeder being turned off.
• Main circuit is interrup-
ted (fuse, circuit brea-
ker, main switch).
• Motor contactor or
contactor control is
defective
Reset Switched off
Event
(alphabetical)
(cont.)
Description
(cont.)
Error processing
(cont.)
Acknow-
ledgement
(cont.)
Contactor
control
(cont.)
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
SIMOCODE pro
15-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Feedback (F) ON The motor feeder could not be
turned on after an ON command.
• Main circuit is interrup-
ted (fuse, circuit brea-
ker)
• Motor contactor or
contactor control is
defective, "Execution
time" parameter is too
short
• Only in the case of the
"Positioner/Solenoid
valve" control function:
The end position
"CLOSE" has not been
reached during the
parameterized runtime.
Reset; Counter
command
Switched off
Hardware faults The hardware of the
SIMOCODE pro basic device is
defective.
Please replace the basic
unit.
See chapter 13 "Moun-
ting, Wiring, Interfaces".
Rectify the fault Switched off
Internal earth
fault
The internal earth-fault monitoring
has been activated. A fault cur-
rent of too high a value is flowing.
Please check the motor
connection cable for
damage.
Reset Switched off
Module fault At least one SIMOCODE pro
module is not ready for use.
• Connecting cable is
defective or has not
been plugged in cor-
rectly.
• Module is defective.
Please replace the
module.
For this, see
chapter 13 "Mounting,
Wiring, Interfaces".
Rectify the
fault; Reset
Switched off
Motor operating
hours >
The configured limit value for the
motor operating hours has been
exceeded.
Please implement the
maintenance measures
planned for the feeder.
No start permis-
sible
The permitted number of starts in
the monitoring timeframe was
achieved. The next start should
not be carried out until the inter-
locking time has expired.
Reset Switched off
Operational pro-
tection off (OPO)
The "Operational Protection Off
(OPO)" signal is pending.
A switched-on motor feeder was
switched off.
Switching on is not possible as
long as the OPO signal is pen-
ding.
Reset Switched off;
for positioners:
QE1 or QE2
switched on
until end posi-
tion - indepen-
dent of the
configuration
Event
(alphabetical)
(cont.)
Description
(cont.)
Error processing
(cont.)
Acknow-
ledgement
(cont.)
Contactor
control
(cont.)
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 15-5
Overload The motor feeder was over-
loaded.
Please check the motor
and the application which
is driven by the motor.
The motor can only be
switched on again after
the cooling down time
has expired or after an
emergency start is car-
ried out.
Reset, Auto-
reset
Switched off
Overload and
Unbalance
The motor feeder was overloaded
asymmetrically.
Possible causes:
• Failure of a phase
• Fault in the motor windings.
Check the motor feeder
and the motor.
The motor can only be
switched on again after
the cooling down time
has expired or after an
emergency start is car-
ried out.
Reset or
Auto reset
Switched off
Parameter blok-
king during start-
up active
The start-up parameter block pre-
vents SIMOCODE pro parame-
ters which could be saved in the
DP Master from being accepted.
The block must be set when
• SIMOCODE ES
or
• SIMATIC PDM
is used for parameterizing.
The block may not be set when
• SIMOCODE pro C/V is integra-
ted in STEP 7 via the
SIMOCODE pro object
manager (OM)
or
• SIMOCODE pro C was parame-
terized via GSD.
Parameter is
faulty ("Gen.
fault" category)
There in an error in the parameter
data.
The designation of the
faulty parameter can be
found on the basis of the
number (byte No.) in the
system manual chapter A
"Tables".
Rectify the
fault; Reset
Switched off
Parameter is
faulty ("Gen.
fault" category)
There is a fault in the parameter
data transmitted to the device.
Faults can occur in the parameter
data, for example, if the device
parameterization was not carried
out with SIMOCODE ES or
SIMATIC PDM.
Check the parameter
data (data records 130
133) transmitted to the
device to make sure that
the contents are correct.
Event
(alphabetical)
(cont.)
Description
(cont.)
Error processing
(cont.)
Acknow-
ledgement
(cont.)
Contactor
control
(cont.)
Attention
The parameter block is not active
in the case of devices which are
still set to the factory default set-
tings or which have been reset to
the factory default settings!
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
SIMOCODE pro
15-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Permissible num-
ber of starts
exceeded
The permitted number of starts in
the monitoring timeframe has
already been exceeded. The next
start should not be carried out
until the interlocking time has
expired.
Reset Switched off
Phase unbalance The limit value for the phase
unbalance was exceeded. The
phase unbalance can lead to an
overload.
Possible causes:
• Failure of a phase
• Fault in the motor
windings.
Check the motor feeder
and the motor.
Reset Switched off
Power failure
monitoring (UVO)
The network failure lasted longer
than the configured network
failure time.
Reset Switched off
Pre-warning
overload
(I > 115%)
The motor feeder is in overload
operation.
It will be tripped within a short
period of time due to overloading
if this condition continues to per-
sist.
Please check the motor
and the application which
is driven by the motor.
Required
function is not
supported
At least one parameterized
function is not supported by the
product version of the basic unit.
Only activate functions
that are supported by the
product version of the
basic unit.
For example,
SIMOCODE pro V basic
units with the product
version E01 do not sup-
port the voltage measu-
ring module, the
temperature module and
the analog module.
Status - Cooling
down time active
The motor feeder was switched
off due to overload.
The motor can only be
switched on again after
the cooling down time
has expired.
Status - Emer-
gency start exe-
cuted
The thermal memory was deleted
with the function "Emergency
start".
The motor can immedia-
tely be switched on again
after an overload release.
Status - Test
position Feed-
back (TPF)
The motor feeder is in the test
position.
The main current circuit is inter-
rupted and the "cold starting" of
the feeder can be carried out.
Stop time > The configured limit value for the
stop time has been exceeded.
Please implement the
maintenance measures
planned for the feeder. If
possible, switch on the
feeder.
Event
(alphabetical)
(cont.)
Description
(cont.)
Error processing
(cont.)
Acknow-
ledgement
(cont.)
Contactor
control
(cont.)
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 15-7
Temperature
module -
Warning level
overshot
The temperature warning level
was exceeded.
Check the temperature
measuring station.
Temperature
module Out of
Range
The temperature sensor is yiel-
ding values which are not permit-
ted.
Check the temperature
sensor.
Reset Switched off
Temperature
module sensor
fault
Either a short circuit or a wire
break has occurred in the tempe-
rature sensor circuit.
Check the temperature
sensor nd the sensor
cable.
Rectify the
fault; Reset
Switched off
Test position
feedback (TPF)
Current flows in the motor feeder
even though the motor feeder is
in the test position (TPF).
The main circuit is not
interrupted in test opera-
tion.
Reset Switched off
Test shutdown The motor feeder was checked
and switched off by a test switch-
off.
Reset Switched off
Thermistor open
circuit
A wire break has occurred in the
thermistor sensor cable.
Check the thermistor
sensor cable and the
thermistor.
Rectify the
fault; Reset
Switched off
Thermistor short
circuit
A short circuit has occurred in the
thermistor sensor cable.
Check the thermistor
sensor cable and the
thermistor.
Rectify the
fault; Reset
Switched off
Thermistor trip
level
The thermistor protection has
been activated. The temperature
of the motor is too high.
Please check the motor
and the application which
is driven by the motor.
The motor cannot be
switched on again until
the temperature has rea-
ched the switch-back
point of the thermistor.
Reset, Auto-
reset
Switched off
Warning level
cos phi <
The power factor has undershot
the warning level.
Possible cause: The motor is ope-
rated without a load.
Please check the applica-
tion which is driven by
the motor.
Warning level I<
undershot
The maximum current has
undershot the warning level.
Please check the applica-
tion which is driven by
the motor.
Warning level I>
overshot
The maximum current has overs-
hot the warning level.
Please check the applica-
tion which is driven by
the motor.
Warning level P<
undershot
The real power of the motor has
undershot the warning level.
Please check the applica-
tion which is driven by
the motor.
Warning level P>
overshot
The real power of the motor has
overshot the warning level.
Please check the applica-
tion which is driven by
the motor.
Warning level U<
undershot
The voltage in the motor feeder
has undershot the warning level.
Possible causes:
• Undervoltage in the network
• Fuse has tripped.
Check the motor feeder.
Event
(alphabetical)
(cont.)
Description
(cont.)
Error processing
(cont.)
Acknow-
ledgement
(cont.)
Contactor
control
(cont.)
Alarm, Faults and System Messages
SIMOCODE pro
15-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Table 15-1: Alarm, Faults and System Messages
Warning level
0/4 - 20 mA<
undershot
The measured value on the ana-
log input has undershot the
warning level.
Check the measuring
station.
Warning level
0/4 - 20 mA>
overshot
The measured value on the ana-
log input has overshot the
warning level.
Check the measuring
station.
Wrong password The SIMOCODE pro parameters
are protected by a password.
An attempt was made to change
the parameters without entering
the password.
Please use the correct
password for changing
the parameters.
If you do not know the
password, new parame-
ters cannot be set until
the factory default set-
tings have been reset.
Please refer to chapter
14.3.4 "Resetting the
Basic Factory Default
Settings" for a descrip-
tion of the factory default
settings.
Event
(alphabetical)
(cont.)
Description
(cont.)
Error processing
(cont.)
Acknow-
ledgement
(cont.)
Contactor
control
(cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 A-1

Tables A
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find various tables which can help you when working
with SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
A.1 Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls
and Status Messages for the Control Functions
Table A-1: Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status messages for control functions
1
)

B
a
s
i
c

u
n
i
t

1
,

S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
C
2
)

B
a
s
i
c

u
n
i
t

2
,

S
I
M
O
C
O
D
E
p
r
o
V
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
/

C
o
n
t
r
o
l

f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

s
t
a
t
i
o
n
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
L
a
m
p

c
o
n
t
r
o
l
Q
L
E
<
<

(
O
N
<
<
)
Q
L
E
<

(
O
N
<
)
Q
L
A

(
O
F
F
)
Q
L
E
>

(
O
N
>
)
Q
L
E
>
>

(
O
N
>
>
)
S
t
a
t
u
s

s
i
g
n
a
l
O
N
<
<
O
N
<
O
F
F
O
N
>
O
N
>
>
Q
E
1
Q
E
2
Q
E
3
Q
E
4
Q
E
5
O
N
<
<
O
N
<
O
F
F
O
N
>
O
N
>
>
O
v
e
r
l
o
a
d

1
)
,
2
)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
c
t
i
v
e
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
D
i
r
e
c
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

1
)
,
2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
O
N
-
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
R
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

1
)
,
2
)
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
R
i
g
h
t
L
e
f
t
-
-
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
C
i
r
c
u
i
t

b
r
e
a
k
e
r

1
)
,
2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
O
N
i
m
p
u
l
s
e
-
O
F
F
i
m
p
u
l
s
e
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
t
a
r
-
d
e
l
t
a


s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
D
e
l
t
a
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
N
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
t
a
r
-
d
e
l
t
a

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

w
i
t
h

r
e
v
e
r
s
a
l

o
f

t
h
e

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

r
o
t
a
t
i
o
n

2
)
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
S
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
D
e
l
t
a
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
R
i
g
h
t
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
e
f
t
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
D
a
h
l
a
n
d
e
r

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
F
a
s
t
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
s
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
D
a
h
l
a
n
d
e
r

w
i
t
h

r
e
v
e
r
s
a
l

o
f

t
h
e

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

r
o
t
a
t
i
o
n

2
)
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
s
t
a
r
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
P
o
l
e
-
c
h
a
n
g
i
n
g

s
w
i
t
c
h

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
F
a
s
t
S
l
o
w
-
-
-
-
-
O
F
F
S
l
o
w
F
a
s
t
P
o
l
e
-
c
h
a
n
g
i
n
g

s
w
i
t
c
h

w
i
t
h

r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

t
h
e

d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n

o
f

r
o
t
a
t
i
o
n

2
)
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
-
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
f
a
s
t
L
e
f
t
s
l
o
w
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
s
l
o
w
R
i
g
h
t
f
a
s
t
V
a
l
v
e

2
)
-
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
O
p
e
n
-
O
p
e
n
-
-
-
-
-
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
O
p
e
n
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

1

2
)
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
O
p
e
n
C
l
o
s
e
d
-
-
-
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

2

2
)
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
O
p
e
n
C
l
o
s
e
d
-
-
-
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

3

2
)
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
O
p
e
n
C
l
o
s
e
d
-
-
-
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

4

2
)
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
O
p
e
n
C
l
o
s
e
d
-
-
-
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
P
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
r

5

2
)
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
O
p
e
n
C
l
o
s
e
d
-
-
-
-
C
l
o
s
e
d
S
t
o
p
O
p
e
n
-
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

2
)
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
O
N
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
-
R
e
s
e
t
O
N
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
-
-
-
O
F
F
O
N
-
S
o
f
t

s
t
a
r
t
e
r

w
i
t
h

r
e
v
e
r
s
i
n
g

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r

2
)
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
R
i
g
h
t
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
-
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
L
e
f
t
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
-
c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
R
e
s
e
t
O
N
c
o
m
m
a
n
d
-
-
L
e
f
t
O
F
F
R
i
g
h
t
-
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 A-3
A.2 Abbreviations and Specifications
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
Abbreviation Meaning
BU1 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)
BU2 Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)
IM Current measuring module
UM Current/voltage measuring module
DM1 Digital module 1
DM2 Digital module 2
OP Operator panel
AM Analog module
EM Earth-fault module
TM Temperature module
Th Thermistor
CF Control function
Cycl. Cyclic
Acycl. Acyclic
FAU Fault
M Event
W Warning
Table A-2: Abbreviations
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:
Figure A-1: Table specifications
Signal - prm error number (bytes):
If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (prm
group) which caused the error is transmitted here.
Figure A-2: Example for parameter group
Designation Type Range Unit Information
Reserved Byte[4]
Cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1% BU2
Reserved Byte[5]
Max. current I
max
Word 0 .. 65535 1% / I
e
BU1/BU2
Entry relevant for basic
unit 1 and basic unit 2
Example
Entries in italics are
not relevant (reserved)
and, when writing,
should be filled with "0"
Parameters can be changed while running.
Byte.Bit Designation
(Prm group)
0.0 Reserved
4.0 Device configuration (12) Parameter group 12
. . .
.

.

.
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 A-5
A.3 Socket Assignment Table - Digital
This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (digital). You
only need these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user pro-
gram to fill data records and write these back.
No. Designation Designation Information
0 Static level Not connected BU1/BU2
1 Fixed level value‚ 0 BU1/BU2
2 Fixed level value‚ 1 BU1/BU2
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Basic unit (BU) BU - Test/reset button BU1/BU2
9 BU - input 1 BU1/BU2
10 BU - input 2 BU1/BU2
11 BU - input 3 BU1/BU2
12 BU - input 4 BU1/BU2
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
16 Digital module (DM) DM1 - input 1 DM1
17 DM1 - input 2 DM1
18 DM1 - input 3 DM1
19 DM1 - input 4 DM1
20 DM2 - input 1 DM2
21 DM2 - input 2 DM2
22 DM2 - input 3 DM2
23 DM2 - input 4 DM2
24 Reserved
25 Reserved
26 Reserved
27 Reserved
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 Reserved
31 Reserved
32 Operator panel (OP) OP - Test/reset button OP
33 OP - button 1 OP
34 OP - button 2 OP
35 OP - button 3 OP
36 OP - button 4 OP
37 Reserved
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
38 Reserved
39 Reserved
40 DPV1/RS-232 interface
(acyclic data)
Acyclic receive - bit 0.0 BU1/BU2
41 Acyclic receive - bit 0.1 BU1/BU2
42 Acyclic receive - bit 0.2 BU1/BU2
43 Acyclic receive - bit 0.3 BU1/BU2
44 Acyclic receive - bit 0.4 BU1/BU2
45 Acyclic receive - bit 0.5 BU1/BU2
46 Acyclic receive - bit 0.6 BU1/BU2
47 Acyclic receive - bit 0.7 BU1/BU2
48 Acyclic receive - bit 1.0 BU1/BU2
49 Acyclic receive - bit 1.1 BU1/BU2
50 Acyclic receive - bit 1.2 BU1/BU2
51 Acyclic receive - bit 1.3 BU1/BU2
52 Acyclic receive - bit 1.4 BU1/BU2
53 Acyclic receive - bit 1.5 BU1/BU2
54 Acyclic receive - bit 1.6 BU1/BU2
55 Acyclic receive - bit 1.7 BU1/BU2
56 PLC/DCS interface PLC [DPV0]
(cyclic data)
Cyclic receive - bit 0.0 BU1/BU2
57 Cyclic receive - bit 0.1 BU1/BU2
58 Cyclic receive - bit 0.2 BU1/BU2
59 Cyclic receive - bit 0.3 BU1/BU2
60 Cyclic receive - bit 0.4 BU1/BU2
61 Cyclic receive - bit 0.5 BU1/BU2
62 Cyclic receive - bit 0.6 BU1/BU2
63 Cyclic receive - bit 0.7 BU1/BU2
64 Cyclic receive - bit 1.0 BU1/BU2
65 Cyclic receive - bit 1.1 BU1/BU2
66 Cyclic receive - bit 1.2 BU1/BU2
67 Cyclic receive - bit 1.3 BU1/BU2
68 Cyclic receive - bit 1.4 BU1/BU2
69 Cyclic receive - bit 1.5 BU1/BU2
70 Cyclic receive - bit 1.6 BU1/BU2
71 Cyclic receive - bit 1.7 BU1/BU2
72 Enabled control command Enabled control command ON <<
Dependent on the control
function
73 Enabled control command ON <
74 Enabled control command OFF
75 Enabled control command ON >
76 Enabled control command ON >>
77 Reserved
78 Reserved
79 Reserved
No. Designation Designation Information
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 A-7
80 Contactor controls Contactor control 1 QE1
Dependent on the control
function
81 Contactor control 2 QE2
82 Contactor control 3 QE3
83 Contactor control 4 QE4
84 Contactor control 5 QE5
85 Reserved
86 Reserved
87 Reserved
88 Lamp controls Display - QLE<< (ON<<)
Dependent on the control
function
89 Display - QLE< (ON<)
90 Display - QLA (OFF)
91 Display - QLE> (ON>)
92 Display - QLE>> (ON>>)
93 Display - QLS (fault) BU1/BU2
94 Reserved
95 Reserved
96 Status messages - General Status - General fault BU1/BU2
97 Status - General warning BU1/BU2
98 Status - Device BU1/BU2
99 Status - Bus BU1/BU2
100 Status - PLC/DCS BU1/BU2
101 Status - Motor current flowing IM
102 Reserved
103 Reserved
104 Status messages - Controlling Status - ON <<
Dependent on the control
function
105 Status - ON <
106 Status - OFF
107 Status - ON >
108 Status - ON >>
109 Status - Start active BU1/BU2
110 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing starters and
positioners
111 Status - Switching interval active Star-delta,
Dahlander,
Pole-changing switch
112 Status - Runs in open direction
Dependent on the control
function
113 Status - Runs in closed direction
114 Status - FC
115 Status - FO
116 Status - TC
117 Status - TO
118 Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU1/BU2
119 Status - OPO BU2
120 Status - Remote mode of operation BU1/BU2
No. Designation Designation Information
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
121 Status messages - Protection Status - Emergency start executed IM
122 Status - Cooling down time active IM
123 Status - Pause time active IM
124 Status messages - Miscellaneous Status - Device test active BU1/BU2
125 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM
126 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM
127 Reserved
128 Events - Protection Event - Overload operation IM
129 Event - Unbalance IM
130 Event - Overload IM
131 Event - Overload + phase failure IM
132 Event - Internal earth fault IM
133 Event - External earth fault EM
134 Event - Warning ext. earth fault EM
135 Event - Thermistor overload Th
136 Event - Thermistor short circuit Th
137 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th
138 Event - TM warning T> TM
139 Event - TM tripping T> TM
140 Event - TM sensor error TM
141 Event - TM Out of range TM
142 Reserved
143 Reserved
144 Events - Level monitoring Event - Warning I> IM
145 Event - Warning I< IM
146 Event - Warning P> UM
147 Event - Warning P< UM
148 Event - Warning cos phi< UM
149 Event - Warning U< UM
150 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
151 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< AM
152 Event - Tripping I> IM
153 Event - Tripping I< IM
154 Event - Tripping P> UM
155 Event - Tripping P< UM
156 Event - Tripping cos phi< UM
157 Event - Tripping U< UM
158 Event - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
159 Event - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA< AM
160 Event - Blocking IM
161 Reserved
162 Reserved
163 Event - No start permitted BU1/BU2
164 Event - Number of starts > BU1/BU2
No. Designation Designation Information
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 A-9
165 Event - Another start permitted BU1/BU2
166 Event - Motor operating hours > BU1/BU2
167 Event - Motor stop time > BU1/BU2
168 Event - Limit value 1 BU2
169 Event - Limit value 2 BU2
170 Event - Limit value 3 BU2
171 Event - Limit value 4 BU2
172 Events - Miscellaneous Event - External fault 1 BU1/BU2
173 Event - External fault 2 BU1/BU2
174 Event - External fault 3 BU1/BU2
175 Event - External fault 4 BU1/BU2
176 Event - External fault 5 BU2
177 Event - External fault 6 BU2
178 Reserved
179 Reserved
180 Event - Analog module open circuit AM
181 Reserved
182 Reserved
183 Reserved
184 Events - Timestamp function Event - Timestamp function active+ok BU2
185 Reserved
186 Reserved
187 Reserved
188 Events - System interface Event - Configured operator panel is missing BU1/BU2
189 Reserved
190 Reserved
191 Reserved
192 Faults - General Fault - HW fault basic unit BU1/BU2
193 Fault - Module fault (module e.g. IM, DM) BU1/BU2
194 Fault - Temporary components (e.g. memory
module)
BU1/BU2
195 Fault - Configuration fault BU1/BU2
196 Fault - Parameterization BU1/BU2
197 Fault - Bus BU1/BU2
198 Fault - PLC/DCS BU1/BU2
199 Reserved
200 Faults - Controlling Fault - Execution time ON
Not for overload relays
201 Fault - Execution time OFF
202 Fault - F ON
203 Fault - F OFF
204 Fault - Blocked positioner Positioner
205 Fault - Double 0 Valve/positioner
206 Fault - Double 1 Valve/positioner
207 Fault - End position Valve/positioner
No. Designation Designation Information
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
208 Fault - Antivalence Positioner
209 Fault - Cold starting (TPF) error BU1/BU2
210 Fault - UVO error BU2
211 Fault - OPO error BU2
212 Reserved
213 Reserved
214 Reserved
215 Reserved
216 Freely programmable elements Truth table 1 3I/1O output BU1/BU2
217 Truth table 2 3I/1O output BU1/BU2
218 Truth table 3 3I/1O output BU1/BU2
219 Truth table 4 3I/1O output BU2
220 Truth table 5 3I/1O output BU2
221 Truth table 6 3I/1O output BU2
222 Truth table 7 2I/1O output BU2
223 Truth table 8 2I/1O output BU2
224 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 1 BU2
225 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 2 BU2
226 Reserved
227 Reserved
228 Reserved
229 Reserved
230 Reserved
231 Reserved
232 Timer 1 output BU1/BU2
233 Timer 2 output BU1/BU2
234 Timer 3 output BU2
235 Timer 4 output BU2
236 Counter 1 output BU1/BU2
237 Counter 2 output BU1/BU2
238 Counter 3 output BU2
239 Counter 4 output BU2
240 Signal conditioning 1 output BU1/BU2
241 Signal conditioning 2 output BU1/BU2
242 Signal conditioning 3 output BU2
243 Signal conditioning 4 output BU2
244 Non-volatile element 1 output BU1/BU2
245 Non-volatile element 2 output BU1/BU2
246 Non-volatile element 3 output BU2
247 Non-volatile element 4 output BU2
248 Flashing 1 output BU1/BU2
249 Flashing 2 output BU1/BU2
250 Flashing 3 output BU1/BU2
251 Flickering 1 output BU1/BU2
No. Designation Designation Information
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 A-11
252 Flickering 2 output BU1/BU2
253 Flickering 3 output BU1/BU2
254 Reserved
255 Reserved
No. Designation Designation Information
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
A.4 Socket Assignment Table - Analog
This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (analog).
You only need these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user
program to fill data records and write these back.
All inputs for analog data can only process values of type "Word" (2 bytes). In
order to also be able to process values of type "Byte", the following applies:
• the byte value is processed as a low byte, the high byte is always 0.
No. Designation Unit Information
0 Not connected BU1/BU2
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Timer 1 - actual value 100 ms. BU1/BU2
5 Timer 2 - actual value 100 ms. BU1/BU2
6 Timer 3 - actual value 100 ms. BU2
7 Timer 4 - actual value 100 ms. BU2
8 Timer 1 - actual value BU1/BU2
9 Timer 2 - actual value BU1/BU2
10 Timer 3 - actual value BU2
11 Timer 4 - actual value BU2
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
16 max. current I_max 1%/Ie IM
17 Current I_L1 1%/Ie IM
18 Current I_L2 1%/Ie IM
19 Current I_L3 1%/Ie IM
20 Phase unbalance 1% IM
21 Reserved
22 Reserved
23 Reserved
24 Voltage U_L1 1 V UM
25 Voltage U_L2 1 V UM
26 Voltage U_L3 1 V UM
27 Cos phi 1% UM
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 Reserved
31 Reserved
32 Heating up of the motor model 2% IM
33 Time to trip 100 ms. IM
34 Recovery time 100 ms. IM
Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 A-13
1) S7 format: 0/4 mA=0
20 mA=27648
35 Last tripping current 1%/Ie IM
36 TM - temperature 1 K TM
37 TM - temperature 1 1 K TM
38 TM - temperature 2 1 K TM
39 TM - temperature 3 1 K TM
40 Permitted starts - actual value BU1/BU2
41 Stop time 1h BU1/BU2
42 Reserved
43 Reserved
44 AM - input 1 See 1) AM
45 AM - input 2 See 1) AM
46 AM - input 3 See 1) AM
47 Reserved
48 Acyclic receive - Analog value BU1/BU2
49 Cyclic receive - Analog value BU2
50 Reserved
51 Reserved
52 Motor operating hours - H word
1s
BU1/BU2
53 Motor operating hours - L word BU1/BU2
54 Int. motor operating hours - H word BU1/BU2
55 Int. motor operating hours - L word BU1/BU2
56 Device operating hours - H word BU1/BU2
57 Device operating hours - L word BU1/BU2
58 Number of starts - H word BU1/BU2
59 Number of starts - L word BU1/BU2
60 Int. number of starts right - H word BU1/BU2
61 Int. number of starts right - L word BU1/BU2
62 Int. number of starts left - H word BU1/BU2
63 Int. number of starts left - L word BU1/BU2
64 Reserved
.. Reserved
69 Reserved
70 Real power P - H word
1 W
BU2
71 Real power P - L word BU2
72 Apparent power S - H word
1 VA
BU2
73 Apparent power S - L word BU2
75 Reserved
.. Reserved
255 Reserved
No. Designation Unit Information
Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog (cont.)
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
A.5 Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics
The following table contains the detailed events of the slave diagnostics for
the status messages and the process alarm. This information is also contai-
ned in data record 92.
Byte.Bit Status message Information
0.0 Faults - Controlling Fault - Execution ON command BU1/BU2
0.1 Fault - Execution OFF command BU1/BU2
0.2 Fault - F ON BU1/BU2
0.3 Fault - F OFF BU1/BU2
0.4 Fault - Block. Positioner BU1/BU2
0.5 Fault - Double 0 BU1/BU2
0.6 Fault - Double 1 BU1/BU2
0.7 Fault - End position BU1/BU2
1.0 Fault - Antivalence BU1/BU2
1.1 Fault - Cold starting (TPF) error BU1/BU2
1.2 Fault - UVO error BU2
1.3 Fault - OPO error BU2
1.4 Reserved
2.0 Reserved
2.1 Faults - Protection Fault - Unbalance IM/UM
2.2 Fault - Overload IM/UM
2.3 Fault - Overload + phase failure IM/UM
2.4 Fault - Int. earth fault IM/UM
2.5 Fault - Ext. earth fault EM
2.6 Reserved
2.7 Fault - Thermistor overload Th
3.0 Fault - Thermistor short circuit Th
3.1 Fault - Thermistor open circuit Th
3.2 Reserved
3.3 Fault - TM tripping T> TM
3.4 Fault - TM sensor error TM
3.5 Fault - TM Out of range TM
3.6 Reserved
4.0 Faults -
Level monitoring
Fault - Tripping I> IM/UM
4.1 Fault - Tripping I< IM/UM
4.2 Fault- Tripping P> UM
4.3 Fault- Tripping P< UM
4.4 Fault - Tripping cos phi< UM
4.5 Fault - Tripping U< UM
4.6 Fault - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
4.7 Fault - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA< AM
5.0 Fault - Blocking IM/UM
5.1 Reserved
Table A-5: Detailed slave diagnostic events
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 A-15
5.4 Fault - Number of starts > BU1/BU2
5.5 Reserved
6.0 Faults -
Miscellaneous
Fault - Ext. fault 1 BU1/BU2
6.1 Fault - Ext. fault 2 BU1/BU2
6.2 Fault - Ext. fault 3 BU1/BU2
6.3 Fault - Ext. fault 4 BU1/BU2
6.4 Fault - Ext. fault 5 BU2
6.5 Fault - Ext. fault 6 BU2
6.6 Reserved
6.7 Reserved
7.0 Fault - Analog module open circuit AM
7.1 Fault - Test shutdown BU1/BU2
7.2 Reserved
8.0 Warnings - Protection Warning - Overload operation IM/UM
8.1 Warning - Unbalance IM/UM
8.2 Warning - Overload IM/UM
8.3 Warning - Overload + phase failure IM/UM
8.4 Warning - Internal earth fault IM/UM
8.5 Warning - External earth fault EM
8.6 Reserved
8.7 Warning - Thermistor overload Th
9.0 Warning - Thermistor short circuit Th
9.1 Warning - Thermistor open circuit Th
9.2 Warning - TM warning T> TM
9.3 Reserved
9.4 Warning - M sensor fault TM
9.5 Warning - TM Out of range TM
9.6 Reserved
10.0 Warnings -
Level monitoring
Warning - Warning I> IM/UM
10.1 Warning - Warning I< IM/UM
10.2 Warning - Warning P> UM
10.3 Warning - Warning P< UM
10.4 Warning - Warning cos phi < UM
10.5 Warning - Warning U< UM
10.6 Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
10.7 Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< AM
11.0 Warning - Blocking IM/UM
11.1 Reserved
11.3 Warning - No start permitted BU1/BU2
11.4 - Number of motor starts> BU1/BU2
11.5 Warning - Another start permitted BU1/BU2
11.6 Warning - Motor operating hours > BU1/BU2
11.7 Warning - Motor stop time > BU1/BU2
Byte.Bit Status message Information
Table A-5: Detailed slave diagnostic events (cont.)
Tables
SIMOCODE pro
A-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12.0 Warnings - Miscellaneous Warning - Ext. fault 1 BU1/BU2
12.1 Warning - Ext. fault 2 BU1/BU2
12.2 Warning - Ext. fault 3 BU1/BU2
12.3 Warning - Ext. fault 4 BU1/BU2
12.4 Warning - Ext. fault 5 BU2
12.5 Warning - Ext. fault 6 BU2
12.6 Reserved
12.7 Reserved
13.0 Warning - Analog module open circuit BU2
13.1 Reserved
14.0 Reserved
14.1 Status messages - Protection Status - Emergency start executed IM
14.2 Status - Cooling down time active IM
14.3 Status - Pause time active IM
14.4 Reserved
14.5 Reserved
14.6 Status messages - Controlling Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU1/BU2
14.7 Reserved
15.0 Events -
Parameterization
Event - Parameter blocking during start-up active BU1/BU2
15.1 Event - Parameter change not permitted in the cur-
rent operating state
BU1/BU2
15.2 Event - Device does not support the required
functions
BU1/BU2
15.3 Event - Parameter faulty BU1/BU2
15.4 Signal - Wrong password BU1/BU2
15.5 Event - Password protection active BU1/BU2
15.6 Event - Basic factory default setting BU1/BU2
15.7 Event - Parameterization active BU1/BU2
Byte.Bit Status message Information
Table A-5: Detailed slave diagnostic events (cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-1

Data Formats and Data Records B
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the data records of
SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• good knowledge about writing and reading data records
• good knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.
Data records - overview
Table B-1: Data records - Overview
Data record No. Description Read/write
1 S7 system diagnostics Read
63 Recording analog values Read
67 Process image of the outputs Read
69 Process image of the inputs Read
72 Fault memory Read
92 Device diagnostics
(faults, warnings, events)
Read
94 Measured values Read
95 Service/statistical data Read/write
130 Basic unit parameter 1 (BU1 BU2) Read/write
131 Basic unit parameter 2 (BU1 BU2) Read/write
132 Extended device parameter 1 (BU2) Read/write
133 Extended device parameter 2 (BU2) Read/write
139 Marking Read/write
160 Communication parameters Read/write
165 Designation Read/write
202 Acyclic receive Read/write
203 Acyclic send Read
224 Password protection Write
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.1 Handling Data Records
This section contains helpful information about how best to handle data
records.
B.1.1 Writing/reading Data Records
Access to data records via slot and index
• Slot: access via slot 1
• Index: data record number.
Writing/reading data records with STEP7
You can access the data records from the user program.
• Writing data records:
S7 DPV1 master: by calling SFB 53 "WR_REC" or SFC 58
S7 master: by calling SFC 58
• Reading data records:
S7 DPV1 master: by calling SFB 52 "RD_REC" or SFC 59
S7 master: by calling SFC 59.
Further information
You will find further information on the SFBs
• in the "System Software for S7-300/400, System and Standard Functions"
reference manual
• in the STEP7 online help.
Byte arrangements
When data which is longer than one byte is saved, the bytes are arranged as
follows ("big endian"):
Figure B-1: Byte arrangement in the "big endian" format
Byte 0
Byte 1
High byte
Low byte
High byte
Low byte
High byte
Low byte
High word
Low word
Data type
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte arrangements
Byte
Word
Double word (D-word)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-3
B.1.2 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
B.1.3 Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:
Figure B-2: Specifications
Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system com-
ponents are used.
Abbreviation Meaning
BU1 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)
BU2 Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)
IM Current measuring module
UM Current/voltage measuring module
DM 1 Digital module 1
DM 2 Digital module 2
OP Operator panel
AM Analog module
EM Earth-fault module
TM Temperature module
Th Thermistor
CF Control function
Cycl. Cyclic
Acycl. Acyclic
Table B-2: Abbreviations
Specification Type Range Unit Information
Reserved Byte[4]
cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1% BU2
Reserved Byte[5]
Max. current I
max
Word 0 .. 65535 1% / I
e
BU1/BU2
Entry relevant for basic
unit 1 and basic unit 2
Example
Entries in italics are
not relevant (reserved)
and, when writing,
should be filled with "0"
Parameters can be changed while running.
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.2 Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnostics
Byte
Bit
DR0 DR1 Specification Type No error Error Information
0.0 X X Module fault/OK Bit 0 1
0.1 X X Internal fault Bit 0 0
0.2 X X External fault Bit 0 1
0.3 X X Channel fault Bit 0 1
0.4 X X External auxiliary voltage missing Bit 0 0
0.5 X X Front panel plug missing Bit 0 0
0.6 X X Module not parameterized Bit 0 0
0.7 X X Module parameter false Bit 0 0
1.0 X X Module type Bit[4] 3 3
1.4 X X Channel information available Bit 1 1
1.5 X X Application information available Bit 0 0
1.6 X X Substitute diagnostic alarm Bit 0 0
1.7 X X Reserved = 0 Bit 0 0
2.0 X X Application module false/missing Bit 0 0
2.1 X X Communication fault Bit 0 0
2.2 X X Operating status (0=RUN,
1=STOP)
Bit 0 0
2.3 X X Time monitoring activated Bit 0 0
2.4 X X Internal module supply voltage
failed
Bit 0 0
2.5 X X Battery flat (BATTF) Bit 0 0
2.6 X X Standby supply failed Bit 0 0
2.7 X X Reserved = 0 Bit 0 0
3.0 X X Rack failure (detected by IM) Bit 0 0
3.1 X X Processor failure Bit 0 0
3.2 X X EPROM error Bit 0 0
3.3 X X RAM error Bit 0 0
3.4 X X ADU/DAU error Bit 0 0
3.5 X X Blown fuse Bit 0 0
3.6 X X PRAL missing Bit 0 0
3.7 X X Reserved = 0 Bit 0 0
4.0 X Channel type Byte 0x7D 0x7D
5.0 X Length of the channel-specific
diagnostics
Byte 0x20 0x20
6.0 X Number of channels Byte 0x01 0x01
7.0 X Channel fault vector (one bit per
channel)
Byte 0x01 0x01
8.0 X Reserved Bit 0 0
8.1 X Short circuit Bit 0 0
8.2 X Undervoltage Bit 0 0
8.3 X Overvoltage Bit 0 0
8.4 X Overload Bit 0 0
8.5 X Overtemperature Bit 0 0
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-5
Table B-3: Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics
Byte
Bit
DR0 DR1 Specification Type No error Error Information
8.6 X Wire break Bit 0 0
8.7 X Upper limit overshot Bit 0 0
9.0 X Lower limit undershot Bit 0 0
9.1 X Error Bit 0 X Error F9
9.2 X Reserved Bit 0 0
9.3 X Reserved Bit 0 0
9.4 X Reserved Bit 0 0
9.5 X Reserved Bit 0 0
9.6 X Reserved Bit 0 0
9.7 X Reserved Bit 0 0
10.0 X Parameterization error Bit 0 X Error F16
10.1 X Sensor or load voltage missing Bit 0 0
10.2 X Fuse defective Bit 0 0
10.3 X Reserved Bit 0 0
10.4 X Ground fault Bit 0 0
10.5 X Reference channel fault Bit 0 0
10.6 X Process alarm missing Bit 0 0
10.7 X Actuator warning Bit 0 0
11.0 X Actuator switch-off Bit 0 0
11.1 X Safety-related switch-off Bit 0 0
11.2 X External fault Bit 0 0
11.3 X Non-specific fault Bit 0 0
11.4 X Reserved Bit 0 0
11.5 X Reserved Bit 0 0
11.6 X Reserved Bit 0 0
11.7 X Reserved Bit 0 0
12.0 X Reserved Byte[4] 0 0
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.3 Data Record 63 - Recording of Analog Values
Table B-4: Data record 63 - Recording of analog values
The unit of the measured value is dependent on the assigned analog value.
You will find all the available analog values with their units in
Kapitel A.4 "Socket Assignment Table - Analog".
B.4 Data Record 67 - Process Image of the Outputs
Byte.Bit Specification Type Range Information
0.0 Reserved Word
2.0 Reserved Byte
3.0 Recording active Bit 0, 1 BU2
3.1 Trigger event occured Bit 0, 1 BU2
3.2 Reserved Bit[6] 0
4.0 Measured value (0) Word 0 ... 65535 BU2
6.0 Measured value (1) Word 0 ... 65535 BU2
...
122.0 Measured value (59) Word 0 ... 65535 BU2
124.0 Reserved Byte[76] 0
Byte.Bit Specification Presetting
(also see parameters)
Type Infor-
mation
0.0 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON< Bit
BU1/BU2
0.1 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.1 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] OFF Bit
0.2 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.2 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON> Bit
0.3 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.3 Test 1 Bit
0.4 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.4 Motor protection - Emergency start Bit
0.5 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.5 Mode selector S1 Bit
0.6 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.6 Reset 1 Bit
0.7 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.7 Not assigned Bit
1.0 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.0 Not assigned Bit
1.1 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.1 Not assigned Bit
1.2 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.2 Not assigned Bit
1.3 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.3 Not assigned Bit
1.4 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.4 Not assigned Bit
1.5 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.5 Not assigned Bit
1.6 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.6 Not assigned Bit
1.7 Cyclic receive - Bit 1.7 Not assigned Bit
2.0 to 3.7 Cyclic receive - Analog value Not assigned Word BU2
Table B-5: Data record 67 - Process image of the outputs
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-7
B.5 Data Record 69 - Process Image of the Inputs
Byte.Bit Specification Presetting
(also see parameters)
Type Information
0.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Status - ON < Bit
BU1/BU2
0.1 Cyclic send - Bit0.1 Status - OFF Bit
0.2 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Status - ON > Bit
0.3 Cyclic send - Bitt 0.3 Event - Overload operation Bit
0.4 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active Bit
0.5 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation Bit
0.6 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Status - General fault Bit
0.7 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Status - General warning Bit
1.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.0 Not assigned Bit
1.1 Cyclic send - Bit 1.1 Not assigned Bit
1.2 Cyclic send - Bit 1.2 Not assigned Bit
1.3 Cyclic send - Bit 1.3 Not assigned Bit
1.4 Cyclic send - Bit 1.4 Not assigned Bit
1.5 Cyclic send - Bit 1.5 Not assigned Bit
1.6 Cyclic send - Bit 1.6 Not assigned Bit
1.7 Cyclic send - Bit 1.7 Not assigned Bit
2.0 PLC/DCS analog. input 1 Max. current I_max Word
4.0 PLC/DCS analog. input 2 Not assigned Word BU2
6.0 PLC/DCS analog. input 3 Not assigned Word BU2
8.0 PLC/DCS analog. input 4 Not assigned Word BU2
Table B-6: Data record 69 - Process image of the inputs
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.6 Data Record 72 - Fault Memory
Table B-7: Data record 72 - Fault memory
Timestamp
The operating hours of the device are used as a timestamp (resolution: 1 s).
Type/error number
If the type has the value 71, the entry contains a fault: Refer to the error
numbers for detailed information: You will find the meaning in
Kapitel B.7 "Data Record 92 - Device Diagnostics" in the "Error number"
column of the "Data record 92 - diagnostics".
If the type has the value 255, the entry displays "Mains ON". In this case,
the error number contains the number of mains ON, reduced by 1
(0 = 1x mains ON, ...).
Byte.Bit Entry Specification Type Information
0.0
1
Timestamp D-word BU1/BU2
4.0 Type Byte BU1/BU2
5.0 Error number Byte BU1/BU2
6.0
2
Timestamp D-word BU1/BU2
10.0 Type Byte BU1/BU2
11.0 Error number Byte BU1/BU2
...
120.0
21
Timestamp D-word BU1/BU2
124.0 Type Byte BU1/BU2
125.0 Error number Byte BU1/BU2
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-9
B.7 Data Record 92 - Device Diagnostics
Byte.Bit Specification Information DP
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
0.0 Reserved
1.0 Status messages -
General
Status - General fault BU1/BU2
1.1 Status - General warning BU1/BU2
1.2 Status - Device BU1/BU2
1.3 Status - Bus BU1/BU2
1.4 Status - PLC/DCS BU1/BU2
1.5 Status - Motor current flowing IM
1.6 Reserved
2.0 Status messages -
Controlling
Status - ON <<
Dependent on the
control function
2.1 Status - ON <
2.2 Status - OFF
2.3 Status - ON >
2.4 Status - ON >>
2.5 Status - Start active BU1/BU2
2.6 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing starters
and positioners
2.7 Status - Switching interval active Star-delta, Dahlander,
pole-changing swit-
ches
3.0 Status - Runs in open direction
Dependent on the
control function
3.1 Status - Runs in closed direction
3.2 Status - FC
3.3 Status - FO
3.4 Status - TC
3.5 Status - TO
3.6 Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU1/BU2 M
3.7 Status - OPO BU2
4.0 Status - Remote mode of operation BU1/BU2
4.1 Status messages -
Protection
Status - Emergency start executed IM M
4.2 Status - Cooling down time active IM M
4.3 Status - Pause time active IM
4.4 Status messages -
Miscellaneous
Status - Device test active BU1/BU2
4.5 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM
4.6 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM
4.7 Reserved
5.0 Events - Protec-
tion
Event - Overload operation
IM
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
5.1 Event - Unbalance IM
5.2 Event - Overload IM
5.3 Event - Overload + phase failure IM
5.4 Event - Internal earth fault IM
5.5 Event - External earth fault EM
5.6 Event - Warning ext. earth fault EM
5.7 Event - Thermistor overload Th
6.0 Event - Thermistor short circuit Th
6.1 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th
6.2 Event - TM warning T> TM
6.3 Event - TM tripping T> TM
6.4 Event - TM sensor error TM
6.5 Event - TM Out of range TM
6.6 Reserved
7.0 Events - Level
monitoring
Event - Warning I> IM
7.1 Event - Warning I< IM
7.2 Event - Warning P> UM
7.3 Event - Warning P< UM
7.4 Event - Warning cos phi< UM
7.5 Event - Warning U< UM
7.6 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
7.7 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< AM
8.0 Event - Tripping I> IM
8.1 Event - Tripping I< IM
8.2 Event - Tripping P> UM
8.3 Event - Tripping P< UM
8.4 Event - Tripping cos phi< UM
8.5 Event - Tripping U< UM
8.6 Event - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
8.7 Event - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA< AM
9.0 Event - Blocking IM
9.1 Reserved
9.3 Event - No start permitted BU1/BU2
9.4 Event - Number of starts > BU1/BU2
9.5 Event - Another start permitted BU1/BU2
9.6 Event - Motor operating hours > BU1/BU2
9.7 Event - Motor stop time > BU1/BU2
10.0 Event - Limit value 1 BU2
10.1 Event - Limit value 2 BU2
10.2 Event - Limit value 3 BU2
10.3 Event - Limit value 4 BU2
Byte.Bit Specification Information DP
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-11
10.4 Events -
Miscellaneous
Event - Ext. fault 1 BU1/BU2
10.5 Event - Ext. fault 2 BU1/BU2
10.6 Event - Ext. fault 3 BU1/BU2
10.7 Event - Ext. fault 4 BU1/BU2
11.0 Event - Ext. fault 5 BU2
11.1 Event - Ext. fault 6 BU2
11.2 Reserved
11.3 Reserved
11.4 Event - Analog module open circuit AM
11.5 Reserved
12.0 Events -
Timestamp
function
Event - Timestamp function
active+ok
BU2
12.1 Reserved
12.4 Events - System
interface
Event - Configured operator panel
missing
BU1/BU2
12.5 Event - Module not supported BU1/BU2
12.6 Reserved
13.0 Events - Memory
module
Event - Memory module read in BU1/BU2
13.1 Event - Memory module program-
med
BU1/BU2
13.2 Event - Memory module deleted BU1/BU2
13.3 Reserved
13.7 Events - Addres-
sing plug
Event - Addressing plug read in BU1/BU2
14.0 Events - Parame-
terization
Event - Parameter blocking during
start-up active
BU1/BU2 M
14.1 Event - Parameter change not per-
mitted in the current operating
state
BU1/BU2 M
14.2 Event - Device does not support the
required functions
BU1/BU2 M
14.3 Event - Parameter faulty BU1/BU2 M
14.4 Event - Wrong password BU1/BU2 M
14.5 Event - Password protection active BU1/BU2
14.6 Event - Basic factory default setting BU1/BU2
14.7 Event - Parameterization active BU1/BU2
15.0 Event - prm number error (bytes) **) BU1/BU2
16.0 Reserved
17.0 Warnings - Protec-
tion
Warning - Overload operation IM W
17.1 Warning - Asymmety IM W
17.2 Warning - Overload IM W
17.3 Warning - Overload + phase failure IM W
Byte.Bit Specification Information DP
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
17.4 Warning - Internal earth fault IM W
17.5 Warning - External earth fault EM W
17.6 Reserved
17.7 Warning - Thermistor overload Th W
18.0 Warning - Thermistor short circuit Th W
18.1 Warning - Thermistor open circuit Th W
18.2 Warning - TM warning T> TM W
18.3 Reserved
18.4 Warning - TM sensor error TM W
18.5 Warning - TM Out of range TM W
18.6 Reserved
19.0 Warnings -
Level monitoring
Warning - Warning I> IM W
19.1 Warning - Warning I< IM W
19.2 Warning - Warning P> UM W
19.3 Warning - Warning P< UM W
19.4 Warning - Warning cos phi < UM W
19.5 Warning - Warning U< UM W
19.6 Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM W
19.7 Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< AM W
20.0 Warning - Blocking IM W
20.1 Reserved
20.3 Warning - No start permitted BU1/BU2 W
20.4 Warning - Number of motor starts> BU1/BU2 W
20.5 Warning - Another start permitted BU1/BU2 W
20.6 Warning - Motor operating hours > BU1/BU2 W
20.7 Warning - Motor stop time > BU1/BU2 W
21.0 Warnings -
Miscellaneous
Warning - Ext. fault 1 BU1/BU2 W
21.1 Warning - Ext. fault 2 BU1/BU2 W
21.2 Warning - Ext. fault 3 BU1/BU2 W
21.3 Warning - Ext. fault 4 BU1/BU2 W
21.4 Warning - Ext. fault 5 BU2 W
21.5 Warning - Ext. fault 6 BU2 W
21.6 Reserved
21.7 Reserved
22.0 Warning - Analog module open cir-
cuit
AM W
22.1 Reserved
23.0 Faults -
General
Fault - HW fault basic unit BU1/BU2 F9 0
23.1 Fault - Module fault
(e.g. module IM, DM)
BU1/BU2 F9 1
Byte.Bit Specification Information DP
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-13
23.2 Fault - Temporary components (e.g.
memory module)
BU1/BU2 F9 2
23.3 Fault - Configuration fault BU1/BU2 F16 3
23.4 Fault - Parameterization BU1/BU2 F16 4
23.5 Fault - Bus BU1/BU2 5
23.6 Fault - PLC/DCS BU1/BU2 6
23.7 Reserved
24.0 Faults -
Controlling
Fault - Runtime ON CF = positioner FAU 8
24.1 Fault - Execution OFF command CF = positioner FAU 9
24.2 Fault - F ON CF = positioner FAU 10
24.3 Fault - F OFF CF = positioner FAU 11
24.4 Fault - Blocked positioner CF = positioner FAU 12
24.5 Fault - Double 0 CF = positioner FAU 13
24.6 Fault - Double 1 CF = positioner FAU 14
24.7 Fault - End position CF = positioner FAU 15
25.0 Fault - Antivalence CF = positioner FAU 16
25.1 Fault - Cold starting (TPF) error BU1/BU2 FAU 17
25.2 Fault - UVO error BU2 FAU 18
25.3 Fault - OPO error BU2 FAU 19
25.4 Reserved
26.0 Reserved
26.1 Faults - Protection Fault - Unbalance IM FAU 25
26.2 Fault - Overload IM FAU 26
26.3 Fault - Overload + phase failure IM FAU 27
26.4 Fault - Int. earth fault IM FAU 28
26.5 Fault - Int. earth fault EM FAU 29
26.6 Reserved
26.7 Fault - Thermistor overload Th FAU 31
27.0 Fault - Thermistor short circuit Th FAU 32
27.1 Fault - Thermistor open circuit Th FAU 33
27.2 Reserved
27.3 Fault - TM tripping T> TM FAU 35
27.4 Fault - TM sensor error TM FAU 36
27.5 Fault - TM Out of range TM FAU 37
27.6 Reserved
28.0 Faults - Level
monitoring
Fault - Tripping I> IM FAU 40
28.1 Fault - Tripping I< IM FAU 41
28.2 Fault- Tripping P> UM FAU 42
28.3 Fault- Tripping P< UM FAU 43
28.4 Fault - Tripping cos phi< UM FAU 44
28.5 Fault - Tripping U< UM FAU 45
28.6 Fault - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA> AM FAU 46
Byte.Bit Specification Information DP
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
*The "DP Diagn." column contains the bits which are additionally available in
the diagnostics using PROFIBUS DP:
• FAU Fault
• S: Signal
• W: Warning
• F9, F16:Error types
See also Kapitel A.5 "Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics".
**) Event - prm error number (bytes):
If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (prm
group) which caused the error is transmitted here. You will find the parame-
ter groups in the parameter data records 130 to 133.
Figure B-3: Example of parameter group
***) See "Error numbers" in Kapitel B.6 "Data Record 72 - Fault Memory".
28.7 Fault - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA< AM FAU 47
29.0 Fault - Blocking IM FAU 48
29.1 Reserved
29.4 Fault - Number of starts > BU1/BU2 FAU 52
29.5 Reserved
30.0 Faults -
Miscellaneous
Fault - External fault 1 BU1/BU2 FAU 56
30.1 Fault - External fault 2 BU1/BU2 FAU 57
30.2 Fault - External fault 3 BU1/BU2 FAU 58
30.3 Fault - External fault 4 BU1/BU2 FAU 59
30.4 Fault - External fault 5 BU2 FAU 60
30.5 Fault - External fault 6 BU2 FAU 61
30.6 Reserved
30.7 Reserved
31.0 Fault - Analog module open circuit AM FAU 64
31.1 Fault - Test shutdown BU1/BU2 FAU 65
31.2 Reserved
Byte.Bit Specification Information DP
Diagn.*)
Error No.
***)
Table B-8: Data record 92 - Diagnostics (cont.)
Byte.Bit Specification
(Prm group)
0.0 Reserved
4.0 Device configuration
(see above) (12) Parameter group 12
.

.

.
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-15
B.8 Data Record 94 - Measured Values
1) S7 format:
0/4mA = 0
20mA = 27648
2) Representation "Heating up the motor model":
Value always refers to symm. trip level,
representation in 2% increments in bits 6..0 (range 0 to 254%),
bit 7 shows unbalance (fixed level 50%).
3) Representation in Kelvin.
Byte.Bit Specification Type Range Unit Infor-
mation
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Heating up the motor model Byte 0 .. 255 See
2
) IM
5.0 Phase unbalance Byte 0 .. 100 1 % IM
6.0 Cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1 % UM
7.0 Reserved Byte[5]
12.0 Max. current I
max
Word 0 .. 65535 1% / I
e
IM
14.0 Current I
L1
Word 0 .. 65535 1% / I
e
IM
16.0 Current I
L2
Word 0 .. 65535 1% / I
e
IM
18.0 Current I
L3
Word 0 .. 65535 1% / I
e
IM
20.0 Last tripping current Word 0 .. 65535 1% / I
e
IM
22.0 Time to trip Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms IM
24.0 Cooling down time Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms IM
26.0 Voltage U
L1
Word 0 .. 65535 1 V UM
28.0 Voltage U
L2
Word 0 .. 65535 1 V UM
30.0 Voltage U
L3
Word 0 .. 65535 1 V UM
32.0 AM - Output Word 0 .. 27648
See
1
)
AM
34.0 AM - Input 1 Word 0 .. 27648 AM
36.0 AM - Input 2 Word 0 .. 27648 AM
38.0 Reserved
40.0 Max. TM - Temperature Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see
3
) TM
42.0 TM - Temperature 1 Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see
3
) TM
44.0 TM - Temperature 2 Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see
3
) TM
46.0 TM - Temperature 3 Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see
3
) TM
48.0 Reserved Byte[4]
52.0 Real power P D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W UM
56.0 Apparent power S D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 VA UM
60.0 Reserved Byte[4]
Table B-9: Data record 94 - Measured values
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.9 Data Record 95 - Service/Statistical Data
Writing the service/statistical data
Writing is only possible if the password protection is not active.
Additional abbreviations
r/w: value can be written/changed
r: value can only be read
Byte.Bit Specification Type Range Unit Infor-
mation
0.0 Reserved Byte[4] 0
4.0 Permitted starts - Actual value Byte 0 .. 255 r BU1/BU2
5.0 Reserved Byte
8.0 Number of parameterizations Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1/BU2
10.0 Number of overload trippings Word 0 .. 65535 r/w BU1/BU2
12.0 Number of internal overload trip-
pings
Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1/BU2
14.0 Stop time Word 0 .. 65535 1 h r/w BU1/BU2
16.0 Timer 1 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms. r BU1/BU2
18.0 Timer 2 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms. r BU1/BU2
20.0 Timer 3 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms. r BU2
22.0 Timer 4 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms. r BU2
24.0 Timer 1 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1/BU2
26.0 Timer 2 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1/BU2
28.0 Timer 3 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU2
30.0 Timer 4 - Actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU2
32.0 Reserved Byte
40.0 Motor operating hours D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 s r/w BU1/BU2
44.0 Int. motor operating hours D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 s r BU1/BU2
48.0 Device operating hours D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 s r BU1/BU2
52.0 Numer of starts D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r/w BU1/BU2
56.0 Internal number of starts right D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r BU1/BU2
60.0 Internal number of starts left D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r BU1/BU2
64.0 Reserved Byte[12]
Table B-10: Data record 95 - Diagnostics - Statistical data
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-17
B.10 Data Record 130 - Basic Device Parameters 1
Byte
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Device configuration (12) Byte[8] BU1/BU2
4.0 Device class Byte 5, 9 5 = BU1
9 = BU2
BU1/BU2
BU2
5.0 Thermistor (Th) Bit 0, 1 1 = active; thermistor in the BU BU1/BU2
5.1 Reserved Bit[7]
6.0 Operator panel (OP) Bit 0, 1 BU1/BU2
6.1 Analog module (AM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
6.2 Temperature module (TM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
6.3 Earth-fault module (EM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
6.4 Digital module 1 (DM1) Bit[2] 0 .. 2 0 = no digital module
1 = monostable
2 = bistable
BU2
6.6 Digital module 2 (DM2) Bit[2] 0 .. 2 BU2
7.0 Reserved Bit[8]
8.0 Current measuring module
(IM)
Bit[7] 0 .. 5 0 = no current measuring
1 = 0.3 A - 3 A
2 = 2.4 A -25 A
3 = 10 A - 100 A
4 = 20 A - 200 A
5 = 63 A - 630 A
BU1/BU2
8.7 Voltage measuring (UM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
9.0 Reserved
10.0 Control function (CF) 0x00
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x20
0x21

0x30
0x31

0x40
0x41

0x50
0x60
0x61
0x62
0x63
0x64
0x70
0x71
0x00 = overload
0x10 = direct starter
0x11 = reversing starter
0x12 =linked switchgear
0x20 = star-delta starter
0x21 = star-delta starter with
reversal of the direction of rota-
tion
0x30 =Dahlander
0x31 = Dahlander with reversal
of the direction of rotation
0x40 = pole-changing switch
0x41 = pole-changing switch
with reversal of the direction of
rotation
0x50 = valve
0x60 =positioner 1
0x61 =positioner 2
0x62 =positioner 3
0x63 =positioner 4
0x64 =positioner 5
0x70 =soft starter
0x71 =soft starter with rever-
sing contactor
BU1/BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU1 BU2
BU2
BU2

BU2
BU2

BU2
BU2

BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
11.0 Reserved Bit[8]
Table B-11: Data record 130 - Basic device parameter 1
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
12.0 Bit parameters (16)
12.0 No configuration fault due to
OP
Bit 0, 1 0 BU1/BU2
12.1 Parameter blocking during
start-up active
Bit 0, 1 1 BU1/BU2
12.2 Test/reset buttons blocked Bit 0, 1 0 BU1/BU2
12.3 Bus and PLC/DCS - Reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = manual, 1 = automatic BU1/BU2
12.4 Reserved Bit 0
12.5 Reserved Bit 0
12.6 Reserved Bit 0
12.7 Reserved Bit 0
13.0 Diagnostics for process
signals
Bit 0, 1 0 BU1/BU2
13.1 Diagnostics for process
warnings
Bit 0, 1 1 BU1/BU2
13.2 Diagnostics for process faults Bit 0, 1 1 BU1/BU2
13.3 Diagnostics for device faults Bit 0, 1 1 BU1/BU2
13.4 Reserved Bit 0
13.5 Reserved Bit 0
13.6 Bus monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU1/BU2
13.7 PLC/DCS monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU1/BU2
14.0 Overload protection - Type of
load
Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase, 1 = 1-phase IM
14.1 Overload protection - Reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = manual, 1 = automatic IM
14.2 Reserved Bit 0
14.3 Save switching command Bit 0, 1 0
14.4 Non-maintained command
mode
Bit 0, 1 0
14.5 Cold starting level (TPF) Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact BU1/BU2
14.6 Type of load Bit 0, 1 0 0 = motor, 1 = resistiveload BU1/BU2
14.7 Reserved Bit 0
15.0 External fault 1 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact BU1/BU2
15.1 External fault 2 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 BU1/BU2
15.2 External fault 3 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 BU1/BU2
15.3 External fault 4 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 BU1/BU2
15.4 External fault 1 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 0 = always, 1 = only motor ON BU1/BU2
15.5 External fault 2 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 BU1/BU2
15.6 External fault 3 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 BU1/BU2
15.7 External fault 4 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 BU1/BU2
Byte
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
Table B-11: Data record 130 - Basic device parameter 1 (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-19
16.0 Bit[2] parameters (20)
16.0 Thermistor -
Overload response
Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 3
0 = deactivated
1 = signal
2 = warn
3 = switch off
Th
16.2 Thermistor - Response
to sensor error
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 Th
16.4 Internal earth fault - Response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
16.6 Motor protection -
Overload response
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 3
17.0 Motor protection - Overload
response
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2
17.2 Motor protection - Response
to unbala
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2
17.4 Tripping response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0
17.6 Warning response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0
18.0 Tripping response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0
18.2 Warning response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0
18.4 Blocking protection -
Response
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
18.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
19.0 Monitoring the number of
starts -
Response to overshooting
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1/BU2
19.2 Monitoring the number of
starts -
Response at pre-warning
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1/BU2
19.4 Operating hours
monitoring - Response
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1/BU2
19.6 Stop time monitoring -
Response
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1/BU2
20.0 Ext. fault 1 - Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU1/BU2
20.2 Ext. fault 2 - Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU1/BU2
20.4 Ext. fault 3 - Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU1/BU2
20.6 Ext. fault 4 - Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU1/BU2
21.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.2 Basic unit - Debounce time
inputs
Bit[2] 0 - 3 1 Offset 6 ms BU1/BU2
21.4 Timer 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = with clsg. delay
1 = with clsg. delay with mem.
2 = with OFF delay
3 = with fleet. clsg.
BU1/BU2
21.6 Timer 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1/BU2
22.0 Signal conditioning 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = non-inverting
1 = inverting
2 = rising edge with memory
3 = falling edge with memory
BU1/BU2
22.2 Signal conditioning 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1/BU2
22.4 Non-volatile
element 1 - Type
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1/BU2
22.6 Non-volatile
element 2 - Type
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1/BU2
23.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0 BU1/BU2
Byte
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
Table B-11: Data record 130 - Basic device parameter 1 (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
23.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0 BU1/BU2
23.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0 BU1/BU2
23.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0 BU1/BU2
24.0 Bit[4] parameters (24)
24.0 External fault 1 -
Reset also by
Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] = panel reset
Bit[1] = automatic reset
Bit[2] = remote reset
Bit[3] = OFF command reset
BU1/BU2
24.4 External fault 2 -
Reset also by
Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU1/BU2
25.0 External fault 3 -
Reset also by
Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU1/BU2
25.4 External fault 4 -
Reset also by
Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU1/BU2
26.0 Limit monitor - Hysteresis for
limit monitoring
Bit[4] 0 .. 15 5 BU1/BU2
26.4 Reserved Bit[4] 0
27.0 Reserved Bit[4] 0
27.4 Reserved Bit[4] 0
28.0 Byte parameters (28)
28.0 Internal earth fault - Delay Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM
29.0 Overload protection - Class Byte 5, 10 .. 35,
40
10 BU1
BU2
30.0 Motor protection - Delay
with overload operation
Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM
31.0 Motor protection - Unbalance
level
Byte 0 .. 100 40 IM
32.0 Unbalance protection - Delay
with unbalance
Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM
33.0 Interlocking time Byte 0 .. 255 0
34.0 F time Byte 0 .. 255 5 0 = deactivated
35.0 Trip level I> Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM
36.0 Warning level I> Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM
37.0 Trip level I< Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM
38.0 Warning level I< Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM
39.0 Blocking level Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM
40.0 Trip delay I> Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM
41.0 Warning delay I> Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM
42.0 Trip delay I< Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM
43.0 Warning delay I< Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM
44.0 Blocking delay Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM
45.0 Monitoring the number of
starts - Permitted starts
Byte 1 .. 255 1 BU1
BU2
46.0 Reserved Byte 0
47.0 Reserved Byte 0
48.0 Truth table 1 type 3I/1O Byte 0 ..
11111111B
0 BU1/BU2
Byte
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
Table B-11: Data record 130 - Basic device parameter 1 (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-21
49.0 Truth table 2 type 3I/1O Byte 0 ..
11111111B
0 BU1/BU2
50.0 Truth table 3 type 3I/1O Byte 0 ..
11111111B
0 BU1/BU2
51.0 Reserved Byte 0
52.0 Word parameters (32)
52.0 Motor protection - Cooling
down time
Word 600 ..65535 3000 IM
54.0 Motor protection - Pause time Word 0 .. 65535 0 0 = deactivated IM
56.0 Run time Word 0 .. 65535 10 0 = deactivated
58.0 Monitoring the number of
starts -
Time range for starts
Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
60.0 Monitoring the number of
starts - Interlocking time
Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
62.0 Stop time level > Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
64.0 Timer 1 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
66.0 Timer 2 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
68.0 Counter 1 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
70.0 Counter 2 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
72.0 Reserved Word 0
74.0 Reserved Word 0
76.0 D-word parameters (36)
76.0 Operator enables Bit[32] 0 .. 1..1B 0.0.0B
80.0 Overload protection -
Set current Ie1
D-word 0 .. 63000 30 IM
84.0 Motor operating hours level > D-word 0 ..
0xFFFFFFFF
0 BU1
BU2
88.0 Reserved D-word 0
Byte
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
Table B-11: Data record 130 - Basic device parameter 1 (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.11 Data Record 131 - Basic Device Parameter 2 (Plug )
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Byte parameters (40)
4.0 BU - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
5.0 BU - Output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
6.0 BU - Output 3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
7.0 Reserved Byte 0
8.0 OP - LED green 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP
9.0 OP - LED green 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP
10.0 OP - LED green 3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP
11.0 OP - LED green 4 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP
12.0 OP - LED yellow 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP
13.0 OP - LED yellow 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP
14.0 OP - LED yellow 3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP
15.0 Reserved Byte 0
16.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 .. 255 105 Default: Status - ON < BU1/BU2
17.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.1 Byte 0 .. 255 106 Default: Status - OFF BU1/BU2
18.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Byte 0 .. 255 107 Default: Status - ON > BU1/BU2
19.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.3 Byte 0 .. 255 128 Default: Event - Over-
load operation
BU1/BU2
20.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Byte 0 .. 255 110 Default: Status -
Interlocking time
active
BU1/BU2
21.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Byte 0 .. 255 120 Default: Status -
Remote mode of ope-
ration
BU1/BU2
22.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Byte 0 .. 255 96 Default: Status -
General fault
BU1/BU2
23.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Byte 0 .. 255 97 Default: Status -
General warning
BU1/BU2
24.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
25.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
26.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
27.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
28.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.4 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
29.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.5 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
30.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.6 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
31.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.7 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
32.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
33.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
34.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
35.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
36.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.4 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
Table B-12: Data record 131 - Basic device parameter 2
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-23
37.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.5 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
38.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.6 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
39.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.7 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
40.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
41.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
42.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
43.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
44.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.4 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
45.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.5 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
46.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.6 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
47.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.7 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
48.0 Monitoring PLC/ DCS input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
49.0 Motor protection - Emergency start Byte 0 .. 255 60 Default: Cyclic
receive - bit 0.4
IM
50.0 Reserved Byte 0
51.0 Reserved Byte 0
52.0 Mode selector S1 Byte 0 .. 255 61 Default: Cyclic
receive - bit 0.5
BU1/BU2
53.0 Mode selector S2 Byte 0 .. 255 2 Default: Fixed level
value "1"
BU1/BU2
54.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON< Byte 0 .. 255 0 Dependent
on the con-
trol
function
55.0 Control station - Local control [LC] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0
56.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON> Byte 0 .. 255 0
57.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON< Byte 0 .. 255 56 Default: Cyclic
receive - bit 0.0
58.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 57 Default: Cyclic
receive - bit 0.1
59.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON> Byte 0 .. 255 58 Default: Cyclic
receive - bit 0.2
60.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON< Byte 0 .. 255 0
61.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0
62.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON> Byte 0 .. 255 0
63.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON< Byte 0 .. 255 0
64.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0
65.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON> Byte 0 .. 255 0
66.0 Control function - ON< Byte 0 .. 255 73 Default: General con-
trol station ON <
67.0 Control function - OFF Byte 0 .. 255 74 Default: General con-
trol station OFF
68.0 Control function - ON> Byte 0 .. 255 75 Default: General con-
trol station ON >
69.0 Control function - Feedback ON Byte 0 .. 255 101 Default: Status -
Motor current flowing
70.0 External fault 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
71.0 External fault 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
72.0 External fault 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
Table B-12: Data record 131 - Basic device parameter 2 (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
73.0 External fault 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
74.0 External fault 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
75.0 External fault 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
76.0 External fault 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
77.0 External fault 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
78.0 Cold starting (TPF) Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
79.0 Test 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 59 Default: Cyclic
receive - bit 0.3
BU1/BU2
80.0 Test 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
81.0 Reset 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 62 Default: Cyclic
receive - bit 0.6
BU1/BU2
82.0 Reset 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
83.0 Reset 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
84.0 Reserved Byte 0
85.0 Reserved Byte 0
86.0 Reserved Byte 0
87.0 Reserved Byte 0
88.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
89.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
90.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
91.0 Truth table 2 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
92.0 Truth table 2 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
93.0 Truth table 2 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
94.0 Truth table 3 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
95.0 Truth table 3 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
96.0 Truth table 3 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
97.0 Reserved Byte 0
98.0 Timer 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
99.0 Timer 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
100.0 Timer 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
101.0 Timer 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
102.0 Counter 1 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
103.0 Counter 1 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
104.0 Counter 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
105.0 Counter 2 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
106.0 Counter 2 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
107.0 Counter 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
108.0 Signal conditioning 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
109.0 Signal conditioning 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
110.0 Signal conditioning 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
111.0 Signal conditioning 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
112.0 Non-volatile element 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
113.0 Non-volatile element 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
114.0 Non-volatile element 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
Table B-12: Data record 131 - Basic device parameter 2 (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-25
115.0 Non-volatile element 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
116.0 Flashing 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
117.0 Flashing 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
118.0 Flashing 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
119.0 Flickering 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
120.0 Flickering 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
121.0 Flickering 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1/BU2
122.0 Analog parameters (44)
122.0 PLC/DCS analog input Byte 0 .. 255 16 Default: Max. current
I_max
BU1/BU2
123.0 Reserved Byte 0
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
Table B-12: Data record 131 - Basic device parameter 2 (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.12 Data Record 132 - Extended Device Parameter 1
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range Unit De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Bit parameters (17)
4.0 3UF50 compatibility mode Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
4.1 3UF50 mode of operation Bit 0, 1 0 0 = DPV0,
1 = DPV1
BU2
4.2 Reserved Bit 0
4.3 Reserved Bit 0
4.4 Reserved Bit 0
4.5 Reserved Bit 0
4.6 Reserved Bit 0
4.7 Reserved Bit 0
5.0 Reserved Bit 0
5.1 Reserved Bit 0
5.2 Reserved Bit 0
5.3 Reserved Bit 0
5.4 Analog module - Measuring range
Input
Bit 0, 1 0
0 = 0..20 mA
1 = 4 - 20 mA
AM
5.5 Analog module - Measuring range
Output
Bit 0, 1 0 AM
5.6 Reserved Bit 0
5.7 Reserved Bit 0
6.0 Overshooting/undershooting of
limit value 1
Bit 0, 1 0 0 = ">"
(overshooting)
1 = "<"
(undershoo-
ting)
BU2
6.1 Overshooting/undershooting of
limit value 2
Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
6.2 Overshooting/undershooting of
limit value 3
Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
6.3 Overshooting/undershooting of
limit value 4
Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
6.4 Reserved Bit 0
6.5 OPO level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO con-
tact,
1 = NC contact
BU2
6.6 Positioner response for OPO Bit 0, 1 0 0 = closed,
1 = open
BU2
6.7 Star-delta - Transformer mounting Bit 0, 1 0 0 = delta
1 = in supply
cable
7.0 External fault 5 - Level Bit 0, 1 0
0 = NO contact,
1 = NC contact
BU2
7.1 External fault 6 - Level Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
7.2 Reserved Bit 0
7.3 Reserved Bit 0
Table B-13: Data record 132 - Extended device parameter 1
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-27
7.4 Monitoring external fault 5 Bit 0, 1 0
0 = always
BU2
7.5 Monitoring external fault 6 Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
7.6 Reserved Bit 0
7.7 Reserved Bit 0
8.0 Reserved Bit 0
8.1 Reserved Bit 0
8.2 Reserved Bit 0
8.3 Reserved Bit 0
8.4 Timestamping active Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
8.5 Reserved Bit 0
8.6 Reserved Bit 0
8.7 Reserved Bit 0
9.0 Reserved Bit 0
9.1 Reserved Bit 0
9.2 Reserved Bit 0
9.3 Reserved Bit 0
9.4 Reserved Bit 0
9.5 Reserved Bit 0
9.6 Reserved Bit 0
9.7 Reserved Bit 0
10.0 Bit[2] parameters (21)
10.0 3UF50 basic type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU2
10.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
10.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
10.6 UVO mode of operation Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = deactiva-
ted,
1 = activated
BU2
11.0 Tripping monitoring U< Bit[2] 1, 2 1 1 = on+
(always, not
TPF)
2 = run (motor
ON, not TPF)
UM
11.2 Warning monitoring U< Bit[2] 1, 2 1 UM
11.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
11.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
12.0 Tripping monitoring
0/4-20 mA>
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = on
(always)
1 = on+
(always, not
TPF)
2 = run (motor
ON, not TPF)
3 = run+
(motor ON, not
TPF,
start hiding)
AM
12.2 Warning monitoring 0/4 - 20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 AM
12.4 Tripping monitoring
0/4-20 mA<
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 AM
12.6 Warning monitoring 0/4 - 20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 AM
13.0 Limit value 1 monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
13.2 Limit value 2 monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
13.4 Limit value 3 monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
13.6 Limit value 4 monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range Unit De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
Table B-13: Data record 132 - Extended device parameter 1 (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
14.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
14.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
14.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
14.6 AM - Active inputs Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0=1 input
1=2 inputs
AM
15.0 DM - Debounce time inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 10 ms. 1 Offset 6ms DM1/DM2
15.2 AM - Response at open circuit Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 2 0 = deactiva-
ted
1 = signal
2 = warn
3 = switch off
AM
15.4 EM - Response to an external earth
fault
Bit[2] 1, 3 1 EM
15.6 EM - Response to warning of an
external earth fault
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 EM
16.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
16.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
16.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
16.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
17.0 TM - Tripping response T> Bit[2] 1, 3 3 0 = deactiva-
ted
1 = signal
2 = warn
3 = switch off
TM
17.2 TM - Warning response T> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 TM
17.4 TM - Response to a sensor error/
Out of range
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 TM
17.6 TM - Active sensors Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = 1 sensor
1 = 2 sensors
2= 3 sensors
TM
18.0 Tripping response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 0 = deactiva-
ted
1 = signal
2 = warn
3 = switch off
UM
18.2 Warning response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
18.4 Tripping response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
18.6 Warning response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
19.0 Tripping response cos phi< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
19.2 Warning response cos phi< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
19.4 Tripping response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
19.6 Warning response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
20.0 Tripping response 0/4 - 20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM
20.2 Warning response 0/4 - 20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM
20.4 Tripping response 0/4 - 20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM
20.6 Warning response 0/4 - 20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM
21.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
21.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
22.0 Response - External fault 5 Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 0 = deactiva-
ted
1 = signal
2 = warn
3 = switch off
BU2
22.2 Response - External fault 6 Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU2
22.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
22.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range Unit De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
Table B-13: Data record 132 - Extended device parameter 1 (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-29
23.0 Recording of analog values - Trig-
ger edge
Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = positive
1 = negative
BU2
23.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
23.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
23.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
24.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
25.0 Timer 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = with clsg.
delay
1 = with clsg.
delay. &
mem.
2 = with OFF
delay
3 = with fleet.
clsg.
BU2
25.2 Timer 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
25.4 Signal conditioning 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = non-inver-
ting
1 =
inverting
2 = rising edge
with memory
3 = falling
edge with
memory
BU2
25.6 Signal conditioning 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
26.0 Non-volatile
element 3 - Type
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
26.2 Non-volatile
element 4 - Type
Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
26.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
26.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
27.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0
27.2 Reserved Bit[2] 0
27.4 Reserved Bit[2] 0
27.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0
28.0 Bit[4] parameters (25)
28.0 TM - Sensor type Bit[3]
+bit
000B - 100B 000B 000B = PT100,
001B = PT1000
010B = KTY83
011B = KTY84
100B = NTC
TM
28.4 Reserved Bit[4] 0
29.0 External fault 5 -
Reset also by
Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] =
panel reset,
Bit[1] =
auto reset,
Bit[2] =
remote reset,
Bit[3] = OFF
command
reset
BU2
29.4 External fault 6 -
Reset also by
Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU2
30.0 Reserved Bit[4] 0
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range Unit De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
Table B-13: Data record 132 - Extended device parameter 1 (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
30.4 Reserved Bit[4] 0
31.0 Reserved Bit[4] 0
31.4 Reserved Bit[4] 0
32.0 Truth table 7 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0 BU2
32.4 Truth table 8 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0 BU2
33.0 Reserved Bit[4] 0
33.4 Reserved Bit[4] 0
34.0 Hysteresis P - cos phi - U Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% UM
34.4 Hysteresis 0/4 - 20 mA Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% AM
35.0 Hysteresis free limit values Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% BU2
35.4 Reserved Bit[4] 0
36.0 Byte parameters (29)
36.0 Reserved Byte 0
37.0 EM - Delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms. 5 EM
38.0 Trip level cos phi< Byte 0 - 100 1% 0 UM
39.0 Warnung level cos phi< Byte 0 - 100 1% 0 UM
40.0 Trip level U< Byte 0 - 255 8 V 0 UM
41.0 Warning level U< Byte 0 - 255 8 V 0 UM
42.0 Trip level 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM
43.0 Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM
44.0 Trip level 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM
45.0 Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM
46.0 Trip delay P> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
47.0 Warning delay P> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
48.0 Trip delay P< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
49.0 Warning delay P< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
50.0 Trip delay cos phi< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
51.0 Warning delay cos phi< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
52.0 Trip delay U< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
53.0 Warning delay U< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
54.0 Trip delay 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM
55.0 Warning delay 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM
56.0 Trip delay 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM
57.0 Warning delay 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM
58.0 Limit value 1 delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 BU2
59.0 Limit value 2 delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 BU2
60.0 Limit value 3 delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 BU2
61.0 Limit value 4 delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 BU2
62.0 TM - Hysteresis Byte 0 - 255 1 K 5 TM
63.0 Maximum time for star operation Byte 0 - 255 1s 20 Star-delta
starter
64.0 UVO time Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 0 BU2
65.0 Staggering time Byte 0 - 255 1s 0 BU2
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range Unit De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
Table B-13: Data record 132 - Extended device parameter 1 (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-31
66.0 Recording of analog values -
Pretrigger
Byte 0 - 20 5% 0 BU2
67.0 Reserved Byte 0
68.0 Reserved Byte 0
69.0 Reserved Byte 0
70.0 Truth table 4 type 3I/1O Byte 0 .. 11111111B 0 BU2
71.0 Truth table 5 type 3I/1O Byte 0 .. 11111111B 0 BU2
72.0 Truth table 6 type 3I/1O Byte 0 .. 11111111B 0 BU2
73.0 Reserved Byte 0
74.0 Reserved Byte 0
75.0 Reserved Byte 0
76.0 Word parameters (33)
76.0 Analog module - Start value output Word 0 .. 65535 0 Value for 0/4
mA
AM
78.0 Analog module - End value output Word 0 .. 65535 27648 Value for 20
mA
AM
80.0 TM - Trip level T> Word 0 .. 65535 1 K 0 TM
82.0 TM - Warning level T> Word 0 .. 65535 1 K 0 TM
84.0 Limit monitor 1 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2
86.0 Limit monitor 2 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2
88.0 Limit monitor 3 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2
90.0 Limit monitor 4 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2
92.0 Timer 3 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms 0 BU2
94.0 Timer 4 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms 0 BU2
96.0 Counter 3 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2
98.0 Counter 4 - Limit value Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2
100.0 Switching interval Word 0 .. 65535 10 ms 0
102.0 Recording of analog values - Pre-
trigger
Word 1 .. 50000 1 ms 100 BU2
104.0 Reserved Word 0
106.0 Reserved Word 0
108.0 D-word parameters (37)
108.0 Overload protection - Set current
I
e2
D-word 0 .. 63000 10 mA 0
112.0 Trip level P> D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM
116.0 Warning level P> D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM
120.0 Trip level P< D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM
124.0 Warning level P< D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM
128.0 Truth table 9
type 5I/2O - Output 1
Bit[32] 0 .. 1..1B 0 BU2
132.0 Truth table 9
type 5I/2O - Output 2
Bit[32] 0 .. 1..1B 0 BU2
136.0 Reserved D-word 0
140.0 Reserved D-word 0
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range Unit De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
Table B-13: Data record 132 - Extended device parameter 1 (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.13 Data Record 133 - Extended Device Parameter 2
(Plug )
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Byte parameters (41)
4.0 DM1 - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM1
5.0 DM1 - Output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM1
6.0 DM2 - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM2
7.0 DM2 - Output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM2
8.0 Reserved Byte 0
9.0 Reserved Byte 0
10.0 Reserved Byte 0
11.0 Reserved Byte 0
12.0 Timestamping - Input 0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
13.0 Timestamping - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
14.0 Timestamping - Input 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
15.0 Timestamping - Input 3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
16.0 Timestamping - Input 4 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
17.0 Timestamping - Input 5 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
18.0 Timestamping - Input 6 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
19.0 Timestamping - Input 7 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
20.0 Recording of analog values - Trigger input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
21.0 Reserved Byte 0
22.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0 Dependent
on the
control
function
23.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0
24.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0
25.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0
26.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0
27.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0
28.0 Control station - Operator panel [OP] ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0
29.0 Control station - Operator panel
[OP]<>/ <<>>
Byte 0 .. 255 0
30.0 Control function - ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0
31.0 Control function - ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0
32.0 Auxiliary control input - FC Byte 0 .. 255 0
33.0 Auxiliary control input - FO Byte 0 .. 255 0
34.0 Auxiliary control input - TC Byte 0 .. 255 0
35.0 Auxiliary control input - TO Byte 0 .. 255 0
36.0 External fault 5 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
37.0 External fault 6 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
38.0 Reserved Byte 0
39.0 Reserved Byte 0
Table B-14: Data record 133 - Extended device parameter 2
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-33
40.0 External fault 5 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
41.0 External fault 6 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
42.0 Reserved Byte 0
43.0 Reserved Byte 0
44.0 UVO error Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
45.0 OPO error Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
46.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
47.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
48.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
49.0 Truth table 5 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
50.0 Truth table 5 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
51.0 Truth table 5 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
52.0 Truth table 6 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
53.0 Truth table 6 3I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
54.0 Truth table 6 3I/1O - Input 3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
55.0 Truth table 7 2I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
56.0 Truth table 7 2I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
57.0 Truth table 8 2I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
58.0 Truth table 8 2I/1O - Input 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
59.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
60.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
61.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
62.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 4 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
63.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O - Input 5 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
64.0 Timer 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
65.0 Timer 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
66.0 Timer 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
67.0 Timer 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
68.0 Counter 3 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
69.0 Counter 3 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
70.0 Counter 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
71.0 Counter 4 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
72.0 Counter 4 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
73.0 Counter 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
74.0 Signal conditioning 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
75.0 Signal conditioning 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
76.0 Signal conditioning 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
77.0 Signal conditioning 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
78.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
79.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
80.0 Non-volatile element 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
81.0 Non-volatile element 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
82.0 Reserved Byte 0
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
Table B-14: Data record 133 - Extended device parameter 2 (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
83.0 Reserved Byte 0
84.0 Reserved Byte 0
85.0 Reserved Byte 0
86.0 Reserved Byte 0
87.0 Reserved Byte 0
88.0 Analog parameters (45)
88.0 Analog module - Output Byte 0 - 255 0 AM
89.0 Analog input limit value 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
90.0 Analog input limit value 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
91.0 Analog input limit value 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
92.0 Analog input limit value 4 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
93.0 Reserved Byte 0
94.0 Recording of analog values - Analog input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
95.0 PLC/DCS analog input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
96.0 PLC/DCS analog input 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
97.0 PLC/DCS analog input 4 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
98.0 Reserved Byte 0
99.0 Reserved Byte 0
Byte.
Bit
Specification
(Prm group)
Type Range De-
fault
Note Infor-
mation
Table B-14: Data record 133 - Extended device parameter 2 (cont.)
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-35
B.14 Data Record 139 - Marking
The diagnostics
• External fault 1 to 6 (events, warnings and faults)
• Limit value 1 to 4 (events)
• TM warning T>/tripping T> (events, warnings and faults)
• Warning/tripping 0/4 - 20 mA<> (events, warnings and faults)
can be parameterized to have various meanings e.g. fill level >, stock hot,
etc. To simplify the diagnostics, these texts can be saved in the device.
These can be created, read out and displayed, for example, with
SIMOCODE ES. The texts have no functionality.
Byte.Bit Specification Type Information
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Reserved Byte[6]
10.0 Marking - External fault 1 Byte[10] BU1/BU2
20.0 Marking - External fault 2 Byte[10] BU1/BU2
30.0 Marking - External fault 3 Byte[10] BU1/BU2
40.0 Marking - External fault 4 Byte[10] BU1/BU2
50.0 Marking - External fault 5 Byte[10] BU2
60.0 Marking - External fault 6 Byte[10] BU2
70.0 Reserved Byte[10]
80.0 Reserved Byte[10]
90.0 Marking - Limit value 1 Byte[10] BU2
100.0 Marking - Limit value 2 Byte[10] BU2
110.0 Marking - Limit value 3 Byte[10] BU2
120.0 Marking - Limit value 4 Byte[10] BU2
130.0 Marking - TM warning T> Byte[10] BU2
140.0 Marking - TM tripping T> Byte[10] BU2
150.0 Marking - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte[10] BU2
160.0 Marking - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte[10] BU2
170.0 Marking - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte[10] BU2
180.0 Marking - Tripping 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte[10] BU2
190.0 Reserved Byte[10]
Table B-15: Data record 139 - Marking
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.15 Data Record 160 - Communication Parameters
Attention
Only the address is relevant for writing. The baud rate is recognized automa-
tically. The current baud rate is read.
B.16 Data Record 165 - Comments
Byte Specification Type Information
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
BU1/BU2
4.0 Station address Byte
5.0 Baud rate Byte
6.0 to 11.0 Reserved Byte[6]
Table B-16: Data record 160 - Communication parameters
Byte.Bit Specification Type Information
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
BU1/BU2
4.0 System designation Byte[32]
36.0 Location identification Byte[22]
58.0 Date Byte[16]
74.0 Reserved Byte[38]
112.0 Comment Byte[54]
Table B-17: Data record 165 - Comments
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-37
B.17 Data Record 202 - Acyclic Receive
Description
The acylic control data can be used for any functions. The control data is
available as device-internal outputs (sockets).
Byte.Bit Specification Type Information
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
BU1/BU2
4.0 Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.0 Bit
4.1 Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.1 Bit
4.2 Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.2 Bit
4.3 Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.3 Bit
4.4 Acyclic Receive - v 0.4 Bit
4.5 Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.5 Bit
4.6 Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.6 Bit
4.7 Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.7 Bit
5.0 Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.0 Bit
5.1 Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.1 Bit
5.2 Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.2 Bit
5.3 Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.3 Bit
5.4 Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.4 Bit
5.5 Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.5 Bit
5.6 Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.6 Bit
5.7 Acyclic Receive - Bit 1.7 Bit
6.0 Acyclic Receive - Analog value Word
Table B-18: Data record 202 - Acyclic receive
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.18 Data Record 203 - Acyclic Send
Description
Any data can be transmitted via the acyclic signaling data. The signaling data
is available as device-internal inputs (plugs).
Byte.Bit Specification Type Information
0.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.0 Bit
BU1/BU2
0.1 Acyclic send - Bit 0.1 Bit
0.2 Acyclic send - Bit 0.2 Bit
0.3 Acyclic send - Bit 0.3 Bit
0.4 Acyclic send - Bit 0.4 Bit
0.5 Acyclic send - Bit 0.5 Bit
0.6 Acyclic send - Bit 0.6 Bit
0.7 Acyclic send - Bit 0.7 Bit
1.0 Acyclic send - Bit 1.0 Bit
1.1 Acyclic send - Bit 1.1 Bit
1.2 Acyclic send - Bit 1.2 Bit
1.3 Acyclic send - Bit 1.3 Bit
1.4 Acyclic send - Bit 1.4 Bit
1.5 Acyclic send - Bit 1.5 Bit
1.6 Acyclic send - Bit 1.6 Bit
1.7 Acyclic send - Bit 1.7 Bit
Table B-19: Data record 203 - Acyclic send
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-39
B.19 Data Record 224 - Password Protection
Beschreibung
• Password protection ON
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is
activated and the password is accepted. If, at the time of receiving, "Pass-
word protection ON" and the password are not the same, the event "Event -
Password false" is set and no change is carried out.
• Password protection OFF
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection
is deactivated. If the password is false, the event "Event - Password false" is
set and no change is carried out.
Table B-20: Data record 224 - Password protection
Byte.Bit Specification Type Information
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
BU1/BU2
4.0 Control flag: 0 = password protection OFF
1 = password protection ON
Bit
4.1 Reserved Bit[31]
8.0 Password Byte[8] BU1/BU2
16.0 Reserved Byte[8]
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.20 Assignment of Cyclic Control and Signaling Data for
Predefined Control Functions
B.20.1 Overload Relay
Table B-21: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Overload relay
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Not connected
Bit 0.2 Not connected
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Not connected
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Test/reset -> Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Not connected
Bit 0.2 Not connected
Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Not connected
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-41
B.20.2 Direct Starter
Table B-22: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Direct starter
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF
Bit 0.2 Status - ON >
Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.20.3 Reversing Starter
Table B-23: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Reversing starter
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<
Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON <
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF
Bit 0.2 Status - ON >
Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-43
B.20.4 Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
Table B-24: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Circuit breaker (MCCB)
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF
Bit 0.2 Status - ON >
Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.20.5 Star-delta Starter

Table B-25: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - star-delta starter
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF
Bit 0.2 Status - ON
Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Bit 0.4 Status - Switching interval active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-45
B.20.6 Star-delta Starter with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation

Table B-26: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Star-delta starter with reversal of the
direction of rotation
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<
Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON <
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF
Bit 0.2 Status - ON >
Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Bit 0.4 Status - Switching interval active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.20.7 Dahlander
Table B-27: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Dahlander
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>>
Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON >>
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF
Bit 0.2 Status - ON >
Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Bit 0.4 Status - Switching interval active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-47
B.20.8 Dahlander with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation
Table B-28: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Dahlander with reversal of the
direction of rotation
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>>
Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<<
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON >>
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF
Bit 0.2 Status - ON >
Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Bit 0.4 Status - Switching interval active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Status - ON <<
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Status ON <
Bit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.20.9 Pole-changing Switch
Table B-29: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Pole-changing switch
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>>
Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON >>
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF
Bit 0.2 Status - ON >
Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Bit 0.4 Status - Switching interval active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-49
B.20.10 Pole-changing Switch with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation
Table B-30: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Pole-changing switch with reversal of the
direction of rotation
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>>
Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<<
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON >>
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF
Bit 0.2 Status - ON >
Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Bit 0.4 Status - Switching interval active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Status - ON <<
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Status ON <
Bit 1.3 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-50 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.20.11 Valve
Table B-31: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Valve
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->Closed
Bit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->Open
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF (closed)
Bit 0.2 Status - ON> (open)
Bit 0.3 Not connected
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Not connected
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-51
B.20.12 Positioner
Table B-32: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Positioner
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->Closed
Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->Stopped
Bit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] ->Open
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON< (closed)
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF (stopped)
Bit 0.2 Status - ON> (open)
Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Status - positioner opens
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Status - positioner closes
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-52 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
B.20.13 Soft Starter
Table B-33: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Soft starter
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF
Bit 0.2 Status - ON >
Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Bit 0.4 Not connected
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 B-53
B.20.14 Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor
Table B-34: Assignment of cyclic control/signaling data - Soft starter with reversing contactor
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON<
Bit 0.1 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->PLC/DCS [DP] -> ON>
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks ->Standard functions - test/reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks -> Standard functions -> Emergency start -> Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device parameters ->Motor control ->Control stations ->Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks ->Standard functions ->Test/reset ->Reset 1 - Input
Bit 0.7 Not connected
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. signaling data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON <
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF
Bit 0.2 Status - ON >
Bit 0.3 Event - Overload prewarning (I>115%)
Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode of operation
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General warning
Bit 1.0 Not connected
Bit 1.1 Not connected
Bit 1.2 Not connected
Bit 1.3 Not connected
Bit 1.4 Not connected
Bit 1.5 Not connected
Bit 1.6 Not connected
Bit 1.7 Not connected
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max
Byte 4/5 *) (analog value) Not connected
Byte 6/7 *) (analog value)( Not connected
Byte 8/9 *) (analog value) Not connected
Data Formats and Data Records
SIMOCODE pro
B-54 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 C-1

Dimension Drawings C
In this chapter
This chapter contains the technical dimension drawings of the
SIMOCODE pro system components.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
• technicians.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• good knowledge about configuring switchgear.
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
C.1 3UF70 Basic Unit
C.1.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 Basic Unit
C.1.2 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 Basic Unit
86
5 36
8
0 1
0
6
1
2
5
4
45
8
0 1
0
6
1
2
5
45
115
5 65
4
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 C-3
C.2 3UF710 Current Measuring Modules
C.2.1 Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A ,
45 40 5
8
4
3
8
T1 T3
7,5
T2
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
C.2.2 Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A
55 67
9
4
6
5
14
5
T1
T2
T3
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 C-5
C.2.3 Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A,
120
95
7
9
9
5
5 140
7
8
25
7
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
C.2.4 Current Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A
120
95
37 17
9
7
9
9
5
1
1
9
7 47
140
5
8
4
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 C-7
C.2.5 Current Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A
145
5
7
25 50
11
9
8
5
1
2
2
1
4
7
125
6
148
60,5
6
0
,
5
6
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
C.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
C.3.1 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A
7
1
1
21
4
5
85
5
3
1
6
6
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 C-9
C.3.2 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A
20
2
3
1
2
94
5
5
9
2
6
0
5
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
C.3.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter)
3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A
l20
95
7
9
9
5
5
l40
7
8
25
7
K6
7K
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 C-11
C.3.4 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A
3
79
140
47 5
120
95
1
1
9
9
5
7
9
9
17 37
Ø
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
C.3.5 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Rail Connection)
3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A
145
6
149
67
8
8
3
2 125
1
4
7
1
2
2
Ø
1
1
25 48
Ø
1
1
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 C-13
C.4 3UF7200 Operator Panel
2
9
8 29 7
96
3
6
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
C.5 Expansion Modules
Versions:
• 3UF73 digital modules
• 3UF7500 earth-fault module
• 3UF7700 temperature module
• 3UF7400 analog module
115 5 4
1
0
6
8
9
2
22,5
1
1
0
15
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 C-15
C.6 Accessories
C.6.1 Door adapter
1
3
,
4
21 1,7
1,7
R
1
,
5
R
3
,
7
3
9
Ø
3
46
1
7
37
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 D-1

Technical Data D
In this chapter
This chapter contains the technical data about SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• configurators
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• good knowledge about configuring switchgear
• good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
Technical Data
SIMOCODE pro
D-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
D.1 Common Technical Data
Permiss. ambient temperature
In operation -25 °C - +60 °C
During storage and transport -40 °C - +80 °C
Site height above sea level
<2,000 m
<3,000 m Max. +50 °C (no safe isolation)
<4,000 m Max. +40 °C (no safe isolation)
Degree of protection (according
to IEC 60529)
All components (except current
measuring modules, rail connection,
operator panel and door adapter)
IP20
Current measuring module with
rail connection
IP00
Operator panel (front) and door
adapter (front) with cover
IP54
Shock resistance (sine pulse) 15 g/11 ms
Installation location Arbitrary
Frequencies 50/60 Hz ± 5%
EMC stability
according to IEC 60947-1
Corresponds to Degree of severity 3
Conducted interference signal
injection, burst according to
IEC 61000-4-4
2 kV (power ports) Overvoltage limiter is required for inductive loads.
1 kV (signal ports)
Conducted interference signal
injection, burst according to IEC
61000-4-5
2 kV (line to earth)
1 kV (line to earth)
Electrostatic discharging,
ESD according to IEC 61000-4-2
8 kV (air discharge)
6 kV (contact discharge)
Field-related interference signal
injection according to
IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m
EMC emitted interference
according to IEC 60947-1
This is a Class A product. This product can
cause radio interference if used in a dome-
stic environment. The user must provide
suitable countermeasures if required.
Conducted and emitted
interference
DIN EN 55011/DIN EN 55022 (CISPR11/CISPR22)
(corresponds to Degree of severity A)
Safe isolation
according to IEC 60947-1
All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are isolated from each other
according to IEC 60947-1, i.e. dimensioned with double cree-
page distance and air gap.
Attention
Please observe the information in the "Safe Isolation" test
report, No. 2668
Technical Data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 D-3
D.2 Technical Data of the Basic Units
Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Display
•Red/green "DEVICE" LED •Green: "Ready for operation"
•Red: "Function test was negative, device is blocked"
•OFF: "No control supply voltage"
•Green "BUS" LED •Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/DCS"
•Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/pro-
gramming device"
•Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
TEST/RESET" button •Resets the device after tripping
•Function test (system self-test)
•Operation of memory module, addressing plug
System interfaces
•Front For connecting an operator panel or expansion modules. The
memory module, addressing plug or a PC cable can also be
connected to the system interface for carrying out parameteri-
zation.
•Bottom For connecting a current measuring module or current/voltage
measuring module
PROFIBUS DP interface
•Interface design
•Connection technology
RS485
9-pole SUB-D socket (12 MBit)
Terminals (1.5 MBit), connection cross section like control cir-
cuit
For connecting a PROFIBUS DP cable using the terminal con-
nection or the 9-pole SUB-D socket.
Rated control voltage U
s
(accor-
ding to DIN EN 61131-2)
110 V - 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz 24 V DC
Operating range 0.85 x Us - 1.1 x Us 0.8 x Us - 1.2 x Us
Power consumption
•Basic unit 1 (3UF7000) 7 VA 5 W
•Basic unit 2 (3UF7010)
(including two expansion modules
connected to basic unit 2)
10 VA 7 W
Rated insulation voltage U
i
300 V (for Degree of pollution 3)
Rated surge voltage strength
U
imp
4 kV
Technical Data
SIMOCODE pro
D-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Relay outputs:
•Number 3 monostable relay outputs
•Auxiliary contacts of the 3 relay
outputs
The isolated NO contacts (NC contact response can be para-
meterized via internal signal conditioning), of which 2 relay out-
puts have a common root and one is separate, can be freely
assigned to control functions (e.g. network, star or delta con-
tactor or signaling of the operating state).
•Mandatory short-circuit protec-
tion for auxiliary contacts (relay
outputs)
•Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, fast-acting 10 A
(IEC 60947-5-1)
•Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C-characteristic
(IEC 60947-5-1)
•Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (I
k
< 500 A)
•Rated uninterrupted current 5 A
6 A at max. +50 °C
•Rated switching capacity AC-15 6 A/ 24 V AC 6 A/ 120 V AC 3 A/ 230 V AC
DC-13 2 A/ 24 V DC 0.55 A/ 60 V DC 0.25 A/ 125 V DC
Inputs (binary) 4 inputs with a common root that are supplied via the device
electronics (24 V DC) for measuring process signals (e.g. local
control, key-operated switch, limit switch, ...) and
can be freely assigned to the control functions.
•24 V DC
Cable lengths
Input characteristic curve

300 m
Type 1 according to EN 61131-
2
Thermistor motor protection
(binary PTC)
•Total cold resistance < 1.5 kOhm
•Response value 3.4 kOhm - 3.8 kOhm
•Return value 1.5 kOhm -1.65 kOhm
•Cable lengths Cross section:2.5 mm
2
1.5 mm
2
0.5 mm
2
Lengths:2 x 250 m
2 x 150 m
2 x 50 m
Connection
•Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
•Connection cross sections:
- Solid 2 x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/ 1 x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves 2 x 0.5 mm
2
-

1.5 mm
2
/ 1 x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
Power failure stored-energy time
(Longer power failures lead to a
shut-off of the relay outputs
(monostable))
•SIMOCODE pro C -
DC 24 V
AC/DC 110 V - 240 V
•SIMOCODE pro V -
DC 24 V
•SIMOCODE pro V -
AC/DC 110 V - 240 V
typ. 50 ms




typ. 200 ms
Technical Data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 D-5
D.3 Technical Data of the Current Measuring Modules
and Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
Mounting
•Set current l
e
= 0.3 A - 3 A;
2.4 A - 25 A; 10 A - 100 A
(3UF71.0, 3UF71.1, 3UF71.2)
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
•Set current l
e
= 20 A -200 A
(3UF7103, 3UF7 113)
Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails, screw
attachment onto the mounting plate or directly to the contactor
•Set current l
e
= 63 A -630 A
(3UF7104, 3UF7 114)
Screw attachment onto the mounting plate or directly to the
contactor
System interface For connection to a basic unit
Main circuit
•Set current I
e
3UF71.0: 0.3 A - 3 A 3UF71.3: 20 A - 200 A
3UF71.1: 2.4 A -25 A 3UF71.4: 63 A - 630 A
3UF71.2: 10 A -100 A
•Rated insulation voltage U
i
(for
Degree of pollution 3)
690 V
•Rated operational voltage U
e
690 V
•Rated surge voltage strength U
imp
6 kV
•Measurement frequency 50/60 Hz
•Type of current Three-phase current
•Short circuit Additional short-circuit protection in main circuit
required
1
)
•Accuracy of the current measuring
(in the range 1x the minimum set
current I
u
to 8 x the maximum set
current I
o
)
+/- 3%
Typical measuring range of the
voltage measuring
•Phase-to-phase voltage/line-to-line
voltage (e.g. U
L1L2
)
•Phase voltage (e.g. U
L1
)
110 V - 690 V
65 V - 400 V
Accuracy of the
•voltage measuring in the range
230 V - 400 V
•power factor (cos phi) measure-
ment
•apparent power measurement

+/- 3% (typical)

+/-5% (typical)
+/-5% (typical)
Notes on voltage measuring
•Grounded network
•Rated control
voltage U
s
Suitable for three-phase current networks with grounded neu-
tral point
An earthed ground or a neutral conductor is necessary
Push-through opening Diameter
•Set current 0.3 A - 3 A;
2.4 A - 25 A
7.5 mm
•Set current 10 A -100 A 14.0 mm
•Set current 20 A -200 A 25.0 mm
Technical Data
SIMOCODE pro
D-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Rail connection
2
)
•Set current Ie 20 A -200 A 63 A -630 A
•Connection screw M8x20 M10x30
•Tightening torque 10 Nm - 14 Nm 14 Nm -24 Nm
•Solid with cable lug 16 mm
2
- 95 mm
2
)
3
) 50 mm
2
-240 mm
2
)
4
)
•Stranded with cable lug 25 mm
2
-120 mm
2
)
3
) 70 mm
2
-240 mm
2
)
4
)
•AWG cable 6 kcmil - 300 kcmil 1/0 kcmil - 500 kcmil
Connection for voltage measuring
•Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
•Connection cross sections:
- Solid 2 x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/ 1 x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves 2x 0.5 mm
2
- 1.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
1) More information is available at http://www.siemens.com/simocode and D.6 "Short-circuit Protection with
Fuses for Motor Feeders for Short-circuit Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V" on page D-11.
2) Screw connection is possible with a suitable 3RT19 box terminal.
3) The 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain the phase separation when connecting cable lugs
complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 95 mm
2
.
4) The 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain the phase separation when connecting cable lugs
complying with DIN 46234 to cables with a cross section larger than 240 mm
2
as well as when connecting
cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 185 mm
2
.
Technical Data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 D-7
D.4 Technical Data of the Expansion Modules
D.4.1 Technical Data of the Digital Modules
Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Display
•Green "READY" LED •Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
•Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion
module, a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module or the operator panel
Control circuit
Rated insulation
voltage U
i
300 V (for Degree of pollution 3)
Rated surge voltage
strength U
imp
4 kV
Relay outputs
•Number
•Auxiliary contacts of the 2 relay
outputs


•Mandatory short-circuit protec-
tion for auxiliary
contacts (relay outputs)

•Rated uninterrupted current
•Rated switching capacity
2 mono or bistable relay outputs (depending on type)
The isolated NO contacts (NC contact response can be para-
meterized via internal signal conditioning) whose relay out-
puts all have a common root can be freely assigned to control
functions (e.g. network, star or delta contactor or signaling of
the operating state).
•Fuse link, operating class gL/gG 6 A, fast-acting 10 A
(IEC 60947-5-1)
•Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C-characteristic
(IEC 60947-5-1)
•Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (I
k
< 500 A)
5 A
6 A at max. +50 °C
AC-15 6 A/ 24 V AC 6 A/ 120 V AC 3 A/ 230 V AC
DC-13 2 A/ 24 V DC 0.55 A/ 60 V DC 0.25 A/ 125 V DC
Inputs (binary) 4 externally supplied isolated inputs (24 V DC or 110 V - 240 V
AC/DC depending on the type) have inputs with a common
root for measuring process signals (e.g. local control, key-ope-
rated switches, limit switches, ...) and can be freely assigned
to the control functions.
•24 V DC
Cable lengths
Input characteristic curve

300 m
Type 2 according to EN 61131-2
•110 V up to 240 V AC/DC
Cable lengths
Input characteristic curve

200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF/km)

Connection
•Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
•Connection cross sections:
- Solid 2 x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/ 1 x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves 2x 0.5 mm
2
- 1.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
Technical Data
SIMOCODE pro
D-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
D.4.2 Technical Data of the Analog Module
Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Display
•Green "READY" LED •Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
•Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion
module, a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module or the operator panel
Control circuit
Type of connection: 2-wire connection
Inputs:
•Channels 2 (passive)
•Parameterizable measuring ran-
ges
0/4 mA - 20 mA
•Cable shielding Cable shielding recommended for cables up to 30 m and
required for cables over 30 m
•Max. input current
(destruction limit)
40 mA
•Accuracy of the 1%
•Input resistance 50 Ohm
•Conversion time 130 ms.
•Resolution 12 bit
•Open circuit recognition For the measuring range 4 mA - 20 mA
Output:
•Channels 1
•Parameterizable output range 0/4 mA - 20 mA
•Cable shielding Cable shielding recommended for cables up to 30 m and
required for cables over 30 m
•Max. output voltage 30 V DC
•Accuracy of the 1%
•Max. output load 500 Ohm
•Conversion time 10 ms.
•Resolution 12 bit
•Short-circuit proof Yes
Isolation of the inputs/output from
the electronics
No
Connection:
•Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
•Connection cross sections:
- Solid 2 x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/ 1 x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves 2 x 0.5 mm
2
- 1.5 mm
2
/ 1 x 0.5 mm
2
-

2.5 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
Technical Data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 D-9
D.4.3 Technical Data of the Earth-fault Module
D.4.4 Technical Data of the Temperature Module
Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Display
•Green "READY" LED •Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
•Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion
module, a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module or the operator panel
Control circuit
Connectable 3UL22 summation
current transformer with rated
fault currents I
N
•I
Earth fault
< 50% I
N
•I
Earth fault
> 100% I
N
0.3/0.5/1 A
No tripping
Tripping
Response delay 300 ms - 500 ms, with additional delay
Connection:
•Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
•Connection cross sections:
- Solid 2 x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/ 1 x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves 2x 0.5 mm
2
- 1.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard mounting rails or
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Display
•Green "READY" LED •Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
•Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion
module, a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module or the operator panel
Sensor circuit
Typical sensor current:
•PT100 1 mA (typical)
•PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC 0.2 mA (typical)
Open circuit recognition/short-
circuit recognition/measuring
range:
•PT100/PT1000 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -50 °C - +500°C
•KTY83-110 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -50 °C - +175°C
•KTY84 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -40 °C - +300°C
Technical Data
SIMOCODE pro
D-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
D.5 Technical Data of the Operator Panel
•NTC Short circuit; measuring range: +80 °C - +160°C
Measuring accuracy at an ambi-
ent temperature of 20°C (T20)
<+ 2 K
Deviation due to ambient tempera-
ture (as % of measuring range)
0.05 per K deviation from T20
Connection:
•Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 IN.LB - 10.3 IN.LB
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
•Connection cross sections:
- Solid 2 x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
/ 1 x 0.5 mm
2
- 4 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves 2x 0.5 mm
2
- 1.5 mm
2
/ 1x 0.5 mm
2
- 2.5 mm
2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
Mounting Installation in a switchgear cabinet door and/or in a front panel,
with IP54 system interface covering
Display
•Red/green "DEVICE" LED •Green:
•Flashing green:
•Red: blocked
•OFF:
"Ready for operation"
"No connection to basic unit"
"Function test was negative, device is
blocked"
"No control supply voltage"
•Green "BUS" LED •Continuous light:
•Flashing:
"Communication with PLC/DCS"
"Baud rate recognized/communication
with PC/programming device"
•Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light/
flashing:
"Feeder fault", e.g. overload tripping
•3 yellow LEDs/4 green LEDs Can be freely assigned to any status signals
Buttons
•Test/reset •Resets the device after tripping
•Function test (system self-test)
•Operation of memory module, addressing plug
•Control buttons •Control of the motor feeder, freely assignable
System interfaces
•Front For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug or a
PC cable for parameterization
•Rear For joining a connection cable to the basic unit or the expansion
module
Technical Data
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 D-11
D.6 Short-circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor Feeders
for Short-circuit Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V
V
e
r
s
i
o
n
:
J
a
n
u
a
r
y

2
0
,

2
0
0
5
6
9
0
V
S
h
o
r
t
-
c
i
r
c
u
i
t

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

w
i
t
h

F
u
s
e
s

f
o
r

M
o
t
o
r

F
e
e
d
e
r
s

F
a
s
t

fu
s
e
lin
k
s

3
)
f
o
r

S
h
o
r
t
-
c
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t
s

u
p

t
o

5
0
k
A


a
n
d

6
9
0
V
N
H
T
y
p
e
3
N
A
f
o
r

3
U
F
7
D
IA
Z
E
D
T
y
p
e
5
S
B
N
E
O
Z
E
D
T
y
p
e
5
S
E
O
v
r
lo
a
d

r
e
la
y
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
C
L
A
S
S
O
p
e
r
a
t
in
g

c
la
s
s

S
e
t
t
in
g

r
a
n
g
e
5

a
.
1
0
1
5
2
0
2
5
3
0
3
5
4
0
g
L
(
g
G
)
(
T
y
p
e
)
R
a
t
e
d

o
p
e
r
a
t
in
g

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

I
e
/
A
C
-
3

in

A

f
o
r
T
e
s
t

c
u
r
r
e
n
t


r

4
0
0
V
/
5
0
0
V
/
6
9
0
V
4
0
0
V
/
5
0
0
V
/
6
9
0
V
4
0
0
V
/
5
0
0
V
/
6
9
0
V
4
0
0
V
/
5
0
0
V
/
6
9
0
V
4
0
0
V
/
5
0
0
V
/
6
9
0
V
4
0
0
V
/
5
0
0
V
/
6
9
0
V
4
0
0
V
/
5
0
0
V
/
6
9
0
V
1
2
0
.
3

-

3
.
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
1
5
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
3
5
2
0
3
R
T
1
0
1
6
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
/
3
,
0
3
5
2
0
2
.
4

-

2
5
A
3
R
T
1
0
1
5
7
,
0
/
5
,
0
/
4
,
0
7
,
0
/
5
,
0
/
4
,
0
7
,
0
/
5
,
0
/
4
,
0
7
,
0
/
5
,
0
/
4
,
0
7
,
0
/
5
,
0
/
4
,
0
7
,
0
/
5
,
0
/
4
,
0
7
,
0
/
5
,
0
/
4
,
0
3
5
2
0
3
R
T
1
0
1
6
9
,
0
/
6
,
5
5
,
2
9
,
0
/
6
,
5
5
,
2
9
,
0
/
6
,
5
5
,
2
9
,
0
/
6
,
5
5
,
2
9
,
0
/
6
,
5
5
,
2
9
,
0
/
6
,
5
/
5
,
2
8
,
5
/
6
,
5
5
,
2
3
5
2
0
3
R
T
1
0
1
7
1
2
,
0
/
9
.
0
/
6
,
3
1
1
,
0
/
9
,
0
/
6
,
3
1
0
,
0
/
9
,
0
/
6
,
3
9
,
5
/
9
,
0
/
6
,
3
9
,
0
/
9
,
0
/
6
,
3
9
,
0
/
9
,
0
/
6
,
3
8
,
5
/
8
,
5
/
6
,
3
3
5
2
0
3
R
T
1
0
2
3
9
,
0
/
6
,
5
/
5
,
2
9
,
0
/
6
,
5
/
5
,
2
9
,
0
/
6
,
5
/
5
,
2
6
3
2
5
3
R
T
1
0
2
4
1
2
,
0
/
1
2
,
0
/
9
,
0
1
2
,
0
/
1
2
,
0
/
9
,
0
1
2
,
0
/
1
2
,
0
/
9
,
0
1
2
,
0
/
1
2
,
0
/
9
,
0
1
2
,
0
/
1
2
,
0
/
9
,
0
1
2
,
0
/
1
2
,
0
/
9
,
0
1
2
,
0
/
1
2
,
0
/
9
,
0
6
3
2
5
3
R
T
1
0
2
5
1
7
,
0
/
1
7
,
0
/
1
3
,
0
1
7
,
0
/
1
7
,
0
/
1
3
,
0
1
6
,
0
/
1
6
,
0
/
1
3
,
0
1
5
,
0
/
1
5
,
0
/
1
3
,
0
1
4
,
0
/
1
4
,
0
/
1
3
,
0
1
3
,
0
/
1
3
,
0
/
1
3
,
0
1
2
,
0
/
1
2
,
0
/
1
2
,
0
6
3
2
5
3
R
T
1
0
2
6
2
5
,
0
/
1
8
,
0
/
1
3
,
0
1
8
,
0
/
1
8
,
0
/
1
3
,
0
1
6
,
0
/
1
6
,
0
/
1
3
,
0
1
5
,
0
/
1
5
,
0
/
1
3
,
0
1
4
,
0
/
1
4
,
0
/
1
3
,
0
1
3
,
0
/
1
3
,
0
/
1
3
,
0
1
2
,
0
/
1
2
,
0
/
1
2
,
0
1
0
0
3
5
3
R
T
1
0
3
4
2
5
,
0
/
2
5
,
0
/
2
0
,
0
2
5
,
0
/
2
5
,
0
/
2
0
,
0
2
2
,
3
/
2
2
,
3
/
2
0
,
0
2
0
,
3
/
2
0
,
3
/
2
0
,
3
1
9
,
1
/
1
9
,
1
/
1
9
,
1
1
7
,
6
/
1
7
,
6
/
1
7
,
6
1
6
,
1
/
1
6
,
1
/
1
6
,
1
1
2
5
6
3
3
R
T
1
0
3
5
2
5
,
0
/
2
5
,
0
/
2
4
,
0
2
5
,
0
/
2
5
,
0
/
2
4
,
0
2
5
,
0
/
2
5
,
0
/
2
4
,
0
2
5
,
0
/
2
5
,
0
/
2
4
,
0
2
5
,
0
/
2
5
,
0
/
2
4
,
0
2
5
,
0
/
2
5
,
0
/
2
4
,
0
2
3
,
5
/
2
3
,
5
/
2
3
,
5
1
2
5
6
3
1
0
-
1
0
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
3
4
3
2
,
0
/
3
2
,
0
/
2
0
,
0
2
5
,
5
/
2
5
,
5
/
2
0
,
0
2
2
,
3
/
2
2
,
3
/
2
0
,
0
2
0
,
3
/
2
0
,
3
/
2
0
,
0
1
9
,
1
/
1
9
,
1
/
1
9
,
1
1
7
,
6
/
1
7
,
6
/
1
7
,
6
1
6
,
1
/
1
6
,
1
/
1
6
,
1
1
2
5
6
3
3
R
T
1
0
3
5
4
0
,
0
/
4
0
,
0
/
2
4
,
0
3
3
,
0
/
3
3
,
0
/
2
4
,
0
2
9
,
4
/
2
9
,
4
/
2
4
,
0
2
8
,
0
/
2
8
,
0
/
2
4
,
0
2
6
,
5
/
2
6
,
5
/
2
4
,
0
2
5
,
0
/
2
5
,
0
/
2
4
,
0
2
3
,
5
/
2
3
,
5
/
2
3
,
5
1
2
5
6
3
3
R
T
1
0
3
6
5
0
,
0
/
5
0
,
0
/
2
4
,
0
3
8
,
5
/
3
8
,
5
/
2
4
,
0
3
2
,
7
/
3
2
,
7
/
2
4
,
0
2
9
,
4
/
2
9
,
4
/
2
4
,
0
2
6
,
5
/
2
6
,
5
/
2
4
,
0
2
5
,
0
/
2
5
,
0
/
2
4
,
0
2
3
,
5
/
2
3
,
5
/
2
3
,
5
1
6
0
8
0
3
R
T
1
0
4
4
6
5
,
0
/
6
5
,
0
/
4
7
,
0
5
6
,
0
/
5
6
,
0
/
4
7
,
0
4
9
,
0
/
4
9
,
0
/
4
7
,
0
4
5
,
0
/
4
5
,
0
/
4
5
,
0
4
1
,
7
/
4
1
,
7
/
4
1
,
7
3
8
,
2
/
3
8
,
2
/
3
8
,
2
3
4
,
5
/
3
4
,
5
/
3
4
,
5
2
0
0
1
2
5
3
R
T
1
0
4
5
8
0
,
0
/
8
0
,
0
/
5
8
,
0
6
1
,
0
/
6
1
,
0
/
5
8
,
0
5
3
,
0
/
5
3
,
0
/
5
3
,
0
4
7
,
0
/
4
7
,
0
/
4
7
,
0
4
5
,
0
/
4
5
,
0
/
4
5
,
0
4
3
,
0
/
4
3
,
0
/
4
3
,
0
4
0
,
0
/
4
0
,
0
/
4
0
,
0
2
0
0
1
6
0
3
R
T
1
0
4
6
9
5
,
0
/
9
5
,
0
/
5
8
,
0
6
9
,
0
/
6
9
,
0
/
5
8
,
0
5
9
,
0
/
5
9
,
0
/
5
8
,
0
5
3
,
0
/
5
3
,
0
/
5
3
,
0
5
0
,
0
/
5
0
,
0
/
5
0
,
0
4
7
,
0
/
4
7
,
0
/
4
7
,
0
4
4
,
0
/
4
4
,
0
/
4
4
,
0
2
0
0
1
6
0
3
R
T
1
0
5
4
1
0
0
,
0
/
1
0
0
,
0
/
1
0
0
,
0
9
3
,
2
/
9
3
,
2
/
9
3
,
2
8
1
,
7
/
8
1
,
7
/
8
1
,
7
7
4
,
8
/
7
4
,
8
/
7
4
,
8
6
9
,
0
/
6
9
,
0
/
6
9
,
0
6
3
,
0
/
6
3
,
0
/
6
3
,
0
5
7
,
0
/
5
7
,
0
/
5
7
,
0
3
5
5
3
1
5
3
R
T
1
0
5
5
1
0
0
,
0
/
1
0
0
,
0
/
1
0
0
,
0
1
0
0
,
0
/
1
0
0
,
0
/
1
0
0
,
0
9
7
,
5
/
9
7
,
5
/
9
7
,
5
9
0
,
0
/
9
0
,
0
/
9
0
,
0
8
2
,
0
/
8
2
,
0
/
8
2
,
0
7
4
,
0
/
7
4
,
0
/
7
4
,
0
3
5
5
3
1
5
2
0
-
2
0
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
5
4
1
1
5
,
0
/
1
1
5
,
0
/
1
1
5
,
0
9
3
,
2
/
9
3
,
2
/
9
3
,
2
8
1
,
7
/
8
1
,
7
/
8
1
,
7
7
4
,
8
/
7
4
,
8
/
7
4
,
8
6
9
,
0
/
6
9
,
0
/
6
9
,
0
6
4
,
0
/
6
4
,
0
/
6
4
,
0
3
5
5
3
1
5
3
R
T
1
0
5
5
1
5
0
/
1
5
0
/
1
5
0
1
2
2
/
1
2
2
/
1
2
2
1
0
7
/
1
0
7
/
1
0
7
9
8
/
9
8
/
9
8
9
0
/
9
0
/
9
0
8
2
/
8
2
/
8
2
7
4
/
7
4
/
7
4
3
5
5
3
1
5
3
R
T
1
0
5
6
1
8
5
/
1
8
5
/
1
7
0
1
5
0
/
1
5
0
/
1
5
0
1
3
1
/
1
3
1
/
1
3
1
1
2
0
/
1
2
0
/
1
2
0
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
1
0
2
/
1
0
2
/
1
0
2
9
3
/
9
3
/
9
3
3
5
5
3
1
5
6
3
-
6
3
0
A
3
R
T
1
0
6
4
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
1
8
2
/
1
8
2
/
1
8
2
1
6
0
/
1
6
0
/
1
6
0
1
4
6
/
1
4
6
/
1
4
6
1
3
5
/
1
3
5
/
1
3
5
1
2
6
/
1
2
6
/
1
2
6
5
0
0
4
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
6
5
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
2
1
5
/
2
1
5
/
2
1
5
1
8
8
/
1
8
8
/
1
8
8
1
7
2
/
1
7
2
/
1
7
2
1
5
9
/
1
5
9
/
1
5
9
1
4
6
/
1
4
6
/
1
4
6
1
3
3
/
1
3
3
/
1
3
3
5
0
0
4
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
6
6
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
/
2
8
0
2
4
3
/
2
4
3
/
2
4
3
2
1
3
/
2
1
3
/
2
1
3
1
9
5
/
1
9
5
/
1
9
5
1
8
0
/
1
8
0
/
1
8
0
1
6
5
/
1
6
5
/
1
6
5
1
5
0
/
1
5
0
/
1
5
0
5
0
0
4
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
7
5
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
3
2
4
/
3
2
4
/
3
2
4
2
8
4
/
2
8
4
/
2
8
4
2
6
0
/
2
6
0
/
2
6
0
2
4
0
/
2
4
0
/
2
4
0
2
2
0
/
2
2
0
/
2
2
0
2
0
0
/
2
0
0
/
2
0
0
6
3
0
4
0
0
3
R
T
1
0
7
6
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
/
4
5
0
4
0
5
/
4
0
5
/
4
0
5
3
5
5
/
3
5
5
/
3
5
5
3
2
5
/
3
2
5
/
3
2
5
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
2
7
5
/
2
7
5
/
2
7
5
2
5
0
/
2
5
0
/
2
5
0
6
3
0
5
0
0
3
R
T
1
2
6
4
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
/
2
2
5
1
9
4
/
1
9
4
/
1
9
4
1
7
3
/
1
7
3
/
1
7
3
1
5
2
/
1
5
2
/
1
5
2
1
3
1
/
1
3
1
/
1
3
1
5
0
0
5
0
0
3
R
T
1
2
6
5
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
/
2
6
5
2
2
8
/
2
2
8
/
2
2
8
2
0
4
/
2
0
4
/
2
0
4
1
8
0
/
1
8
0
/
1
8
0
1
5
6
/
1
5
6
/
1
5
6
5
0
0
5
0
0
3
R
T
1
2
6
6
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
/
3
0
0
2
5
8
/
2
5
8
/
2
5
8
2
3
1
/
2
3
1
/
2
3
1
2
0
4
/
2
0
4
/
2
0
4
1
7
7
/
1
7
7
/
1
7
7
5
0
0
5
0
0
3
R
T
1
2
7
5
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
/
4
0
0
3
4
4
/
3
4
4
/
3
4
4
3
1
6
/
3
1
6
/
3
1
6
8
0
0
8
0
0
3
R
T
1
2
7
6
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
4
3
0
/
4
3
0
/
4
3
0
3
8
5
/
3
8
5
/
3
8
5
3
4
0
/
3
4
0
/
3
4
0
3
1
6
/
3
1
6
/
3
1
6
8
0
0
8
0
0
3
T
F
6
8

2
)

6
3
0
/
6
3
0
/
6
3
0
5
0
2
/
5
0
2
/
5
0
2
4
4
0
/
4
4
0
/
4
4
0
4
0
8
/
4
0
8
/
4
0
8
3
7
6
/
3
7
6
/
3
7
6
3
4
4
/
3
4
4
/
3
4
4
3
1
7
/
3
1
7
/
3
1
7
8
0
0
5
0
0
4
)
3
T
F
6
9

2
)

6
3
0
/
6
3
0
/
6
3
0
6
3
0
/
6
3
0
/
6
3
0
5
7
2
/
5
7
2
/
5
7
2
5
3
1
/
5
3
1
/
5
3
1
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
/
5
0
0
4
6
9
/
4
6
9
/
4
6
9
4
3
8
/
4
3
8
/
4
3
8
8
0
0
6
3
0
4
)
1
)

C
a
n

b
e

m
o
u
n
t
e
d

o
n

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
s

(
a
f
t
e
r

d
e
m
o
u
n
t
in
g

t
h
e

b
o
x

t
e
r
m
in
a
l

b
l
o
c
k
)
5
)

A
s
s
i
g
n
m
e
n
t

a
n
d

s
h
o
r
t
-
c
ir
c
u
it

d
e
v
ic
e
s

a
c
c
o
r
d
in
g

t
o

I
E
C
6
0
9
4
7
-
4
-
1
2
)

C
a
n
n
o
t

b
e

m
o
u
n
t
e
d

o
n

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
s

T
y
p
e

o
f

c
o
o
r
d
i
n
a
t
i
o
n


1

:


C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
s
a
n
d

s
t
a
r
t
e
r
s

m
a
y

n
o
t

e
n
d
a
n
g
e
r

e
it
h
e
r

p
e
r
s
o
n
s

o
r

s
y
s
t
e
m
s

in
t
h
e

e
v
e
n
t

o
f

a

s
h
o
r
t

c
ir
c
u
it
.

3
)

O
b
s
e
r
v
e

o
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

v
o
l
t
a
g
e






T
h
e
y
a
r
e

n
o
t

s
u
it
a
b
le

f
o
r

fu
r
th
e
r

o
p
e
r
a
t
io
n

u
n
t
il
t
h
e
y

h
a
v
e

b
e
e
n
r
e
p
a
ir
e
d
o
r
t
h
e
r
e
s
p
e
c
t
iv
e

p
a
r
t
s

h
a
v
e

b
e
e
n
r
e
p
la
c
e
d
.
4
)

E
n
s
u
r
e

t
h
a
t

t
h
e

s
a
f
e
t
y

m
a
r
g
in

b
e
t
w
e
e
n

t
h
e

m
a
x
im
u
m

A
C
-
3

o
p
e
r
a
t
in
g

c
u
r
r
e
n
t
a
n
d

t
h
e

f
u
s
e

r
a
t
in
g

is
s
u
f
f
ic
ie
n
t
.
T
y
p
e

o
f

c
o
o
r
d
i
n
a
t
i
o
n


2

:
C
o
n
t
a
c
t
o
r
s

a
n
d
s
t
a
r
t
e
r
s

m
a
y

n
o
t

e
n
d
a
n
g
e
r

e
it
h
e
r

p
e
r
s
o
n
s
o
r

s
y
s
te
m
s
in

t
h
e

e
v
e
n
t

o
f
a

s
h
o
r
t

c
ir
c
u
it








a
n
d
m
u
s
t

b
e

s
u
ita
b
le

f
o
r

f
u
r
t
h
e
r

o
p
e
r
a
t
io
n
.

T
h
e
r
e

is
d
a
n
g
e
r

o
f

c
o
n
t
a
c
t
w
e
ld
in
g
.
T
y
p
e

o
f

c
o
o
r
d
in
a
tio
n

5
)
Technical Data
SIMOCODE pro
D-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-1
Example Circuits E
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find circuit examples for the following parameterizable
control functions:
• Overload relay
• Direct starter
• Reversing starter
• Circuit breaker (MCCB)
• Star-delta starter
• Star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation
• Dahlander
• Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation
• Pole-changing switch
• Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation
• Valve
• Positioner
• Soft starter
• Soft starter with reversing contactor.
Target groups
This manual is addressed to the following target groups:
• planners
• configurators
• mechanics
• electricians
• commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro (see chapter 1, SIMOCODE pro
system manual)
• basic knowledge of the SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.1 General
Target of the example circuits
The examples will
• show you how to implement a circuit for each control function
with SIMOCODE pro
• help you modify these examples for your respective application
• help you to easily implement other applications.
Important steps
• Implementation of the external wiring (for control and feedback of main cur-
rent switching devices and control and signaling devices)
(see circuit diagrams).
• Implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions, with control
and evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs (internal SIMOCODE pro
wiring) (see function circuit diagrams with the function blocks of the graphics
editor of the "SIMOCODE ES" configuration software).
• Setting of the cyclic control and signaling data for the communication of
SIMOCODE pro with a PLC (see function circuit diagrams and the "Assign-
ment of cyclic control and signaling data" tables).
Conditions
• Load feeder/motor present
• PLC/DCS control with PROFIBUS DP interface is present
• The main circuit is already wired
• PC/programming device is present
• The SIMOCODE ES software is installed
• The basic unit has the basic factory default settings. In the "Configuring the
basic factory default settings" section of the SIMOCODE pro manual, you will
learn how to implement the basic factory default settings.
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-3
E.2 Example for the "overload relay" circuit
E.2.1 Circuit diagram for the "overload relay"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Figure E-1: Circuit diagram for the "overload relay"
1
1
Z
1
N
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
5
ê
-
X
2
-
X
1
9
2
N
8
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
Z
3 P E / P E
8
1
1
-

l
T 2 2
8
/.5
! l
2
L
1
l
>
1 3
9
1
-
V
1
ê
N
-
T
1
0
1
L
1
C
1
A
-
0
1
5
1 8
-
X
1
9
2
T 1
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
L 1
P
E
1
T 2
T 3
2
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
P E
2
ê
ê
L
2
-
X
1
1
C
1

A
P
E
A 1
2
3
0
\
A
C
-
F
1
1
1
3
2 1 \
-
A
1
0
8
u
1 9
\
ê
A lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
L
1
2
P E
8
u
3
l
>
u
V
a
|r
s
c
o
r
la
c
lo
r
T 1
5
L 3
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
8
-
F
1
2
1
/ . 2
2
3
>
>
>
l
l
l
2 0
X 9
L
3
w
L 2
0
e
v
|c
e
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
/ . 2
1
1
2
3
! 2
-
K
1
3 Y 3
1 0
A
3

A
C
V
1 5
1
2
3
A
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

C
/
\
-
X
1
3
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1
C T
5
A 2
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-5
E.2.2 Function circuit diagram for the "overload relay"
Figure E-2: Function circuit diagram for the "overload relay"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.3 Example for the "direct starter" circuit
E.3.1 Circuit diagram for the "direct starter"
Figure E-3: Circuit diagram for the "direct starter"
1 2 3
1
2
3
1
1 3
3 P E / P E
/ . 2
C
1

A
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
-
K
1
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1
8
-
V
1
1
ê
0
F
F
1
1 1
/.1
A 1
8
1 9
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1
-
X
2
3 Y 3
1 2
=
0
0
L
3
L 1
9
3 2
P E
5
-
A
1
2
1
N
3
A 2
2
3
0
\
A
C
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
L 2
2
L
1
-
F
1
2
Z
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
ê
5
2
N
u
1 8
3 Y 3
1
1 0
5
2 1 \
-
K
1
C
1
A
8
u
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
5
A
A
1
2
P
E
T 1
3
9
A 2
2 0
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
w
)

3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

C
/
\
-
A
1
0
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
A 1
1
L
1
1
1
ê
8
1
C T
P
E
-
X
1
-
3
1
2
3
8
X 9
2 2
L
2
T 1
2 1
1
N
\
3
3

A
C
V 2
0
e
v
|c
e
0
N
8
u
3
5
ê
-
X
1

)
)
)
T 3
-
X
1
9
L 3
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
T 2
T 2
/ . 2
1
P E
-
3
1
1
-
T
1
0
L
1
1 0
L
3
2
)

-
0
1
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
2
2
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P A
1 1
8
2
2
-
F
1
1
1
ê Z
-
X
1
9
1
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
L
o
c
a
|
0
r
L
o
c
a
|
0
l
l
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-7
E.3.2 Function circuit diagram for the "direct starter"
Figure E-4: Function circuit diagram for the "direct starter"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.4 Example for a "reversing starter" circuit
E.4.1 Circuit diagram for the "reversing starter"
Figure E-5: Circuit diagram for the "reversing starter"
1 2 3 4 5
1
2
1
3
4
5
1
2
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
3
2
0
N
>
l
>
2
C T
6
3 Y 3
A
1 1
-
A
1
2
2
L
1
8
u
3
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
-
X
1
P E
l
>
-
T
1
0
-
F
1
1
9
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
u
5
1
T 1
-
0
1
1
C
1

A
L 2
0
F
F
-
F
1
2
0
e
v
|c
e
1
A 2
ê
1 8
-
K
2
A 2
8
1 1
X 9
-
V
1
-
3
1
2
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
1
3
5
1 1
A 1
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
2 2
5
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
1
8
\
P E
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
0
N
<
3
L
3
A 1
/ . 2
-
A
1
0
T 1
L
2
N
2
1
-
X
2
3

A
C
V
1 9
Z
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
9
-
K
1
P
E
5
>
>
>
l
l
l
w
-
K
1
-
X
1
9
/.1
2
3
2
N
1 1 0
-
K
2
A 2
1 3
L
1
-
3
1
3
-
X
1
1
1
L
1
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1 3
T 2
/.1
ê
2 1
L 3 ê
8
A
5
1
1
1
A 1
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

C
/
\
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
2
T 3
ê
8
1 0
3
1
1
7
8
u
2
3
0
\
A
C
2
1
/ . 2
P
E
2
2
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
2 1 \
3
8
1
3 P E / P E
T 2
1
N
ê
3
2 0
3 Y 3
-
3
1
1
-
X
1
9
C
1
A
1 2
A
2
L 1
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
R
u
r

s
|d
r
a
|
-

r
|d
|
l
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
R
u
r

s
|r
d
a
|
-

|e
l
l
L
o
c
a
|
0
l
l
L
o
c
a
|
R
u
r

s
|d
r
a
|
-

r
|d
|
l
L
o
c
a
|
R
u
r

s
|d
r
a
|
-

|e
l
l
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-9
E.4.2 Function circuit diagram for the "reversing starter"
Figure E-6: Function circuit diagram for the "reversing starter"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.5 Example for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit
E.5.1 Circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)"
Figure E-7: Circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)"
1
2
3
4
5
6
C 1
1
L 3
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

\
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
)

/.ê
3 Y 3
N
8
C
1

A
/.ê
-
X
2
A 5
X 2 0 . 2
3
3
8
0 1
-
A
1
0
A
V
T 3
A
1
L
1
-
0
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
C
|r
c
u
|l o
r
e
a
|
e
r
|
V
C
C
8
)
o
r
C
|r
c
u
|l o
r
e
a
|
e
r
|
V
C
C
8
)
o
ll
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
C
8
R
o
r
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
C
8
R
r
e
|e
a
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
|
0
r
L
o
c
a
|
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
/.ê
C
1
A
2
L
1
$ l
-
0
1
A 3
2
T 2
1
A
A 2
C T
X 2 0 . 1
8
2
P
E
3 Y 3
X
2
0
.5
2
3
0
\
A
C
-
T
1
0
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
-
A
1
1
2
Z
5
-
3
1
2
C 5
3
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
X 9
X 1 . 1
2 1
2 1 \
L 2
1
N
2 2
X 1 . 2
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
1 L 1
1
-
F
1
2
3 P E / P E
X 1 . 1
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
-
X
1
9
T 1
X 2 0 . 3
X 1 . 3
1 0
T 1
1
/.ê
0
F
F
l
2
1 1
-
X
1
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
L
1
8
u
3
0
e
v
|c
e
-
&
l
l
T 2
5
0 3
A 1
-
0
1
)

2
ê
3
8
-
X
1
9
2
N
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
0
N
)
)

V

)

-
0
1
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
1
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
C 1
-
3
1
1
1
8
u
1 3
L
2
X 2 0 . 1
L
3
ê
9
A 1
$ 2
2
X 1 . ê
/ . 1
X 1 . 2
/ . 1
1
-
0
1
5
3
>
l
>
l
>
l
V
X 2 0 . 5
X 1 . 5
X 1 . 1
X 2 0 . 1
X 2 0 . 3
/ . 3
X 1 . 3
/ . 2
2
1
X 1 . 1
X 2 0 . 2
ê
X 2 0 . 1
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-11
E.5.2 Function circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)"
Figure E-8: Function circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.6 Example for the "star-delta starter" circuit
E.6.1 Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter" circuit
Figure E-9: Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter" circuit
1 2 3 4 5
4
5
1
2
3
N
A 2
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
P E
/ . 2
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
ê
1
V
A
C
A 1
-
X
2
-
X
1
9
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
-
K
1
-
V
1
3 Y 3
C 5 1 0
T 2
A
-
K
3
A 2
1
L
1
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
u
2
-
K
2
/.1
0
F
F
A 2
A 1
1
N
1
-
3
1
2
2
P
E
8
T 1
8
L
1
u
1
3
0 2
-
X
2
A 3
1
-
K
1
3
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
-
F
1
2
C
1
A
1
1
2 2
8
u
3
T 3
P E
3
-
X
1
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
1
1 3
A 1
L
2
A
A 1
2
L 3
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
3 P E / P E
C 2
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
\
1
3
-
0
1
X 9
2
ê
5
L 2
5
-
T
1
0
1
/.1
8
u
1
3 Y 3
2
3
8
3
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
/ . 2
ê
w
2
1
3
A 2
-
A
1
1
-
A
1
0
ê
A
2
T 2
1
-
F
1
1
P E
2
-
K
2
-
3
1
1
-
K
3
5
T 1
C 3
C 1
/.5
1
l
> 2
2
5
ê
l
>
0
N
\
2
2
1
5
L
3
2 1
L 1
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

\
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
0 1
2
3
0
\
A
C
1
l
>
l
l
>
>
9
C T
1
0 3
A 5
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
C
1

A
2
L
1
8
3
5
1
2 1 \
0
e
v
|c
e
w
1
C 1
Z A 1
2
N
0 1
ê
-
X
1
9
1 1
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
0
e
|l
a

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
3
l
a
r

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
L
o
c
a
|
0
r
L
o
c
a
|
0
l
l
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-13
E.6.2 Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter"
Figure E-10: Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.7 Example for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the
direction of rotation" circuit
E.7.1 Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of
rotation"
Figure E-11: Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation"
2 3 4 5 6 7
1
2
3
5
6
7
2
N
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
1
2 2
3 Y 3
A 1
2 ê
1
L
1
A 2 2
-
F
1
2
A 5
0
e
v
|c
e
0 1
T 1
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
A
2 Z
3
Z
/.5
0
F
F
P E
1
1
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
8
-
K
3
-
K
3
2
3
0
\
A
C
2
-
X
1
9
A 1
2
L
1
-
X
2
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
-
K
2
2 5
ê
8
u
3
3 P E / P E
N
2
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
1
-
A
1
2
1
N
0 1
ê
C 5
X 9
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
/.1
0
N
>
ê
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
8
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
C
1

A
3 Y 3 1
0
|d
|la
| r
o
d
u
|e
2 2
A
A 2
ê
1
1
2 0
-
3
1
3
C 1
0
u
T
1
lN
1
lN
1
lN
3
N
/V
0
u
T
2
lN
2
2 1
-
T
1
0
P E
C 3
3 Y 3 2
C 2
A 3
A 1
-
X
1
0 2
ê
A 2
-
3
1
2
A
1 3
1
3 Y 3
P E
l
>
l
l
>
>
8
C
1
A
/ . 2
l
>
2
1
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

\
-
K
1
L
-
0
1
P
E
3
-
A
1
0
0 3
1 1
-
K
2
0
N
<
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
-
3
1
1
A 2
-
X
1
9
3
2
A 1
9
l
>
1
A 2
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1
\
2
-
V
1
u
1
w
2
\
1
V
A
C
P E
w
1
3
u
2
T 2
1 1
3
5
5
1 3
2
/ . 2
1 0
5
L
1
L
2
3
2
1
-
X
2
-
K
1
R
2
R e a d v
A 1
-
F
1
1
2
3
0
\
A
C
-
A
1
1
5
A 1
C 1
1
8
C T
5
3
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

\
L
3
2 3
2 1 \
2 1
L 1
8
u T 3
L 2
L 3
T 2
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
T 1
2 1
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
R
|d
|
l
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
L
e
l
l
0
e
|l
a

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
3
l
a
r

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
L
o
c
a
|
R
|d
|
l
L
o
c
a
|
L
e
l
l
L
o
c
a
|
0
l
l
1
ê
-
K
1
L
/.ê
5
ê
1
/.ê
5
2
3
3
2
-
K
1
R
1
1
A 1
A 2
1
4
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-15
E.7.2 Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the
direction of rotation"
Figure E-12: Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.8 Example for the "Dahlander" circuit
E.8.1 Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander"
Figure E-13: Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander"
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
2
3
5
6
4
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
F
a
s
l
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
3
|o
W
3
l
a
r

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
F
a
s
l
L
o
c
a
|
F
a
s
l
L
o
c
a
|
3
|o
W
L
o
c
a
|
0
l
l
1
2
N
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
1
ê
2 2
1
L
1
A 2 2
\
1
0
e
v
|c
e
0
F
F
0 1
T 1
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
5
2
L
1
u
2
3
Z
/.1
-
F
1
2
P E
1
1
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
8
-
K
3
-
V
1
-
K
3
2
3
0
\
A
C
2
3 Y 3
1
/.1
-
X
2
A 1
-
K
1
L 1
5
1 1
8
u
3
X 9
N
2
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
8
u
1
-
A
1
1
1
N
0 1
A 2
ê
C 5
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
/.5
0
N
>
2
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
\
2
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
C
1

A
w
1
ê
1
1
V
A
C
P E
C 1
1 3
2 1
-
T
1
0
1
0 %
C 3
C 2
1
w
2
A 1
3
-
X
1
0 2
ê
-
3
1
2
A
1 3
3 Y 3
3
)

)
)

C
1
A
/ . 2
)

ê
1
0 3
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

\
-
K
2
K
-
0
1
P
E
2
3
-
A
1
0
-
K
1
-
K
2
-
3
1
3
2
0
N
>
>
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
-
X
1
9
-
3
1
1
A 2
3
L
2
9
)

T 3
5
A 2
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1
u
1
T 2
1 1
3
5
/ . 2
2
1 0
ê
L 2
5
L
1
2
-
X
2
2
L 3
A 1
L
3
1
1
A 1
C 1
T 2
8
C T
5
3
3 P E / P E
2 1 \
T 1
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
-
F
1
1
A 5
A
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
8
A
A 3
8
A 1
A 1
A 2
-
X
1
9
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-17
E.8.2 Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander"
Figure E-14: Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.9 Example for the "Dahlander with reversal of the
direction of rotation" circuit
E.9.1 Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of
rotation"
Figure E-15: Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
0
1
0
9
8
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
F
a
s
l
R
|d
|
l
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
3
|o
W
R
|d
|
l
3
l
a
r

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
F
a
s
l
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
3
|o
W
L
e
l
l
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
F
a
s
l
L
e
l
l
L
o
c
a
|
0
l
l
L
o
c
a
|
3
|o
W
R
|d
|
l
L
o
c
a
|
F
a
s
l
R
|d
|
l
L
o
c
a
|
3
|o
W
L
e
l
l
L
o
c
a
|
F
a
s
l
L
e
l
l
8 2
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

\
2
/.ê
3
/.Z
)

)
)

4
E
S
T/RE
S
E
T
2
-
X
1
9
)

C
1

A
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
5
\
1
A 1
-
V
1
0 1
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
u
1
L 1
/ . 5
$
E
V
IC
E
A 1
1
/.ê
T 2
P E
u
2
0
|d
|la
| r
o
d
u
|e
A 1
3
-
X
1
9
1
V
A
C
T 2
2 1
ê
-
3
1
1
-
K
1
L
-
X
2
8
2
0
u
T
1
lN
1
lN
1
lN
3
N
/V
0
u
T
2
lN
2
-
A
1
2
ê
C
1
A
0 3
1
-
A
1
0
3
C 5
C 3
1
1
-
3
1
3
9
L 3
3
5
/.5
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
C 1
8 5
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
"
5
3
1 3
A 1
5
1
L
1
3
)
-
/
#
/
$
%
P
R
O
6
2 5
P E
1
1
'
E
N
.FA
U
LT
8
3 Y 3 2
3
w
2
ê
-
K
3
L
"
A
S
IC
5
N
IT
A 2
-
3
1
5
A 2
)

2 2
2
8 3
1
-
K
1
R
5
-
K
3
R
2
L
1
ê
2 0
1 3
R e a d v
1
A 2
3
-
0
1
N
A 1
T 3
/ . 2
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
0
N
>
/.5
-
X
2
2
-
A
1
1
-
X
1
0
F
F
-
F
1
2
-
K
1
L
2
3
0
\
A
C
0
N
<
A 1
-
K
1
R
-
3
1
2
ê
8 1
5
2
w
1
/ . 2
1
N
1
3 P E / P E
5
2
3
0
\
A
C
ê
A 2
3 Y 3
1 3
P
E
3
1 3
5
-
F
1
1
2 2
5
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
2 Z
1
1
P E
-
K
3
L
# 4
X 9
1 1
1 3
A 2
2
1
T 1
L 2
/.Z
2
N
1
C 1
<>/<<>>
1
-
K
2
\
2
1 1
3
-
T
1
0
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
ê
0 2
3 Y 3
2
L
1
-
K
2
P E
A
2 3
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
-
K
3
R
ê
8 1
2
2 1 \
2 1
L
2
1
0 1
8
u
1
2 ê
1
1 0
C 2
1 1
3 -
3
1
1
1 1
2
T 1
3 Y 3 1
L
3
1
1
A 2
2
Z
2 1
A 5
A
-
X
1
9
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
8
A
A 3
8
A 1
A 1
A 2
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-19
E.9.2 Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction
of rotation"
Figure E-16: Function circuit diagram (1 of 2) for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Figure E-17: Function circuit diagram (2 of 2) for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-21
E.10 Example for the "pole-changing switch" circuit
E.10.1 Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Figure E-18: Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch"
1 2 3 4 5 6
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
l
>
l
l
>
>
8
A 5
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
2
3
0
\
A
C
T 1
ê
2
C
1
A
5
-
V
1
-
0
1
1
\
2
-
F
1
2
A 2
8
u
3
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
0
N
>
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
9
-
X
1
L
2
ê
1
X 9
u
1
/.1
-
X
2
0
N
>
>
2 1
N
5
u
2
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1
A
V
A
C
1 3
-
T
1
0
1 3
1
C
1

A
8
u
0 1
A
1
1
-
F
1
1
T 2
3
3
A
2
C 1
A 3
-
K
1
P E
ê
8
L 2
1 0
ê
w
1
A 2
T 1
P
E
P E
2 2
3
1
C 3
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
2
L
1
1
3
A 1
8
3 Y 3
3 Y 3
-
3
1
1
2
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
1 1
L 3
/ . 2
l
>
w
2
L 1
0
F
F
2
ê
1
A 1
-
3
1
2
2
N
1 -
K
3
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
Z
L
1
3
1
1
/.1
5
-
X
2
1 1
3 P E / P E
-
K
1
A 1
5
-
X
1
9
P E
-
A
1
1
C 5
A 1
-
A
1
0
\
1
/ . 2
C 1
T 2
2
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

\
0 2
L
3
3
1
L
1
C 2
2 1 \
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
0 3
1
N
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
-
3
1
3
3
1
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
0
e
v
|c
e
-
K
3
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
-
X
1
9
T 3
8
0 1
C T
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
2
2
2
A 2
5
l
>
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
F
a
s
l
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
3
|o
W
L
o
c
a
|
F
a
s
l
L
o
c
a
|
3
|o
W
L
o
c
a
|
0
l
l
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-23
E.10.2 Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch"
Figure E-19: Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.11 Example for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of
the direction of rotation" circuit
E.11.1 Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the
direction of rotation"
Figure E-20: Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
0
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
9
1
0
4
5
-
F
1
1
1 1
5
2 1
-
F
1
2
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
Z
1 1
/.5
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
0
e
v
|c
e
/.5
L
3
u
1
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
1
0
|d
|la
| r
o
d
u
|e
1
-
3
1
1
-
3
1
2
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E

p
r
o

\
9
2
2 5
C 1
A 1
/ . 2
3
1
0 %
R e a d v
2 2
0 3
0
N
<
1
3 P E / P E
3
1 1
C
1

A
-
A
1
2
8 5
C T
-
0
1
5
-
K
1
R
C 5
-
K
3
R
8
0
u
T
1
lN
1
lN
1
lN
3
N
/V
0
u
T
2
lN
2
-
T
1
0
T 2
8
A
<>/<<>>
2 2
A
1
ê
1
N
5
-
K
1
L
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E

p
r
o

\
w
1
C 3
V
A
C
T 3
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
2 ê
/.Z
8 3
\
1
ê
1
1
2 2
A 1
ê
A 1
A 2
1
N
2
A 2
0 2
8
u
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
T 1
5
3 Y 3 2
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1
2
L
1
3
5
1 1
/ . 2
2
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
1 3
A 1
3
2
3
-
K
1
R
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
5
3
C 2
X 9
2 0
1
1
2
w
2
P E
3 Y 3
-
V
1
-
K
3
L
1
L
1
1
A 3
A 5
)

)
)

1 0
5
A 1
2
3
0
\
A
C
P E
ê
0 1
2
3
0
\
A
C
P
E
1
ê
1
-
K
3
R
1
/.Z
L 2
-
X
1
9
2 Z
2
0
N
>
1
-
X
1
9
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
L
2
\
2
C
1
A
A 2
-
3
1
5
L 1
3
-
A
1
1
2
A 1
1 3
A 2
8 2
T 2
2 1
-
K
3
L
8
2 1
3 Y 3 1
l
>
-
X
1
9
ê
/.ê
2 1 \
-
X
1
1
-
X
2
1
L 3
-
K
1
L
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
8
8 1
P E
-
3
1
3
ê
2 3
/ . 5
8
u
3
T 1
A
1
-
3
1
1
2
L
1
2
N
A 2
l
>
3 Y 3
C 1
3
u
2
1 3
1 3
-
A
1
0
0 1
8 1
0
F
F
-
X
2
3
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
F
a
s
l
R
|d
|
l
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
3
|o
W
R
|d
|
l
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
3
|o
W
L
e
l
l
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
F
a
s
l
L
e
l
l
L
o
c
a
|
0
l
l
L
o
c
a
|
3
|o
W
R
|d
|
l
L
o
c
a
|
F
a
s
l
R
|d
|
l
L
o
c
a
|
3
|o
W
L
e
l
l
L
o
c
a
|
F
a
s
l
L
e
l
l
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-25
E.11.2 Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of
the direction of rotation" circuit
Figure E-21: Function circuit diagram (1 of 2) for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Figure E-22: Function circuit diagram (2 of 2) for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-27
E.12 Example for the "valve" circuit
E.12.1 Circuit diagram for the "valve"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Figure E-23: Circuit diagram for the "valve"
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8
2
3
7
8
1
9
3 Y 3
C
L
0
3
E
-
X
1
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
2
1
L
1
-
Y
1
C
1

A
1 3
-
X
2
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
3
C
1
A
1
A
8
L
2
-
0
1
2
1 1
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
-
K
1
1
1 1
-
A
1
0
2
1 9
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
-
R
V
A
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
P E
ê
l
l
>
l
>
>
3
3 Y 3
8
1
-
3
1
2
2 1 \
Z
1
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
P E
C T
8
2
3
0
\
A
C
3
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
1
0
e
v
|c
e
l
>
1
ê
-
F
1
2
1
2 0
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
2
5
9
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E

p
r
o

\
1
L
1
2
1
ê 5
A 1
N
2
A 2
-
K
1
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
Z
ê
1 1
P
E
T 1
2
/ . 2
2 2
A 1
1 3
Z
2
N
5
-
X
1
9
5
-
F
1
1
8
A 2
3
ê
-
X
1
9
-
X
1
-
A
1
2
3 P E / P E
5
A
-
R
V
Z
0
P
E
N
1
8 1 2
1
8
u
3
l
>
2 1
1 1
/.1
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
2
T 2
/ . 2
3
1
N
1 0
X 9
1
1 3 2
L
1
2
1
1
L
3
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
N
1 0
P E
-
3
1
1
1 8
A
8
3
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
L
o
c
a
|
0
r
L
o
c
a
|
0
l
l
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
L
|r
|l

s
W
|l
c
|
C
|o
s
e
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
||r
|l

s
W
|l
c
|
0
p
e
r
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-29
E.12.2 Function circuit diagram for the "valve"
Figure E-24: Function circuit diagram for the "valve"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.13 Example of the "positioner" circuit
E.13.1 Circuit diagram for "positioner 1"
Figure E-25: Circuit diagram for "positioner 1"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
2
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
-
A
1
0
3 Y 3 1
-
X
1
T 2
2
1 ê
3
1 3
A
2 0
2
3
0
\
A
C
2 Z
-
V
1
5
2
N
1
2
A 2
2 1
L
3
2 3
1 3
1
L
1
1 1
1
2
3
0
\
A
C
L 3
1 1
L 2
2
8
/ . 2
9
A 1
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
>
>
>
l
l
l
2
2
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
Z
2 1
-
X
1
9
1 3
ê
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
3
8
X 9
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
2 1 \
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E

p
r
o

\
-
X
1
9
2
L
1
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
3

A
C
V
-
R
V
Z
-
3
1
1
-
K
2
T 3
-
X
1
1 8
l
> 1
1 0
1 2
1
A 2
A 1
1 3
1
8
u
3
-
F
1
2
3
-
3
1
3
/.1
L
1
A 1
C T
2
2 ê
-
K
2
0
e
v
|c
e
3 Y 3
1
ê
2
1 1
u
1
N
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E

p
r
o

\
1
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1
-
T
1
0
1 0
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
ê
1 3 2 5
2 0
1
8
-
X
1
9
-
K
1
ê
8
1
-
R
V
A
P E
3
0
P
E
N
1 Z
/ . 2
C
1

A
l
>
/ . 1
-
3
1
2
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
-
X
2
-
F
1
1
Z
P E
T 1
1
3
T 1
/.Z
9
2 2
-
K
1
L 1
1 1
w
-
A
1
2
8
1
N
-
0
1
1
R e a d v
2 2
C
1

A
ê
1
1
1 5
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
C
L
0
3
E
1 9
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
2
A
3
T 2
A
0
|d
|la
| r
o
d
u
|e
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
1
1 1
3
1
A 2
ê
P E
L
2
5
/.1
-
A
1
1
1 1
P
E
P
E
\
5
0
u
T
1
lN
1
lN
1
lN
3
N
/V
0
u
T
2
lN
2
3 P E / P E
2 1
8
u
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
3 Y 3
5
2
5
3
T
0
P
3 Y 3 2
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
0
p
e
r
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
C
|o
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
|
3
l
o
p
L
o
c
a
|
C
|o
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
|
0
p
e
r
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
L
|r
|l

s
W
|l
c
|
C
|o
s
e
d
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
L
|r
|l

s
W
|l
c
|
0
p
e
r
1
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-31
E.13.2 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 1"
Figure E-26: Function circuit diagram for "positioner 1"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.13.3 Circuit diagram for "positioner 2"
Figure E-27: Circuit diagram for "positioner 2"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
0
1
2
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
1
-
R
V
Z
1
L
1
L 1
L
3
1 0
T 2
-
R
V
A
-
3
1
3
2 1
-
X
2
1
>
>
>
l
l
l
5
1 3
L 2
-
3
1
2
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
l
>
-
0
V
A
2 1 \
5
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1 1
2 1
0
e
v
|c
e
3

A
C
V
9
1
P E
-
X
1
9
2 5
3
8
u
1 3
/.Z
3 Y 3 2
1 ê
3
2 0
-
T
1
0
2 1
1
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
3
X 9
3
8
-
A
1
2
1
1
N
3
-
K
2
2
-
K
2
2 Z
-
0
1
2 1
-
X
1
9
-
X
1
1 Z
ê u
1 8
2
C
1

A
9
2
L
1
ê
8
3 Y 3 1
-
F
1
2
2
N
/ . 1
1 3
1 0
-
K
1
P E
L
1
1 9
0
u
T
1
lN
1
lN
1
lN
3
N
/V
0
u
T
2
lN
2
A
1
2 2
A 1
1
T 2
A 2
A
P E
8
u
3
w
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
2
-
X
1
1
2 2
2 1
ê
8
l
>
8
T 1
1
/.1
1 1
-
A
1
1
A
2 0
2
3
/ . 2
3 Y 3
-
F
1
1
2
3
0
\
A
C
1 1
P
E
2
1 3
R e a d v
A 2
/ . 2
2
0
|d
|la
| r
o
d
u
|e
1 1
Z
2
5
1 2
ê
2 ê
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
P
E
3 P E / P E
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
2
3
1
1
T 3
A 1
ê
A 1
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
2 2
T 1
Z
1
5
1
-
X
1
9
2
-
3
1
1
C
1

A
8
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
N
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
1 1
1 3
2 2
L 3
1
2 3
C T
1
-
K
1
\
-
0
V
Z
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
1
/.1
-
V
1
1 5
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

\
-
A
1
0
ê
1 1
1
5
A 2
L
2
2
3
0
\
A
C
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

\
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
0
p
e
r
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
C
|o
s
e
L
o
c
a
|
3
l
o
p
L
o
c
a
|
C
|o
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
|
0
p
e
r
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
T
o
r
c
u
e

s
W
|l
c
|
C
|o
s
e
d
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
L
|r
|l

s
W
|l
c
|
C
|o
s
e
d
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
L
|r
|l

s
W
|l
c
|
0
p
e
r
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
T
o
r
c
u
e

s
W
|l
c
|
0
p
e
r
0
P
E
N
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
3
T
0
P
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
3 Y 3
C
L
0
3
E
1
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-33
E.13.4 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 2"
Figure E-28: Function circuit diagram for "positioner 2"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.13.5 Circuit diagram for "positioner 3"
Figure E-29: Circuit diagram for "positioner 3"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
2
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
1
-
X
1
9
2 3
3
5
1 3
L 3
2 1
3 P E / P E
5
-
V
1 N
1 0
-
A
1
1
>
>
>
l
l
l
2 5
w
A 2
3
2 1 \
8
1
8
u
3
2 1
C
L
0
3
E
2
3
0
\
A
C
1 1
R e a d v
0
|d
|la
| r
o
d
u
|e
2 3
2 2
5
L
3
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
9
-
X
1
9
ê
3
-
A
1
0
2 0
0
u
T
1
lN
1
lN
1
lN
3
N
/V
0
u
T
2
lN
2
/ . 2
1
P E
A
\
T 3
1 3
ê
-
K
1
1 9
1
L
1
3 Y 3
2
L
1
T 2
-
0
1
8
u
2 ê
P E
A 2
-
K
1
3

A
C
V
/.1
ê
C
1

A
-
F
1
1
Z
2
N
1 3
0
P
E
N
1 1 1
2
9
-
3
1
2
2
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

\
8
2 2
l
>
ê
3
T
0
P
1
-
3
1
1
/ . 2
1 3
-
K
2
3 Y 3 1
C
1

A
-
R
V
Z
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
0
e
v
|c
e
A 1
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
1
A
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
1
8
2
3
0
\
A
C
3
-
X
1
9
1 2
1 1
-
A
1
2
L
1
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
2
1
-
X
2
-
T
1
0
1 1
1 1
1
1
1 3
L 2
Z
5
3 Y 3
-
K
2
X 9
2 0
1
3 Y 3 2
1 5
1 8
1
N
1
-
R
V
A
1 3
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
3
1 0
u
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
2 1
A 2
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

\
2
L 1
-
X
1
A 1
/.1
1
2 Z
-
F
1
2
1 Z
ê
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
P E
2 1
8
l
>
C T
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
2
2
-
0
V
Z
-
3
1
3
/ . 1
T 1
1 ê
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
L
2
P
E
P
E
T 2
5
ê
T 1
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
1
8
1
A 1
/.Z
A
1 1
1
-
X
1
2
2 2
2
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
0
p
e
r
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
C
|o
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
|
3
l
o
p
L
o
c
a
|
C
|o
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
|
0
p
e
r
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
T
o
r
c
u
e

s
W
|l
c
|
C
|o
s
e
d
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
L
|r
|l

s
W
|l
c
|
C
|o
s
e
d
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
L
|r
|l

s
W
|l
c
|
0
p
e
r
1
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-35
E.13.6 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 3"
Figure E-30: Function circuit diagram for "positioner 3"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.13.7 Circuit diagram for "positioner 4"
Figure E-31: Circuit diagram for "positioner 4"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
2
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
1
-
X
1
9
2 3
3
5
1 3
L 3
2 1
3 P E / P E
5
-
V
1 N
1 0
-
A
1
1
>
>
>
l
l
l
2 5
w
A 2
3
2 1 \
8
1
8
u
3
C
L
0
3
E
2
3
0
\
A
C
1 1
2 1
R e a d v
0
|d
|la
| r
o
d
u
|e
2 3
2 2
5
L
3
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
9
-
X
1
9
-
0
V
A
ê
3
-
A
1
0
2 0
0
u
T
1
lN
1
lN
1
lN
3
N
/V
0
u
T
2
lN
2
/ . 2
1
P E
A
\
T 3
1 3
ê
-
K
1
1 9
1
L
1
3 Y 3
2
L
1
T 2
-
0
1
8
u
2 ê
2 2
A 2
-
K
1
3

A
C
V
/.1
ê
C
1

A
-
F
1
1
Z
2
N
1 3
0
P
E
N
1 1 1
2
9
-
3
1
2
2
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

\
8
2 2
P E
l
>
ê
3
T
0
P
1
-
3
1
1
/ . 2
1 3
-
K
2
3 Y 3 1
C
1

A
-
R
V
Z
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
0
e
v
|c
e
A 1
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
1
A
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
1
8
2
3
0
\
A
C
3
-
X
1
9
1 2
1 1
-
A
1
2
L
1
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
2
1
-
X
2
-
T
1
0
1 1
1 1
1
1
1 3
L 2
Z
5
3 Y 3
-
K
2
X 9
2 0
1
3 Y 3 2
1 5
1 8
1
N
1
-
R
V
A
1 3
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
3
1 0
u
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
2 1
A 2
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E
p
r
o

\
L 1
-
X
1
A 1
2
/.1
1
2 Z
-
F
1
2
1 Z
ê
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
P E
2 1
8
l
>
C T
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
2
2
-
3
1
3
/ . 1
T 1
1 ê
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
L
2
P
E
P
E
T 2
5
ê
T 1
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
1
8
1
A 1
/.Z
A
1 1
1
-
X
1
2
2
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r

0
p
e
r
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
C
|o
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
|
3
l
o
p
L
o
c
a
|
C
|o
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
|
0
p
e
r
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
L
|r
|l

s
W
|l
c
|
C
|o
s
e
d
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
L
|r
|l

s
W
|l
c
|
0
p
e
r
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
T
o
r
c
u
e

s
W
|l
c
|
0
p
e
r
1
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-37
E.13.8 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 4"
Figure E-32: Function circuit diagram for "positioner 4"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.13.9 Circuit diagram for "positioner 5"
Figure E-33: Circuit diagram for "positioner 5"
1
2
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
L
1
L 1
L
3
1 0
T 2
-
3
1
3
2 1
-
X
2
1
>
>
>
l
l
l
5
1 3
L 2
-
3
1
2
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
l
>
-
0
V
A
/R
V
A
2 1 \
5
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
1 1
2 1
0
e
v
|c
e
3

A
C
V
9
1
P E
-
X
1
9
2 5
3
8
u
1 3
/.Z
3 Y 3 2
1 ê
3
2 0
-
T
1
0
2 1
1
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
3
X 9
3
8
-
A
1
2
1
1
N
3
-
K
2
2
-
K
2
2 Z
-
0
1
2 1
-
X
1
9
-
X
1
1 Z
ê u
1 8
2
C
1

A
9
2
L
1
ê
8
3 Y 3 1
-
F
1
2
2
N
/ . 1
1 3
1 0
-
K
1
P E
L
1
1 9
0
u
T
1
lN
1
lN
1
lN
3
N
/V
0
u
T
2
lN
2
A
1
2 2
A 1
1
T 2
A 2
A
0
P
E
N
P E
8
u
3
w
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
2
-
X
1
1
2 2
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
2 1
ê
8
l
>
8
T 1
1
/.1
1 1
-
A
1
1
A
2 0
2
3
3
T
0
P
/ . 2
3 Y 3
-
F
1
1
2
3
0
\
A
C
1 1
P
E
2
1 3
R e a d v
A 2
/ . 2
2
0
|d
|la
| r
o
d
u
|e
1 1
Z
2
5
1 2
ê
2 ê
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
P
E
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
3 P E / P E
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
2
3
1
1
T 3
A 1
ê
A 1
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
2 2
T 1
Z
1
5
1
-
X
1
9
2
-
3
1
1
C
1

A
8
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
N
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
3 Y 3
1 1
1 3
2 2
L 3
1
2 3
C
L
0
3
E
C T
1
-
K
1
\
-
0
V
Z
/ R
V
Z
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
1
/.1
-
V
1
1 5
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E

p
r
o

\
-
A
1
0
ê
1 1
1
5
A 2
L
2
2
3
0
\
A
C
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E

p
r
o

\
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
0
p
e
r
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
C
|o
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
|
3
l
o
p
L
o
c
a
|
C
|o
s
e
d
L
o
c
a
|
0
p
e
r
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
T
o
r
c
u
e

s
W
|l
c
|
/
L
|r
|l

s
W
|l
c
|
C
|o
s
e
d
F
e
e
d
o
a
c
|
T
o
r
c
u
e

s
W
|l
c
|
/
L
|r
|l

s
W
|l
c
|
0
p
e
r
1
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-39
E.13.10 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 5"
Figure E-34: Function circuit diagram for "positioner 5"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.14 Example for the "soft starter" circuit
E.14.1 Circuit diagram for the "soft starter"
Figure E-35: Circuit diagram (1 of 2) for the "soft starter"
1
5
6
1
2
3
4
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
3
A 2
N
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\
5
2
3
0
\
A
C
1
1
A 1 0 N
7
1
2 1
A 1 L 2 1
2
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
1
N
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
X 9
1
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
-
A
1
0
T 1
2 1 \
1 1
1 0
o
ll
5
3
T 3
0
e
v
|c
e
2
2
1
-
3
1
1
9
0
N
>
1
1
L 2
l
>
A
5
-
T
1
0
/ 2 . 2
T 2
8
u
2
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E

p
r
o

\
/ 2 . 5
1
/ 2 . 3
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
/ 2 . 4
A
2
L
1
T 2
3 Y 3
ê
T 1
! 2 ê
A 1 L 3
8
C T
2
L 1
-
F
1
2
-
3
1
2
3 Y 3
A 1 E R R
/ 2 . 2
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
2
N
2 2
l
>
l
l
>
>
! l 2 % 3
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
L
1
-
A
1
1
8
-
K
1
C
1
A
ê
1
L
2
L
3
ê
/ 2 . 1
P
E
2
/ 2 . 2
1
! l +
/ 2 . 4
' A
C
1

A
5
-
0
1
3
1 3
-
X
9
3
0
F
F
A 1
8
3 P E / P E
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
! l
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
9
2
-
X
1
0
-

l
-
F
1
1
/ 2 . 1
8
u
3
-
X
1
0
8
8 u s c o r r e c l o r o r 3 u o - 0
L 3
' 8
P E
/.5
A
/ 2 . 5
8
8
A 1 L 1
A
/ 2 . 3
l
>
1
L
1
K
Z
1 2 3 4 5 6
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
3
o
l
l

s
l
a
r
l
e
r
3
l
a
r
l
3
o
l
l

s
l
a
r
l
e
r
R
e
s
e
l
3
o
l
l

s
l
a
r
l
e
r
F
a
u
|l
L
o
c
a
|
0
r
L
o
c
a
|
0
l
l
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-41
Figure E-36: Circuit diagram (2 of 2) for the "soft starter"
R e s e l
/ 1 . 1
8
2
1 1
3

A
C
V
A 1 L 3
3
1
T 2
T 1
/ 1 . 3
C
3
A
/ 1 . 1
1 5
-
F
1
3
1 0
P E
1 3
5
A 1 L 2
A 1 0 N
1
/ 1 . 1
l | r | s | e d
A c c e | e r a l | o r
T 3
0 C L ÷ 2 1 \
c o r l a c l o r
8 r a | e
/ 1 . 2
u
ê
P E
/ 1 . 1
L 1
/ 1 . 2
L 3
1
3
P
E
A 1 ÷
-
V
1
F a u | l
w
L 2
/ 1 . 5
1
/ 1 . 5
. P E
Z
A 1 R E 3
2
/ 1 . 5
l
>
A 1 E R R
A 1 L 1
0 l l
\
1 2
2
3
l
K
0
3
T
A
R
T
A C 3 8 0 - 1 1 5 \
A C 2 0 0 - 2 1 0 \
N / L
3
R
w
2
2
A C 1 0 0 - 1 2 0 \
9
-
A
1
/ 1 . 2
1 1
0 r
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.14.2 Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter"
Figure E-37: Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter"
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-43
E.15 Example for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"
circuit
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.15.1 Circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"
Figure E-38: Circuit diagram (1 of 2) for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
2
6
7
8
5
1
2
3
4
T 2
1
8
u
1
8 u s c o r l a c l o r o r 3 u o - 0
X 9
/ 2 . 1
0
F
F
1
l
>
3
3
1
3 P E / P E
1
L
1
/ 2 . 5
/.1
-
X
9
L 2
1
l
>
l
l
>
>
' A
1
3
2
3
0
\
A
C
1
1
8
P E
0
e
v
|c
e
C u r r e r l r e a s u r e r e r l
l
>
-
T
1
0
C
1

A
A 2
5
L
1
-
F
1
2
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
0
u
T
1
lN
1
lN
1
lN
3
N
/V
0
u
T
2
lN
2
/ 2 . 1
2
A 2
-
3
1
1
lN
2
lN
3
0
u
T
1
0
u
T
2
lN
1
P
T
C
lN
1
0
u
T
3
2 ê
2 Z
8
0
e
r
.la
u
|l
P
E
3
2 2
1
1 1
A 1 R E 3
/ 2 . 1
ê
2
ê
8
u
3
R
E
3
E
T
0
E
N
.F
A
u
L
T
0
E
\
lC
E
T
E
3
T
/
ê
L 3
-
X
1
0
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E

p
r
o

\
A 1
0
N
>
2 3
-
A
1
2
5
A
2
N
P
r
o
l|o
u
s
0
P
T 1
5
9
A 1 ÷
2
T
e
s
l/r
e
s
e
l
2 0
1
8
a
s
|c
u
r
|l
/ 2 . 3
/ 2 . 5
2 2
/ 2 . 2
ê
-
K
1
/ 2 . 2
A 1 L 3
1 3
/ 2 . 1
1 0
-
0
1
3 Y 3 2
2
-
3
1
3
2
L
1
5
C T
1
/N
A
C
5
0
l
z
2
3
0
\
2
A 1
Z
3
/N
/P
E
A
C
5
0
l
z
1
0
0
\ -
K
2
2 1
1 3
3 Y 3 1
-
A
1
0
A 2
C
1
A
2 5
-
K
1
8
2
L 1
-
K
2
8
1
3 Y 3
A
A 1 L 1
8
u
3
T 2
T 3
N L
3
2 1
9
8
0
N
>
>
1 1
A 1
2
2
3
0
\
A
C
3
R e a d v
A 1 E R R
3
A 1 L 2
/ 2 . 2
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
/.1
-
X
1
0
A
1
P E
ê
-
A
1
1
/ 2 . 3
L
2
Z
2 1
A
8
-
3
1
2
3
l
V
0
C
0
0
E

p
r
o

\
0
p
e
r
a
lo
r
p
a
r
e
|
1
N
T 1
3 Y 3
1
5
A 1 0 N
2 1 \
' 8
P
R
0
F
l8
u
3
2
o
ll
-
F
1
1
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
R
|d
|
l
V
a
|r
s

c
o
r
l
a
c
l
o
r
L
e
l
l
3
o
l
l

s
l
a
r
l
e
r
3
l
a
r
l
3
o
l
l

s
l
a
r
l
e
r
R
e
s
e
l
3
o
l
l

s
l
a
r
l
e
r
F
a
u
|l
L
o
c
a
|
R
|d
|
l
L
o
c
a
|
0
l
l
L
o
c
a
|
L
e
l
l
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 E-45
Figure E-39: Circuit diagram (2 of 2) for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"
ê
A 1 E R R
1 5
-
V
1
1
\
2
A 1 0 N
0 l l
T 2
0 C L ÷ 2 1 \
5
3

A
C
V
2
/ 1 . ê
A 1 L 2
1 2
0 r
1 1
3
l
K
0
3
T
A
R
T
A C 3 8 0 - 1 1 5 \
A C 2 0 0 - 2 1 0 \
N / L
3
R
w
2
2
A C 1 0 0 - 1 2 0 \
R e s e l
1
c o r l a c l o r
8 r a | e
l
>
P E
3
8
P
E
Z
A 1 L 1
1
/ 1 . 1
T 3
. P E
/ 1 . 1
T 1
9
/ 1 . 2
-
A
1
L 1
1
w
l | r | s | e d
A c c e | e r a l | o r
C
3
A
/ 1 . 3
u
1 3
1 0
L 2
2
/ 1 . 5
1 1
P E
A 1 L 3
/ 1 . 2
A 1 R E 3
-
F
1
3
3
A 1 ÷
/ 1 . 5
/ 1 . 2
/ 1 . Z
/ 1 . ê
L 3
F a u | l
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
E.15.2 Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"
Figure E-40: Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 F-1
Safety and Commissioning Information
for EEx Areas F
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find safety and commissioning information for
potentially explosive areas. It is imperative that you observe this information
when you have to protect motors in potentially explosive areas.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• planners and configurators
• commissioners
• maintenance and service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
You need the following knowledge:
• explosion protection
• IEC 60079-14/EN 60079-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 1 Electrical apparatus for explo-
sive gas atmospheres - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than
mines)
• IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installa-
tions in hazardous areas (other than mines)
• IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence
of combustible dust - Selection and installation
• IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the
presence of combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)
• VDE 0118 for the erection of electrical installations in mines
• Ordinance on industrial safety and health.
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
SIMOCODE pro
F-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
F.1 General
Information and standards
The increased danger in potentially explosive areas makes it necessary to
carefully observe the following notes and standards:
• IEC 60079-14/EN 60079-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 1 Electrical apparatus for explo-
sive gas atmospheres - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other than
mines)
• IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installa-
tions in hazardous areas (other than mines)
• IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence
of combustible dust - Selection and installation
• IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the
presence of combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)
• VDE 0118 for the erection of electrical installations in mines
• Ordinance on industrial safety and health.

All 3UF7 devices are approved under Device Group I, Category "M2" (mining)
and Device Group II, Category 2 in the area "GD" (areas in which explosive
gas, steam, fog and air mixtures, as well as inflammable dust are present):
*) Notice:
The safety and commissioning information is also valid for devices with
BVS 04 ATEX F 003 certificate numbers.
The devices are suitable for the protection of motors in explosive atmosphe-
res according to the standards listed above.
Tests other than those stipulated by law (Ordinance on industrial safety
and health) are not necessary.
Warning
All work for connecting, commissioning and maintenance must be carried
out by qualified, responsible personnel. Unprofessional behavior can cause
serious damage to persons and goods.
BVS 06 ATEX F 001 II (2) GD *)
BVS 06 ATEX F 001 I (M2) *)
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 F-3
F.2 Setting up and Commissioning
Attention
Follow the operating instructions (enclosed with the devices)
SIMOCODE pro
Basic device Order number 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
Current measuring module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
Current/volt. measuring module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
Digital module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
F.2.1 Setting the Rated Current of the Motor
Set the 3UF7 to the rated motor current (according to the type plate or
design test certificate of the motor).
Attention
Note the tripping class/tripping characteristic curve of the 3UF7.
Select the tripping class so that the motor is also thermally protected even
with a stalled rotor.

Motors, cables and contactors must be designed for the selected tripping
class.
Attention
Set the response of the overload protection to "Switch off"!
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
SIMOCODE pro
F-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Example
Motor 500 V, 50/60 Hz, 110 kW, 156 A, temperature class T3, time T
E
= 11 s,
I
A
/I
e
= 5.5:
Figure F-1: Switch-off conditions of the EExe motor, selected: CLASS 10
I
A
/I
e
= 5.5
T
E
= 11 s
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 F-5
F.2.2 SIMOCODE pro with Thermistor Input
For the 3UF70 you can use a type A temperature sensor with a characteri-
stic curve according to IEC 60947-8 (DIN VDE 0660, Part 303), DIN 44081
and DIN 44082.
Depending on the number of sensors, this results in the following tripping
and restart temperatures:
Figure F-2: Typical characteristic curve of a type A sensor (logarithmic scale)
Depending on the number of sensors, the following tripping and restart
temperatures result in relation to the NFT (nominal functioning temperature
of the sensor):
Table F-1: Tripping and restart temperatures
The specified temperatures are limit values.
Attention
Set the response of the activated thermistor to "Switch off"!
Tripping temperature Restart temperature
3 sensors NFT + 4 K NFT - 7 K
6 sensors NFT - 5 K NFT - 20 K
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
SIMOCODE pro
F-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
F.2.3 Wiring of the Sensor Circuit
Caution
Lay the measuring circuit cables as separate control cables.
The use of cores of the motor feeder or other main current cables is not per-
mitted.
Shielded control cables must be used if extremely inductive or capacitive
interferences are to be expected due to high-voltage cables that are laid par-
allel to each other.
Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables:
Table F-2: Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables
It is recommended to evaluate the short-circuit recognition of the sensor
cable.
If the short-circuit recognition of the sensor cable is not evaluated, the sen-
sor resistance must be measured with a suitable measuring device during
commissioning or after modifications/maintenance work has been carried
out (mounting, demounting the system).
F.2.4 Short-circuit Protection according to IEC 60947-4-1 for Type of
Coordination 2
The short-circuit protection must be ensured by separate overcurrent pro-
tection devices.
Caution
Note the respective maximum fuse protection of the contactor for type of
coordination 2 when combining with other contactors.
Cable
cross section
Cable lengths at the thermistor input
without short-circuit
recognition
with short-circuit recognition
1
)
2.5 mm
2
2x 2,800 m 2x 250 m
1.5 mm
2
2x 1,500 m 2x 150 m
0.5 mm
2
2x 500 m 2x 50 m
1) A short circuit in the sensor circuit is recognized up to this maximum cable length.
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 F-7
F.2.5 Cable Protection
Caution
Avoid impermissibly high surface temperatures of the cables by correctly
dimensioning the cross sections!
Select a sufficient cross section - especially with heavy starting CLASS 20
to CLASS 40 (see chapter D.6 "Short-circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor
Feeders for Short-circuit Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V").
F.2.6 Test
SIMOCODE pro provides users with a convenient method for checking the
complete motor protection chain (incl. actuators and sensors such as e.g.
contactors, circuit breakers and thermistors). This check can, for example,
be used to carry out testing according to IEC 60079-17.
This test includes a complete functional test. All three test phases must be
run through (hardware test, current feedback, deactivation of the motor con-
tactors, see below).
The test can be carried out either by pressing the existing "TEST/RESET"
buttons or automatically via the bus.
Due to the existing self-test routines it is not necessary to add tripping cur-
rents to carry out the test
Test phases
• Phase 1: hardware test/lamp test (0 to 2 s):
The hardware (e.g. the thermistor electronics) is tested, all LEDs and displays
are activated, as are the lamp controls. The contactor controls remain unchan-
ged.
• Phase 2: hardware test results (2 to 5 s):
If there is an fault, the "HW fault basic unit" fault is triggered.
If there is no fault,
– the "GEN. FAULT" LED flashes if no main current is flowing
– the "GEN. FAULT" LED flickers if main current is flowing in all three pha-
ses (special case: for "1-phase load" in one phase).
• Phase 3: relay test (> 5 s):
If a test is implemented with switch-off, the contactor controls are deactiva-
ted.
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
SIMOCODE pro
F-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
The following table shows the test phases carried out when the
"TEST/RESET" button is pressed for the respective period of time:
Test
phase
Status Without main current With main current
O.K. Fault *) O.K. Fault
Hardware test/lamp test

< 2 s
"DEVICE" LED Green Green Green Green
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged
Show QL*
Results of the hardware test/lamp test
2 s - 5 s
"DEVICE" LED Green Red Green Red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated
Relay test

> 5 s
"DEVICE" LED Green Red Green Red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
LED lit/activated LED flashing LED flickering LED off
*) "Fault" displayed after 2 s
Table F-3: States of the status LEDs/contactor controls during the test
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 F-9
F.2.7 Further Safety Instructions
Caution
Only the relay outputs of the 3UF70 basic unit or the 3UF730 monostable
digital module may be used for the protection function!
Warning
The 3UF7 is not suitable for set-up in potentially explosive areas.
The device may only be used in a switchgear cabinet which has at least the
IP 4x degree of protection.
When setting up in potentially explosive areas, the 3UF7 may not cause any
danger of fire. Corresponding measures must be taken (e.g. encapsulation).
Attention
The 3UF7 is not suitable for the load-side operation of frequency converters.
F.2.8 Ambient Conditions
Permitted ambient temperature range:
• Storage/transport: -40 °C to +80 °C
• Operation: -25 °C to +60 °C.
F.3 Maintenance and Repairs
The devices are maintenance-free.
Warning
Repairs on the device may only be carried out by the manufacturer.
F.4 Guarantee
The guarantee presumes the observance of this safety and commissioning
information of the operating instructions
SIMOCODE pro
Basic device Order number 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
Current measuring module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
Current/voltage measuring
module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
Digital module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
and the complete manual Order number 3UF7970-0AA01-0

Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
SIMOCODE pro
F-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
F.5 Further Information
You will find further information about the 3UF7
• in the Siemens catalogs LV1 or LV1T "Low-voltage Controls and Distribution -
SIRIUS - SENTRON - SIVACON"
or
• on the internet at http://www.ad.siemens.com/csi/cd.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Index-1
Index
Numerics
0/4 A -20 mA signal monitoring 5-14
3UF50 compatibility mode 9-1
9-pole SUB-D connection 13-31
A
A/B terminals 13-31
Abbreviations A-3, B-3
Abbreviations and specifications A-3
Access to data records in STEP 7 12-21
Accessories 1-19, 1-30, C-15
Acknowledgement of faults 10-6
Active control stations 4-57, A-2
Active control stations, contactor & lamp
controls and status signal of the control
functions 4-57
Active power monitoring 1-11, 5-1, 5-12,
Gl-1
Actual analog signal value 1-16
Acyclic receive 7-15
Acyclic send 6-3, 6-16
Acyclic services 6-16, 7-15
Acyclic signaling data 6-3, 6-16, 12-1
Acyclic writing and reading of
DPV1 data records 12-15
Addressing plug 1-19, 1-22, 1-30, 13-25,
13-29, Gl-1
Alarm, faults and system messages 15-1
Alarms 12-6, 12-13
AM - inputs 7-12
AM - output function block 6-10
Ambient conditions F-10
Analog connecting blocks 1-33
Analog module (AM) 1-2, 1-12, 1-18,
1-27, 1-28, 5-14, D-8, Gl-1
Analog module inputs 7-1, 7-3, 7-12
Analog module open circuit 15-2
Analog module outputs 6-1, 6-3, 6-10
Analog module pin assignment 13-17
Analog temperature monitoring 1-9, 5-1,
5-21
Analog value recording 8-1 to 8-3
Analog values 1-8
Another start permitted 15-2
Apparent power 1-16
Assignment of cyclic control and
signaling data for predefined
control functions B-40
Automatic acknowledgement
of faults reset 10-6
Auto-Reset 3-9, 10-10
B
Basic factory default settings 2-2, 14-2,
E-2, Gl-2
Basic unit (BU) 1-10, 1-20, C-2, Gl-2
Basic unit outputs 6-3
Basic unit inputs 7-3
Basic unit pin assignment 13-9
Baud rate Gl-1
Binary connecting blocks 1-33
Binary inputs 1-9, 7-1
Binary inputs on the basic units
and digital modules 7-1
Bistable relay outputs 1-9
Blocked positioner 15-2
Blocking 15-2
Blocking limit 3-11
Blocking protection Gl-2
Basic unit - input settings 7-5
Basic unit - inputs function block 7-4
Basic unit outputs 6-5
Bus Gl-2
Bus fault/PLC/DCS fault response 10-18
Bus monitoring 10-17, 10-18
Bus parameters 12-1
Bus segment Gl-2
Bus termination modules 13-32
Bus/PLC fault - reset 10-18
Buttons D-11
C
Cable cross sections 13-7
Cable lengths D-4
Cable length
of the sensor circuit cables F-6
Cable protection F-7
Cables 13-7
Catalogs LV1 or LV1T F-10
SIMOCODE pro
Index-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 01
Index
Changing of the parameters is not permis-
sible in the current mode 15-2
Channel-related diagnostics 12-6, 12-12
Characteristic curve of a type A sensor
F-5
Check list for selecting the device
series 1-8
Circuit breaker (MCCB) 1-13, 4-23, B-43,
E-10, E-11
Circuit breaker control 1-20
Class Gl-2
Class 1 master 12-2, 12-15, Gl-3
Class 2 master 12-2, Gl-3
Class interval 3-11
Clockwise rotation 4-27
Cold starting 10-8
Cold starting function test 10-8
Color coding of the connection cable
13-28, 13-30
Commissioning 2-9, 14-1 to 14-3, F-3
Communication 1-14, 12-1
Communication principle 12-4
Compatibility mode 1-14
Configuration fault 15-2
Configuration for SIMOCODE pro V
(example) 13-26
Configuration of the diagnostic
response 12-6
Configuring a reversing starter 2-1
Connecting cables 1-19, 1-30, 13-25, Gl-3
Connecting plugs with sockets 1-34
Connecting system components
to the system interface 13-27, 13-29
Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the
9-pole SUB-D socket 13-31
Connection D-4
Connection cross sections
D-4, D-7 to D-10
Connection for voltage measuring
D-6
Contactor 4-57
Contactor & lamp controls A-2
Control circuit D-7, D-8
Control commands 4-1, 4-7, 4-19, 4-27,
4-31, 4-41, 4-47, 4-52
Control data from PROFIBUS DP 1-33,
7-1
Control function 4-1, 4-2
Control function
"Circuit breaker" (MCCB) 4-22
"Dahlander" 4-31, 4-34
"Dahlander with reversal of the direction
of rotation" 4-34
"Direct starter" 4-17
"Overload relay" 4-16
"Pole-changing switch" 4-38
"Pole-changing switch with reversal of
the direction of rotation" 4-41
"Positioner" 4-47
"Reversing starter" 4-19
"Soft starter" 4-52
"Soft starter with reversing contactor"
E-43
"Star-delta starter" 4-24
"Star-delta starter with reversal of the
direction of rotation" 4-27
"Valve" 4-45
Control functions 1-13, 4-10, 4-57, Gl-3
Control programs 1-2
Control station - local control 1-6, 4-3
Control station - operator panel 4-2, 4-4
Control station - PC 4-2, 4-4
Control station - PLC/DCS 4-2, 4-3
Control station settings 4-9
Control stations 4-1, Gl-3
Controlling lamps for displaying the opera-
ting states 6-4
Controlling the main contactor in the motor
feeder 6-4
Cooling down period 3-7
Cooling down time 1-16, Gl-4
Cos phi 1-25, Gl-4
Counter 11-2
Counter settings 11-9
Counter-clockwise rotation 4-27
Counters 1-15, 11-8
Counters logic modules 11-8
Cover 1-22
Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 1-16
Current limits 1-10, 3-11
Current limits monitoring 1-8, 1-10, 5-1,
5-5
Current limits monitoring I< 5-7
Current limits monitoring I> 5-6
Current limits function block 5-5
Current limits values 5-5
Current measuring 1-8, D-5
Current measuring module (IM)
1-17, 1-24, 5-5, 13-19, C-3 to C-7, D-5, Gl-4
with an external current transformer
(interposing transformer) 13-22
Current measuring
with current measuring modules
13-19, 13-20
Current transformer 3-4
Current/voltage measuring module
(UM) 1-2, 1-17, 1-25, 5-5, 5-8, 5-12,
13-20, C-8 to C-12, D-5, Gl-4
Cyclic receive 7-14, 12-5
Cyclic data transfer 12-15
Cyclic output of an analog value 6-13
Cyclic send 6-14, 12-5
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Index-3
Index
Cyclic send data 6-15
Cyclic services 1-14, 6-15, 7-14
Cyclic signaling data 2-12, 6-3, 6-15, 12-1
D
Dahlander 1-13, 1-20, 4-33, B-46, E-16,
E-17
Dahlander control function 4-32
Dahlander reversing starter 4-12
Dahlander starter 4-12
Dahlander with reversal of the direction of
rotation 4-36, 4-37, B-47, E-18 to E-20
Data access 12-5
Data formats B-1
Data record 130 -
Basic device parameter 1 B-17
Data record 131 -
Basic device parameter 2 B-22
Data record 132 -
Extended device parameter 1 B-26
Data record 133 -
Extended device parameter 2 B-32
Data record 139 - marking B-35
Data record 160 - communication
parameters B-36
Data record 165 - comments B-36
Data record 202 - acyclic receive B-37
Data record 203 - acyclic send B-38
Data record 224 - password protection
B-39
Data record 67 - process image of the
outputs B-6
Data record 69 - process image of the
inputs B-7
Data record 92 - device diagnostics B-9
Data record 94 - measured values B-15
Data record 95 - service/statistical
data B-16
Data records 12-21, B-1, B-2
Debounce time 1-28
Degree of protection (according to
60529) D-2
Delay parameter 3-9
Delay pre-warning 3-9
Delays inputs 7-9
Device data 12-2
Device data (GSD file) Gl-4
Device parameters 12-1
Device series 1-2
Devices 1-17
Diagnostic alarm 12-6, 12-13
Diagnostic data 1-16, 12-6
Diagnostics
for device errors 12-6
for device faults 12-6
for messages 12-6
Diagnostics
for warnings 12-6
Digital module (DM) 1-18, 1-27, D-7, Gl-4
Digital module 1 inputs 7-3
Digital module 1 outputs 6-3
Digital module 2 inputs 7-3
Digital module 2 outputs 6-3
Digital module outputs 6-8
Digital module pin assignment 13-11
Dimension drawings C-1
Direct starter 1-4, 1-5, 1-8, 1-13, 4-12,
4-18, B-41, E-6, E-7
Direction of rotation 4-19
Display D-3, D-7 to D-9, D-11
DM - inputs function blocks 7-8
DM - inputs settings 7-9
Door adapter 1-19, 1-30, C-15, Gl-5
Double 0 15-2
Double 1 15-2
DP master 12-2, Gl-5
DP master
with DPV1 alarm support
(DPV1 alarm mode) 12-19
without DPV1 alarm support
(DPV1 alarm mode) 12-19
DP masters
which are operated in
"DPV1" DP mode 12-20
which are operated in
"S7 compatible" DP mode 12-20
DP slave/DP standard slave Gl-5
DPV1 slave 12-2
DPV1 slave via GSD 12-15
E
Early warning and fault signals 1-16
Earth fault monitoring 5-1, 5-2
Earth-fault module (EM) 1-18, 1-27, 1-28,
D-9, Gl-5
Earth-fault module pin assignment 13-1
Earth-fault monitoring 1-8 to 1-10, 1-18,
Gl-5
EEx e applications 3-6, 3-12, 5-22
Electronic overload protection 1-10
EMC emitted interference
according to IEC 60947-1 D-2
EMC stability
according to IEC 60947-1 D-2
Emergency start 1-14, 10-2, 10-16, Gl-5
Enabled control command 4-7
Enables 4-1, 4-7
Error protocolling with time stamp 1-16
Error types 12-12
Evaluating diagnostic data 12-19
Example circuits E-1
SIMOCODE pro
Index-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 01
Index
Example
for connecting the terminals of the ana-
log module 13-18
for connecting the terminals of the basic
unit 13-10
for connecting the terminals of the digi-
tal module 13-12
for connecting the terminals of the
earth-fault module 13-14
for connecting the terminals of the tem-
perature module 13-16
Execution ON command 15-2
Execution stop command 15-3
Execution time 4-14, 4-15
Expansion modules 1-27, C-14, D-7, Gl-6
Explosion protection F-1
External current transformer 13-22
External earth fault 15-3
External earth fault monitoring 1-10, 5-2
with summation current transformer
5-4
External fault 1-14, 10-2, 10-9, 10-10,
15-3
External fault response 10-10
External fault settings 10-10
F
Fault - Antivalence 15-3
Fault - Bus 15-3
Fault - End position 15-3
Fault - PLC/DCS 10-17, 15-3
Fault - Power failure UVO 10-15
Fault - Temporary components 15-3
Fault - Test position feedback (TPF) 10-8
Feedback (F) OFF 15-3
Feedback (F) ON 15-4
Feedback faults 1-16
Feedback ON 4-13, 4-14, 4-38
Feedback time 4-14, 4-15
Fixing lugs for screw attachments 13-2
Flashing 1-15, 11-2, 11-19
Flashing logic modules 11-19
Flashing settings 11-19
Flickering 1-15, 11-2, 11-20
Flickering logic modules 11-20
Flickering settings 11-20
Frequencies D-2
Function block Gl-6
Function test F-7
G
General representation of the input
types 7-2
GSD 9-2, 12-2
GSD file 1-32, 12-16
Guarantee F-9
H
Hardware faults 15-4
Hardware test 10-5, F-7, F-8
Heating up motor model 1-16, 3-7
Hysteresis
for the current limits I> 5-6
for the current limits I< 5-7
for voltage, power factor (cos phi),
power 5-9
for 0/4-20 mA signal 5-16
for monitoring functions 5-23
I
Identification-related diagnostics 12-10
Independent operation 1-3, Gl-6
Information and standards F-2
Input characteristic curve D-4
Inputs 7-1, 7-3
Inputs (binary) D-4, D-7
Installation guidelines
for the PROFIBUS DP 13-32
Installation location D-2
Integration of SIMOCODE pro
as DPV1 Slave via GSD in the configura-
tion software 12-16
as S7 slave via
OM SIMOCODE pro 12-18
as SIMATIC PDM objekt (DPV1 slave via
GSD) in STEP-7-HW Config 12-17
in SIMATIC S7 with
OM SIMOCODE ES 12-20
Interfaces 13-1
Interlocking time 4-13, 4-14, 4-19, 5-20
Internal comments 1-16
Internal earth fault 15-4
Internal earth fault monitoring 1-10, 5-3
K
Key-operated switch operation 4-5
L
Lamp controls 4-11, 4-57
Lamp test 10-5, F-7, F-8
Legend strip 1-22, 1-23
Light-emitting diodes of the operator
panel 6-1
Limit monitor 1-15, 11-2, 11-21 to 11-23
Limit monitor logic modules 11-21
Limit temperature 3-12
List of abbreviations 1-1
Load type 4-13
Local 4-5, 4-6
Local control 4-9
Local control station 2-2, 2-3, 2-9, 4-2, 7-8
Locking the contactor 4-13
Logic module 1-15, 11-1, 11-2, 11-15,
Gl-6
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Index-5
Index
M
Main circuit D-5
Maintenance F-10
Making internal assignments 4-52, 4-55
Manual operation 4-5
Manufacturer's identification 12-9
Master Gl-6
Master PROFIBUS address 12-9
Measurement frequency D-5
Memory module 1-19, 1-22, 1-30, 13-25,
13-29, Gl-7
Memory module "park position" 1-23
Mode selectors 4-5, 4-6, 4-9
Modes of operation 4-1, 4-5, 4-6
Module fault 15-4
Monitoring 1-8, 1-10
Monitoring additional process variables via
the analog module 1-12
Monitoring current limits Gl-7, 5-6, 5-7
Monitoring earth faults Gl-7
Monitoring for further availability 1-11
Monitoring for undervoltage 1-11
Monitoring functions 5-1, Gl-7
Monitoring of 0/4 A - 20 mA 5-1, Gl-8
Monitoring of the motor current 5-5
Monitoring PLC/DCS 1-14, 10-2
Monitoring temperature 1-18
Monitoring the number of starts 5-19,
Gl-7
Monitoring the power factor 5-10, 11-23
Monitoring the voltage 5-8, Gl-8
Motor control 4-1
Motor control functions 1-20
Motor feeder 1-4, 1-5, 2-3
Motor model 10-16
Motor operating hours 1-16
Motor protection 3-1, Gl-8
Motor protection functions 3-2
Motor stop times 1-16
Motor switching state 1-16
Motor temperature 1-10
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
4-12
Mounting 13-1, 13-3, D-3, D-5, D-7 to
D-9, D-11
Mounting and wiring 13-2
Mounting lugs 13-2 to 13-5
Mounting
the basic units and expansion
modules 13-3
Mounting
the current measuring modules
13-4
the current/voltage measuring
modules 13-5
N
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES 11-1, 12-1
Network contactor 4-27
No start permissible 15-4
Non-maintained command mode 4-13
Non-volatile element 11-2, 1-15 to 11-18
Non-volatile elements logic modules
11-16
Non-volatile elements settings 11-18
NOR function 11-15, 11-18
Notes on parameterizing 14-2
Number of motor starts 1-16, 5-19
Number of overload trippings 1-16
Number of permissible starts 1-16
Number of starts overshooting limit 5-18
Number of starts pre-warning 5-18
Number of start-ups 1-12
O
Object Manager (OM) SIMOCODE DP 9-2
Object Manager (OM) SIMOCODE pro
1-19, 1-31, 12-2
OFF command-reset 10-10
Operator panel 4-9
OP - buttons function block 7-7
Operating data 1-16
Operating hours 1-12, 5-17
Operating hours monitoring 5-18, Gl-8
Operating panel buttons 7-7
Operating range D-3
Operating, service and diagnostic data
1-16
Operation as DPV1 slave downstream
from the Y link 1-14
Operation hours monitoring 5-1
Operation monitoring 5-17, Gl-8
Operational Protection OFF (OPO) 1-14,
10-2, 10-11, 10-12, 15-4, Gl-8
Operator enable 4-8
Operator Panel (OP) 1-17, 1-22, 13-6,
C-13, D-11, Gl-8
Operator panel buttons 7-1, 7-3, 7-6
Operator panel LEDs 6-3, 6-6
Output of the effective motor current
6-11, 6-12
Output response of the timer 11-11
Outputs 6-1
Overload 3-6, 15-5
Overload and Unbalance 15-5
Overload protection 1-10, 3-1 to 3-4,
3-11, Gl-9
Overload relay 1-8, 1-13, 1-20, 4-12, 4-16,
B-40, E-3, E-5
Overshooting the limit value 11-21
Overtemperature 5-22
Overview of system components 1-17
SIMOCODE pro
Index-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 01
Index
P
Panel reset 10-10
Parameter 4-13
Parameter blocking during start-up
active 15-5
Parameter is faulty ("Gen. fault"
category) 15-5
Parameterization software 1-31
Parameterization start-up 12-15
Parameterization via PROFIBUS 12-22
Parameterization with
SIMOCODE ES 12-6
Pause time 3-7, 4-14, Gl-9
PC cable 1-19, 1-30, 13-25, 13-29, Gl-9
PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro 1-31
Permissible ambient temperature D-2
Permissible number of starts
exceeded 15-6
Permissible starts 5-19
Phase unbalance 1-10, 1-16, 3-10, 15-6
Phase cycle 1-16, 1-25, Gl-4
Phase failure 1-8, 1-10
Phase sequence identification 1-12
Pin assignment of the removable
terminals 13-9, 13-11, 13-13, 13-15,
13-17, 13-21
Pin cross section 13-19, 13-20
Plant downtimes 5-17
PLC/DCS 4-5, 4-9
PLC/DCS monitoring 10-17, 10-18
Plugs (analog) 1-33
Plugs (binary) 1-33
Pole-changing switch 4-12, 4-39, B-48,
E-21, E-23
with reversal of the direction of
rotation 4-12, 4-43, 4-44, B-49, E-24 to
E-26
Positioner 1-8, 1-13, 4-12, 4-51, 10-11,
10-12, B-51, E-30 to E-39
Power considerations 1-8
Power consumption D-3
Power factor 1-16
Power factor (cos phi) monitoring
1-11, 5-1, 5-10, Gl-9
Power failure monitoring 1-14, 10-2,
10-14, 10-15, 15-6
Power failure stored-energy time D-4
Power management 1-8
Power-up time 3-4
Prerequisites for commissioning and
servicing 14-2
Preventive maintenance 14-6
Pre-warning 3-9
Pre-warning - overload (I >115%) 15-6
Procedure for connecting PROFIBUS DP
to the basic unit 13-31
Procedure for joining connecting cables to
the system interface 13-28, 13-29
Process alarm 12-6, 12-14
Process and diagnostic alarm 12-15
Process monitoring 1-10
PROFIBUS DP 1-14, 1-19, 1-31, 2-2, 4-4,
4-52, 4-54, 6-2, 6-3, 6-5, 6-14, 6-16, 7-15,
10-6, 12-2, Gl-9
PROFIBUS DP interface 1-14, D-3, Gl-9
PROFIBUS DP on
a 9-pole SUB D socket 13-31
PROFIBUS DPV1 6-16, 7-15, 12-2, Gl-10
PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) instal-
lation guidelines 13-32, Gl-10
Programmable logical controller (PLC)
Gl-10
Programming Device (PD) Gl-10
Protecting functions 1-10
PTC 3-12
Pump 1-6, 1-10
Push-through opening 13-19, 13-20, D-5
Push-through system 1-17, 13-19, 13-20
R
Rail connection D-6
Rail connection system 13-19, 13-20
Rated control voltage D-3
Rated insulation voltage D-3, D-5, D-7
Rated motor current F-3
Rated operational voltage D-5
Rated surge voltage strength D-3, D-5,
D-7
Reading data 12-3
Reading out statistical data 14-6
Real power 1-16
Relay outputs 6-1, D-4, D-7
Relay test 10-5, F-7, F-8
Remote operation 4-5
Remote reset 10-10
Remote/automatic 4-5, 4-6
Removable terminals 13-2, 13-7, 14-10
Repairs F-10
Replacing a basic unit 14-9
Replacing an expansion unit 14-9
Replacing the current measuring module
and the current/voltage measuring
module 14-10
Required function is not supported 15-6
Reset 1-14, 3-9, 10-2
Reset function 10-3, 10-4
Reset parameter 3-9
Reset settings 10-6
Resistive load 4-13
Responses x, 3-3
Restart delay 10-14
Restart delay (staggered) 10-15
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Index-7
Index
Restart temperature F-5
Reversing starter 1-8, 1-13, 2-1, 2-2, 2-9,
4-12, 4-21, B-42, E-8, E-9
S
S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro 12-15
Safe isolation according to
IEC 60947-1 D-2
Safety and commissioning information for
EEx areas F-1
Safety instructions F-9
Save switching command 4-13
Saving parameters
from a SIMOCODE ES file into a basic
unit 14-8
from the basic unit into a SIMOCODE ES
file 14-7
from the basic unit into the memory
module 14-7
from the memory module into the basic
unit 14-7
Screw attachment 13-2 to 13-5
Screw terminals 1-33
Sensor circuit D-9
Sensor circuit error 3-13
Sensor error 3-13
Sensor measuring circuits 1-11
Sensor types 1-29
Service data 1-16
Service pack 1 1-31
Servicing 14-1
Set current D-5
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
via SIMOCODE ES 2-11, 14-4
via the addressing plug 2-11, 14-4
Setting the rated current of the motor F-3
Setting up F-3
Setting up in potentially explosive
areas F-9
Shock resistance (sine pulse) D-2
Short circuit D-5
Short-circuit protection
according to IEC 60947-4-1 for type of
coordination 2 F-6
Short-circuit protection
for auxiliary contacts (relay outputs)
D-4
Signal conditioner 1-15, 11-2, 11-13,
11-14
Signal conditioner logic modules 11-13
Signal conditioner settings 11-15
Signal types/output responses of non-vola-
tile elements 11-17
Signaling data on the PROFIBUS DP 6-1
Signaling data to PROFIBUS DP 1-33
SIMATIC Gl-10, Gl-11
SIMATIC PDM 4-4, 12-2, Gl-10
SIMATIC PDM (PCS7) 12-2
SIMATIC powercontrol 12-2
SIMATIC S7 1-32, 12-16
SIMOCODE ES 1-31, 2-11, 4-1, 6-1, 7-1,
8-1, 9-1, 10-1, 10-10, 11-1, 12-1, 14-2,
14-7, B-35, Gl-10
SIMOCODE ES Graphic 1-19, 1-31
SIMOCODE ES parameter files 1-32
SIMOCODE ES Professional 1-19, 1-31,
4-4, 12-2, 12-22
SIMOCODE ES Smart 1-19, 1-31
SIMOCODE ES Smart 2004 +
Service Pack 1 1-31
SIMOCODE ES software 2-2
SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD
12-19
SIMOCODE pro Object Manager
(OM) Gl-10
SIMOCODE pro parameterization 1-30
SIMOCODE pro PCS-7 library Gl-11
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave 12-3, Gl-11
Slave Gl-11
Slave diagnostics 12-9
Slave modes of operation 12-15
Slide control 1-20, 4-50
Slider control function 4-49
Smooth running down time 4-56
Snap-on mounting 13-3
Socket assignment table - analog A-12
Socket assignment table - digital A-5
Sockets (analog) 1-33
Sockets (binary) 1-33
Soft starter 1-8, 1-13, 4-12, 4-53, B-52,
E-40 to E-42
Soft starter control 1-20
Soft starter control function 4-53
Soft starter with reversing contactor
4-12, 4-54 to 4-56, B-53, E-44 to E-46
Software 1-19, 1-31
Software tools 1-31
Solenoid valve 4-12
Specifications A-4, B-3
Stall limit 3-11
Stall protection 1-10, 3-2, 3-3, 3-11
Standard diagnostics 12-6, 12-15
Standard function 1-14, 10-1,10-2, Gl-11
Standard motor feeders 1-8
Standard mounting rail mounting 13-4,
13-5
Standards F-2
Star contactor 4-27
Star-delta connection 4-28
Star-delta reversing starter 4-12
Star-delta starter 1-8, 1-13, 1-20, 4-12,
B-44, E-12, E-13
SIMOCODE pro
Index-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 01
Index
Star-delta starter with reversal of the
direction of rotation 4-29, 4-30, B-45,
E-14, E-15
Station Gl-11
Station status 12-8
Station status 1 12-8
Station status 2 12-9
Station status 3 12-9
Statistical data 14-6, Gl-11
Status - cooling down time active 15-6
Status - emergency start executed 15-6
Status - Test Position Feedback (TPF)
15-6
Status messages 12-6, 12-11, 12-15, A-2
Status signal 4-11, 4-57
States of the status LEDs/contactor con-
trols during the test 10-5, F-8
STEP 7 12-16 to 12-18, Gl-11
Stop time 1-12, 5-17
Stop time > 15-6
Stop time monitoring 5-18, Gl-11
Strip lengths 13-7, 13-21
Summation current transformer 1-2, 1-18
Supplying the inputs
of the basic unit 13-8
of the digital module 13-11
Switch off time 3-4
Switching from star to delta 4-24, 4-27,
4-30
Switching interval 4-13, 4-25, 4-38
Switching the direction of rotation 4-19,
4-27, 4-34, 4-41, 4-54
Switching the direction of travel 4-48
Switching the speed 4-31, 4-34, 4-38,
4-41
System description 1-1
System interface 1-17, 13-28, D-5
System interface cover 1-19, 1-30,
13-27, 13-29, Gl-12
System interfaces 13-29, D-3, D-7 to D-9,
D-11
System interfaces
on basic units, expansion modules, cur-
rent measuring modules and
current/voltage measuring
modules 13-27
System interfaces on the operator
panel 13-29
T
Tables A-1
Target groups 4-1
Technical data D-1
Telegram description 12-5
Temperature in the sensor measuring
circuits 1, 2 and 3 1-16
Temperature module 1-2, 1-11, 1-18,
1-27, 1-29, 15-7, D-9, Gl-12
Temperature module - warning level
overshot 15-7
Temperature module inputs 7-1, 7-3,
7-10, 7-11
Temperature module out of range 15-7
Temperature module pin assignment
13-15
Temperature monitoring 1-11, Gl-12
Temperature monitoring system 1-29
Temperature sensors 1-2, 5-21
Test 1-14, 10-2, 10-5, F-7
Test function 10-3, 10-4
Test function block 10-3
Test phases 10-5, F-8
Test position 10-7
Test position feedback (TPF) 1-14, 10-2,
10-7, 10-8, 15-7, Gl-12
Test shutdown 15-7
TEST/RESET button 10-10, D-3
Thermal motor model 10-4
Thermistor motor protection 1-8, D-4
Thermistor open circuit 15-7
Thermistor protection 1-10, 3-1, 3-2,
Gl-12
Thermistor sensors 1-10
Thermistor short circuit 15-7
Thermistor trip level 15-7
Thermistors 3-12
Tightening torques 13-7, 13-21, D-7 to
D-10
Time frame of the start process 5-19
Time synchronization 1-14, 12-24
Time to trip 1-16
Timer 11-2, 11-10
Timer logic modules 11-10
Timer settings 11-12
Timers 1-15
Timestamp function block 10-20
Timestamping 1-14, 10-2, 10-19, 10-20
Timestamping in the fault memory 10-19
TM - inputs function block 7-10
Torque 4-50
Transferring the parameters to the basic
device 2-9
Transformation ratio 13-22
Transmitting data 12-4
Tripping characteristic curve F3
Tripping class 3-4, 3-5, F-3, Gl-12
Tripping current 1-16
Tripping temperature F-5
Tripping time 3-5
Truth table for 2I/1O logic modules 11-6
Truth table for 3I/1O logic modules 11-3
Truth table for 5I/2O logic modules 11-7
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Index-9
Index
Truth tables 1-15, 11-2, 11-4, 11-5
Type of current D-5
Type of load 3-8
Types of signals/output responses
11-14, 11-17
U
Unbalance 1-8
Unbalance limit 3-10
Unbalance protection 3-1 to 3-3, 3-10,
Gl-12
Undershooting the limit value 11-21
UVO fault 10-14
V
Valve 4-46, B-50, E-27, E-29
Valve control 1-20
Valve control function 4-46
Valves 1-8, 1-13
Variants for slide control 4-50
Versions of digital modules 1-27
Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 1-16
Voltage measuring 1-8
Voltage monitoring 1-8, 1-11, 5-1, 5-8,
Gl-12
W
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA 15-8
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA> overshot
15-8
Warning level cos phi 15-7
Warning level I 15-7
Warning level I> overshot 15-7
Warning level P 15-7
Warning level P> overshot 15-7
Warning level U 15-7
Warnings 1-14
Watchdog 1-14, 10-2, 10-17
Watchdog settings 10-17
Win SIMOCODE DP converter 1-32, 9-1,
Gl-12
Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files 1-32
Wiring 13-1, 13-7
Wiring of the sensor circuit F-6
Wiring
the basic units and expansion
modules 13-7
the current measuring modules
13-19
the current/voltage measuring
modules 13-20
the removable terminals 13-9, 13-18,
13-31
Writing data 12-3
Writing/reading data records B-2
Wrong password 15-8
SIMOCODE pro
Index-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 01
Index
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Abbreviations-1
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
Acycl. Acyclic
AM Analog module
AS Alarm switch
AS Auxiliary switch
AWG American Wire Gauge
BU Basic unit
CF Control function
Cycl. Cyclic
DCS Process control system
DM Digital module
DP Decentralized periphery
EM Earth-fault module
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
F Feedback
FC Feedback CLOSE
FMS Fieldbus message specification
FO Feedback OPEN
GSD Device data
IM Current measuring module
LC Local control
NTC Negative temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
OM Object manager
OP Operator panel
OPO Operational protection OFF
PCS Process control system
PDM Process device manager
PG Programming device
PLC Programmable logical controller
PTC Positive temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
TC Torque switch CLOSE
Th Thermistor
TM Temperature module
TO Torque switch OPEN
TPF Test position feedback
UM Current/voltage measuring module
List of Abbreviations
SIMOCODE pro
Abbreviations-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Glossary-1
Glossary
Active power monitoring
SIMOCODE pro offers the option of two-phase active power
monitoring in which not only the current, but also the power
factor (cos phi) is taken into account.
Addressing plug
The addressing plug is necessary to enable the "hardware-
related" allocation of the PROFIBUS DP address to a basic
unit without a PC/programming device.
Analog module (AM)
The analog module offers the option of expanding BU 2 with
optional analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA - 20 mA). This
makes it possible to measure and monitor any arbitrary
process variables which can be mapped on a 0/4 mA - 20 mA
signal. In this case, the automation system has free access to
the measured process variables.
Baud rate
The baud rate is the speed with which data is transmitted and
indicates the number of transmitted bits per second (baud
rate = bit rate).
With PROFIBUS DP, baud rates from 9.6 kBaud to 12 MBaud
are possible.
Basic factory default settings
The basic factory default settings are used to reset all
parameters of a switching device to the default settings to
which they were set at the factory.
The basic factory default settings can be configured via the
"TEST/RESET" button on the basic device or via the
SIMOCODE ES software.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Basic unit (BU)
The basic units are the fundamental components of the
SIMOCODE pro system. Basic units are always required
when using SIMOCODE pro. They have the same enclosure
width of 45 mm and are equipped with removable terminals.
Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the
SIMOCODE pro C device series. It contains the important
motor control functions and motor protection functions.
Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all functions and
fulfils all requirements for motor protection, motor control,
diagnostics and monitoring.
Blocking protection
After the motor current overshoots an adjustable blocking
limit (current limit), a definable and delayable response can
be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro. For example, the motor
can be set to switch off quickly independently of the overload
protection. The blocking protection is only active after the
parameterized class interval has elapsed, e.g. for Class 10
after 10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal
and mechanical loads as well as premature deterioration of
the motor.
Bus
A common transmission path with which all stations are
connected. It has two defined ends. With PROFIBUS, the bus
is a two-wire line (copper conductor) or a fiber optic cable.
Bus segment
The PROFIBUS DP consists of at least one bus segment.
A bus segment has at least two stations, one of which must
be a DP master. A maximum of 32 stations can be connected
to a bus segment.
Class
The class (tripping class) indicates the maximum tripping
time in which SIMOCODE must trip cold at the 7.2-fold set
current Ie (motor protection according to IEC 60947). If e.g.
Class 10 was set for SIMOCODE pro, it is guaranteed that the
(cold) motor will be switched off at a 7.2-fold set current after
10 seconds. The tripping class can be set to 8 different
settings ranging from Class 5 to Class 40.
Class 1 master
Active stations on PROFIBUS DP. The cyclic data exchange
with other stations is characteristic for this type of master.
Typical class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a
PROFIBUS DP connection.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Glossary-3
Class 2 master
Optional stations on PROFIBUS DP.
Typical class 2 masters are, for example,
• PC/programming devices with the
"SIMOCODE ES professional" software
• PDM (PCS7)
• PC with "SIMATIC powercontrol" software (power manage-
ment).
Connecting cable
Connecting cables are necessary for connecting the
individual basic units with their current measuring modules
and, if required, with their expansion modules or operator
panels. They are available in various versions and lengths
(ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.5 m; round cable 2.0 m).
The total length of all connecting cables must not exceed 3 m
per system!
Control functions
Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are
used for controlling load feeders. They have the following
important features:
• Monitoring the switch-on/switch-off process (no current
flows in the main circuit without the ON command)
• Monitoring the OFF state (no current flows in the main
circuit without the ON command)
• Monitoring the ON status
• Switching off in case of a fault.
Control stations
Control stations are places from which control commands are
issued to the motor. The "Control stations" function block is
used for administration, switching and priorization of these
different control stations. With this, SIMOCODE pro allows
the parallel administration of up to four different control
stations. Dependent on the control function, up to 5 different
control commands can be transmitted from every control
station to SIMOCODE pro.
• Local control, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control
commands are issued via pushbutton.
• PLC/DCS, switching commands are issued by the
automation system (remote).
• PC, control commands are issued via an operator control
station or via PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES
software.
• Operator panel, control commands are issued via the
buttons of the operator panel in the switchgear cabinet
door.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Cooling down time
The cooling down time is the specified time after which an
overload tripping can be reset. It is usually five minutes.
Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time
extend the specified time correspondingly.
Current Measuring module (IM)
Current measuring modules are used together with the basic
units of the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device
series.
The current measuring module must be selected according to
the set current to be monitored (rated operating current of
the motor). The current measuring modules cover current
ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with interposing
transformers up to 820 A.
Current/voltage measuring module
The SIMOCODE pro V device series offers the option of
using a current/voltage measuring module instead of a
current measuring module.
As well as measuring the motor current, current/voltage
measuring modules also
• monitor voltages up to 690 V
• evaluate and monitor power and the power factor (cos phi)
• Monitoring of the phase cycle.
Device data (GSD file)
The device data (GSD) contains a description of the
respective switching device. It is used for integrating the
switching device into SIMATIC S7 or into any DP standard
master system (automation system).
Digital module (DM)
Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the
types and number of binary inputs and outputs on basic
unit 2, if required.
A maximum of two digital modules can be connected to basic
unit 2. All versions can be combined with each other.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of
12 binary inputs and 7 binary outputs.
Door adapter
The door adaptor is necessary for making the system
interface of a basic unit available at an easily accessible
location (e.g. front panel), thus enabling fast
parameterization.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Glossary-5
DP master
A master which works with the DP protocol according to the
EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Cyclic signaling data is exchanged once in every DP cycle
between the DP master and the DP slave. In this case, the
DP master sends the cyclic control data to SIMOCODE pro.
In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic signaling data
to the DP master.
DP slave/DP standard slave
A slave which is operated on the PROFIBUS bus with the
PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the
EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Earth-fault module (EM)
The earth-fault module offers the option of implementing
powerful external earth-fault monitoring in connection with
the 3UL22 summation current transformer (making it
possible to evaluate rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A and
1 A). In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring function
which is supported by both device series, SIMOCODE pro V
can be expanded by an additional and more precise external
earth-fault monitoring system.
Earth-fault monitoring
The basic units have
• internal earth-fault monitoring:
For motors with a 3-wire connection, the basic unit
evaluates a possible fault current/earth-fault current from
the total current. Internal earth-fault monitoring is only
possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks
which are either grounded directly or grounded with low
impedance.
• external earth-fault monitoring with SIMOCODE pro V:
the earth-fault module (EM) evaluates rated fault currents
using an externally connected summation current
transformer (e.g 3UL22).
Emergency start
The emergency start deletes the thermal memory from
SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This enables the
motor to restart immediately after an overload tripping. This
function can be used to:
• enable an immediate restart/reset after an overload switch-
off
• influence the operation of the thermal memory (motor
model), if required.
Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, it is not possible
for this function to continuously affect the thermal motor
model.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Expansion modules
Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion
modules are available:
• Digital module (DM)
• Analog module (AM)
• Earth-fault module (EM)
• Temperature module (TM).
All expansion modules have the same design with an
enclosure width of 22.5 mm. They are equipped with
2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and removable
terminals.
Function block
Predefined function blocks for control functions, logic
functions and standard functions.
The digital plugs and sockets have not already been
connected at the factory with the binary inputs and the relay
outputs of the basic unit. The internal wiring (connecting the
plugs and sockets) is determined by the user according to
his/her respective application.
Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor
feeder independently of the automation system. Even if the
automation system (PLC) fails or if communication is
disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully protected and
controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being
connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can also be easily
connected at a later period in time, if required.
Logic module
Logical functions, time relay functions and counter functions
are implemented with logic modules.
Master
PROFIBUS DP is based on master-slave architecture.
Telegrams are sent from the master to the actuated station
(slave) and are answered by it in return.
Memory module
The memory module is plugged into the system interface and
is used for fast reading in or out of the entire SIMOCODE pro
parameterization, e.g. in the case of a unit replacement.
Monitoring current limits
Monitoring of current limits is used for process monitoring.
Impending irregularities in the system can be detected in
good time: Exceeding a current limit which is still below the
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Glossary-7
overload limit can e.g. be an indiction that there is a dirty filter
on a pump or that a motor bearing is running more and more
sluggishly. Falling below a current limit can be the first hint
that a drive motor belt is worn out.
Monitoring earth faults
The basic units have
• internal earth-fault monitoring:
via current measuring modules or current/voltage
measuring modules is only possible for motors with a 3-
phase connection in networks which are either grounded
directly or grounded with low impedance
• external earth-fault monitoring:
via a summation current transformer and earth-fault
module is normally used for networks which are grounded
with high impedance.
Monitoring functions
The monitoring functions
• Earth-fault monitoring
• Current limit monitoring
• Voltage monitoring
• Power factor (cos phi) monitoring
• Active power monitoring
• 0/4 A - 20 mA signal monitoring
• Operation monitoring
• Analog temperature monitoring
function - similar to motor protection and motor control - "in
the background". They can be active or not depending on the
chosen control function.
Monitoring the number of starts
The function for monitoring the number of starts is used to
protect system parts (motor, switching devices such as e.g.
soft starters and converters) from too many impermissible
start processes within a parameterizable time frame and thus
to prevent damage from occurring. This is especially useful
for commissioning or manual control.
Monitoring the voltage
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of a three-
phase network or a one-phase network for undervoltage for
voltage limits which can be freely chosen. The response of
SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be
freely parameterized and delayed.
Voltage measuring is carried out using current/voltage
measuring modules.
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
Monitoring the 0/4 A - 20 mA signal
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog
signals of a measurement transformer (standard 0/4 - 20 mA
output signal). The analog signals are fed to the "0/4 - 20 mA"
function block via the analog module.
Motor protection
The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-
dependent motor protection:
• Overload protection
• Unbalance protection
• Blocking protection
• Thermistor protection.
Operator panel (OP)
The operator panel is often integrated into the front panels of
motor control centers. It can be used with both the
SIMOCODE pro C device series as well as with the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all the status
LEDs which are on the basic units, the "TEST/RESET" button
and makes the system interface externally available.
Operating hours monitoring
The operating hours monitoring function offers the option of
recording the operating hours (service life) of a motor, and
generating maintenance prompts for the motor in good time
if required.
Operation monitoring
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop
times of a motor and restrict the number of motor start-ups
in a defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due
to failed motors because they were either running too long or
they were stopped for too long a period of time.
Operational protection OFF (OPO)
The "Operational protection OFF (OPO)" function block puts
the positioner into the safe mode and switches the motor off.
Overload protection
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors in
compliance with IEC 60947-4-1. The tripping class can be set
to 8 different settings ranging from Class 5 to Class 40.
Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response
of the motor when switched off under normal operating
conditions (not in the case of overload tripping!). After this
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Glossary-9
interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted
and a new cold start is possible. This makes frequent start-
ups within a short period of time possible.
PC cable
A PC is connected via its serial interface to the system
interface of a basic unit with the PC cable for device
parameterization.
Power factor (cos phi) monitoring
Power factor monitoring monitors the load state of inductive
loads. The main field of application is for asynchronous
motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks, whose loads vary
greatly. The measuring principle for the power factor (cos phi)
is based on the evaluation of the phase displacement
between voltage and current in one phase.
PROFIBUS
Process fieldbus, European process and fieldbus standard as
defined in the PROFIBUS standard (EN 50 170, Volume 2,
PROFIBUS).
It lays down the functional, electrical and mechanical
properties for a serial bit fieldbus system.
PROFIBUS is a bus system that networks PROFIBUS-
compatible automation systems and field devices at the
cubicle and field level. PROFIBUS is available with the DP
protocols (decentralized periphery), FMS (fieldbus message
specification), PA (process automatization) or TF (techno-
logical functions).
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol (decentralized
periphery).
The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange
between the central DP devices and the periphery devices.
PROFIBUS DP interface
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface
(SUB-D socket or terminal connection on the basic units).
PROFIBUS DPV1
Expansion of the DP protocol.
This enables acyclic data exchange of parameter, diagnostic,
control and test data.
PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) installation guidelines
For PROFIBUS networks, the PROFIBUS DP/FMS
installation guidelines from the PROFIBUS user organization
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
must be adhered to. They contain important information
about the cable arrangement and commissioning of
PROFIBUS networks.
Programmable logical controller (PLC)
Control whose function is stored as a program in the control
unit. The PLC consists of CPU, memory, input/output
modules and an internal bus system. The periphery and the
programming language are based on the needs of the control
engineering.
Programming device (PD)
A programming device is normally a PC which is industry-
compatible, compact and transportable. It is characterized by
a special hardware and software configuration for SIMATIC
programmable logical controllers.
SIMATIC
Term for industrial automation products and systems from
Siemens AG.
SIMATIC PDM
You can also configure SIMOCODE pro via the SIMATIC PDM
(process device manager).
The following options are available:
• SIMATIC PDM as a stand-alone program
• PDM, integrated into STEP7.
SIMOCODE ES
Standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro,
which is runnable on a PC/programming device under
Windows 2000 or Windows XP.
SIMOCODE pro Object Manager OM
Part of SIMOCODE ES Professional. When SIMOCODE ES
Professional and the SIMOCODE pro object manager are
installed on a PC/programming device, SIMOCODE ES
Professional can be called directly from the Step7 HW
configuration. This enables simple and thorough SIMATIC-S7
configuration.
SIMOCODE pro PCS-7 library
The SIMOCODE pro PCS-7 library is used to connect
SIMOCODE pro to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control
system. It contains
• the corresponding diagnostic and driver blocks with the
respective diagnostic and driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7
• the elements necessary for operator control and process
monitoring (symbols and faceplate).
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 Glossary-11
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave
The SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a special slave and has the
following characteristics:
• it supports the S7 model (diagnostic alarms, process
alarms)
• it is parameterizable.
Slave
PROFIBUS DP is based on master-slave architecture.
Telegrams are sent from the master to the actuated station
(slave) and are answered by it in return
Standard function
Standard functions are typical motor functions which can be
activated according to need and set individually for each
motor feeder.
They are already available, work independently of the
selected control function and can be used/activated as
optional supplements.
Station
Device which can send, receive or amplify data via the bus,
e.g. master, slave.
Statistical data
SIMOCODE pro makes statistical data available which e.g.
can be read out with SIMOCODE ES under "Target system >
Service data/statistical data".
STEP 7
Engineering system. Contains programming languages to
create user programs for SIMATIC-S7 controls.
Stop time monitoring
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the stop times of a motor in
order to avoid plant down times due to failed motors because
they were either running too long (wear out) or they were
stopped for too long a period of time.
System interface cover IP54
Cover to protect the system interface on the door adaptor or
on the operator panel from soiling or to seal it.
Temperature module (TM)
The temperature module offers the option of expanding the
SIMOCODE pro V device series by an analog temperature
monitoring system. With this, up to 3 analog sensor
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
measuring circuits (two-wire or three-wire system) can be
connected. The temperatures recorded can be fully
integrated into the process, can be monitored and are also
available for a higher-level automation system. You can, for
example, implement analog temperature monitoring of the
motor windings, the bearings or the coolant or gear box
temperature. SIMOCODE pro V supports various sensor
types (NTC, KTY83/84, PT100 and PT1000) for use with hard,
fluid or gaseous media.
Temperature monitoring
See temperature module (TM).
Test position feedback (TPF)
If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is
isolated from the network. However, the control voltage is
connected.
The "Cold starting" function test is carried out in this status.
Cold starting is defined as the testing of the motor feeder
without a current in the main circuit.
Thermistor protection
The basic units (BU1 and BU2) also make it possible to
connect thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the
motor temperature.
Tripping class
See "Class".
Unbalance protection
The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and
transmitted to the control system. A definable and delayable
response can be tripped when an adjustable limit is overshot.
If the phase unbalance is greater than 50%, a reduction in the
tripping time according to the overload characteristic curve
takes place automatically since the heat development in
motors increases under asymmetrical conditions.
Voltage monitoring
SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of voltage monitoring.
A three-phase current network or a one-phase network can
be monitored for undervoltage, direction of rotation (for
three-phase current) or availability.
Win SIMOCODE DP converter
Software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP
parameter files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES
parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01
To
SIEMENS AG
A&D CD MM3
92220 Amberg, Germany
Fax: ++49 9621/ 80-3337
SIMOCODE pro Manual
Did you notice an error while reading this manual?
If so, please let us know using this form.
We are grateful for your comments and suggestions.
Sender (please complete)
Name
Comany / department
Address
Telephone
Fax:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation and Drives
Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg
www. s i e me n s . com / s i m o c o d e
Order-No. 3UF7970-0AA00-0

Safety Guidelines Table of Contents Important Notes System Description Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A B C D E F

SIMOCODE pro

Motor Protection Motor Control Monitoring Functions Outputs Inputs

System Manual

Analog Value Recording 3UF50 Compatibility Mode Standard Functions Logic Modules Communication Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces Commissioning and Servicing Alarm, Faults and System Messages Tables Data Formats and Data Records Dimension Drawings Technical Data Example Circuits Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas Index List of Abbreviations Glossary

Order Number: 3UF7970-0AA00-0

To

Edition 03/2006
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. Danger indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Notice indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account. If more that one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.

Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Prescribed Usage
Note the following: Warning This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG Automation and Drives Postfach 4848 D-90327 Nürnberg GERMANY

Order No.: 3UF7970-0AA00-0 Edition 03/2006

Copyright © Siemens AG Technical data subject to change

Table Of Contents
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6 1.5.7 1.6 1.7 1.7.1 1.7.2 1.7.3 1.7.4 1.7.5 1.7.6 1.7.7 1.8 1.8.1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simplify Configuration with SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check List for Selecting the Device Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protecting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Signal Processing with Freely Programmable Logic Modules. Operating, Service and Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the System Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Units (BU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Panel (OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Measuring Modules (IM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current/Voltage Measuring Modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion Modules for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Configuration of SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix 1-1 1-2 1-4 1-6 1-8 1-10 1-10 1-10 1-13 1-14 1-14 1-15 1-16 1-17 1-20 1-20 1-22 1-24 1-25 1-27 1-30 1-31 1-33 1-33 2-1

Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction and Target of the Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reversing Starter with Motor Feeder and Local Control Station . . . . Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extending the Reversing Starter with a Control Station via PROFIBUS .. .. .. DP

. 2-2 . 2-3 . 2-6 . 2-10 3-1

Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . Overload Protection . . Unbalance Protection . Stall Protection . . . . . Thermistor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

. 3-2 . 3-4 . 3-10 . 3-11 . 3-12 4-1 4-2 4-2 4-5 4-7

Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modes of Operation and Mode Selectors Enables and Enabled Control Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

i

Table Of Contents

4.1.4 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9 4.2.10 4.2.11 4.2.12 4.2.13 4.2.14 4.2.15 4.2.16 4.3

Control Station Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Settings and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Overload Relay" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Direct Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Reversing Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "MCCB Circuit Breaker" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Star-delta Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Star-delta Starter with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Dahlander" Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Dahlander with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control Function . "Pole-changing Switch" Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Pole-changing Switch with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Valve" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Positioner" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Soft Starter" Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls and Status Signal for the Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-9 4-10 4-10 4-13 4-16 4-17 4-19 4-22 4-24 4-27 4-31 4-34 4-38 4-41 4-45 4-47 4-52 4-54

. 4-57 5-1 5-2 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-10 5-12 5-14 5-17 5-17 5-18 5-18 5-19 5-21 5-23 6-1

5 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.8 5.9 6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5

Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Earth Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Earth fault Monitoring (with Summation Current Current Limits Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I> (Upper Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I< (Lower Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Factor (cos phi) Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Power Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0/4 A-20 mA Signal Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Hours Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring the Number of Starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Temperature Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hysteresis for Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Transformer) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . Basic Unit Outputs. . . . Operator Panel LEDs . . Digital Module Outputs. Analog Module Outputs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

. 6-2 . 6-4 . 6-6 . 6-8 . 6-10

SIMOCODE pro

ii

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Table Of Contents

6.6 6.7 7 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 8 9 10 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.5.1 10.5.2 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 10.9.1 10.9.2 11 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 11.10 11.11 12 12.1 12.2 12.3

Cyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Acyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . Basic Unit Inputs . . . . . . Operator Panel Buttons. . . Digital Module Inputs . . . . Temperature Module Inputs Analog Module Inputs . . . . Cyclic Receive . . . . . . . . Acyclic Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7-2 7-4 7-6 7-8 7-10 7-12 7-14 7-15 8-1 9-1

Analog Value Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3UF50 Compatibility Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test/Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Position Feedback (TPF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operational Protection OFF (OPO) . . . . . . . . . . Response for positioner control function . . . . . . Response to other control functions . . . . . . . . . Power Failure Monitoring (UVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Watchdog (Bus Monitoring, PLC/DCS Monitoring) Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timestamping in the fault memory . . . . . . . . . . Timestamping/time synchronization via PROFIBUS .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 10-2 . 10-3 . 10-7 . 10-9 . 10-11 . 10-11 . 10-13 . 10-14 . 10-16 . 10-17 . 10-19 . 10-19 . 10-20

Logic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Introduction . . . . . . . Truth Table for 3I/1O . Truth Table for 2I/1O . Truth Table for 5I/2O . Counters . . . . . . . . . Timer . . . . . . . . . . . Signal Conditioner . . . Non-volatile Elements . Flashing . . . . . . . . . Flickering . . . . . . . . Limit Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 11-3 11-6 11-7 11-8 11-10 11-13 11-16 11-19 11-20 11-21

Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Transmitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Telegram Description and Data Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

iii

Table Of Contents

12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3 12.4 12.4.1 12.4.2 12.4.3 12.4.4 12.4.5 12.5 12.5.1 12.5.2 12.6 12.7 12.7.1 12.7.2 12.7.3 12.8 13 13.1 13.2 13.2.1 13.2.2 13.2.3 13.2.4 13.3 13.3.1 13.3.2 13.3.3 13.3.4

Cyclic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Data and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration of the Slave Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP master systems . . . . . . . . . . Slave Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 Slave via GSD in the Configuration Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM Object (DPV-1 Slave via GSD) in STEP7-HW Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 Slave via OM SIMOCODE pro . . . . Evaluating Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES . Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameterization via PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMOCODE ES Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting up Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 12-5 . 12-6 . 12-7 . 12-15 . 12-15 . 12-15 . 12-16 . 12-17 . 12-18 . 12-19 . 12-19 . 12-20 . 12-21 . 12-22 . 12-22 . 12-22 . 12-23 . 12-24

Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 . 13-3 . 13-3 . 13-4 . 13-5 . 13-6 . 13-7 . 13-7 . 13-19 . 13-20

General Information about Mounting and Wiring. . . . . . . . . . Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Units and Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current/voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Units and Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Measuring with an External Current Transformer (Interposing Transformer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4 System Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4.2 System Interfaces on Basic Units, Expansion Modules, Current Measuring Modules and Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . 13.4.3 System Interfaces on the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 PROFIBUS DP on a 9-pole SUB-D socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 Installation Guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 14.1 14.2 14.2.1 14.2.2 14.2.3 14.3 14.3.1

. . . . . . . 13-22 . . . . . . . 13-25 . . . . . . . 13-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27 . 13-29 . 13-31 . 13-32

Commissioning and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 General Information about Commissioning and Servicing Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics via LED Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 14-3 14-3 14-4 14-5 14-6 14-6

SIMOCODE pro

iv

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

Table Of Contents

14.3.2 Saving the Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 14.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 14.3.4 Resetting the Basic Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 15 A A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 B B.1 B.1.1 B.1.2 B.1.3 B.2 B.3 B.4 B.5 B.6 B.7 B.8 B.9 B.10 B.11 B.12 B.13 B.14 B.15 B.16 B.17 B.18 B.19 B.20 Alarm, Faults and System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls and Status for the Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Socket Assignment Table - Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Socket Assignment Table - Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Messages . . . . . . . A-2 . . . . . . . A-3 . . . . . . . A-5 . . . . . . . A-12 . . . . . . . A-14 B-1 B-2 B-2 B-3 B-3 B-4 B-6 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-15 B-16 B-17 B-22 B-26 B-32 B-35 B-36 B-36 B-37 B-38 B-39 B-40 B-40 B-41 B-42 B-43 B-44 B-45 B-46 B-47 B-48 B-49 B-50

Data Formats and Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Handling Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing/reading Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 63 - Recording of Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 67 - Process Image of the Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 69 - Process Image of the Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 72 - Fault Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 92 - Device Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 94 - Measured Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 95 - Service/Statistical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 130 - Basic Device Parameters 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 131 - Basic Device Parameter 2 (Plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 132 - Extended Device Parameter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 133 - Extended Device Parameter 2 (Plug) . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 139 - Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 160 - Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 165 - Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 202 - Acyclic Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 203 - Acyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 224 - Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Cyclic Control and Signaling Data for Predefined Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.20.1 Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.20.2 Direct Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.20.3 Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.20.4 Circuit Breaker (MCCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.20.5 Star-delta Starter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.20.6 Star-delta Starter with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation . . . . . . . . B.20.7 Dahlander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.20.8 Dahlander with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.20.9 Pole-changing Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.20.10Pole-changing Switch with Reversal of the Direction of Rotation . . . . . . B.20.11Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

v

Table Of Contents

B.20.12Positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-51 B.20.13Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52 B.20.14Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53 C C.1 C.1.1 C.1.2 C.2 C.2.1 C.2.2 C.2.3 C.2.4 C.2.5 C.3 C.3.1 C.3.2 C.3.3 C.3.4 C.3.5 C.4 C.5 C.6 C.6.1 D D.1 D.2 D.3 D.4 D.4.1 D.4.2 D.4.3 D.4.4 D.5 D.6 Dimension Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3UF70 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3UF710 Current Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter) 3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A , . . . . . . . . Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter) 3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Measuring Module (Push-through Converter) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Measuring Module (Rail Connection) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Measuring Module (Rail Connection) 3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter) 3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A . . . . . . . . . Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter) 3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Push-through Converter) 3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Rail Connection) 3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Rail Connection) 3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3UF7200 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 C-2 C-2 C-2 C-3 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-8 C-9

. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .

. . . . . . . . C-10 . . . . . . . . C-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 C-15 D-1 D-2 D-3

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data of the Basic Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data of the Current Measuring Modules and Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data of the Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data of the Analog Module . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data of the Earth-fault Module . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data of the Temperature Module . . . . . . . . . Technical Data of the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . Short-circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor Feeders for Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Short-circuit .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. D-5 . D-7 . D-7 . D-8 . D-9 . D-9 . D-11

. . .D-12

SIMOCODE pro

vi

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01

. . . . . . . . . .10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 E. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . .1 E. . . . . . . Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagram for "positioner 1" . . . . . . . E-25 E-27 E-27 E-29 E-30 E-30 E-31 E-32 E-33 E-34 E-35 SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 vii . Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation" . . .9. . . . . . Circuit diagram for the "overload relay" . .2 E. . . . . . . . .2 E. . . . Example for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 E. .2 E. . . . . .12 E. . . . . . . .5. . . .1 E. .11. . . .2 E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation" circuit . Circuit diagram for "positioner 3" . . .2 E. . . Example for the "pole-changing switch" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . E-14 . . . . . Function circuit diagram for the "valve" . . . . .1 E. . . Function circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24 . . . . . . . . Example for the "direct starter" circuit . . . Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation" . . . . . . . . . E-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 E. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function circuit diagram for the "direct starter". . . . . .13. . . . Function circuit diagram for "positioner 1" . . .1 E. . E-15 E-16 E-16 E-17 . . . . . . . .13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . .Table Of Contents E E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . .1 E. . Circuit diagram for the "valve" . . . .6 Example Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 E.1 E. . . . . . .2 E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch" .13 E. . . . . . . . . E-18 . . Circuit diagram for the "reversing starter" . . . . . . E-19 E-21 E-21 E-23 . . . . . .3 E. . . . . . . . . . . .7 E. . Function circuit diagram for "positioner 3" . . . . . .4 E. Circuit diagram for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation" . . . . . .2 E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example for the "overload relay" circuit . . . . . . . .2 E. . . . Example for the "star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation" circuit . . . . . Circuit diagram for "positioner 2" . . . . . . . . Example for the "pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation" circuit . . . . .2. . .1 E. . . . . . . . . . . . . Function circuit diagram for the "Dahlander" . . Circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter" circuit . . Example for a "reversing starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14 . .4 E. . Function circuit diagram for "positioner 2" . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . Function circuit diagram for the "star-delta starter" . . . . Example for the "circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example for the "star-delta starter" circuit . . . . . . . . . .12. . . . . . . . . . .13. . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander" . . . . . . . . . . . . Example for the "Dahlander" circuit .9 E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 E.6 E. . . . . . . . . . . .2 E. . . . . .5 E. . . . . . . . . .2 E. . . . . .4. . . . E-1 E-2 E-3 E-3 E-5 E-6 E-6 E-7 E-8 E-8 E-9 E-10 E-10 E-11 E-12 E-12 E-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . .1 E. .12. Circuit diagram for the "direct starter" .2 E. . . . . . . . .13. . . .1 E. . . . .10 E. . . . . . Example for the "valve" circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 E. . . .11. . .9. . .13. . . . . . . Function circuit diagram for the "pole-changing switch" . . . . . . . Function circuit diagram for the "overload relay" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-24 . . . Circuit diagram for the "Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of the "positioner" circuit .11 E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function circuit diagram for the "reversing starter" . . . . . . . . .5 E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . E. . . . . F-9 . . . . .6 F. . . . . . . . . Wiring of the Sensor Circuit . .15 Example for the "soft starter with reversing contactor" circuit . . . . . . . . E. . .. . .1 Circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor" . .14. . . . .. . . .2.Table Of Contents E. . . . . . . . Further Information . .3 F. . . . . . .. . . Maintenance and Repairs. .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .3 F. . .1 Circuit diagram for the "soft starter" . . . . . ..2. . . . . . .. . . .5 F. . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . SIMOCODE pro with Thermistor Input. . . . . . .2. . . Short-circuit Protection according to IEC 60947-4-1 for Type of Coordination 2 . .8 F. ... . . . .. F-9 . . . .4 F. .. . .. . . . . . . . . Ambient Conditions . . . . .2 F. . .. . . . . . . . .. . . .14. . . . . . . . . . . . ..2. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . Test. E. . . E.15. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . F-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . Further Safety Instructions . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .15. .. . . .. . . . .1 F. . .. . . . . .13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . E. . . . . . . F-7 . . F-9 . . . . . . .10Function circuit diagram for "positioner 5" .2 Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter with reversing contactor" F F. . . .2 Function circuit diagram for the "soft starter" . . . . .13. . . . . . . . E-36 E-37 E-38 E-39 E-40 E-40 E-42 E-43 E-44 E-46 F-1 F-2 F-3 F-3 F-5 F-6 Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas . .2. .. . . . .4 F. .. . . . . . . . . .2 F. . . F-6 . . Setting the Rated Current of the Motor . . .... . .. . E. . . . .. .. ..13.... . . .7 Circuit diagram for "positioner 4" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . E. . . . . . .13. . . . . . . . . . . . . E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. . . . . . . . . Setting up and Commissioning . . .9 Circuit diagram for "positioner 5" . . . . . F-9 . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .2. . . . . . . . . . Guarantee . . .. . . . . . .1 F. F-10 SIMOCODE pro viii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Function circuit diagram for "positioner 4" . ..5 Index List of Abbreviations Glossary . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . General . . .. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Protection ..14 Example for the "soft starter" circuit . . . . . . . . .

Required basic knowledge Basic knowledge in the areas of low-voltage controls and distribution. electricians. It contains information about configuring. this manual also contains information of special importance to service and maintenance personnel. programmers Logic Modules Configurators. In addition to providing assistance for troubleshooting and eliminating faults. The topics with a gray background represent the contents of the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization and service software. The following table lists the most relevant topics. PLC programmers Standard Functions Configurators. The manual contains circuit diagrams. planners. programmers Analog Value Recording Configurators. programmers. planners Configurators. dimension drawings and technical data about the system components to assist you in carrying out the configuration. Topic System Description Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter Motor Protection Motor Control Monitoring Functions Target group Configurators.Important Notes Purpose of the manual The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes in detail the motor management system and its functions. PLC programmers Messages SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 ix . PLC programmers Configurators. Faults and System commissioners. commissioners. electricians. Topics This manual consists of instructional chapters which can be used to look up specific information. commissioning. maintenance and service personnel. maintenance and service personnel Interfaces Commissioning and SerCommissioners. programmers. maintenance and service pervicing sonnel Alarms. commissioners Configurators. configurators. planners. service and maintenance. commissioners. service personnel Outputs Configurators. commissioners Configurators. Wiring and Mechanics. The user is introduced to the system quickly and practically using a typical reversing motor application as an example. technicians. PLC programmers Mounting. service personnel 3UF50 Compatibility Mode Configurators. programmers Communication Configurators. planners. digital circuit engineering and automation technology is required in order to be able to understand this manual. programmers Inputs Configurators.

Tripping) can be parameterized for various different types of functions (e.5 s Function 2 X (d) X X X Function 3 X X (d) - Short description of the responses: • Disabled: The corresponding function is switched off. An error message is generated which is available as diagnosis for PROFIBUS DP The error mes. Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro Using SIMOCODE pro. overload). no signals are generated. Definitions • If "SIMOCODE pro" is referred to. Correction sheet A correction sheet is included at the end of this manual. • Warning: A warning signal which is available as diagnosis for PROFIBUS DP is generated in addition to the device-internal signal.Important Notes Scope of application This manual is applicable for the components included in the SIMOCODE pro system. Warning. Response Tripping Warning Signalling Disabled Delay Function 1 X (d) X X 0 . A delay time can also be specified for specific responses. • The DP-Master manual is also required in addition to this system manual. specific responses (Disabled. We reserve the right to include information about new components or new versions of components in additional documents.g. SIMOCODE pro x GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . Please use it to fill in suggestions for improvements.25. Further documentation • Please read the operating instructions of the respective components. • Signalling: Only a device-internal signal is generated which can be further processed in any way. additions and corrections and send it back to us. It contains a description of the components that are applicable at the time of printing the document. sage and the device-internal signal remain on until the corresponding time has elapsed or the cause of the error has been eliminated and acknowledged. They are always displayed in tabular form: • "X" = Applicable • "-" = Not applicable • "d" = Default. Signalling. then both the "SIMOCODE pro C" and the "SIMOCODE pro V" series are meant. • Tripping: The contactor controls QE* are switched off. This helps us to improve the next edition.

No new guarantee. evaluation units. signaling devices and methods for safe switching off. In general. warranty or liability above those standard to Siemens can be derived from the following description. its subsidiaries and associated companies (herein referred to as "Siemens") is not in the position to guarantee every characteristic of a complete plant or machine that is not designed by Siemens. a complete safety system consists of sensors. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 xi . It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure the safe functioning of the complete plant or machine.Important Notes Exclusion of liability The products described here were developed to carry out protection tasks as part of a complete plant or machine. Siemens AG. Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are given or implied in the following description.

Important Notes SIMOCODE pro xii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 .

• characteristics of both the SIMOCODE pro C and the SIMOCODE pro V device series • simplifications of circuits with SIMOCODE pro • a function overview • an overview of the system components. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: • planners and configurators • people who are now using SIMOCODE DP and in the future want to use SIMOCODE pro as a replacement or as an additional system • optional for commissioners. Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge: • basic knowledge about load feeders • basic knowledge about motor protection • basic knowledge of control engineering • basic knowledge of industrial bus technology.g.System Description In this chapter 1 In this chapter you will find an introduction and general information about the SIMOCODE pro system including e. maintenance and service personnel as additional information about SIMOCODE pro • system integrators/process technology. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-1 .

new types can be added – a current/voltage Measuring module can be used for additional voltage measuring and for monitoring power-related measured values (power management) – a temperature module enables the evaluation of several analog temperature sensors – an earth-fault detection system can be integrated together with a summation current transformer – an analog module extends the system by additional analog inputs and outputs. circuit breakers. pole-changing switches. It provides a lot of operating. SIMOCODE pro replaces large sections of the control circuit and also automatically implements all the necessary interlockings.1 Introduction SIMOCODE pro (SIRIUS Motor Management and Control Devices) is a system of motor management and control devices with a PROFIBUS DP interface. as well as valves and positioners.the variable system which also offers many other additional functions in addition to the SIMOCODE pro C functions. SIMOCODE pro 1-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . Dahlanders. for fill-level or flow-rate monitoring.each also in combination with reversal of the direction of rotation. service and diagnostic data making the functionality of the motor feeder more transparent. SIMOCODE pro C is upwards-compatible to SIMOCODE pro V. – the number of binary inputs and outputs can be increased in stages and are adjustable. soft starters . It integrates the motor feeder completely into a main . e.the compact system for direct and reversing starters and • SIMOCODE pro V . fuses) are additionally needed. Additional control programs are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V for star-delta starters. for example. Its functionality can be extended if required.g. SIMOCODE pro is a flexible. automation system via PROFIBUS DP Description Device series SIMOCODE pro can be subdivided into two device series with different functions: • SIMOCODE pro C . modular motor management system which combines all functions necessary for a motor feeder. This means that you can use both ranges simultaneously in your plant according to your requirements. SIMOCODE pro V is also especially versatile. SIMOCODE pro is the further development of the SIMOCODE DP system.System Description 1. Only the switching and short-circuit protection mechanisms of the main circuit (contactors.

SIMOCODE pro can be used without being connected to PROFIBUS DP This can be connected later according to need.System Description Independent operation SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor feeder independently of the automation system. . Typical configuration The following schematic shows a typical configuration of SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V: SIMOCODE pro C Current measuring module (IM) Operator panel (OP) Basic unit (BU1) Maximum configuration SIMOCODE pro V Basic unit (BU2) Digital module (DM) Analog module (AM) Current measuring module (IM) Operator panel (OP) UF-01129 Additional optional expansions are possible Figure 1-1: Typical configurations of SIMOCODE pro SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 UF-01130 1-3 . the motor feeder also remains protected and can still be controlled. If the automation system (PLC) fails or if communication is disrupted.

F2 2 4 6 Local stop S1 Local start 2 4.. analog/digital converters • wiring up the control circuit • connecting the control devices for start/stop • bringing the contactor into locking mode via auxiliary switches • wiring up the interlocks The following figure shows the conventional configuration of a direct starter: Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro 3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V 1L1 L1 -F4 L2 L3 N PE -Q1 1 3 5 Q1 -F3 2 4 6 . The following components must be used and the following wiring must be carried out: • inserting and wiring up the overload relays..2 Simplify Configuration with SIMOCODE pro Individual components are used for all the control. monitoring and signal pre-processing.20 mA S2 1 -K1 1N PLC Start/stop -K1 -K12 OFF ON -F2- Automation level / I/O module Feedback Thermistor Overload -Q1 open Current Control commands Man. current transformers. -K11 -X3 -K1 1 Switchgear -K1 -F2 -F3 -Q1 D A -F3 Thermistor evaluation 2 N ON / OFF -K12 Automatic PE UVW M 3~ J Figure 1-2: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter) SIMOCODE pro 1-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . thermistor evaluation devices. / aut.System Description 1.K1 1 3 5 2 4 6 -X1 -K11 Manual -X2 1 3 5 .

thermistor evaluation devices. analog/digital converters are not necessary • wiring up the control circuit (interlocking) is simplified • the start and stop switches are wired directly to the inputs of the basic unit • the contactor coil is activated via the output of the basic unit. This offers the following advantages: • additional overload relays. The auxiliary contact for locking is no longer necessary The following figure shows the configuration with SIMOCODE pro: 3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V L1 L2 L3 N PE PROFIBUS DP L+ L1/L+ 1 3 5 Q1 F11 Control station local control [LC] 2 4 6 S0 Current Measuring module (IM) A2 A1 IN1 S1 IN2 24 V Basic unit (BU) T1 T2 OUT 1 K1 1 1 3 5 .K1 2 4 6 N/L– PE U V W T1 M 3~ J Thermistor T2 Figure 1-3: Configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter) with SIMOCODE pro SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-5 .System Description Configuration with SIMOCODE pro Only SIMOCODE pro is used for complete control. monitoring and signal pre-processing. current transformers.

local control [LC] for manual switching on and off (by visual inspection) • in the switchgear cabinet door: control station operator panel [OP] for switching on and off manually • in the automation level: control station PLC/DCS [DP] for remote-controlled switching on and off (automatic operation) via PROFIBUS DP • via SIMOCODE by means of internal logic modules.K1 1 3 5 2 4 6 N/L– Pump PE U V W T1 M 3~ J Thermistor Optional: Laptop with SIMOCODE ES T2 Figure 1-4: Schematic of a typical application example SIMOCODE pro 1-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 .3 Application Example The fill level is monitored in a liquid container. Schematic Control station PLC/DCS [DP] 3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230V L1 L2 L3 N PE PLC/DCS PROFIBUS DP L+ Fill-level indicator L1/L+ 1 3 5 Q1 F11 Control station local control [LC] 2 4 6 Current Measuring module (IM) System interface A2 A1 S0 S1 Liquid container IN1 IN2 24 V Basic unit (BU 2) In+ Control station In– Analog module (AM) Operator panel Connecting cable T1 T2 OUT 1 K1 1 Out+ Out– Display Motor current . Then the pump is switched off. If the fill level sinks below a certain level. The fill level (actual value) is measured by the fill-level indicator and outputted as an analog signal. A pump keeps the liquid level (reference value) almost constant by pumping more liquid into the container. Description Controlling the pump The pump can be controlled as follows: • locally: control station .System Description 1. Liquid is pumped in until the reference value is again reached. the pump is switched on by SIMOCODE pro.

Optionally. a laptop can be connected to the operator panel with the SIMOCODE ES software in order to evaluate further process data locally.g. which is measured by the current measuring module • analog value of the fill-level indicator. which is measured by the analog module The measured values are evaluated directly by SIMOCODE pro and/or transferred via PROFIBUS DP to the PLC/DCS. e. the effective motor current when a pointer instrument is connected.g. Any measured value can be outputted via the analog module. displaying and evaluating the measured values The following measured values are required for monitoring the process: • pump motor current.System Description Recording. e. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-7 .

overload protection Earth-fault monitoring via current measuring module (internal) Thermistor motor protection with PTC (binary) ✓ ✓ 1) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 1) 1) 1) ✓ Motor feeder with control function: Star-delta starters. pole-changing switches. fill level. power monitoring More than 4 binary inputs required (maximum 12) Table 1-1: Check list for selecting the device series ✓ ✓ — 1) — ✓ 2) ✓ ✓ ✓ 3) 3) — 3) — ✓ 2) 1) Via current measuring module 2) With expansion modules 3) Via current/voltage measuring modules SIMOCODE pro 1-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 .System Description 1. etc. valves.4 Check List for Selecting the Device Series The following check list should help you decide on the best device series for your requirements: SIMOCODE pro Requirement pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Footnote Standard motor feeders (4 inputs. implementing power considerations (power. power factor). phase failure Current measuring. current limit monitoring. flow rate. intelligent overload relays Monitoring of blocking. soft starters – each also possible in combination with reversal of the direction of rotation –.g. 3 outputs) with control functions for direct starters. reversing starters. Dahlanders. positioners Measuring. processing and outputting analog values e. (if necessary via an analog module) Current measuring and voltage measuring — Voltage monitoring for undervoltage — Power management. unbalance.

4) — ✓ ✓ ✓ 2) — 2) — 2) — Analog temperature monitoring with NTC. 8) Bistable relay outputs (max.System Description SIMOCODE pro Requirement pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Footnote More than 3 relay outputs required (maximum 7) Earth-fault monitoring with a summation current transformer via an earth-fault module Binary inputs for 110 .240 V AC/DC (max. PT100. PT1000 and KTY 83/84 sensor types Table 1-1: Check list for selecting the device series (cont.) ✓ 2) — ✓ 2) 1) Via current measuring module 2) With expansion modules 3) Via current/voltage measuring modules SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-9 .

Electronic overload protection The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-dependent motor protection: • overload protection • phase unbalance • phase failure. • External earth-fault monitoring by SIMOCODE pro V 1).5 A/ 1 A can be evaluated with the summation current transformer.5 1. Stall protection See chapter 3 "Motor Protection". A maximum of one earth-fault module can be used to create an additional input on basic unit 2 to connect a 3UL22 summation current transformer. Rated fault currents of 0. 1. Thermistor protection The basic units (BU1 and BU2) make it also possible to connect thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the motor temperature. Current limit monitoring The current limit monitoring function is used for process monitoring.5.5): In the case of networks which are grounded with a higher impedance it may be necessary to set up the earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault currents using a summation current transformer instead of carrying out internal earth-fault monitoring via a current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module. indicate a dirty filter on a pump or a motor bearing which is running more and more sluggishly. Internal earth-fault monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks which are either grounded directly or grounded with low impedance. the basic unit evaluates a possible fault current/earth-fault current from the total current via a current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module.2 Monitoring Functions For a more detailed description. SIMOCODE pro 1-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . see chapter 3 "Motor Protection".3 A/ 0.System Description 1.1 Function Overview Protecting Functions For a more detailed description.g. Falling below a current limit can be the first hint that a drive motor belt is worn out. Earth-fault monitoring The basic units have • Internal earth-fault monitoring: For motors with a 3-cable connection. see chapter 5 "Monitoring Functions".5. Impending irregularities in the system can be detected in good time: Exceeding a current limit which is still below the overload limit can e.

Power factor (cos phi) monitoring 2) Especially in the low-end performance range of a motor. be a sign of no-load operation of the motor. the power factor changes more frequently than either the motor current or the active power does. An active power which is too low can. e. a tear in a drive belt or a break in a drive shaft. SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of two-phase active power monitoring for upper and lower limits which can be freely chosen. of the motor windings or the bearings of up to 3 sensor measuring circuits. For this reason. The response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.System Description Voltage monitoring 2) SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of voltage monitoring of a three-phase current network or a one-phase network for undervoltage or further availability: • Monitoring for undervoltage: Two-phase monitoring for limits which can be freely chosen. Active power monitoring 2) The shape of the active power curve of a motor shows its actual load. SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of overtemperature for freely selectable limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a prewarning or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed. lead to premature motor failure. power factor monitoring is particularly suitable for distinguishing between non-load operation and faults. Temperature monitoring always takes place taking the highest temperature of all the sensor measuring circuits in use into account. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-11 . SIMOCODE pro V allows two-phase monitoring of the power factor (cos phi) for undershooting freely selectable limits.g. Temperature monitoring 1). SIMOCODE pro can display the further availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit breaker or at the fuses. for example. The response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a particular pre-warning or trip level can be freely parameterized.3) The temperature module from SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of implementing analog temperature monitoring. in certain circumstances. A load which is too high leads to increased wear of the motor and as a result can. The response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed. e.g. • Monitoring for further availability: Even when the motor is switched off.

a signal can be generated or the motor switched off. After replacing the motor. the number of motor start-ups in a selected time frame can be limited. The response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed. a signal can be issued which can indicate that maintenance on the relevant motor is necessary or even that the motor should be replaced. or if the differential pressure overshoots a specified value. See chapter 11.11 "Limit Monitor". stop time and number of start-ups SIMOCODE pro V can monitor the operating hours and the stop times of a motor in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors because they were either running too long (wear) or they were stopped for too long a period of time. SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of the corresponding process variables for upper and lower limits which can be freely chosen. For example.System Description Monitoring operating hours. or the degree of pollution in a filter can be monitored using a differential pressure transducer. if an adjustable limit value is exceeded. the pump can be switched off. the filter should be cleaned. Phase sequence identification 2) SIMOCODE pro offers the option of determining the direction of rotation of a motor by identifying the phase sequence. the fill level can be monitored to protect the pump against dry operation. SIMOCODE pro 1-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . In order to avoid excessive thermal strain on a motor and premature aging. If the fill level undershoots a specified level. For example. Monitoring additional process variables via the analog module 1) 4) SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of measuring and monitoring other process variables via the analog module. The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings. the operating hours and stop times can be reset. If the direction of rotation is false. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) When using basic unit 2 When using basic unit 2 with a current or voltage measuring module Additional temperature module required Additional analog module required Additional earth-fault module and summation current transformer required. Monitoring measured values using unrestricted limit monitors 1) SIMOCODE pro is able to monitor every measured value in the system for undershooting or overshooting a set threshold value by using unrestricted limit monitors.

System Description 1. the following parameterizable control functions are available: SIMOCODE Control function pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Overload relays Direct starters Reversing starters Circuit breakers (MCCBs) Star-delta starters. power measuring). see chapter 4 "Motor Control".3 Control Functions Depending on the device series.g.5. can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation Valves Positioners Soft starters. can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 1) 1) 1) 1) — ✓ — ✓ — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ 1) Due to additional requirements (e. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-13 . For a more detailed description of the individual control functions. Table 1-2: Control functions All the necessary protection functions and interlocks are already available and can be flexibly adapted and expanded. can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation Pole-changing switches. it may be necessary to select the BU2 device version. can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation Dahlander.

the following services: SIMOCODE Service pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s Automatic baud rate recognition Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1) Operation as DPV1 slave downstream from the Y link Warnings according to DPV1 Time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP 3UF50 compatibility mode Table 1-3: PROFIBUS DP services ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ For a detailed description.5. for example.System Description 1. time-staggered restart of the drives after a power failure.g. SIMOCODE pro has the following standard functions: SIMOCODE Standard function pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Number Test Reset Test position feedback (TPF) External fault Operational protection off (OPO) Power failure monitoring (UVO) Emergency start Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS) Timestamping Table 1-4: Standard functions Number 2 3 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 4 — — 1 1 — For a detailed description.5 Standard Functions Standard functions are predefined functions which can be easily activated.4 Communication PROFIBUS DP SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or terminal connection on the basic units). SIMOCODE pro supports. SIMOCODE pro 1-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . e. 1. see chapter 10 "Standard Functions".5. see chapter 12 "Communication".

These can be used.System Description 1. for example. the system offers several logic modules which can be parameterized freely: SIMOCODE Logic module pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Number Truth tables 3 inputs/1 output Truth tables 2 inputs/1 output Truth tables 5 inputs/2 outputs Timers Counters Signal conditioners Non-volatile elements Flashing Flickering Limit monitor Table 1-5: Logic modules which can be programmed freely Number 6 2 1 4 4 4 4 3 3 4 3 — — 2 2 2 2 3 3 — For a detailed description. Depending on the device series. see chapter 11 "Logic Modules". SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-15 .5.6 Additional Signal Processing with Freely Programmable Logic Modules If you need any other additional functions for your application. time relay functions and counter functions. every value in SIMOCODE pro can be monitored for undershooting or overshooting selected limit values using limit monitors. you can use the logic modules which can be programmed freely. Furthermore. to implement logical functions.

2 and 3 and maximum current in % of set current • Voltage in phases 1.7 Operating. etc. also resettable) • Motor stop times. quickly). derived from the current flow in the main circuit. also resettable • Number of motor starts. e. etc.g. off. slowly. 1) When using basic unit 2 2) When using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module 3) Additional temperature module required 4) Additional analog module required SIMOCODE pro 1-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . also for further processing in the device or in the control system • Internal device error protocolling with time stamp • Value of the last tripping current • Feedback faults (e. service and diagnostic data: Operating data • Motor switching state (on. SIMOCODE pro yields the following information for maintaining relevant data: • Number of motor operating hours. Service and Diagnostic Data SIMOCODE pro supplies a lot of detailed operating. 2 and 3 and maximum temperature in °C 1) 3) • Actual analog signal value • Time to tripping in s • Heating up of the motor model in % • Remaining motor cooling down time in s.g. 2 and 3 in V • Real power in W 2) 2) 2) • Apparent power in VA • Power factor in % • Phase cycle 2) 2) • Phase unbalance in % • Temperature in the sensor measuring circuits 1. Diagnostic data • Numerous detailed early warning and fault signals. no current flow in the main circuit after switch-on command). also resettable • Number of permissible starts remaining • Number of overload trippings. right. therefore no feedback via auxiliary contacts of circuit breakers and contactors is necessary • Current in phases 1.System Description 1. information regarding maintenance events. 1) 4) Service data Among other things. also resettable • Internal comments stored in the device referring to the feeder. etc.5.

phase cycle Current measuring modules (IM) 63 A up to 630 A Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) * 0. With system interface for connecting a PC Current measuring with push-through system. Basic unit can be snapped open Current measuring modules (IM) 0. Additional control station and display.power factor (cos phi) measurement . also: .System Description 1.3 A up to 3 A 2.4 A up to 25 A Current measuring modules (IM) 10 A up to 100 A Current measuring modules (IM) 20 A up to 200 A Current measuring with push-through system or a rail connection system Current measuring with a rail connection system Mounting only next to the basic unit.3 A up to 3 A 2. devices — — — — SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-17 .4 A up to 25 A Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) * 10 A up to 100 A Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) * 20 A up to 200 A Current/voltage measuring modules (UM) * 63 A up to 630 A Table 1-6: System components.power measurement . otherwise similar to the current measuring modules.6 Devices Overview of System Components SIMOCODE pro Connectable system components pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application Operator panel (OP) Installation in the cabinet door.voltage measuring .

devices (cont. Interfaces". see chapter 1. — Earth-fault module (EM) * — Temperature module (TM) * — Table 1-6: System components. 1 EM possible For monitoring temperature via additional sensors (PT100.System Description SIMOCODE pro Connectable system components pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application Digital modules (DM) 24 V DC monostable 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC monostable 24 V DC bistable 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC bistable Analog module (AM) * — Additional binary inputs and outputs.) For a detailed description of the system components. SIMOCODE pro 1-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . see chapter 13 "Mounting. Max. Wiring. For assembly information. 1 TM possible. 1 AM possible For connecting a 3UL22 external summation current transformer for earth-fault monitoring Max. Maximum 2 DMs possible Additional inputting and outputting as well as monitoring of analog values Max. see chapter C "Dimension Drawings". KTY83/KTY84. For dimensional drawings.7 "Description of the System Components". NTC). PT1000.

software *) Optional software package for SIMOCODE ES Smart or SIMOCODE ES Professional SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-19 . In the case of device replacement.System Description Accessories SIMOCODE basic unit Connectable system components pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application Connecting cable in 4 different lengths ranging from 0. diagnostics and testing SIMOCODE basic unit Software components pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application SIMOCODE ES Smart Access via the system interface on the device Access via the system interface on the device and PROFIBUS DP Graphical parameterization per "Drag&Drop" SIMOCODE ES Professional with Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro SIMOCODE ES Graphic *) Table 1-8: System components. accessories Software For parameterization.025 m up to 2m System interface cover For connecting system components via system interfaces For covering system interfaces not in use For saving the device parameters. control. existing parameters can be transferred without a PC For configuring the PROFIBUS DP address without a PC For connecting SIMOCODE pro to a PC Only for leading out the system interface e.g. from a switchgear cabinet Memory module Addressing plug PC cable Door adapter Table 1-7: System components.

The following motor control functions are supported: • overload relays • direct and reversing starters • star-delta starters. They have a standard enclosure width of 45 mm and are equipped with detachable terminals: Basic unit 1 (BU1) SIMOCODE pro C device series Basic unit 2 (BU2) SIMOCODE pro V device series Figure 1-5: Basic units Basic unit 1 (BU1) Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro C device series. also with reversal of the direction of rotation • slide control • valve control • circuit breaker control (MCCB) • soft starter control.7. motors with separate windings (pole-changing switches). also with reversal of the direction of rotation • 2 speeds. SIMOCODE pro 1-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . also with reversal of the direction of rotation.System Description 1. Basic unit 2 (BU2) Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro V device series.1 Description of the System Components Basic Units (BU) The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro system.7 1. The following motor control functions are supported: • overload relays • direct starters and reversing starters • circuit breaker activation. also with reversal of the direction of rotation • 2 speeds. Basic units are always required when using SIMOCODE pro. motors with superette Dahlander windings.

5 mm width • using a current/voltage measuring module instead of the current measuring module used • additional inputs and outputs if necessary.3 "Wiring".System Description Basic unit 2 offers the following expansion options: • increasing the device functionality if necessary using expansion modules of 22. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-21 . Supplying the inputs See chapter 13.

Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4 Figure 1-7: Legend strip for operator panel buttons and LEDs 1-22 0 DEVICE BUS GEN. A PC with SIMOCODE ES or the memory module and the addressing plug can be connected using the PC cable via the system interface on the front (with a cover for IP54). It can be used with the SIMOCODE pro C as well as with the SIMOCODE pro V device series. FAULT TEST/ RESET LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . The voltage is supplied by the basic unit.System Description 1. For this. the operator panel is equipped with • 5 buttons. of which 4 can be parameterized freely • 10 LEDs.2 Operator Panel (OP) The operator panel is often integrated into the front panels of motor control centers. of which 7 can be parameterized freely The following figure shows an operator panel: Operator panel Device series SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro V Figure 1-6: Operator panel The operator panel can be connected to the basic unit or to the expansion module on the back of the system interface. the "TEST/RESET" button and makes the system interface externally available. It contains all the status LEDs which are on the basic units. It also offers the option of controlling the motor feeder from the cabinet. Legend strip: Legend strips for designating buttons 1 to 4 as well as LEDs 1 to 3 are enclosed: • Buttons 1 to 4: 6 pre-assigned and 1 individually inscribable legend strip • LEDs 1 to 3: 1 individually inscribable legend strip.7.

the storage clips for the legend strip cannot be used.System Description Unused legend strips can be stored on the back of the operating panel: Legend strip Storage clips Figure 1-8: Storage clips for legend strip Memory module "park position": The memory module can be protected from unauthorized use by "parking" it on the back of the control panel. Memory module Figure 1-9: Memory module in the park position SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-23 . In this case.

100A 0. SIMOCODE pro 1-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 .3A 2. with interposing transformers up to 820 A.25A 20A . Current measuring modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs.3A .System Description 1.200A 63A . The basic units can be snapped directly onto the current measuring modules. The current measuring module must be selected according to the set current to be monitored (rated operating current of the motor). The current measuring module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the integrated screw attachments.3 Current Measuring Modules (IM) Current measuring modules are used with the basic units of the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device series. optionally. they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments which are integrated into the enclosure.7.3 A and 630 A. The current measuring modules cover current ranges between 0.4A . The current measuring modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard rail or.630A Figure 1-10: Current measuring modules The current measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a connecting cable which also supplies the power. The following figure shows the different current measuring modules: Current measuring modules Device series SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro V 10A .

System Description 1.630A Figure 1-11: Current/voltage measuring modules The current/voltage measuring module is connected to the basic device via a connecting cable which also supplies the power. Current/voltage measuring modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. optionally.3A 2. Basic units can only be mounted separately next to the current/voltage measuring modules. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-25 .200A 63A . they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments which are integrated into the enclosure. In addition to measuring the motor current. current/voltage measuring modules can also • monitor voltages up to 690 V • evaluate and monitor the power and power factor (cos phi) • monitor the phase cycle The following figure shows the different current/voltage measuring modules: Current/ voltage measuring modules Monitoring voltages up to 690 V Device series SIMOCODE pro V 10A .25A 20A .3A .4 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series The SIMOCODE pro V device series offers the option of using a current/ voltage measuring module instead of a current measuring module.7. Mounting is only possible via the internal screw attachments for the current/ voltage measuring modules up to 630 A.100A 0.4A . The current/voltage measuring modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard rail or.

Current/voltage measuring modules have additional detachable terminals for the evaluation or monitoring of performance variables which can be fed with all three phase voltages of the main circuit.System Description Note The use of a current/voltage measuring module requires basic unit 2. product version EO2 (from 04/2005) or later. SIMOCODE pro 1-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 .

240 V AC/DC. The following expansion modules are available: • digital modules (DM) • analog module (AM) • earth-fault module (EM) • temperature module (TM). The following digital modules are available for basic unit 2: Inputs Supply 24 V DC.7.5 mm. if required. The following figure shows an expansion module: Expansion module Device series SIMOCODE pro V Figure 1-12: Expansion module Digital module (DM) Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the types and number of binary inputs and relay outputs on basic unit 2. All expansion modules have the same design with an enclosure width of 22.System Description 1. external Outputs 2 monostable relay outputs 4 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs 4 inputs 110 . SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-27 . All versions listed here can be combined with each other. external 2 bistable relay outputs Table 1-9: Versions of digital modules A maximum of 2 digital modules can be connected to basic unit 2. external 2 monostable relay outputs 24 V DC. This means that 4 additional binary inputs and 2 additional binary outputs are available.240 V AC/DC. external 2 bistable relay outputs 110 . They are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and detachable terminals. SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs and 7 relay outputs.5 Expansion Modules for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the SIMOCODE pro V device series.

An additional input for connecting a summation current transformer can be added to basic unit 2 via the earth-fault module. 1 A can be evaluated with the summation current transformer.20 mA • 1 output for outputting a 0/4 mA . • 1 earth-fault module can be connected to BU2. for example. be used for the visualization of any process variables on a pointer instrument. Supplying the inputs: see also chapter 13. SIMOCODE pro V can therefore be expanded by a supplementary.3 "Wiring". it is possible to measure and monitor any process variable which can be mapped on to a 0/4 mA . fill level monitoring for protecting pumps from dry operation or the monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer. The automation system can also freely access the output.20-mA. • 1 analog module can be connected to BU2 • 2 analog inputs for detecting signals from 0/4-mA . Note The use of an analog module requires basic unit 2.3 A. Analog module (AM) By means of the analog module.5 A. Rated fault currents of 0. product version EO2 (from 04/2005) or later. basic unit 2 can be optionally expanded by analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA to 20 mA). As a result. 0. external and more precise earth-fault monitoring system. product version EO2 (from 04/2005) or later.4 "Digital Module Inputs". In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring supported by both device series. Typical applications are. In this case. Earth-fault module (EM) In the case of networks which are grounded with a higher impedance it may be necessary to set up the earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault currents using a 3UL22 summation current transformer instead of carrying out earth-fault monitoring via a current measuring module or a current/voltage measuring module.20-mA signal.20 mA signal. you can set a debounce time for the digital module inputs (see chapter 7. for example. the automation system has free access to the measured processed variables. Note The use of an earth-fault module requires basic unit 2.System Description With the monostable version. the switching state of the relay outputs remains intact even after switching off/ failure/interruption of the supply voltage. If necessary. The analog output can. Both inputs are set to either 0 to 20 mA or 4 mA . SIMOCODE pro 1-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . the relay outputs open after switching off/ failure/interruption of the supply voltage. With the bistable version.

up to 3 analog sensor measuring circuits (in two or threewire systems) can be connected.System Description Temperature module (TM) The temperature module offers the option of expanding the SIMOCODE pro V device series by an analog temperature monitoring system. bearings. SIMOCODE pro V supports various sensor types (NTC. implement analog temperature monitoring of the motor winding. You can. With this. product version EO2 (from 04/2005) or later. fluid or gaseous media. The temperatures recorded can be fully integrated into the process. Attention The same sensor type must be used in all sensor measuring circuits. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-29 . coolant and gear oil temperature. PT100 and PT1000) for use in hard. for example. • 1 temperature module can be connected to BU2 • 3 sensor measuring circuits in 2 or 3-wire systems Note The use of a temperature module requires basic unit 2. can be monitored and are also available for a main automation system. the temperatures in the 3 sensor measuring circuits evaluated as well as the highest temperature in all the sensor measuring circuits determined. KTY83/84.

for connecting a PC to the system interface of a basic unit via its serial interface. The total length of all the connecting cables should not exceed pro System 3 m! Door adapter for making the system interface of a basic unit available at an easily accessible location (e.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address". They are required for connecting the individual basic units with their current measuring modules and. round cable 2.7. with their expansion modules or operator panels.g. SIMOCODE pro 1-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 .0 m). in the case of a unit replacement (see chapter 14.3 "Replacing SIMOCODE pro Components").g.2.025 m. Addressing plug for the "hardware" transfer of the PROFIBUS DP address to a basic unit without a PC/programming device. Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with an addressing plug: Please see chapter 14.1 m. 0. if necessary. Memory module for plugging onto the system interface and for fast reading in or out of the entire SIMOCODE pro parameterization.System Description 1. e. 0. thus guaranteeing fast parameterization. System interface cover to protect the system interfaces from dirt or to seal them.6 Accessories The following figure shows accessories which are independent of the device series: PC cable Addressing plug Device series SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro V Memory module Door adapter Connecting cable System interface cover Figure 1-13: Accessories PC cable for the device parameterization. Connecting cable in different lengths and various versions (ribbon cable 0.5 m.3. front panel). In normal operation. system interfaces which are not used must be closed.

When SIMOCODE ES Professional and the OM SIMOCODE pro are installed on a PC/programming device. The device parameterization can be graphically documented.siemens. Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro Part of SIMOCODE ES Professional. • SIMOCODE ES Smart. SIMOCODE ES Professional can be called directly from Step7 HW configuration. The inputs and outputs from function blocks can be graphically linked and the parameters set. for directly connecting the PC/programming device (serial interface) to SIMOCODE pro with a PC cable via the system interface on the device (point to point) • SIMOCODE ES Professional. Note Prerequisite for the installation of SIMOCODE ES Graphic is an installed version of SIMOCODE ES Smart 2004 + service pack 1 or SIMOCODE ES Professional + service pack 1 on the PC/programming device.7. a simple and thorough SIMATIC-S7 configuration is made possible. SIMOCODE pro can be connected easily and conveniently to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system. PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro With the PCS-7 library SIMOCODE pro. It extends the user interface by a graphics editor and as a result allows very ergonomic and user-friendly parameterization per "Drag & Drop". for connecting one or more devices via PROFIBUS DP and/or via the system interface on the device. which is runnable on a PC/programming device under Windows 2000 or Windows XP It is available in 2 versions: . SIMOCODE ES Graphic is an optional software package for SIMOCODE ES Smart or SIMOCODE ES Professional. You can find a demo and the latest updates on the Internet at http://www. time-saving parameterization.7 Software SIMOCODE pro offers different software tools for thorough.ad. The PCS-7 library SIMOCODE pro contains • the corresponding diagnostic and driver blocks with the diagnostic and driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7 • the elements necessary for operator control and process monitoring (symbols and faceplate) Attention Observe the respective system versions! SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-31 .de/simocode -> Support -> Tools & Downloads. configuration and diagnostics: SIMOCODE ES SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro.System Description 1. Thus.

siemens. Win SIMOCODE DP Converter is a software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for SIMOCODE pro. You will find the current english version on the Internet at http://www. SIMOCODE pro 1-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . You will find further information on the integration of DP slaves in the documentation for the automation system.System Description GSD File for the integration into SIMATIC S7 or into any DP standard master system (automation system).de.ad.

with SIMOCODE ES. DP Plugs (analog) Screw terminals Control data from PROFIBUS DP Output Sockets (binary) From the DP master to SIMOCODE pro e. Internal analog signals (analog sockets) which are not assigned to a function block. Contactors. Sockets are assigned via software to analog plugs. Function blocks in the basic devices can have binary sockets. status.g. are connected there. with SIMOCODE ES.g.g. Every function block has a name and is equipped with inputs and outputs.g. e.System Description 1. e. other). Control devices and auxiliary switches are usually connected there. Example: 2-byte word for cyclic signaling data.k.g. These are connected via software to binary sockets. e. The following table shows the possible input and output types of the internal functions blocks from SIMOCODE pro: Input Plugs (binary) Symbol Example Function blocks in the basic unit can have binary plugs.g.g. Function blocks in the basic unit can have analog plugs.g. Example: 2-byte word max. function block "BU input". They are relevant for the parameterization e. there are internal function blocks e. They are relevant for the parameterization e. Sockets (analog) Screw terminals Signaling data to PROFIBUS DP Binary connecting blocks Analog connecting blocks DP Table 1-10: Input and output types of the internal function blocks from SIMOCODE pro SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 1-33 .8.. with SIMOCODE ES. function block "BU output".g. "Status .g." (in the graphics editor). "Phase unbalance" (in the graphics editor). current I_max.1 Structural Configuration of SIMOCODE pro Function Blocks Characteristics In the SIMOCODE pro system. These are assigned via software to binary plugs. control functions and motor protection. function block "Cyclic control".device o. for control stations. They are relevant for the parameterization e. Function blocks in the basic devices can have analog sockets. Screw terminals are outside e. function block "cyclic signaling data". These are connected via software to analog sockets.g. Screw terminals are outside e. They are relevant for the parameterization e. Internal binary signals (binary sockets) which are not assigned to a function block (fault. From SIMOCODE pro to the DP master e. with SIMOCODE ES.g.8 1.

1 Bit 0.2 Function block D Bit 0. the reversing starter.0 To the DP Master DP 2 3 4 Standard function Cyclic signaling Standard function Function block C Sockets Plugs BU internal Sockets Function block A 1 2 3 4 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 Plugs BU outputs Outputs (terminals) Logic function PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP Figure 1-14: Principal configuration of SIMOCODE-pro Connecting plugs with sockets Note The plugs and sockets of the function blocks have not already been connected at the factory with the binary inputs and the relay outputs of the basic unit.System Description Schematic of principle structural configuration The following function block diagram shows the principal configuration of SIMOCODE pro with its external inputs and outputs and the internal function blocks: BU external Inputs (terminals) BU inputs 1 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 Cyclic control Bit 0.2 Function block B Bit 0. SIMOCODE pro 1-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . but SIMOCODE pro has not yet been parameterized: If you now press a button. all links and interlocks for the reversing starter are created in the basic unit.0 From the DP Master DP Control function Bit 0.g. 1) Attention If external wiring has already been carried out. the contactors will not be activated!1) 1) If you select and load a preset application in SIMOCODE ES. e. The internal wiring (connecting the plugs and sockets) is determined by the user according to his respective application.1 Bit 0.

Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge: • basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro (see Chapter 1 "System Description") • basic knowledge of the SIMOCODE ES parameterization software. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 2-1 . Most of the parameters are appropriately set as factory defaults for most of the applications.Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter In this chapter 2 In this chapter you will find short instructions for configuring a reversing starter including an example. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: • planners • configurators • mechanics • electricians • commissioners. Only a few parameters have to be set.

Help you modify this example for your respective application 3. In this case. In chapter 14.3. with control and analysis of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs (internal SIMOCODE wiring). Show you how to implement a standard switching operation of a reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro in only a few steps 2. the reversing starter will be equipped with • a local control station • and then with a second control station with PROFIBUS DP The SIMOCODE ES software is used for parameterization. Introduction Target of the example This example is intended to 1. Conditions • Load feeder/motor present • PLC/DCS control with PROFIBUS DP interface is present • The main circuit of the reversing circuit including the current measuring module is already wired.4 "Resetting the Basic Factory Default Settings" you will learn how to implement the basic factory default settings. Help you easily implement other applications Important steps The two important steps with SIMOCODE pro are always: • implementation of the external wiring (for control and feedback of main current switching devices and control and signaling devices) • implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions (function blocks). the 3 cables leading to the motor must be led through the push-through system openings of the current measuring module. The PC/programming device is connected to the basic unit via PC cable. • PC/programming device is present • The SIMOCODE ES software is installed • The basic unit has the basic factory default settings. SIMOCODE pro 2-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 .1 Introduction and Target of the Example The following simple example of a reversing starter demonstrates step-bystep how to work with SIMOCODE pro. In this context.Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter 2.

-1AA00-0 Necessary components 4 3ZS1 312-1CC10-0YA0 (3ZS1 312-2CC10-0YA0 5 6 3UF7940-0AU00-0 Table 2-1: Components needed for the example SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 2-3 .Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter 2. depending on the length "SIMOCODE ES Smart" software for parameterization via the system interface or "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software for parameterization via the PROFIBUS DP and system interface.3 A up to 3 A Connecting cable for connecting the basic unit and the current measuring module.2 Reversing Starter with Motor Feeder and Local Control Station The following table shows the components that are required for this example: Item 1 2 3 Ordering data SIMOCODE pro C basic unit (SIMOCODE pro V also possible) Current measuring module 0. including STEP-7 Object Manager possible PC cable for connecting the basic device to a PC/ programming device PROFIBUS DP cable Order number 3UF7000-1AU00-0 (3UF7010-1AU00-0) 3UF7100-1AA00-0 3UF793.

K1 2 4 6 .K2 1 3 5 2 4 6 N/L– K1 K2 PE U V W M 3~ J Motor. motor rated current e. 3 A CLASS 10 Optional: thermistor Figure 2-1: Circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit with SIMOCODE pro SIMOCODE pro 2-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 .g.Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter Circuitry of the reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro The following schematic shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit: Main circuit 3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V L1 L2 L3 N PE Control circuit L1/L+ 1 3 5 Q1 F11 2 4 6 3 push-through system openings S0 Current Measuring module (IM) System interface S1 S2 24 V A1 A2 IN1 IN2 IN3 Basic unit (BU) System interface Connecting cable OUT1 OUT2 1 1 3 5 .

etc. Standard reversing starter L1/L+ Reversing starter w.Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter Circuit diagram of the control circuit of a reversing starter The following schematic shows the circuit diagram of the control circuit with a local control station for the commands • LEFT • OFF • RIGHT. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 2-5 . SIMOCODE pro L1/L+ S1 Necessary interlocks and links F11 S0 A1 S0 K1 S2 K2 A2 S1 S2 IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V Basic unit (BU) K2 K1 OUT1 K1 K2 K1 K2 OUT2 1 N/L– N/L– S0: "LEFT" button S1: "OFF" button S2: "RIGHT" button K1: Contactor clockwise rotation K2: Contactor counterclockwise rotation Figure 2-2: Circuit diagram of the control circuit of a reversing starter The necessary interlocks and links are carried out via the software in the basic unit. are not taken into account. signals. Displays.

the set current.e put the plugs in the sockets) • if required. If you press a button now. the second step is the parameterization of SIMOCODE pro. type of control function The inputs of the function blocks in the basic device are designated and labeled as plugs: The outputs of the function blocks in the basic device are designated and labelled as sockets: Plugs and sockets of the inputs and outputs of the devices are not connected as factory defaults.g. e.3 Parameterization After the external connections have been carried out (contactor coils connected. Function blocks can have settings. e. the type of control function and the set current for the overload protection. e. The basics of parameterization 6 7 8 Table 2-2: Schematic of the different function blocks in SIMOCODE pro SIMOCODE pro 2-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . for control stations and control functions with motor protection. For this you need to know the following points: Point 1 2 3 4 5 Description Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system. Function blocks have names.g. You have to do the following in order to achieve the desired functionality: • connect the function blocks by connecting specific plugs to specific sockets (i. set the values in the function blocks. the contactors are not activated.g.Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter 2. Function blocks have plugs and sockets. current measuring module integrated in the main circuit). These are clearly designated.

the set current corresponds to the motor rated current. See chapter 4.input 1" – connect local control station [LC] OFF to socket "BU . • The "BU . Setting values 2. here 3 A.inputs • Choose a reversing starter • Determine Ie Protecting/controlling QE1 ON< • Connect relay outputs BU .input 2" – connect local control station [LC] ON> to socket "BU . This means – connect local control station [LC] ON< to socket "BU .outputs 1 2 3 1 2 Right QE2 OFF ON> Ie = 3 A Left Local control station [LC] Contactor controls Figure 2-3: Schematic of an example of parameterization The assignment of the contactor controls QE depends on the parameterized control function. • You determine the set current Ie for the motor protection. This means – connect "BU .input 3". SIMOCODE pro • Connect digital inputs BU . this means the following: • You choose the "reversing starter" control function to implement all interlocks and links in the basic device for the reversing starter.output 2" to the socket "Contactor control QE2" (left). • the plugs of the "protecting/controlling" function block must be connected to the sockets of the "BU . In this case. Linking function blocks In the example. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 2-7 . Contactor & Lamp Controls and Status Signal for the Control Functions".Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter General procedure for parameterizing a reversing starter Parameterization means: 1.output 1" to the socket "Contactor control QE1" (right) – connect "BU .3 "Active Control Stations.inputs" function block via the software.outputs" function block must be connected to the sockets of the "protecting/controlling" function block via the software.

Open the dialog Device parameters > Motor protection > Overload/unbalance/ blocking . When you select this application. Set the set current Ie1 to 3A. Under "Device configuration". Check if the releases for "ON" and "OFF" for the operating mode "local2" are set. Open the dialog Further function blocks > Outputs > Basic device and check the following settings: • Contactor control > Contactor control QE1.input 1 • local control [LC] OFF: BU .Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES Carry out the following steps: Step 1 2 Description Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC/programming device. Table 2-3: Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES SIMOCODE pro 2-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 .outputs The control station Protecting/controlling is now connected "locally" with 1 2 3 ON< OFF ON> the binary inputs of the basic unit. other presettings might be made when assigning the BU outputs to the contactor controls. • Contactor control > Contactor control QE2. 7 Parameterization is finished.inputs 3 4 5 The relay outputs are connected Protecting/controlling QE1 to the contactor controls. Deactivate the operator panel if not present.input 3 BU . Choose the control function "reversing starter" as the application. a range of presettings will be automatically carried out that you will have to check later. select either SIMOCODE pro C or SIMOCODE pro V.input 2 • local control [LC] ON>: BU . 6 Open the dialog Device parameters> Motor control > Control stations and check the following settings: • local control [LC] ON<: BU . Store the parameter file on your PC/ programming device using Switchgear > Save. BU . QE2 1 2 Note By choosing a preset application (step 2).

To do this. 5 Table 2-4: Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and commissioning Attention Switching between "right" and "left" is only possible via "OFF" and after expiration of the preset interlocking time of 5 seconds. SIMOCODE pro can be started up. If the wiring and parameterization is correct. The "Device" LED should light up green. Configuration with local control station is finished The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now finished. you will receive the message "Download to the switchgear finished successfully". You now have a functional reversing starter with a local control station. After having transferred the data to the basic device. Transfer the parameter file to the basic unit via the menu e. execute the following steps: Step 1 2 3 4 Description Switch on the voltage supply of the basic device. Connect the serial interface of the PC/programming device and the system interface of the basic unit with the PC cable. the contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are activated when the corresponding buttons are pushed.Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter Transferring the parameters to the basic device and commissioning After creating the parameter file. using Target system > Load in switchgear. Observe the status LED on the basic unit. you can transfer it to SIMOCODE pro and start up the reversing starter.g. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 2-9 . Choose the RS232 interface with which SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC via the PC cable.

You will find further information on the integration of DP slaves in the documentation for the automation system. This enables SIMOCODE pro to be controlled locally via buttons as well as via PLC/ DCS. Setting the PROFIBUS DP address First set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit. In this section Conditions The following conditions must be fulfilled: • The motor is switched off • The supply voltage for the basic device is switched on.Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter 2. The following options are available: • via the addressing plug • via SIMOCODE ES. face is on the front side (9-pole SUB-D socket) • You have integrated SIMOCODE pro in your automatization system.4 Extending the Reversing Starter with a Control Station via PROFIBUS DP In this section you will find out how the previously configured example can be extended by one control station via PROFIBUS DP You have the option of . you only have to set the PROFIBUS DP address for SIMOCODE pro so that it can be recognized correctly as a DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP . SIMOCODE pro 2-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . For this reason. The "Device" LED must light up green • The basic unit is connected to the PROFIBUS DP The PROFIBUS DP inter. The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in SIMOCODE pro. using either the local control stations (local control) or PLC/ DCS (remote control).

Select the DP address. Pull the addressing plug from the system interface. Save the data in the basic unit with Target system > Load to switchgear. Open the menu Switchgear > Open online. Example address 21: Put the switches "16"+"4"+"1" in the "ON position". The set address is accepted. The address is set. Plug the addressing plug in the system interface. 3 seconds. 2 3 4 5 Table 2-6: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 2-11 . Briefly press the test/ reset button.Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES Carry out the following steps: Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Plug the PC cable into the system interface. Table 2-5: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug Carry out the following steps: Step 1 Description Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch. Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface. If necessary. The switches are numbered. Start SIMOCODE ES. Confirm the change of the address. Open the dialog Device parameters > Bus parameters. pull the PC cable out of the system interface. Press OK to confirm. The "Device" LED lights up yellow. The "Device" LED blinks yellow for approx.

Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter Additional internal components of the basic unit The control local control station [LC] is already wired. The assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Additional function blocks > Outputs > Cyclic signaling data Configuration with PLC/DCS [DP] control station is finished The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now finished. The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled by setting the corresponding bits.2 DP RIGHT Bit0. You now have a reversing starter with an additional control station via PROFIBUS DP .outputs Right Left PROFIBUS DP Cyclic control Bit0.inputs Control stations 1 LEFT 2 3 OFF RIGHT QE1 QE2 1 2 BU . SIMOCODEpro BU .5 S1 Figure 2-4: Schematic of internal components of the basic unit for the example All pre-assigned cyclic signaling data is not shown.1 and bit 0. "OFF" and "RIGHT" • PROFIBUS DP bit 0. the external components are connected and the required internal connections have been carried out.1 Bit0. bit 0.5 for the switching between the control stations (local) and the PLC/DCS (remotely) – Bit0.2 Cyclic signaling OFF Bit0. SIMOCODE pro 2-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . PROFIBUS DP The assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Device parameters > Motor control > Control stations. The following additional internal components that are already connected as factory defaults and do not have to be parameterized are required: • PROFIBUS DP bit 0. The PLC/DCS [DP] control station and the switch-over (plug S1) are already connected with the bits (sockets) of the cyclic signaling data from .0 LEFT Bit0.0.5=0: local control station [LC] active – Bit0.0 Bit0.2 for the commands "LEFT".5=0: PLC/ DCS [DP] control station active.1 DP Status ON< OFF ON> Bit0.

Motor Protection In this chapter 3 In this chapter you will find information on motor protection. They can be active or non-active depending on the chosen control function. The motor protection operates alongside the motor control "at a higher level in the background". All parameters of the motor protection are explained. Necessary knowledge You need the following knowledge: • good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro • the principle of connecting plugs to sockets • knowledge of electrical drive engineering. Motor protection includes • overload protection • unbalance protection • stall protection • thermistor protection. Target groups This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: • configurators • commissioners. Navigation in SIMOCODE ES You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under: Device parameters > Motor protection. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 3-1 .

40 Response at Trip Level see Tab.Time to trip(analog) Response at Pre-Warning Level Unbalance Protection Level see Tab. protection" function block (overload protection.Unbalance Stalled Rotor Level see Tab. "Stall protection" and "Thermistor protection" are explained in Chapters 3. "Unbalance protection". 3-1 Switching off Signal/Warning/Fault: . Protection/Control Extended protection QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5 Set current Is1 Set current Is2 Class 5.1 Introduction The motor protection functions "Overload protection".Last tripping current (analog) see Tab.Overload + Phase loss . protecting" function block ("Overload protection". cooling down time (analog) . ..Cool Time active . 10.Prewarn Overload . "Unbalance protection" and "Stall protection") with optional parameter settings and signals. 3-1 ..Overload Extended parameters: Reset Current from current measuring Type of Load Pause time Cooling Down Period .Motor Protection 3.Stalled Rotor Figure 3-1: "Ext. 3-1 .4.Pause active .2 to 3.Heating up motor model (analog) .Remain. unbalance protection and stall protection) SIMOCODE pro 3-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . 3-1 . Description Schematic diagram The following schematic diagram shows the "Ext.

25.25.Motor Protection Adjustable responses "Overload protection". "Unbalance protection" and "Stall protection" See also "Table of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes".25.5 s Table 3-1: Adjustable responses "Overload protection".5 s X X X X (d) At "asymmety" level X X X (d) X 0 . Attention Deactivate the unbalance protection in SIMOCODE ES if the type of load is set for 1-phase! SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 3-3 .5 s At "stall protection" level X (d) X X X 0 . "Unbalance protection" and "Stall protection" Response Disabled Signalling Warning Tripping Delay At pre-warning At trip level level X X X (d) 0 .

the remaining cooling down time is displayed. Range: depends on the desired current module Set current Is1: 0. After an overload tripping.4 A up to 10 A 20 A 63 A up to up to up to 3A 25 A 100 A 200 A 630 A Attention Make sure that both motor currents are within the setting range of the current module in use. Description Set current Is1 The motor rated current is usually set with the set current Is1.Motor Protection 3. The "Heating up the motor model" value and the interval up to the overload tripping are also calculated and can be put at the disposal of the control system.3 A up to 2. The motor current at the point of overload tripping is stored. Therefore. It is the basis for calculating the overload tripping characteristic curve. Range: depends on the selected current module Set current Is2: 0. the switch-off time can be adjusted very precisely to the power-up time of the motor which allows the motor to be better used to capacity.3 A up to 2. This value is listed on the type plate of the motor.4 A up to 10 A 20 A 63 A up to up to up to 3A 25 A 100 A 200 A 630 A Set current Is2 The set current Is2 is only necessary for motors with 2 speeds in order to also guarantee suitable overload protection for the higher speed as well. The tripping class can be set to 8 different settings ranging from class 5 to class 40.2 Overload Protection SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors in compliance with IEC 60947-4-1. Otherwise. ls2 must always be set higher than ls1. you should use an additional 3UF18 current transformer. SIMOCODE pro 3-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 .

30. 20. which means that a larger contactor must be used. The following diagram shows the tripping classes 5. 40 SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 3-5 . 10. 25. 35 and 40 for a 3-pole symmetric load: 1. the admissible AC3 current of the contactor must be reduced (derating). 25. Please take into account that with start-ups > "Class 10". 10. 30.2-fold set current Is (motor protection according to IEC 60947). 15. 35. 20. 15.15 Figure 3-2: Switch-off classes for 3-pole symmetric loads Range: Class: 5.Motor Protection Class The class (tripping class) indicates the maximum tripping time in which SIMOCODE pro must trip cold with the 7.

10. 30. 15. 35 and 40 for a 2-pole load: 0.Motor Protection The following diagram shows the tripping classes 5. Attention With motors for EEx e applications the response must remain set to "tripping"! SIMOCODE pro 3-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . 40 Response in case of overload The response of SIMOCODE pro can be additionally adjusted in case of overload: Further information: see "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter "Important Notes" and the table "Responses" in chapter 3. 20.1 "Introduction".85 Figure 3-3: Switch-off classes for 2-pole load Range: Class: 5. 15. 30. 35. 25. 25. 20. 10.

5 seconds Heating up the motor model (thermal memory) At a motor rated current (Is) of 100 %. the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold start is possible. frequent start-ups within a short period of time are possible.15 x 100 %) in a steady state and 100 % at the moment of overload tripping. Due to this.see below) is deleted after the cooling down period expires. Range: Cooling down period: 60 up to 6553. It is usually five minutes. Pause time The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response of the motor when switching off under normal operating conditions (not in the case of overload tripping!). The thermal memory (motor model . Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time correspondingly extend the specified time.Motor Protection Cooling down period The cooling down period is the specified time after which an overload tripping can be reset. the "heating up the motor model" value is 87 % (1/1. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 3-7 . After this interval.

Load type: 1-phase.5 seconds Type of load You can choose whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase load.Motor Protection The following schematic shows the cooling off response with and without a pause time: Motor ON OFF t Thermal memory (Motor model) Without pause time 100% Trip level Overload tripping t With pause time 100% Trip level No overload tripping t Pause time Thermal memory will be deleted after the pause time Figure 3-4: Cooling down response with and without pause time Attention The motor and the switchgear must be dimensioned specifically for this load! Pause time: 0 up to 6553. With a 1-phase load. 3-phase SIMOCODE pro 3-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 . the following measures should be carried out: • The internal earth-fault monitoring and the unbalance protection must be deactivated • Only one of the two cables should be feed through a push-through system opening in the current module. The phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.

For this reason. Reset: Manual. 0. this pre-warning is already issued at approx.input" inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets.Motor Protection Delay pre-warning The "delay" parameter is used to determine the interval during which the pre-warning level (1. Auto Warning The "Auto reset" mode of operation may not be used in applications in which an unexpected restart of the motor can lead to damage to persons or objects.85 x Ie. SIMOCODE pro GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 01 3-9 . there is no reaction. Otherwise. Reset If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto". the "Overload".g. the "Reset . In case of phase failure or unbalance > 50 %.15 x Ie) must be constantly exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. using reset via the bus. e. the errors must be acknowledged by a reset signal: • "Reset" button on the basic unit • "Reset" button on the operator panel • "Reset" standard functions. "Overload + unbalance" and "Thermistor" faults are acknowledged automatically • if the cooling down period has expired • if the thermistor value has decreased to the resetting value according to specificat